The Lotus and The Lion Buddhism and The British Em...

The Lotus
and
the Lion
Copyright © 2011. Cornell University Press. All rights reserved.
Franklin, J. Jeffrey, and Jeffrey Franklin. The Lotus and the Lion : Buddhism and the British Empire, edited by Zhu Feng, Cornell
University Press, 2011. ProQuest Ebook Central, http://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/nantien-ebooks/detail.action?docID=3138087.
Created from nantien-ebooks on 2021-03-08 05:53:04.
ALSO BY J. JEFFREY FRANKLIN
Serious Play: The Cultural Form of the Nineteenth-Century Realist Novel

For the Lost Boys
The Lotus
and
the Lion
Buddhism and the
British Empire
J. Jeffrey Franklin
C ORNELL U NIVERSITY P RESS

I THACA AND L ONDON
Copyright © 2008 by Cornell University
All rights reserved. Except for brief quotations in a review, this book, or
parts thereof, must not be reproduced in any form without permission
in writing from the publisher. For information, address Cornell
University Press, Sage House, 512 East State Street, Ithaca, New York
14850.
First published 2008 by Cornell University Press

Printed in the United States of America
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Franklin, J. Jeffrey.
The lotus and the lion : Buddhism and the British Empire /
J. Jeffrey Franklin.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.

ISBN 978–0–8014–4730–3 (cloth : alk. paper)
1. Buddhism in literature. 2. English literature—19th century—
History and criticism. 3. Buddhism—Study and teaching—Great
Britain—History—19th century. 4. Great Britain—Religion—
19th century. I. Title.
PR468.B83F73 2008
820.9'382943—dc22
2008022869
Cornell University Press strives to use environmentally responsible

suppliers and materials to the fullest extent possible in the publishing
of its books. Such materials include vegetable-based, low-VOC inks
and acid-free papers that are recycled, totally chlorine-free, or partly
composed of nonwood fibers. For further information, visit our website
at www.cornellpress.cornell.edu.
Cloth printing 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents
Preface vii
Acknowledgments xi
Introduction 1
1. The Life of the Buddha in Victorian Britain 25
2. Buddhism and the Emergence of Late-Victorian
Hybrid Religions 50
3. Romances of Reincarnation, Karma, and Desire 88
4. Buddhism and the Empire of the Self in Kipling’s Kim 128

Conclusion: The Afterlife of Nirvana 177
Appendix 1: Selective Chronology of Events in the
European Encounter with Buddhism 209
Appendix 2: Summary of Selected Buddhist Tenets 213
Notes 219
Bibliography 245
Index 265
Preface
The idea for this book grew out of a simple observation in my reading of
British literature from the second half of the nineteenth century. I kept en-
countering signs of Buddhism, signs that generations of critics seemed to have
ignored or had read generically as signs of “the Orient” rather than specifically
as evidence of the presence of Buddhism in Victorian culture. In the writings
of mid century, Buddhism appeared only in passing reference. For instance, in
Elizabeth Gaskell’s 1851 novel Cranford, the ladies of the town mistake Peter
Jenkyns, returning tanned and caftaned from India, for “the great Lama of
Thibet” (111). How, I wondered, did Gaskell, whose life and writing revolved
around provincial and industrial England, know there was such a person as the
Dalai Lama of Tibet? As the century progressed, however, allusions to Bud-
dhism became more visible and more significant in works of literature. Writers
of romance novels, especially, began to employ the Hindu and Buddhist con-
cepts of karma and reincarnation. H. Rider Haggard’s best-selling romance-
adventure She (1887) hinges on a particular understanding of reincarnation,
and its sequel, Ayesha: The Return of “She” (1905), carries the action into the
Himalayas and a Tibetan monastery there. What sources was Haggard drawing
upon in his conception of reincarnation, or in his depictions of the ceremonies
of a Tibetan monastery?
A series of other discoveries—some small, some revelatory—spurred my
further interest. Having been guided to Victorian Buddhism first by works
of literature, I then discovered what any professional religious studies scholar
knows: that the discipline of comparative religion took shape in the nineteenth
viii ~ Preface
century; that it generated a substantial body of translations, analyses, and com-

mentary, both scholarly and popular; and that its predominant object of study
was Buddhism. Looking then at the periodical literature, I found hundreds
of journal and newspaper articles published in the nineteenth century about
Buddhism. Further, the number of articles increased significantly on a decade-
by-decade basis between 1850 and 1900. A survey of them revealed a wide
diversity of interests and concerns. Among them were reports of discovered
manuscripts by East India Company officials, translations by newly created uni-
versity chairs of Sanskrit, archeological surveys of ancient Buddhist holy sites in
India, and travelogues of visits to Buddhist temples in Japan, Tibet, Siam (now
Thailand), and China. There were articles on native religion by Methodist
missionaries in Ceylon (now Sri Lanka), denouncements of Buddhist atheism
by Catholic priests in Dublin, and anti-Catholic comparisons of Catholicism
to Tibetan “Lamaism” by members of the Church of England. Many articles
summarized the life of the Buddha, while others retold the folkloric Jataka
tales about his past lives, birth, and childhood. Commentators summarized,
with varying degrees of knowledge and sympathy, central doctrines like karma
and reincarnation, and not a few addressed a topic of pointed concern: the
perceived compatibility of the Dharma with Darwinian evolutionary theory.
Later in the century, there were book reviews of recent scholarship on Bud-
dhism, studies of medieval pilgrimage narratives of Chinese monks to India,
and polemics by members of the Theosophical Society claiming Buddhism as
their precedent. Even some defenses of Buddhism were penned by those who
felt it had been unjustly attacked or who saw it as a viable alternative in an age
of doubt. Nothing in a decade of doctoral studies, followed by research for my
first book, had given me the slightest inkling that the intellectual and popular
cultures of the time had been so steeped in Buddhism.
A similarly eye-opening experience for me came when, during a research trip
to London, I visited the British Museum and the Victoria and Albert Museum,
finding in each hundreds of Buddhist figurines, statues, paintings, scrolls, and
manuscripts, the lion’s share of which had arrived there in the nineteenth cen-
tury. I felt as if I had walked into the “Wonder House” from Rudyard Kipling’s
novel Kim (1901), and in a sense I had. Rudyard Kipling, after all, had based
it upon the Lahore Museum, of which his father had been the curator while in
India, and some of its Greco-Buddhist statues of the Buddha, found at Gand-
hara, are in fact now held and displayed in those London museums.
Why then, I was compelled to ask, was there such a relative paucity of his-
torical and literary research on Victorian Buddhism? With a few exceptions—
most notably Christopher Clausen’s essays in the 1970s, Philip C. Almond’s
landmark historical book, The British Discovery of Buddhism (1988), and Don-
ald S. Lopez Jr.’s important work in the 1990s within the field of religious
studies—little has been written. What Susan Thach Dean wrote in 1998 still is
true: “In the many treatments of nineteenth-century religious controversies,
Preface ~ ix
relatively little attention has yet been paid to the development of knowledge
about Buddhism in Britain and to the effect that this knowledge had on the
Victorian’s view of religion and of the world” (Dean 209). Even the most
recent collections on Victorian literature and religion, such as those edited by
Judith V. Nixon and by Carolyn W. Oulton, make no mention of Buddhism.
The fact that Buddhist themes and allusions were pervasive in works of litera-
ture has received almost no serious attention in over a hundred years of criticism
beyond that necessary to generate cursory endnote definitions. This situation
seems somewhat akin to a critical work on John Milton’s Paradise Lost devoid
of informed cross-references to the Bible or serious investigation of the history
of the Reformation and Restoration. Over the years it has become increasingly
clear to me that this oversight is neither minor nor accidental. Rather, it repre-
sents a pervasive critical lacunae—at least within literary studies—that signifies
a culture-specific blindness, a failure of critical self-reflection that demands the
analysis given in this book.
On the topic of critical self-reflection, I feel required to acknowledge my
own personal background, as it has a bearing on my motivations for writing
this book. Like the majority of Victorians, I was raised as an Anglican (more
precisely, an Episcopalian), but for over a decade I have been a practicing Bud-
dhist. I cannot be fully aware of the extent to which this may or may not be
apparent to my readers. In any case, the fact that I am Buddhist has deeply
enriched my experience in researching and writing about Victorian Buddhism
and has added personal to intellectual pleasure. Of course, the scholarship
must stand on its own, regardless of my own beliefs as a Buddhist. Therefore
I have worked to ensure that my arguments and interpretations are supported
by textual and historical evidence.
While these scholarly responsibilities should go without saying, experience
suggests that perhaps they should be said more often. One can read many a
book of criticism in which the theoretical, ideological, or religious commitment

of the scholar is all too apparent and yet is assumed to require no disclosure or
reflection. In some cases one wishes for greater transparency and for argumen-
tation not predetermined by the author’s ideology or religion. It is dangerous
to behave as if one is writing from a neutral position, especially with respect to
such charged topics as race, class, ethnicity, gender, sexual orientation, and,
certainly, religion. Among the most common examples of this in the history of
Western letters is the tacit assumption by a critic that his or her immersion in
Judeo-Christian culture in no way influences objective consideration of the reli-
gions of other cultures. Historically, this presumption has licensed those within
a dominant religious group to pass judgment upon another religious group as if
that judgment were merely stating a God-given fact, hence masking an exercise
of power. One can observe this non-self-reflexive exercise of power by some
popular, academic, and clerical critics of Buddhism in the nineteenth century,
and I have used scholarship and argument to expose their lack of perspective.
x ~ Preface
Whether in Victorian England or twenty-first-century North America, what

most non-Buddhist Westerners think they know about Buddhism consists
largely of cultural stereotypes, many of which originated with the Victorians.
Some stereotypes, such as the “martial arts Buddhism” popularized in films
like Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon (2003) and The Matrix (1999), are as
much or more a product of twentieth-century Western popular culture as of
any Eastern culture and certainly do not represent the historical or doctrinal
consensus of Buddhism. Western intellectual culture has developed its own
stereotypes about Buddhism. For instance, as a North American Mahayana
Zen Buddhist, I might have expected to find meditation as a central feature of
Victorian Buddhism, but research suggests that there was little understanding
of or interest in meditation within Victorian discourse about Buddhism. This
may reflect the preference among Victorian scholars for the Theravada as op-
posed to the Mahayana canon, and surely it reflects their tendency to construct
a textualized Buddhism at the neglect of Buddhist practice. But the expec-
tancy of finding meditation as a central concern is itself a product of a specific
culture and history, namely, the history of Buddhism in North America. The
first Buddhist denomination to impact American culture in the early twentieth
century was the Japanese Zen of such masters as D. T. Suzuki, and the two
most influential styles of Buddhism in America today, Zen and Tibetan, both
emphasize meditation. Thus a twenty-first-century American intellectual could
be mistaken, for good reason, in expecting the Victorians to be concerned
with meditation. Understanding, in their historical specificity, the assumptions
about self and other that are embedded in such stereotypes is a primary con-
cern of this book.
Unpacking Victorian conceptions and misconceptions about Buddhism, in
addition to revealing a great deal about that culture and providing a more
informed reading of that literature, has afforded me the indirect opportunity
to cast light upon stereotypes that persist to the present day, stereotypes that
I too may be reproducing. In this respect, I see myself as only one in a long
line of Western writers on Buddhism that began in the nineteenth century
with the likes of Hermann Oldenberg, Caroline Rhys Davids, Henry Steele
Olcott, and Edwin Arnold. My reconstruction of the Victorian construction
of Buddhism unavoidably reflects a certain early twenty-first-century, North
American perspective, and, according to my own theoretical commitments,
must say as much about my historical context as it does about nineteenth-
century Britain, however objective and supportable I have worked to make the
arguments of this book.
J. JEFFREY FRANKLIN
Denver
Acknowledgments
My most general thanks go to the University of Colorado Denver—the

College of Liberal Arts and Sciences and the Department of English—for the
support and encouragement that made this project possible, and to Cornell
University Press—the editors, outside readers, and staff who supported and
worked hard to make this book a reality. I am grateful to two journals, Victor-
ian Literature and Culture, which published a prior incarnation of chapter 3,
and ELH, which published an earlier version of chapter 1. I also thank my col-
leagues and friends who belong to the Victorian Interdisciplinary Studies As-
sociation of the Western United States, who have listened to and commented
upon pieces of this work at conferences over the course of seven years. Thanks
are due to those scholars who read drafts of various chapters and provided
valuable corrections and suggestions: Christopher Clausen, Pennsylvania State
University, whose suggestion led to the title of this book; Gabriel Finkelstein,
University of Colorado Denver; Peter Harvey, University of Sunderland (En-
gland); Bradford K. Mudge, University of Colorado Denver; Mark B. Tanzer,
University of Colorado Denver, who monitored my treatment of philosophi-
cal texts; Steven J. Venturino, Loyola University Chicago; and Russell Webb
and Sara Boin-Webb, former editors of Buddhist Studies Review (London).
I am indebted especially to James Najarian of Boston College, who read the
entire manuscript and whose knowledge and painstaking attention are evi-
denced throughout this book. Finally, my greatest debt of gratitude is owed to
xii ~ Acknowledgments
Peter J. Potter, Editor-in-Chief at Cornell, who from the first envisioned what
this book might be at its best and whose expertise and skillful means guided
me through a process of revision without which this book would not have
fulfilled its promise.
J.J.F.
The Lotus
and
the Lion
Introduction
In the family temple [of the magistrate of Kolang, Tibet],

in addition to the usual life-size images of Buddha and the Triad, there
was a female divinity, carved at Jallandhur in India, copied from a statue
representing Queen Victoria in her younger days—a very fitting
possession for the highest government official in Lahul.
—ISABELLA BIRD BISHOP, Among the Tibetans (1894)
Should I be considered too bold if I were to go one step

farther and suggest that there are really some points in the philosophy
of the East, and especially of India, which are fated sooner or later
to find their place in, and to exercise a not inconsiderable
influence over, the thought of Western nations?
—T. W. RHYS DAVIDS, The History and Literature of Buddhism (1896)
The European “Discovery” of Buddhism
It would not be inaccurate to say that Buddhism did not exist in the West until
near the beginning of the Victorian period (1837–1901), despite the fact that
it had existed for over 2,400 years and was being practiced at that moment by
millions of people throughout Southeast Asia, Tibet, China, and Japan. Prior
to the early nineteenth century, few Europeans had heard of Buddhism at all,
and the few who had heard of it pictured the Buddha as a minor Hindu deity or
a celestial sun god in the pantheon of the “exotic Orient.” Of course, Eastern
thought long had trickled back toward the seats of Western empires along the
same routes used for silk, tea, and opium, but serious engagement with that
2 ~ The Lotus and the Lion
thought only began in the late eighteenth century with the first translations
of the Bhagavad-Gita into French, German, and English.1 Systematic study of
Eastern sacred texts did not begin in Europe until around the 1820s, when col-
lection and translation of ancient Buddhist manuscripts commenced. One of
the earliest Western studies to focus exclusively on Buddhism was Edward Up-
ham’s The History and Doctrine of Buddhism, published in 1829. Only in sub-
sequent decades did “the term ‘Buddha’ (‘Buddoo’, ‘Bouddha’, ‘Boudhou’,
etc.)” begin to “gain currency” in common English usage (Almond 7). As
late as the 1860s, but rapidly at that point, Buddhism “hit” Europe in general
and England in particular, becoming a widespread topic both in the scholarly
and popular literatures that peaked in London’s “Buddhism-steeped Nineties”
(Caracciolo 30).
Yet, despite this relatively recent dawning of awareness of Buddhism, by the
end of the twentieth century there were an estimated 150,000 professed Bud-
dhists in England practicing in 370 different groups representing lineages from
Japan, Sri Lanka, Tibet, and Vietnam, among others (Coleman 19, 20). To
understand why, according to the British census, Buddhism was second only
to Christianity as the most widely observed religion in Devon and Cornwall in
2001, one might begin by asking about the events and discourses that moved
John R. Ambereley to write during 1872 in London that “there is no reli-
gion the study of which is likely to be so useful to Europeans as Buddhism”
(BBC; Ambereley 293). To understand why in the early twenty-first century
many of the bestselling books from the religion sections of British and North
American bookstores are about Buddhism, one should ask why in the latter
decades of the nineteenth century three book-length poems recounting the
life of the Buddha were published in London, of which Sir Edwin Arnold’s
The Light of Asia (1879) became an international bestseller. If one wishes to
understand the chain of events by which the Fourteenth Dalai Lama of Tibet is
now the patron and figurehead of the British Network of Buddhist Organiza-
tions, one well might follow those events back to Brian Houghton Hodgson,
an employee of the British East India Company who, while on assignment in
Nepal in the 1820s, collected ancient Buddhist manuscripts in Sanskrit, the
delivery of which to the Royal Asiatic Society in London in 1835 and to the
Societe Asiatique of Paris in 1837 launched the serious scholarly investigation
of Buddhism in Europe. Within the Victorian period, if one wants to under-
stand from which influences and sources Edwin Arnold created his character
of Siddhartha Gautama, the Buddha, or how H. Rider Haggard derived his
portrayal of a Tibetan Buddhist monastery in his novel Ayesha: The Return of
She (1905), then one needs not merely some knowledge of the British Empire
in India and Tibet but also some background on the Indian origins of Bud-
dhism and on its history in Tibet, some insight into how Victorians responded
Introduction ~ 3
to the figure of the Buddha and, quite differently, to Tibetan “Lamaism,” and
some knowledge of the broad range of sources available in England to Arnold
and Haggard on Buddhism.2
In this book I tell the intriguing and multilayered story of the European
encounter with Buddhism, which began in the first half of the nineteenth cen-
tury and spread throughout British literature and culture in the second half of
that century. I analyze the British constructions of Buddhism in popular nov-
els, in particular Marie Corelli’s A Romance of Two Worlds (1886) and The Life
Everlasting (1911); H. Rider Haggard’s She (1887) and Ayesha: the Return
of She (1905); and Rudyard Kipling’s Kim (1901). I both treat as objects of
analysis and use as sources the primary works within the nineteenth century’s
new field of religious studies, comparative religion, two important examples of
which are F. Max Müller’s Lectures on the Science of Religion; with a Paper on
Buddhist Nihilism (1872) and T. W. Rhys Davids’s Buddhism: Being a Sketch
of the Life and Teachings of Gautama, the Buddha (1877). I comparatively ana-
lyze two of the book-length poems that retold the life of Siddhartha Gautama,
who lived in northeastern India from approximately 566 to 486 BCE: Richard
Phillips’s The Story of Gautama Buddha and his Creed: An Epic (1871) and
Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia. Being The Life and Teaching of Gautama,
Prince of India and Founder of Büddhism (1879). A somewhat different object
of analysis is Isis Unveiled: A Master-Key to the Mysteries of Ancient and Mod-
ern Science and Theology (1877) by Helena Petrovna Blavatsky. She was the
co-founder of a new religion, Theosophy, that claimed its origins from “eso-
teric Buddhism” and was highly influential in both England and India. Finally,
the last chapter traces the threads of the Victorian “nirvana debate” as they
were woven into foundational texts of Western philosophical nihilism, in par-
ticular Friedrich Nietzsche’s The Will to Power (1883–1888). Also discussed
is a broad range of late-Victorian and Modernist literary texts, most notably
Joseph Conrad’s Heart of Darkness (1901), T. S. Eliot’s “The Waste Land”

(1922), and D. H. Lawrence’s novels Women in Love (1920) and Aaron’s Rod
(1922), among others.
These texts, in their diversity, represent the range of Victorian responses
to and constructions of Buddhism—with important implications for mod-
ernism and after. The analysis of them in subsequent chapters demonstrates
that Buddhism pervaded, if diffusely, late-nineteenth-century British thought.
If it existed largely at the margins and in the background, it even so was a
critical component of central Victorian debates—those concerning the Brit-
ish Empire and its colonial obligations, those emanating from the confronta-
tion between Christianity and Eastern religions at a time of religious upheaval
in England, and those precipitated by the advent of Darwinian evolutionary
theory. Indeed, the topic of Buddhism came to function as one nexus within
Victorian discourse, joining these issues. At a time when the Church of En-
gland was losing membership to Nonconformist Protestant denominations,
and in the wake of the perceived assault on Christian faith by scientific natural-
ism, especially Darwinism, concerned Christians were primed to be wary of en-
croachment by a potentially competing Eastern religion. On the frontlines of
empire, missionaries in Burma or Ceylon recognized Buddhism as the primary
competition and understood explicitly that British occupation was wedded to
Christianizing those populations.3 The alignment between religion and empire
meant that to question the superiority of the Christian faith was tantamount
to questioning the God-given right of the British to govern Hindus, Muslims,
and Buddhists.
On the home-front, Buddhism’s compassionate founder and ethical sys-
tem made it “the most appealing of non-Christian religions to the nineteenth-
century mind” and, therefore, the most threatening alternative religion (Clausen,
“Victorian” 13). The threat was intensified by the fact that many Victorians
came to see Buddhism as compatible with evolutionary science, in sharp contrast
to the dominant position across Christian denominations. This aligned it with
the widely perceived nemeses of faith: materialism, science, and atheism. When
Victorian Anglicans, Nonconformists, and, to a lesser extent, Catholics took a
respite from inter-denominational contests and looked up from the immediate,
shared threat of Darwinism, they recognized Buddhism as the next most dan-
gerous enemy. Buddhism was the first non-Christian religion to be considered
a threat to the West in its own home territory. Thus understanding the role of
Buddhism in nineteenth-century Britain provides unique insights into the Vic-
torians, their religious and social obsessions and fears, their aspirations and their
prejudices, their self-understanding and their understanding of other cultures
and religions.
I want to start the story of Victorian Buddhism with a relatively insignificant
event, or rather with a chain of minor events that nevertheless are indicative
of larger patterns. In 1797, Colonel Colin Mackenzie, an operative working
under the auspices of the East India Company, visited the site of the ancient
Buddhist Stupa at Amaravati, which had been in use from the third century
BCE until perhaps as late as the fourteenth century, by which time Buddhism
had died out in the country of its birth.4 By the eighteenth century, nearly all
signs that Buddhism ever had existed in India had been effaced; no living In-
dian knew the locations of most of the ancient Buddhist holy sites. Those sites
would be recovered and preserved against loss through the efforts of European
archaeologists in the nineteenth century. Though as part of colonial usurpa-
tion, and in the process of appropriating Buddhism as an artifact of Western
knowledge, Europeans drove the effort to locate, unearth, collect, and archive
the ancient record of Buddhism in India, which was on the verge of being lost
to Buddhism and to world heritage. As part of this process, Colonel Mackenzie
Introduction ~ 5
expropriated from the Stupa eleven stone bas-reliefs illustrating scenes from
the time of the Buddha, and in 1821 he sent them to the Indian Museum in
Calcutta. Nine of them were sent on to the East India Company collection in
Leadenhall Street, London; to those were added 121 more, and in 1874 some
of them were erected in the Sculpture Court at the Southern Entrance of the
new India Museum in South Kensington. As a child, Rudyard Kipling, having
been shipped by his parents from India back to England for education, spent
many hours in that museum, as Kipling reports in his autobiography, Some-
thing of Myself (1937). In 1879–80, the collection was divided between the
new Victoria and Albert Museum and the British Museum, where for sixty
years they were on display in the main stairwell. I believe it is safe to speculate
that every British author treated in this book, along with millions of other Brit-
ons, saw these and other Buddhist artifacts in one or both of these locations.
I will use this small example as the ground for making several related points.
First, concerning the Western “discovery” of Buddhism, Philip C. Almond’s
The British Discovery of Buddhism argues in short that European scholars, pre-
disposed by the ingrained Protestant belief that true religion is word and book-
based, constructed through translation and analysis of the Buddhist canon an
idealized textual Buddhism. He writes: “Originally existing ‘out there’ in the
Oriental present, Buddhism came to be determined as an object the primary
location of which was the West, through the progressive collection, translation,
and publication of its textual past ” (Almond 13). European scholars asserted
the precedence of their textualized Buddhism over the indigenous practices
of actual Buddhists in Asia. This represented a form of imperial appropriation
of the religious other, a form of discursive violence that supplemented the
physical violence of conquest and occupation. At its farthest remove from the
violence that defines it, “discovery” must be understood as “construction”:
the process by which nineteenth-century British culture assimilated or failed to
assimilate elements of Buddhism. And it is this very process that is the subject
of this book.
This is a book about British culture and the British construction of
Buddhism—not about indigenous Buddhist practices in Asia in the nineteenth
century, nor about an ahistorical abstraction one might label “real” or “true”
Buddhism, except to the extent that Victorians indeed did construct such an
abstraction. My interest is in the fact that the young Rudyard Kipling’s first ex-
posure to Buddhism was in London, not India or Tibet or Japan; that he wrote
the novel Kim for the most part from Rottingdean in Sussex; that most of the
textual sources on which he drew were written and published in England, not
Asia. My focus is upon the textualized Buddhism fashioned by Englishmen,
which unavoidably said as much about nineteenth-century Britain as it did
about Buddhism. Thus my objects of analysis are the very texts that Almond
demonstrates appropriated Buddhism.
As a result, one risk that I confronted in the writing of this book was of
perpetuating the assumptions and prejudices of my subjects—an unavoidable
risk any historically based study must negotiate. One way that I have tried to
ameliorate this risk is by treating works of comparative religion in a way similar
to my treatment of literary works, not assuming that the former were objec-
tive or factual while the latter were strictly imaginative. Indeed, I have found
imaginative misinterpretations of Buddhist doctrine in works of comparative
religion, and I have found works of literature striving to be faithful to the his-
torical record or the doctrinal consensus of Buddhism. All of these texts are
cultural artifacts of that time and place, and I read them as such in relation-
ship to one another. In all one can find signs—sometimes virulent, sometimes
unintended—of the racism and cultural chauvinism that served the interests of
the British Empire. After all, colonial invasion and occupation provided both
the occasion and one motivation for the formation of the field of comparative
religion: to gather knowledge in order to control. It was part of the textual
appropriation of the Oriental other in order to form “the imperial archive”—
what today we call “intelligence gathering” (Richards 1).
At the same time, however, in reading the works of comparative religion
I developed considerable respect for its mission as expressed by its most even-
handed proponents. That mission, in short, was to treat all religions as worthy
of respect and to apply historical and textual analysis to each, even Christianity.
As Max Müller wrote to his Christian readership in 1872, with a nice turn of
reverse psychology: “Those who would use a comparative study of religions as
a means for debasing Christianity by exalting the other religions of mankind,
are to my mind as dangerous allies as those who think it necessary to debase all
other religions in order to exalt Christianity” (Müller, Lectures 21–22). Schol-
ars like Max Müller, and like T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, were able to
build a body of translations and analysis that only could have come from the
type of access colonial occupation afforded. They were able to bring together
for comparative compositional analysis documents and artifacts that had been
separated in time by hundreds of years; separated geographically between the
northern Buddhism of Tibet or China and the southern Buddhism of South-
east Asia; separated doctrinally between the northern Mahayana and southern
Theravada schools; and separated linguistically between the northern Sanskrit
and the southern Pali. In this way, they distinguished what they judged to be
the culture-specific elements of indigenous Buddhist practice from those ele-
ments that were duplicated across nations/cultures/languages and, therefore,
that appeared to them most authentic. This was the basis for the idealized,
textual Buddhism they “discovered.” Yet, their work set the standard that still
is relied upon by scholars of comparative religion today.
Therefore, while striving to remain critical, I compare Victorian literary rep-
resentations of Buddhism to the best nineteenth-century scholarship. If one
Introduction ~ 7
is to be able to assess various Victorian uses of key Buddhist concepts and

doctrines, then one needs some standard definitions against which to compare
them. It seemed reasonable to use definitions drawn from the best Victorian
scholarship, not only because of the generally high quality of that work, but be-
cause one then is drawing upon a context-specific baseline. On the other hand,
this may heighten the risk of uncritically re-inscribing Victorian prejudices.
Responding to this double-bind, I chose to supplement Victorian scholar-
ship through comparison with twentieth and twenty-first-century sources, those
written by renowned practitioners of Buddhism, both from Asia and from the
West, and those by scholars of Buddhism working in Western universities. In
this way, and borrowing a method from comparative religion itself, I triangu-
lated sources in order to posit an abstraction that might be called “the historical
and doctrinal consensus” of Buddhism. I deploy this abstraction throughout
this book whenever I claim that a particular literary representation of karma or
reincarnation, for instance, is or is not consistent with the predominant under-
standing of those concepts within Buddhism. I do this with full awareness that
this abstraction reproduces the textualizing impulse of Victorian scholarship, ig-
noring denominational differences within Buddhism, and, though based on au-
thoritative sources, unavoidably is in part my own construction. Without this or
a similar assumption, however, it becomes impossible to comparatively analyze
any context-specific use of Buddhist concepts—impossible to understand how
the Victorian uses of “nirvana,” for example, compare to a Buddhist norm.
Returning, then, to the question of how to understand the “discovery” of
Buddhism, while concurring with Almond’s conclusions, I want to complicate
his thesis by making a point familiar from recent postcolonial theory: in con-
structing Buddhism in their own image, the Victorians were at the same time
making their self-image subject to reconstruction by other races, cultures, and re-
ligions. The very nature of colonial contact opened Britain to what I have called
a “counter-invasion” of the West by the East, and the resulting engagement with
Oriental culture profoundly changed British culture. The counter-invasion had
been building momentum for centuries as East-West trade and diplomacy gradu-
ally increased, but it culminated in the nineteenth century. This timing seems tied
for obvious reasons to the fact that the British Empire had emerged in the first
half of the century as the preeminent military and economic power in the world.
As celebrations of the victories and duties of empire appeared with increasing
frequency in journalism and literature, crescendoing around Queen Victoria’s
assumption of the title of Empress of India in 1876, an appropriately paradoxical
counter-strain of fear also arose over the effects of Eastern ideas and products
flowing back toward England.
Many Victorians recognized the counter-invasion as it was taking place.
Ernest J. Eitel, writing in 1884 as the Boden Professor of Sanskrit at Ox-
ford, warned: “The history of Eastern Asia is the history of Buddhism. But
the conquests of Buddhism are not confined to Asia. The grand system of
philosophic atheism, which discards from the universe the existence of a cre-
ating and overruling Deity and in its place deifies humanity, has, since the
beginning of the present century, entered upon a course of conquest in the
West, in Europe and America” (Eitel 3). The fear of counter-invasion was
fanned by exaggerated comments such as the following, which originally ap-
peared in the Frankfurter Zeitung on 25 April 1890: “It is known that the
philosophy of Buddha has of late years won many adherents in Europe. What
is less known is that the religion of Buddha is likewise beginning to spread in
Europe. . . . Prominent persons call on me every day to tell me that they have
been converted to Buddhism. I have been told that the number of Buddhists
in Paris alone is 30,000” (Literary Digest 162). If, as some have argued, Ro-
mantic writers “embraced the Orient in a reconciling vision of wholeness,”
portraying it as a mysterious font of ancient wisdom, writers after the Opium
War of 1839 and especially after the Indian Mutiny of 1857 were more likely
to portray it as the seat of “corrupt and effete civilizations” whose decadent,
nihilistic, or enervating ideas posed a threat to Western ideals (Batchelor 253;
Lopez 2). As the novelist Wilkie Collins’s evangelical old-maid Miss Clack puts
it in The Moonstone (1868), with greater aptness than she understands, “How
soon may our own evil passions prove to be Oriental noblemen who pounce
on us unawares!” (Collins 198). Oriental nobleman—whether Brahmins, rajas,
lamas, begums, yogis, or pashas—lurk at the margins of many Victorian texts,
not to mention Indian jugglers, spies, assassins, and hookah-smoking caterpil-
lars. These figures were signs of a process of cultural transformation underway
in Britain as an unforeseen byproduct of the counter-invasion to which empire
opened the doors.
The process I am describing is akin to the familiar postcolonial concept of
“hybridity”—the relationship between colonizer and colonized within which
the boundary of difference separating two nations, races, cultures, or religions

becomes the connection of identity joining the two. As an antecedent to post-
colonial theory, Mikhail Bakhtin theorized hybridity linguistically in terms of a
“verbal-ideological decentering,” which can “occur only when a national culture
loses its sealed-off and self-sufficient character, when it becomes conscious of
itself as only one among other cultures and languages” (Bakhtin, Dialogic 370).
Homi Bhabha develops the concept as “a difference ‘within’ ” identity, an “ ‘in-
between’ reality” separating and joining two cultures in a colonial relationship
that generates a “productive ambivalence” between the self and “that ‘other-
ness’ which is at once an object of desire and derision, an articulation of dif-
ference contained within the fantasy of origin and identity” (Bhabha, Location
13, 67). The original nineteenth-century meaning of “hybrid” was as genetic
cross-breeding, as in “Kipling’s use of the term ‘mule’ to describe English-
university-trained Indians,” and with unavoidable reference to miscegenation
Introduction ~ 9
(Lahiri 99). Taking his cue from this point and building on the work of
Bhabha, Robert C. J. Young focuses on racial hybridity in works such as White
Mythologies and Colonial Desire. He demonstrates that the boundary between
colonizer and colonized always is dangerously and excitingly permeable. The
threat/promise of interpenetration, whether culturally or sexually, operates not
only from the colonizer to the colonized but bi-directionally. This understand-
ing of hybridity as a forced and unequal co-dependency between colonizer and
colonized provides a model for explaining the impact not only of the self upon
the other but of the other upon the self.
With this general definition in mind, I am most interested in pursuing the im-
plications of the observation that “hybridity” “first entered social science via the
anthropology of religion, through the theme of syncretism” and is “meaningless
without the prior assumption of difference, purity, fixed boundaries,” and “sacred
origins” (Pieterse 223, 226). Different sacred origins come into conflict, and into
the dialogue that invites hybridization, when two religions first come into con-
tact. Contact leads to a “translation” between the two religions—how is Buddha
like Jesus?, how is nirvana like heaven?, for instance—and this “desacralizes the
transparent assumptions of cultural supremacy” (Bhabha, Location 228).
Consider the example of Victorian Anglicanism and Singhalese Theravada
Buddhism. From early in the nineteenth century, news and commentary from
British-occupied Ceylon blended political debate over colonial control with
religious issues of Christian missionary access and indigenous Buddhist resis-
tance. Buddhism thus became a topic about which some in Britain needed to
be knowledgeable. Pioneers of Buddhist studies, such as Eugène Burnouf and
George Turnour, had worked as members of the Ceylon Civil Service. Mis-
sionaries and tourists wrote letters, travelogues, reports, polemics, and, at least
in the case of Samuel Landgon’s Punchi Nona (1884), novels back from Cey-
lon. Founders of Theosophy H. P. Blavatsky and H. S. Olcott became among
the first Westerners to publicly take layman’s Buddhist vows while on a visit
to Ceylon in 1880. They already had mixed elements of Buddhism into their
new “hybrid religion,” a subcategory of syncretism historically and culturally
unique to late-Victorian Britain. Olcott went on to become a champion of the
Singhalese Buddhist revival in opposition to pressure by Christian missionar-
ies, mostly Anglicans and Methodists.5 He wrote and distributed A Buddhist
Catechism that still is used by Buddhists in Sri Lanka today, thereby creating a
multi-hybrid of Buddhism mixed with his Protestant orientation and a Catho-
lic genre. Thus my use in this book of the concept of hybridity is a specific
application with special reference to religions.
My theory of cultural counter-invasion assumes the bi-directionality of hy-
bridity and focuses on the impacts of colonization upon the colonizer. The
British “discovery” of Buddhism was at the same time the beginning of the
counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism, or the discovery by Buddhism of
Britain, as evidenced by the number of Buddhists in Britain today. By the same

token, it was the beginning of Britain’s discovery of its own cultural identity
through and as Buddhism.
Historical Background for the Counter-Invasion

of Britain by Buddhism
Though the counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism did not fully commence

until the nineteenth century, it must be understood within the context of the
long history of Western contact with Buddhist cultures. That contact began
certainly by the third century BCE, and may have begun as early as the sixth
century BCE during the lifetime of Siddhartha Gautama, when Greek colo-
nies first were established along the northwest border of current-day India.6
But European contact with Buddhist cultures was not inaugurated until much
later, around the mid thirteenth century, when Franciscan missionaries began
opening pilgrimage routes into Mongolia, China, and Japan.7
The point that needs to be emphasized about the pre-nineteenth-century
history of European interaction with Buddhism is that for at least six centuries,
between the thirteenth and the early nineteenth centuries, there was no sys-
tematic study or synthesis of Buddhism in the West. While numerous individual
contacts occurred—for the most part by missionaries and diplomatic envoys—
“over the long scope of things, the information was never cumulative”: “Time
after time, it appears, writers either started from almost zero, without being
aware of previous knowledge, or they worked without being able to articulate
correctly the previous data with new knowledge” (Droit 15). Over centuries,
disparate reports trickled back to Europe from Ceylon of “Godama,” from
China of “Fo,” from Tibet of “Boud,” from Japan of “Xaca” (Sakya), and
from India of the ninth Hindu Avatar, an incarnation of Vishnu, named Bud-
dha, all without being correlated. Roger-Pol Droit, among other historians of
Buddhism, identifies fairly specifically the date by which a synthesized overview
of Buddhism began to emerge.
We must specify to what the very idea of a discovery of Buddhism refers. And
this is fairly easy to circumscribe. There is a “discovery of Buddhism” from the
moment that questions like the following are explicitly asked. Who is it that is
referred to as the Buddha? What does his name mean? When did he live? What
did he teach? . . . What are the main schools of Buddhism, and what are their
main points of contention? And so forth. . . . It is possible to date, with a certain
amount of precision, the turning point at which the object “Buddhism” took
form among the learned disciplines. . . . ; it was around 1820. (Droit 11–12).
Introduction ~ 11
Buddhism indeed did not exist in and for the West until near the beginning of
the Victorian period.
Hinduism, however, became an object of systematic study at least fifty years
prior to the Victorian period. What historian Raymond Schwab characterizes as
“the Oriental Renaissance” began in Europe in the eighteenth century and, for
political and colonial reasons, focused especially on India and thus Hinduism
(Buddhism having ceased to be practiced in its country of origin by around the
twelfth century). The watershed moment can reasonably be pinpointed as
1784, the year in which Sir William Jones convened the Royal Asiatick Society
of Bengal and in which Sir Charles Wilkins published the Bhagavad-Gita,
the first complete Sanskrit text translated into English. The impact of the
Bhagavad-Gita on European intellectual discourse and, later, on the formation
of American Transcendentalism, was critical: “No text could, by its profound
metaphysics and by the prestige of its poetic casting, more irresistibly shake the
hold of the tradition of a [presumed] superior race” (Schwab 161). In India
and then Europe, an industry of Western Hindu studies burgeoned. Many
commentaries, to the extent they mentioned Buddhism at all, conflated it with
Hinduism. With no practicing Buddhists in India to consult, “no Sanskrit
Buddhist texts [in English translation] to read, and in a climate of brahmanical
anti-Buddhist prejudice, these pioneers of India studies gave little attention to
the obscure figure they knew as Boudh” (Bachelor 233). William Jones, de-
spite his considerable erudition, initiated what would become a popular myth
linking the Teutonic god Wotan or Odin to Buddha, and his “On the Gods of
Greece, Italy, and India” identifies the Hindu Rama as “ ‘the same person with
Buddha’ ” (Jones, qtd. in Marshall 230).
When Wilkins’s Bhagavad-Gita finally reached New England in 1843,
Ralph Waldo Emerson referred to it as that “ ‘much renowned book of Bud-
dhism’ ” (Emerson, qtd. in Field 60). Henry David Thoreau, who had studied
the earliest French works of comparative religion, had a somewhat clearer un-
derstanding of the distinction between Hinduism and Buddhism. No less than
Emerson, however, Thoreau hybridized concepts drawn loosely from a range
of Eastern philosophies and religions—as well as from Protestantism, Romanti-
cism, Deism, and American civil religion—in creating a uniquely nineteenth-
century, New England Transcendentalism.8 If Buddhism emerged as a distinct
object from Hinduism in European scholarship in the 1820s, it did not do so
in the United States until somewhat later. The eighteenth-century tradition
of Orientalist studies both laid the foundations for the Buddhist studies that
would commence in earnest in the 1830s and obfuscated any clear understand-
ing of Buddhism until that time.
The first phase of scholarly Orientalism, then, can be dated roughly to the
years between 1780 and 1820. If it was a phase of “philological and liter-
ary Romanticism” having very little to do with the history or doctrines of
Buddhism, the second phase, from approximately the 1830s to the 1850s,
“was one of linguistic organization” (Schwab 121). The requisite first order of
business was to locate and translate ancient manuscripts from the Sanskrit and,
later, the Pali Buddhist canons. The pioneers of this phase of textual compila-
tion and translation included, among others, Brian Houghton Hodgson, Alex-
ander Csomo de Körös, Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat, Henry and James Princep,
and Philippe Edouard Foucaux.
The moment identified by most historians of Buddhist studies as the cul-
minating event was Eugène Burnouf’s publication in 1844 of Introduction à
l’historie du Buddhisme indien. Burnouf had drawn upon the Sanskrit manu-
scripts provided by Hodgson, the significance of which went largely unrecog-
nized in London until Burnouf. Only after Burnouf did Buddhology emerge
in Britain as the primary occupation of the newly forming field of comparative
religion. Thus the third phase of Orientalism, the phase of “maturation,” “be-
came more pronounced around 1855” when Buddhist studies rose to the fore
(Schwab 121). This phase was signaled by the immigration of F. Max Müller
from Germany to England and his widely read studies on Buddhism published
in the 1860s, and it was cemented especially by the work of T. W. Rhys Da-
vids and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, who formed the Pali Text Society at Oxford
in 1881.
Three characteristics of the third phase of Orientalism are critical. First, the
object of study of Orientalist scholars increasingly became Buddhism rather
than Hinduism, which is not to say that Hindu studies ceased. Second, the
center of Buddhist studies shifted from Paris and the German universities to
London (which, again, is not to say that they ceased on the Continent). Third,
Buddhism rather dramatically entered not only scholarly discourse in Britain
but also popular discourse. Works by F. Max Müller, Henry Alabaster, and the
Reverend Samuel Beal, among others, were widely read and discussed. As a re-
sult, starting in the 1860s, Buddhist concepts began to appear with increasing
frequency in poems, novels, and the popular periodical press.
That Buddhism entered the popular discourse in England in the second
half of the nineteenth century explains the historical frame for this book. My
analysis begins from the publications of comparative religion starting in the
1850s and1860s, incorporates the lively dialogue about Buddhism that oc-
curred in the periodical literature soon thereafter, and then focuses on the
works of fiction, poetry, religion, and philosophy that emerged especially in
the 1870s to the 1890s. The primary works on which this book focuses are
among those that engaged most fully with Buddhism, which is why I chose
them. However, I hope that the current study demonstrates that they be-
longed to a body of scholarly, popular, and literary discourse of which they
are representative.
Introduction ~ 13
The Religious Context for the Counter-Invasion
When Buddhism entered Victorian discourse at mid century, it became part

of an environment of vital and divisive religious debates, not merely debates
between the few dominant Christian institutions, but between a wide range of
religious and spiritual positions. Some of those positions—such as the Spiri-
tualism movement, Anglican Deism, and, later in the century, the Theosophi-
cal movement—are treated at length in this book. But even the dominant
competing religious positions—Anglicanism and Nonconformity, “Church”
and “Chapel”—were themselves very far from unified or stable. The dynamic
complexity of the religious landscape of that century, which stands out in com-
parison with the preceding or succeeding century, meant that there could be
no monolithic “Christian” response to Buddhism. Yet, there were consistent
responses made in the name of Christianity as a whole by representatives of dif-
ferent denominations that spanned the many denominational differences. Some
background is required in order to understand how the diversity of Christian
positions and institutions alive in Victorian England not only conditioned a
diversity of responses but generated certain shared responses to Buddhism.
In the first place, the Church of England was internally divided among
three primary camps. The High Church or Anglo-Catholic position was cham-
pioned by the Tractarian Movement of the 1830s–1840s and led by Oxford
divines like Edward Pusey, John Keble, and John Henry Newman. It sought to
reestablish the apostolic and therefore institutional authority of the Church in
relationship to its Catholic origins. The Low Church movement began as part
of the Evangelical Revival of the eighteenth century and was in the nineteenth
century one attempt to compete with the growing popularity of Nonconform-
ist evangelical and Biblical fundamentalist Christianity. Representative figures
were the Seventh Earl of Shaftesbury, Bishop J. C. Ryle, and Bishop C. J.
Ellicott. The Broad Church or Latitudinarian position was typified by A. P.

Stanley, Benjamin Jowett, and John William Colenso, Bishop of Natal, and
by the publication in 1860 of Essays and Reviews. The authors of those pieces
strove for national unity among the diversity of Anglican positions, but in-
stead they alienated evangelicals and Anglo-Catholics alike by advocating “for
a thoroughly historical and critical approach to the Bible, for recognition of
the moral and spiritual worth of religious traditions outside the Bible, and for
acceptance of the findings of science concerning both the age of the earth and
its geological history” (Parsons, “Reform” 41).
At the same time, the Church was under assault, both theologically and
politically, from other denominations. By the 1830s there was intense pressure
from Whig or Liberal parliamentarians in the direction of disestablishment of
the Church’s privileged status as the state-sanctioned institution it had been for
most of three hundred years. The Test and Corporation Act of 1828 granted
Nonconformists the right to hold public office, and Catholics were extended
similar rights by the Roman Catholic Relief (or Catholic Emancipation) Act of
1829 (though with much less immediate impact, given that Catholics consti-
tuted only about 4 percent of the church-going population in England at mid
century). These acts were precursors of religious legislation in subsequent de-
cades that gradually reduced the legal exclusivity of the Church and extended
greater political equality not only to Nonconformists, but to Catholics and
Jews; indeed, the century charts the step-by-step, de facto disestablishment of
Anglicanism.
A major turning point in this process came with the 1851 Census of Re-
ligious Worship.9 It revealed two ground-shaking facts. First, in a nation that
considered itself unequivocally and thoroughly Christian, the total percentage
of the population that attended church of any kind was only around 60 per-
cent. Second, of that number, the percentage who claimed to be Anglicans
was only 51 percent, a number that would decline in the second half of the
century to below 50 percent. The first of these facts became a clarion call to
action for British Protestants regardless of denomination. The second finally
toppled the long-standing claim that the Anglican establishment represented
a substantial majority of Britons, which had been a primary rationale for its
privileged status.
The 1851 census also revealed the extremely robust and diverse state of
Nonconformity. It identified thirty different Nonconformist denominations
or sub-denominations of adequate size in membership to merit separate
counting.10 The largest three were the Methodists, of which seven different
subgroups were counted, the Congregationalists, and the Baptists, with six
subgroups. It included the four most noted denominations of “Old Dissent”—
Congregationalist, Baptist, Presbyterian, and Quaker—and the four largest de-
nominations of “New Dissent” that had emerged from the Evangelical Revival:
Methodist, Calvinist Methodist, Baptist (the minority of total Baptists), and
Unitarian. One traditional distinction between old and new dissent concerns
the difference between Calvinistic theology, according to which only the elect
or predestined can be saved, and Arminian theology, according to which salva-
tion is available to all through faith. But even in the eighteenth century only
the minority of dissenters were true Calvinists, and the nineteenth century saw
Calvinism become increasingly unpopular. What most distinguished new from
old dissent was the heightened emphasis on evangelicalism, the spiritual and
moral imperative to spread the word of God.
While evangelicals were motivated, as Elisabeth Jay notes, by “the heart’s
consciousness of sin and the need for Christ’s redemptive power,” the “insis-
tence on the primacy of the individual’s relationship with his Saviour, main-
tained through prayer and the search for guidance from Scripture, allowed
Introduction ~ 15
considerable variation in the interpretation of these ‘vital simplicities’ ” of evan-

gelicalism (Jay 1). Indeed, the focus on individual responsibility for one’s salva-
tion and individual communion with Scripture and with God—unmediated by
clergy, church, or state—was endemic to Protestantism from its beginning in
the Reformation. It was part of the logical historical trajectory of Protestantism
that each individual could in theory become his or her own minister and his
or her own congregation. This explains why there were an estimated 63,000
non-denominationally-affiliated worshipers in “isolated Congregations” in
England in 1851(groups like the Church of Christ or the Brethren, as vividly
portrayed in Edmond Gosse’s 1907 memoir Father and Son [Parsons, “Dis-
senters” 102]). Congregationalists and Baptists were so wary of hierarchical
institutional control that they placed the first-order of authority over theology
and practice with each congregation of individual worshipers.
For such reasons, Max Weber in The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Cap-
italism (1905) forwarded a theory of the parallel historical development of
Protestant individualism and the self-satisfying individual of laissez-faire capital-
ism. That theory appears to be fully realized in the case of nineteenth-century
Nonconformity. As Gerald Parsons writes in this regard: “Nonconformist the-
ology, politics, social leadership, church organization and attitudes to social
reform all reinforced one another. At the heart of this synthesis was a commit-
ment to individualism. . . . Thus, paradoxically, commitment to the moral prior-
ity of the individual conscience gave early and mid-Victorian Nonconformity a
unity of purpose and an essential common identity and standpoint” (Parsons,
“Dissent” 87). For very good reasons, then, the success of Nonconformity in
the nineteenth century was founded upon “a network of Nonconformist bank-
ing, manufacturing and professional families committed to the ideals of mid-
Victorian free trade and laissez-fair individualism” that later in the century was
“peculiarly open to an alliance with Gladstonian Liberalism” (Parsons, “Dis-
sent” 88). I will return to these features of Protestant individualism in analyz-

ing Victorian constructions of Buddhism, but the point to be made now is that
in theory there could have been as many “Christian” responses to Buddhism
as there were individual Protestants, with Catholic responses added on top of
these.
How then is it possible to address the Christian response to Buddhism in
nineteenth-century Britain on any other than an atomized basis? Certainly
there was a broad range of Christian responses to Buddhism, everything from
categorical condemnation of it as the paganism of an inferior race to celebration
of it as a moral system compatible with Christian ethics with a founder pleas-
ingly similar to Jesus. One approach would be to look for clearly delineated
patterns of response according to denomination, or even at the level of Angli-
canism, Nonconformity, and Catholicism. However, I have not found that to
be the case, at least not in any easily defined way. In the large body of periodical
articles written in the nineteenth century comparing and contrasting Christi-

anity and Buddhism, one finds articles by Methodists that treat the doctrines of
karma and reincarnation as potentially valid, essays by Catholics that condemn
Buddhist materialism, articles by lay Anglicans that praise the Buddhist ethical
system, and pieces by university-based Anglicans who denounce Buddhism
as atheistic nihilism. The difference is not primarily between denominations.
Often one cannot tell the denomination of an author. If one published in The
Dublin Review, the “leading Roman Catholic journal in Britain,” or Fraser’s
Magazine, which was “Liberal Conservative with broad Church associations,”
or, even more clearly, in American journals like The Methodist Review or Uni-
tarian Review, then one might have grounds for assuming the affiliation of the
author (Fraser, Gender 215, 217). Even this assumption is risky. Authors gen-
erally do not announce their denominations. More significantly, they do not
appear to respond to Buddhism primarily as Congregationalists or as Catholics
or as Broach Church Anglicans or, for that matter, as humanist agnostics who
still profess a Christian worldview and ethics. They nearly all write on behalf of
Christianity as a whole, making general claims about the similarities and differ-
ences between Buddhism and “Christian belief,” or about what “Christianity
demands,” or about “Christian tradition,” or the “Christian world.”
If there are patterns in the responses by Christians on behalf of Christianity
to Buddhism, they probably had less to do with denomination than with posi-
tion on the scale of latitudinarian to evangelical, pluralistic to fundamentalist,
or, in twenty-first-century terms, liberal to conservative. Broad Church Angli-
cans may have had as much in common, theologically, with some Unitarians
than with Low Church Anglicans. Evangelical Anglicans often found more in
common with evangelical Nonconformists than with High Church Anglicans.
What generalization can be made, then, about the difference between latitu-
dinarian and evangelical responses to Buddhism? Perhaps obviously, the more
religiously pluralistic the commentator, the more willing he or she might be

to treat Buddhist history and doctrine either with an attitude of objectivity or
with interest and sympathy. This description clearly identifies Broad Church-
man, but it also includes a spectrum of liberal-intellectual Nonconformists and
Catholics, as well as those who synthesized a pluralistic Christianity with ele-
ments drawn, for instance, from Spiritualism or from Buddhism directly.
That said, the more evangelical the writer, the more likely she or he might
be to reject Buddhism outright or vehemently to defend Christianity while
scathingly criticizing Buddhist tenets. The most fundamentalist of Victorian
Christians—which, as in the case of Primitive Baptists, correlated with lower-
class status—either would not have heard of Buddhism at all or, if they had,
probably would have dismissed it out of hand as beneath consideration. They
did not tend to publish essays in the Westminster Review, which is a reminder
that educational level and class status—themselves correlated—also influenced
Introduction ~ 17
the nature of responses to Buddhism. They did not do so in any straightfor-

ward way, however, since some upper-class, university-based comparative reli-
gion scholars steered their treatment of Buddhism to reaffirm the preeminence
of Christianity, and some middle-class Nonconformists accommodated ele-
ments of Buddhism to their faith, even using Buddhist doctrine to critique the
failure of Christianity to remedy the excesses of the market and the inequalities
of society. Thus in discussing Victorian Christian responses to Buddhism, one
might be advised to distinguish at least between latitudinarian or pluralistic and
evangelical or fundamentalist positions.
Having emphasized the potential diversity of Christian positions on Vic-
torian Buddhism, I want to note that there still existed a significant degree
of commonality, and certainly so among Protestants. On the Anglican side,
despite the apparent chasm separating Tractarians from evangelicals, there was
a solid foundation of agreement between them. Both “espoused the quest for
holiness of living . . . both agreed on the divine inspiration of scripture, both
agreed on the essentiality of the doctrines of divine judgment and eternal pun-
ishment, both held uncompromisingly supernatural view of Christianity, and
both firmly believed in miracles, revelation and the literal fulfillment of proph-
ecy” (Parsons, “Reform” 34). Indeed, these features might apply to the large
majority of Victorian Christians of any type. A different, if not entirely differ-
ent, consensus existed on the Nonconformist side. In 1846, the Evangelical
Alliance was formed in England, creating an elastic unity within diversity. Its
nine-point doctrinal statement included points familiar from the history of
Protestantism, such as the “utter Depravity of human nature in consequence
of the Fall,” the “Justification of the sinner by Faith alone,” and the “right
and duty of Private Judgement in the interpretation of the Holy Scriptures.”
As Parsons argues, “it was precisely the cohesive and coherent unity of Non-
conformity which explains its prominence and importance in Victorian public
life” (Parsons, “Dissent” 87). And, as I have suggested, that unity extended
beyond Nonconformity; the Evangelical Alliance included as signatories Low
Church Anglican congregations as well. Indeed, one of the overarching reli-
gious trends of the nineteenth century was toward increased evangelicalism,
not only across the spectrum of Nonconformists but among British Protes-
tants in general, including Anglicans.
This trend toward evangelicalism was counterbalanced in certain respects by
another overarching trend: “By 1900 both Anglicanism and most of the major
Nonconformists denominations were doctrinally pluralist” (Parsons, “Dissent”
111).11 Victorian Protestants, if more evangelical, became more tolerant of dif-
ference, at least among themselves. This may be one explanation for why they
became more willing to entertain Buddhist concepts toward the end of the
century. It would not be unsupportable to take the nine points of the Evangeli-
cal Alliance as representative of the major component of Victorian Protestant
Christianity by the end of the century, while still recognizing the importance
of non-evangelical Protestantism and, in a separate but small category, Ca-
tholicism. It is this platform I cite when in the course of this book I refer to
“Victorian evangelicalism” or “Victorian fundamentalist Christianity.”
Here I make several final observations about Victorian Christians in gen-
eral, including Anglicans, Nonconformists, and, to a limited extent, Catholics.
First, as Hugh McLeod observes in opening his study, Religion and Society
in England, 1850–1914, during this period “a relatively high degree of reli-
gious consensus existed, which had diminished by the early twentieth cen-
tury, but had not yet broken down” (McLeod 1). This consensus, which was
“accept[ed] by most of the population of Protestant Christianity,” included
“acceptance of the Bible as the highest religious authority, and of moral prin-
ciples derived from Protestant Christianity, practice of the Christian rites of
passage, and observance of Sunday” (McLeod 1). Second, Victorian Christians
shared historically and culturally specific conditions, and this unity of experi-
ence generated a certain uniformity of response that spanned denominations.
For example, British Christians in general experienced a shock from the 1851
census that church attendance, especially among the working classes, was lower
than expected; this signaled a potential “decline of faith” and demanded some
response in the form of “home missions.” Of course, the more evangelical de-
nominations and sub-denominations responded most vigorously. And all de-
nominations experienced the threat that the authority of scientific materialism
posed to the authority of the Bible. All experienced the advent of Darwinian
evolutionary science as a crisis within the faith as a whole, while of course Bibli-
cal literalists were most reactive. In response to common crises, Christians of all
denominations tended to speak in ways if not identical then at least using a
shared vocabulary and to speak on behalf of Christianity as a whole. A lesser
shared crisis was the counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism. Spokespersons
for Christianity from multiple denominations expressed concerns about Bud-

dhism through a common repertoire of responses that focused on a discrete
set of questions, assessments, and constructions. One goal of this book is to
analyze the most prevalent of those responses and to identify the most com-
monly posed questions, assessments, and constructions.
Thus at times I make use of categories that threaten to lose significance
through generality, namely, “Victorian Protestantism” and “Victorian Chris-
tianity.” Where I reference the former of these, I am making a statement that
I intend to encompass the most representative position shared by nineteenth-
century British Protestants, Anglican and Nonconformist. Where I write of
“Protestantism” without further qualification, I mean to generalize about the
historical and doctrinal features that distinguish the collective of all denomi-
nations that trace their origins back to the Reformation, as for example the
Introduction ~ 19
emphasis on individualism or on faith over works. Finally, where I refer to

“Victorian Christianity,” or to categories like “Christian sin and redemption,”
I mean the historical and doctrinal consensus of Christianity that distinguishes
it from other world religions. The history and doctrines that virtually all de-
nominations of Christianity share at however general a level, such as belief in
the birth and crucifixion of Jesus of Nazareth, or belief in some version of sin,
redemption, and heavenly reward. To put this in a more discrete and histori-
cally grounded way, in certain moments in the analysis I take as my exemplars
those Victorians who, regardless of denomination, felt it appropriate to refer
to Christianity as a whole in comparing it with Buddhism.
Forms of the Counter-Invasion
The counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism took place via a diversity of ve-

hicles and media. The earliest of these was through human contact itself: the
hundreds and then thousands of Britons who traveled to the Orient and re-
turned; the much smaller number of people from Eastern countries who visited
or immigrated to England; and, as Robert Young and others argue, the real
and imagined contact between bodies, the most threatening being sexual con-
tact across racial boundaries. Other primary vehicles of the counter-invasion
were the artifacts brought back to England: the thousands of scrolls, robes,
prayer wheels, figurines, singing bowls, tapestries, statues and other items, in-
cluding the Amaravati bas-reliefs, accumulated in London museums, as well as
the thousands of pages of ancient and contemporary religious manuscripts in
many different languages, including those in Sanskrit that Brian Hodgson had
delivered to London.
But the primary vehicles for the counter-invasion were texts produced pri-
marily in Europe, though also in Anglo-India and other imperial enclaves, in

response to the foreign human contacts, artifacts, and manuscripts already men-
tioned. The end of the eighteenth century saw accelerated publication of trans-
lations, government reports, travelogues, and missionary narratives, among
other types of texts, issued from or pertaining to countries with ties to Bud-
dhism. Many examples of each of these genres exist, but then genre boundar-
ies often were far from distinct. Some early works mixed bits of translation
and travelogue with missionary report, study of a foreign religion, or polemic
against that religion. This was true in part of two of the most widely read works
on Buddhism at mid-century, the Reverend R. Spence Hardy’s A Manual of
Buddhism, in its Modern Development; Translated from Singhalese Mss. (1853)
and The Right Reverend P. Bigandet’s The Life or Legend of Gaudama, The
Buddha of the Burmese (1858).
But perhaps the single most influential source of texts was comparative re-
ligion: scholarship was a primary vehicle for Buddhism into Western culture.
Burnouf’s groundbreaking work was followed by an outpouring of scholarly
production, of which these, along with those already cited, are representa-
tive: Jules Barthélemy Saint-Hilaire’s Le Bouddha et Sa religion (1860); Her-
mann Oldenberg’s Buddha: Sein Leben, seine Lehre, seine Gemeinde (1881);
T. W. Rhys Davids’s Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Buddhism (1884); Er-
nest J. Eitel’s Buddhism: Its Historical, Theoretical and Popular Aspects (1884);
and Monier Monier-Williams’s Buddhism, in its Connexion with Brāhmanism
and Hindūism, and in its Contrast with Christianity (1889). Every author
treated in this book was exposed to works of comparative religion and to the
popular commentary upon them in the periodical literature. All of them directly
referenced or alluded to those works in their writings.
However, the British reading public at large, including some indeterminate
percentage of those outside university-educated circles, would have been ex-
posed to Buddhism primarily through the periodical press. The numbers of
newspaper and journal articles with “Buddha” or “Buddhism” in their title
increased significantly on a decade-to-decade basis between 1850 and 1900.12
The counter-invasion arrived in no small part on the flood of periodical liter-
ature about Buddhism that occurred after mid century. In order to illustrate
this point, I will focus on one debate that persisted over the course of several
decades, the Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate. Perhaps the largest percent-
age of the newspaper and journal articles on Buddhism addressed similari-
ties and differences between it and Christianity, not infrequently denouncing
Buddhism while defending Christianity against encroachment. More than a
few articles were titled simply “Christianity and Buddhism,” and these ranged
from thoughtful comparisons to polemics against Buddhism to, in a few cases,
advocacies for Buddhism.13 Other articles clearly announced their mission in
their titles, for instance, C. de Harlez’s “Buddhist Propaganda in Christian

Countries” from the Dublin Review in 1890, or F. F. Ellinwood’s “Buddhism
and Christianity—a crusade which must be met,” published in The Missionary
Review of the World in 1891.
But it was the apparent similarities between Buddhism and Christianity that
afforded the best opportunities for Europeans to begin to approach it. Three
such features of Buddhism were potentially attractive: (1) its presumed histori-
cal similarities to Protestantism; (2) the life and personality of its founder; and,
(3) its ethical system. One common conception of Buddhism was as the “Prot-
estantism of Asia” (Clausen, “Victorian” 7). Some argued that Siddhartha
Gautama had broken from the Brahmanical hierarchy in a way similar to Jesus’s
break from the Hebraic elders, Martin Luther’s launching of Protestantism,
and the emergence of the Church of England from Catholicism. One author
in the Journal of Sacred Literature and Biblical Record in 1865 commented,
Introduction ~ 21
“Caste or Brahmanism, which is the same thing, is the system, Buddhism is

the protest against the system” (J. M. M. 282).14 According to the story of his
life popularized in poems and essays, Gautama had forfeited wealth and royal
blood, opposed the “priest-ridden” hierarchy to found a religion of individual
practice, and transcended the inequalities of the caste system to offer a path
that all could walk in equality (Max Müller, Chips 241). Thus a qualified pro-
Buddhism strain, even in the mouths of some Anglican clergymen, became a
part of Victorian anti-Catholic discourse. This Protestant construction was sup-
ported by a general acceptance of the Buddha’s saintliness. Even detractors
of Buddhism drew comparisons between Buddha and Jesus; the “founder’s
personality” became a major draw, as Richard A. Armstrong observed in an
1870 piece in The Theological Review (Armstrong 198). Many Victorians were
fascinated by the life story of the Buddha, and, following half-a-dozen book-
length accounts by prominent scholars, numerous journal articles summarized
his biography with varying degrees of sympathy and accuracy to the available
historical sources.15
Perhaps the single most attractive feature of Buddhism was its ethical system
as outlined in the Five Precepts and the Noble Eightfold Path, partial corollary
to the Ten Commandments, though the differences between the two sets of
tenets are much more profound than the similarities. Buddhism arrived in En-
gland at the time when mid-Victorian liberal intellectuals like John Stuart Mill,
George Eliot, and Matthew Arnold were striving to generate non-theological
ethical systems to provide a basis for moral order in society.16 It arrived in this
context as a fully articulated, rigorous, and historically tested ethics that did
not depend on a supernatural source but still was part of a religion, as op-
posed to a strictly humanistic philosophy. Thus John R. Ambereley, writing in
The Theological Review in 1872, proclaimed that Buddhism “has the credit of
placing morality far above everything else as a means of obtaining the blessings
promised to believers,” and Helen Graham McKerlie, in the Asiatic Quarterly

Review in 1890, concluded that “we owe much of the morality and civilization
of the world to the life of renunciation and self-sacrifice of Gautama Bud-
dha” (Ambereley 316; McKerlie 225).17 Monier Monier-Williams, an outspo-
ken critic of Buddhism, admitted a laudable similarity to Christian morality of
the Buddhist ethical system, which he called “one of the most perfect which
the world has ever known,” though he goes on to argue, as many Victorians
did, that Buddhism is “no religion at all, but a mere system of morality and
philosophy founded on a pessimistic theory of life” (Monier-Williams, Bud-
dhism 217, 537).
While the perceived similarities of Buddhism to Christianity and the strengths
of its ethical system made it appealing to some, those qualities also heightened
the potential threat of Buddhism as a rival. A number of its features must have
been especially threatening, since they received repeated commentary in the
periodical literature. In the first place, the realization, which emerged as data
on the ancient history of India amassed, that Buddhism had preceded Chris-
tianity by over five hundred years brought with it the implication that Jesus
of Nazareth may well have studied at the feet of “wise men from the East.”
By the 1890s, the thought that “Buddhists had been in the Holy Land dur-
ing Christ’s life-time was an idea very much in vogue” (Whitlark, “ ‘Nirvana
Talk’ ” 27). It was only a step from there to speculating about the influence of
Buddhist parables on the Bible, for which there was some historical support.18
Ernest J. Eitel was not alone in 1884 in asking, incredulously, “Are we to
conclude then, that Christ—as a certain sceptic would make us believe—went
to India, during the eighteen years which intervened between his youth and
manhood, and returned, thirty years old, to ape and reproduce the life and
doings of Shâkyamuni Buddha?” (Eitel 15). Consider, for example, the title of
J. G. R. Forlong’s article “Buddhism, Through what Historical Channels did it
influence Early Christianity?,” which appeared in Open Court in 1887, or Feliz L.
Oswald’s “Was Christ a Buddhist?” from The Arena in 1890, which was re-
printed in the London Review of Reviews in February of 1891.
A lesser but persistent concern among commentators was whether the world
population of Buddhists outnumbered the Christians. As Richard Armstrong
put it in 1870, “The God of Sinai and the gods of Olympus are not represen-
tative of the general faith of humanity,” yet “we have run to our next-door
neighbours for a declaration of their views, and given out these as the opinions
of all mankind” (Armstrong 178). A scare arose when early estimators desig-
nated, inaccurately, the populations of China and the entirety of Southeast Asia
as Buddhist, sparking a mixture of a Malthusian fear of being out-peopled with
a Darwinian anxiety over the statistics of competition and survival.
To make matters worse, John Stuart Mill, in “The Utility of Religions,”
used the large number of Buddhists to argue, as one contemporary critic sum-
marized his point, “that mankind can perfectly well do without belief in a
heaven or a future life” (Gordon 527). Other critics tried to discount the ap-
parent population advantage by turning into an indictment what some other
Victorians saw as an admirable feature of the history of Buddhism: its tolerance
of other religions and general refusal to use violence as part of its evangelism.
John Ambereley, in his 1872 article, wrote that “Buddhism does not teach
the necessary damnation of those who do not believe in Buddha, and in this
respect I think it is more excellent than the other religions which teach that all
but their own followers will surely go to hell” (Ambereley 317). But Reginald
Copleston, Bishop of Colombo, in a well-argued 1888 polemic against Bud-
dhism, answered the threat of being outnumbered with the argument that
Buddhism “is a parasitic religion, ready to thrive where it can, without displac-
ing or excluding others” and so never could mount a unified assault on Chris-
tianity, being too impurely mixed with each country’s indigenous practices
Introduction ~ 23
(Colombo 121). It seemed undeniable, however, that adaptability had proved

to be a historical advantage for the spread of Buddhism. In relation to a na-
tion like England that, while intolerant not only of non-Christian religion but
of non-Anglican Christianity, was perhaps exceptionally tolerant of the free
exchange of ideas, Buddhism’s tolerance and adaptability suited ideally the
purposes of cultural counter-invasion.
The Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate was a primary response to and
expression of the nineteenth-century counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism.
As such, it usefully demarcates the boundary between what Victorians could
accept and what they could not accept about Buddhism. It therefore points to
a related question that underlies this book’s analysis. Which aspects of Bud-
dhism were assimilable by Victorian culture, and which were not? Also, what
can we learn about that culture from those differences? Victorians recognized
certain elements of Buddhism, by which I mean they could perceive the mean-
ing of those elements as expressed in their sources and could respond through
agreement, qualification, or counter-argument. Those elements were assimila-
ble in varying degrees. Assimilability implies some degree of compatibility, “as-
similating Buddhism in so far as it correlate[d] with normative Victorian ideas
and values” (Almond 132). In these cases, we can observe the re-presentation
of those elements within Victorian discourse in ways that mixed efforts at even-
handed treatment with appropriation of Buddhism for purposes that served
those normative ideas and values. Thus even the elements of the Buddhist ethical
system with which Victorians took exception were recognizable and, to some
extent, assimilable.
But certain other elements of Buddhism could not be recognized. These
were the aspects most antithetical to Victorian ideology and to Western meta-
physics generally, so far outside of the Victorian worldview as to be incom-
mensurable and, therefore, incomprehensible, beyond meaning. While some
assimilable elements of Buddhism also were threatening and therefore required

reinterpretation, the unassimilable elements were utterly heretical, blasphe-
mous, horrifying, and so could not be expressed within Victorian discourse
except as denial or trauma. To summarize only briefly here, those included
the absence of a creating deity, the replacement of the system of personal sin/
redemption by the impersonal system of karma, the abandonment of individual
heavenly reward for continuous reincarnation without continuous identity, the
perceived annihilation of nirvana, and the Buddhist “no-self ” doctrine, which
was directly antithetical to the foundational principles of Protestant and capital-
ist individualism. Thus unassimiliability signals much more than foreignness; it
identifies those elements of the other that perfectly correspond to blind spots
within the self, the most potentially disruptive and revealing sites. Assimilability
is an extremely useful index of the boundaries, adaptability, and absolute limits
of Victorian culture.
Thus while the Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate was a significant ex-

pression of and response to the counter-invasion, it serves largely as historical
background for the purposes of this study. The real frontier of the counter-
invasion, the more difficult interface to locate and analyze, was the boundary
between assimilability and inassimilability. Locating and analyzing that bound-
ary must be the ultimate object, as crucial as it is illusive, of this book.
Chapter 1
The Life of the Buddha

in Victorian Britain
Competing Victorian Buddhas
Thousands of late-Victorian Britons went about with images of the Buddha

floating in their heads. While this may sound like a statement out of Lewis
Carroll—who indeed did allude to Buddhism in the Alice books—it is none-
theless a fact, if for no other reason than that three book-length poems re-
counting the life of the Buddha were published in London in the 1870s and
1880s: Richard Phillips’s The Story of Gautama Buddha and his Creed: An Epic
(1871), Sir Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia. Being The Life and Teaching of
Gautama, Prince of India and Founder of Büddhism (1879), and Sidney Ar-
thur Alexander’s much briefer verse narrative, Sakya-Muni: The Story of Bud-
dha (1887), which won the Newdigate Prize that year at Oxford. Arnold’s
The Light of Asia, beyond being a bestseller, was a cultural phenomenon in
England, as well as in America and India. Though it has received scant critical
attention since the nineteenth century, “Immediately after its first publication
in 1879 it became one of the most popular long Victorian poems; its au-
thor . . . achieved overnight fame throughout the English-speaking world, and
for two or three decades the poem exercised an intellectual and religious influ-
ence out of proportion even to the hundreds of thousands of copies which it
sold” (Clausen, Light 1). Arnold’s work marked and to a limited extent caused
a cultural attitude shift in the West concerning perceptions of the Buddha
and receptivity to Buddhism. Reading it moved Charles Bennett in 1901 to
become Ananda Metteyya, the first British Buddhist monk. “Like many before
him and untold thousands since, [he] found that a new world of spiritual ad-
venture was opened before his eyes,” as illumined by The Light of Asia (Hum-
phreys 13). Arnold’s work inspired Rudyard Kipling’s creation of the Teshoo
Lama in Kim (1901) and influenced, however diffusely, a generation or more
of British writers, including W. B. Yeats and T. S. Eliot.1 In one of the many
favorable contemporary reviews, Oliver Wendell Holmes wrote from Amer-
ica that “its tone is so lofty that there is nothing with which to compare it
but the New Testament” (Holmes 347). For this very reason, however, the
poem motivated no less than four book-length rebuttals, all written by clergy-
men who were alarmed that it “had enormously increased an already exist-
ing interest in Buddhism which threatened the predominance of Christianity”
(Clausen, “Sir” 185).2 What conditions laid the groundwork for the tremen-
dous response—both positive and negative—elicited by The Light of Asia? Why
were late Victorians so primed to be fascinated with the life story of a religious
figure who lived in India over 500 years before Christ, and what does the fact
that they were fascinated tell us about them?
Three preliminary answers to the first of these questions come to mind,
which though obvious and sweeping are nonetheless pertinent, namely, the
much-analyzed Victorian “crisis of faith,” the advent of Darwinian evolution-
ary theory, and the culmination of the British Empire in the second half of
the nineteenth century. It is not insignificant for Arnold’s writing of The Light
of Asia or for the popularity of the poem that it was published eight years
after Charles Darwin’s The Descent of Man (1871) and only three years after
Queen Victoria was named Empress of India. The British occupation of India
and colonial presence throughout Southeast Asia had laid the groundwork
for Arnold’s poem decades earlier by opening the channels through which
the sacred texts of Eastern religions would filter back to Europe.3 The years
between 1860 and 1890 saw an outpouring of scholarly translations from San-
skrit and especially from Pali, as well as a rush of scholarship that focused more
on Buddhism than on Hinduism or Islam. During the same decades in which
Darwin published his paradigm-shifting works, the formation of the new disci-
pline of comparative religion shifted the paradigm of religious studies. One of
its founders, Friedrich Max Müller, helped define it with such works as Lectures
on the Science of Religion; with a Paper on Buddhist Nihilism (1872). In 1881,
T. W. Rhys Davids and his wife, C. A. F. Rhys Davids, formed the Pali Text So-
ciety, which continues to be active at Oxford and that in the nineteenth century
produced thousands of pages of translations that still are considered authorita-
tive today.
The general point here is that Darwinian evolutionary theory, comparative
religion, and the first major object of its study, Buddhism, entered British public
consciousness at roughly the same time, contributing separately and conjointly
to the ongoing crisis of faith within the Church of England, especially. In part
The Life of the Buddha in Victorian Britain ~ 27
as a result of this confluence, comparative religion and the understanding of

Buddhism in Britain intermeshed with the discourses surrounding the evolu-
tionary theory debate. Thus comparative religion drew on the historicizing
trend that also characterized recent “Higher Criticism” of the Bible and took
as its purpose the “scientific” comparative analysis of the origins and evolution
of religions. Every aspect of this approach was threatening to divine mystery
and to any claim for the one true religion. Similarly, the British construction
of Buddhism emphasized the parallels between scientific law, especially as de-
scribed by evolutionary theory, and the Dharma, often translated as “Law,”
or between natural causality and the causal necessity of karma, or between
the evolution of species and the progressive evolution that many Westerners
assumed occurred between lives in the cycle of reincarnation.4 These parallels
lent credibility to Buddhism in the eyes of those who subscribed to some form
of evolutionary theory and made Buddhism all the more persuasive as a poten-
tial spiritual or ethical alternative to those who had lost (or never held) their
faith in Christianity. By the same token, these associations with Darwinism
made Buddhism all the more damnable for some concerned Christians, par-
ticularly fundamentalist and evangelical Protestants, Anglican as well as Non-
conformist. Any analysis of Victorian portrayals of the life of Buddha must
consider how they incorporate and respond to evolutionary theory.
The more specific point to be made is that Edwin Arnold’s The Light of
Asia, rather than springing without precedent from an individual man’s Ori-
ental infatuation, was the culmination and expression of an historically specific
wave of interest in the Buddha in the West. A large amount of scholarship
provided the foundation for the success of Arnold’s poem, and a heated pub-
lic dialogue followed on the heels of the scholarship. As comparative religion
focused on Buddhism, so the debate that soon swelled the intellectual, popu-
lar, and religious presses focused on the figure of the Buddha. Multiple articles
published in France, Germany, England, and America offered accounts of the

life of Buddha to a newly fascinated readership. Many of those contributed to
what might be called the Victorian Jesus-versus-Buddha debate.5 Even some
critics of Buddhism acknowledged the saintliness, wisdom, and compassion of
its founder. Some who were attracted to Buddhist thought became interested
in pursuing the implication, made with increasing frequency, that early Chris-
tianity had borrowed from Buddhism.6 In addition, the picture of Siddhartha
Gautama emerged as one who had broken from the “Brahmanical hierarchy”
much as Jesus later broke from Judaism and as the Church of England broke
from “priest-ridden” Catholicism (Almond 72). As James Freeman Clarke, a
Unitarian minister, wrote in 1869, “Buddhism in Asia, like Protestantism in
Europe, is a revolt of nature against spirit, of humanity against caste, of indi-
vidual freedom against the despotism of an order, of salvation by faith against
salvation by sacraments” (Clarke 713). Max Müller summarized the resulting
dilemma: “In no religion are we so constantly reminded of our own as in Bud-

dhism, and yet in no religion has man been drawn away so far from the truth
as in the religion of Buddhism. Buddhism and Christianity are indeed the two
opposite poles with regard to the most essential points of religion”; yet, Jesus
and Buddha remain strikingly similar (Max Müller, Lectures 113). Thus any
study of Victorian portraits of the Buddha must take into account parallels
and divergences from traditional conceptions of Jesus.
This chapter pursues these questions and issues through a comparative
analysis of Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia and Richard Phillips’s The Story of
Gautama Buddha. The analysis is motivated and organized by one additional
question: why was Arnold’s poem such a tremendous success with such far-
reaching influence when Phillips’s poem received so little notice, indeed, no
notice of any kind in print that I have been able to find? Arnold was knighted
and nearly made the Poet Laureate; Phillips appears to have dropped forever
from public sight after the publication of his poem. Yet, both poems focus on
the same subject, only eight years separate their publication dates, and each
was published by a nationally known house. What, then, accounts for such a
wide disparity in reception and impact, and what do the answers to this ques-
tion tell us about the Victorian engagement with the life of the Buddha?
Sources for the Victorian Buddha
Either factors external to The Story of Gautama Buddha and The Light of Asia
or factors internal to them, their portrayals of the character of Buddha—or
both—must account for the difference in reception and impact. The short pe-
riod of time that separates the publication of the two poems argues against the
possibility of a significant change in receptivity. However, evidence suggests
that such a change did indeed take place in those eight years. In his preface,
Phillips himself claims that “Gaútama Buddha is at present hardly known to any
but oriental scholars and literary men” (Phillips v). Yet, only eight years later,
T. W. Rhys Davids, in favorably reviewing Arnold’s work, worried that the
story was “too familiar to the reading public for the poem to become popular”
(Clausen, “Sir” 184). That a contextual change did occur during these years
is supported by comparing the articles on Buddhism in successive editions of
the Encyclopaedia Britannica. The 1810, 1842, and 1854 editions, for instance,
use their definitions of “Hinduism,” “Buddhism,” and “Islam” as opportuni-
ties to assert the superiority of Christianity. In the 1842 article on Buddhism,
as Sheila McDonough argues, “little is said save that Buddha was an incarna-
tion of Vishnu, and that the sceptical doctrines which he disseminated in the
course of that delusive manifestation became afterwards blended with a variety
of other ideas and practices” (McDonough 779). However, “by 1880 the tone
of the Britannica articles has again changed,” thanks to the work of scholars of
comparative religion: “The work of these men in translating the source mater-
ial for the major world religions, in attempting to enter imaginatively into the
inner meaning of the religious experience of persons in other traditions, and
in conveying their knowledge in a dramatic and effective manner to western
readers, seems finally to have broken through the wall of prejudice in the West,
and to have made it possible for the authentic voice of the eastern traditions
to begin to be heard in the pages of the Encyclopaedia” (McDonough 783).
McDonough goes on to note that “by far the most striking instance of the
changed attitude in this edition is the presentation of the life and teaching of
Buddha,” a change undoubtedly influenced by The Light of Asia.
Another factor to consider is which primary sources were available in trans-
lation to Phillips and Arnold. If one considers only those books available
in English prior to 1870, then the primary sources for Phillips would have
been The Right Rev. P. Bigandet’s The Life or Legend of Gaudama (1858),
derived from Burmese sources, and R. Spence Hardy’s A Manual of Bud-
dhism (1860), which relies on ancient Ceylonese texts. Though each of these
authors worked toward accuracy and evenhandedness, neither was sympa-
thetic to Buddhism; both were missionaries, and they wrote in large part
to give those who followed the information necessary to know what they
were up against and, therefore, the best strategies for converting Buddhists
to Christianity. This lack of sympathy is evident in Phillips’s poem, but not in
Arnold’s. Though Arnold in fact includes more Biblical allusions than does
Phillips, Phillips’s purpose was to show that Buddha suffers by comparison
with Jesus, while Arnold’s purpose was to draw upon the parallels in fashion-
ing a sympathetic Buddha. Arnold had read Bigandet and Hardy, but by the
time of his writing a much different body of source materials was available.
In 1871, Henry Alabaster published his still influential work, The Wheel of
the Law: Buddhism Illustrated from Siamese Sources; it includes a sympathetic

retelling of the life of the Buddha and an articulate defense of Buddhism ad-
dressed specifically to Western readers by the Singhalese intellectual Chao
Phya Thipakon. Two of the most important other sources for Arnold were
Samuel Beal’s The Romantic Legend of Sá̄kya Buddha (1875) and T. W. Rhys
Davids’s widely read Buddhism: Being a Sketch of the Life and Teachings of
Gautama, the Buddha (1877).7 The first of these, a translation of the Chinese
version of the Sanskrit Abhinishkramana Sutra, is indeed romantic, color-
ful, and full of miracles. By contrast, Rhys Davids’s book, based on the Pali
canon, strives to be historically factual and to demythologize Buddhism; it is
considered one of the most thorough and balanced sources in English prior
to the twentieth century. Thus Arnold had a larger, more sympathetic, and
perhaps more objective body of sources from which to draw, and he actively
incorporated what he learned from them.
Arnold was more informed and influenced by comparative religion. Vic-

torian Buddhologists such as Max Müller and the Rhys Davidses spent their
professional lives translating and comparatively analyzing ancient texts from
disparate locations—Tibet, China, Ceylon, and Burma. Driven by a Protestant
belief in the truth-telling authority of the most ancient textual sources, they un-
avoidably participated in the appropriation of Buddhism from its indigenous
contexts by attempting to strip it of local mythologies so that it could be turned
into a “purified” textual object of Western knowledge, a project that was insepa-
rable from the British national project of imperialism.8 Their analysis of the writ-
ings enabled them to triangulate between accounts of the life of Buddha that
had been separated by centuries, separated by geography (between the north-
ern Buddhism of Tibet and China and the southern Buddhism of Ceylon and
Southeast Asia), separated by doctrine (between northern Mahayana Buddhism
and southern Theravada Buddhism), and separated by language (between the
northern Sanskrit and the southern Pali). In this way, they were able to identify
the culture-specific elements of Buddhist practice and doctrine from elements
that were duplicated across nations, cultures, and languages and that therefore
appeared to be authenticated. Rhys Davids applied this method in relation to the
story of the life of the Buddha, concluding: “I would maintain, therefore, that
some parts of the story—few indeed, but very important, and sufficient to throw
great light on the origin of Buddhism—may already be regarded as historical;
other parts may be as certainly rejected; and many episodes remain, which may
be altogether or partly fictitious” (Rhys Davids, Buddhism 17). It is clear from
the array of sources Arnold draws upon that he adopted a not dissimilar strategy
of triangulation and synthesis. If he was more confident than Phillips in what
he thought were the facts of the story and more possessed of the sensibility of
retelling verifiable history, this may be one factor in explaining why his poem
was more pleasing and convincing to Victorian readers.
This is not to claim that Arnold’s poem is more “accurate” than Phillips’s,
though it is much more sympathetic to Buddhism, and though it is true that
Phillips takes greater license in boldly rewriting part of the traditional story for
polemical purposes.9 Both Arnold and Phillips touch with varying degrees of
poetic license and fealty to primary sources on the most frequently recounted
historical events in the life of the Buddha. Those events are as follows. In the
year 563 BCE, a child named Siddhartha was born near Kapilavastu into the
royal family of King Suddhodana and Queen Mayadevi of the Gautama family
in the Sakya tribe (“Sakyamuni” means “sage of the Sakya tribe”).10 He grew
toward manhood as a prince sheltered from witnessing the suffering of life
by his station and by his father, who was determined that he should become
a great ruler instead of a great Buddha, as had been prophesized. His father
therefore arranged a marriage between the sixteen-year-old Siddhartha and
the beautiful Yashodhara, with whom he had a son, Rahula. He continued to
live a sheltered life, but on four excursions out of the palace compound he wit-
nessed four events that served as life-changing signs—an old man, a sick man,
a dead man, and, finally, a peaceful monk. He experienced the “Renunciation,”
his decision to leave his life of luxury, privilege, and family in order to become
a monk and seek the truth about human suffering and made his “Great Depar-
ture.” After finding that the most renowned spiritual teachers could not show
him the truth, he committed himself to extreme asceticism. After six years of
this, he realized that such mortification does not lead to enlightenment and
so discovered the “Middle Way” between the extremes of self-indulgence and
self-denial. He determined to sit under the Bodhi tree until he found the truth,
and after intense struggle (with Mara, the god/devil of death and desire) he
attained enlightenment on the day of his thirty-fifth birthday. He traveled to
the Deer Park at Sarnath, near Benares, and delivered his first sermon, the
“Setting into Motion of the Wheel of the Dharma,” in which he preached the
Middle Way, the Four Noble Truths, and the Noble Eightfold Path, the cor-
nerstones of Buddhism; later, and for forty-five years, he built up the commu-
nity of monks, or Sangha, and traveled India teaching the Dharma (truth, law,
reality—no cognate exists in English); on his eightieth birthday in the year 483
near the town of Kushinagara, he died, or entered Paranirvana, the state into
which one passes who already has attained nirvana.11 If accuracy means in some
way representing these events, on which nearly all primary sources, whether
Theravada or Mahayana, agree, then both poems are “accurate.”
But historical accuracy or faithfulness to primary sources is not really the
issue, nor is it a principle explanation for the differing receptions that the two
poems received. Both poems are rife with imaginative projections and diver-
gences from anything in any primary source available to the Victorians. For
that matter, there is no single, authoritative source for the life of the Buddha,
and different sources vary significantly, especially when it comes to the inclu-
sion or not of miraculous phenomena, though they agree on key historical

places and events. The important point is that The Light of Asia and The Story
of Gautama Buddha are themselves cultural artifacts.
I draw three conclusions from this. First, each poem presents specific inter-
pretations of the figure of the Buddha that say more about England in the
1870s–1880s than about India, whether in 500 BCE or in the late nineteenth
century. Second, both poems therefore construct images of the Buddha that un-
avoidably participate in the discourses of cultural superiority/inferiority, West/
East, and colonizer/colonized that were part of the fabric of British Orien-
talism. Third, just as the ancient texts of Buddhism deserve to be read non-
reductively, so these two poems need to be read to reveal the full complexity
of the constructions that they place upon the figure of the Buddha, which are
far from simple, one-sided, or monological. Both poems simultaneously dupli-
cate dominant ideologies of late-Victorian society and throw them into crisis,
whether by introducing “other ‘denied’ knowledges [that] enter upon the dom-
inant discourse and estrange the basis of its authority,” or by constructing a
hybridized figure of the Buddha, or by injecting extreme ambivalence between
“us” and “them,” British and Indian, Christian and Buddhist (Bhabha 114).
A Secular, Exotic, Protestant Buddha
The Light of Asia and The Story of Gautama Buddha share a number of mean-
ingful similarities, the identification of which also will assist in bringing the
more significant differences into relief. The first issue to address is literary
merit. Suffice it to say that Phillips’s 220 pages of heroic octaves are within the
same range of accomplishment as Arnold’s 231 pages of blank verse. Each au-
thor handles the challenges of prosody and of narrative with admirable facility;
each poem can be criticized for metrical predictability and narrative awkward-
ness, though I am not concerned here with evaluation. Literary quality is not
a deciding factor.
Both poems largely strip the Buddha story of supernatural phenomena, hence
reflecting the influence of comparative religion that embodied the empirical and
historicizing tendencies of its age. British scholars came to favor the scriptural
accounts in the Tripitaka (the “Three Baskets” of canonical scripture) over the
popular Jataka, a folkloric collection recounting miraculous events surround-
ing the birth and previous lives of the Buddha. They similarly favored the older
Theravadan, Pali canon over the Mahayanan, Sanskrit canon, because they
thought the former more “original” or “pure” and the later too heavily colored
with demons and miracles.12 Following this line, Max Müller concluded: “In
these three recitation-portions [of the Vinaya Pitaka, one third of the Tripi-
taka] then, we have ‘in a nutshell’ the authentic kernel of Buddhism. The rest
of the ‘sacred books’ and Commentaries are the expansion of its teaching: the
Jataka Life, the Lalita Vistara, and the ‘Light of Asia’ are the fanciful develop-
ment, in successive degrees, of his biography” (Müller, “Buddhism” 334). It is
true, as Müller suggests, that Arnold’s poem surrounds the birth of Siddhartha
with a selection of the traditional miraculous signs and incorporates several of
the Jataka tales. Phillips’s poem more strenuously excludes the supernatural,
and perhaps this is a small part of the reason that Victorian readers found it less
entertaining than Arnold’s poem. But Arnold, too, “by excising many miracles
and reducing the dependence of the narrative on those that remained, . . . made
the story more coherent and increased its appeal for post-Darwinian readers”
(Clausen, “Sir” 177). The fact is that both Phillips and Arnold entirely ex-
cluded from their accounts the “Eight Great Events,” the primary miracles that
are most frequently attributed to the Buddha within certain traditions, choos-
ing instead to focus largely on the “historical Buddha.”13
As might be expected, both poems appeal to the “exotic Orient” through

figures that were long familiar to Westerners by the nineteenth century. The
settings, the foreign cultural references, and the use of vocabulary from ancient
languages provide an exotic mise-en-scene. Here is one sample of Arnold’s
cataloguing of exotic elements:
Its beams were carved with stories of old time—

Rādhā and Krishna and the sylvan girls—
Sitā and Hanumān and Draupadi;
And on the middle porch God Ganesha,
With disc and hook—to bring wisdom and wealth—
Propitious sate, wreathing his sidelong trunk.
By winding ways of garden and of court
The inner gate was reached, of marble wrought,
White, with pink veins; the lintel lazuli,
The threshold alabaster, and the doors
Sandal-wood, cut in pictured paneling;
Whereby to lofty halls and shadowy bowers
Passed the delighted foot, on stately stairs,
Through latticed galleries, ’neath painted roofs
And clustering columns, where cool fountains—fringed
with lotus and nelumbo—danced; and fish
Gleamed through their crystal, scarlet, gold, and blue.
(Arnold 2:46–47)
This passage continues with a listing of animals—gazelles, peacocks, parrots,

snakes, musk-deer, monkeys, and so on—that could have come from, or rather
will reappear in, Kipling’s Jungle Book. In smaller doses, Phillips too dwells on
“The luscious fruits that Eastern lands produce” (Phillips 1.23). Predictably,
both poems also invoke the figure of the harem and draw on the character-
ization of the Oriental other in terms of female seductiveness and receptivity.
While both exploit these stereotypes of patriarchal, imperialist wish fulfillment,
neither gives them a central focus.14 Arnold, unlike Phillips, and “unlike any
of his predecessors,” “was mainly interested in a system of ideas which India
had to offer, and everything in the poem is subordinated to a sympathetic (if
not always accurate) presentation of the Buddha and his religion” (Clausen,
“Light ” 5). At the same time, however, Arnold enlists the “exotic Orient” more
than does Phillips to sell those ideas—and his books—to a Victorian readership,
which may be one part of the explanation for the greater appeal of his poem.
The final similarity is that both poems adopt the commonly held but par-
tially mistaken perception that Buddha was a reformer who “did for India what
Luther and the Reformers did for Christendom” (J. M. M. 287). It is true that
Siddhartha violated the caste system when he abandoned his status, cut his
hair, and donned his robes and begging bowl. It is true, as T. W. Rhys Davids
observed, that “all of his first disciples were layman [rather than Brahmins],
and two of the very first were women,” and, as another nineteenth-century
commentator wrote, that “Buddha made provision for the diffusion of his
doctrines among all classes of the community” (Rhys Davids, Buddhism 54;
Neale, “Buddha” 445). Buddhism was much more egalitarian than contem-
porary Brahmanism, but it was not initially socially revolutionary, and its break
from tradition was less dramatic than Victorians liked to think. The desire to
conceive of Buddhism as a confirmation of Protestantism was so pervasive that
Max Müller felt it necessary to rebuke “romantic” conceptions of the Buddha
as a “daring reformer” (Max Müller, “Buddhism” 318). The Light of Asia was
one of Max Müller’s targets. The poem indeed portrays the Buddha as ready to
question and break from Brahmanic—read “popish”—authority, and it turns
his compassion for all sentient beings into something that often resembles
nineteenth-century middle-class ideology, as in these lines: “ ‘Pity and need /
Make all flesh kin. There is no caste in blood” (Arnold 6:143). Phillip’s The
Story of Gautama Buddha also contributed to this conception, for example, in
these lines in which Buddha casts the Brahmins out of the temple, so to speak:
“ ‘How should they / Who profit most by error lead the way / To reformation,
when the same must cost / The giving up of what they value most? / Their
hearts are narrow. I must look elsewhere / For that salvation wherein all may
share’ ” (Phillips 6.102). Thus both poems underwrote and helped create a
popular understanding of Buddhism as the original protesting reformation.
This certainly did contribute to its appeal among the large majority of Brit-
ish Christians who were Protestants, though not enough, apparently, to make
Phillips’s poem as successful as Arnold’s.
Darwinism and Buddhism
It is the differences between the two poems that are most significant in explain-
ing the gap between the receptions that they received. One critical difference
is the way that each incorporates and responds to the evolutionary theory de-
bates. Both poems expand upon one stereotypical Victorian image, articulated
by Tennyson in In Memoriam prior to Origin of Species, of nature “red in tooth
and claw.” Here Arnold improvises upon a common story of the youthful
Siddhartha witnessing a worm cut in half by a plow:
. . . then marked he, too,

How lizard fed on ant, and snake on him,
And kite on both; and how the fish-hawk robbed

The fish-tiger of that which it had seized;
The shrike chasing the bulbul, which did hunt
The jewelled butterflies; till everywhere
Each slew a slayer and in turn was slain,
Life living upon death. So the fair show
Veiled one vast, savage, grim conspiracy
Of mutual murder, from worm to man.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The rage to live which makes all living strife—
The Prince Siddhārtha sighed.
(Arnold 1:25–26)
Siddhartha then meditates upon “this deep disease of life, / What its far source
and whence its remedy” (Arnold 1:26). In a similar vein, Phillips writes: “To him
the endless war of Nature seemed / Not otherwise than evil, for he dreamed /
Of rest and peace and brotherhood” (Phillips 7.112). But here Phillips and
Arnold part ways.
Arnold’s poem develops three other perspectives on evolutionary theory, the
first two of which are potentially contradictory. The poem in places adopts a
naively progressive understanding of evolution, an understanding that also was
adopted by one strain of Social Darwinism in order to justify “survival of the
fittest” as the “natural” condition of the marketplace, a worldview that was on
the way to becoming the dominant model for the “natural order” of society.15
Thus he writes that “Life runs its rounds of living; climbing up / From mote,
and gnat, and worm, reptile, and fish, / Bird and shagged beast, man, demon,
Deva, God,” according to the “fixed decree at silent work which wills / Evolve
the dark to light, the dead to life, / To fullness void, to form the yet unformed, /
Good unto better, better unto best” (Arnold 4:97, 6:164). This collapses Bud-
dhist concepts of karma and reincarnation into Darwinism, misinterpreting
both. In addition, “This notion of progressive evolution bears little relation to
anything in Buddhism or in Arnold’s sources” (Clausen, “Light ” 221). Never-
theless, it is consoling, optimistic, especially in a society that conceives of nature
as threatening extinction to those who fail to adapt and that therefore chooses
to relieve its anxiety by positing infinite progress as the means of escape from
the grasp of this avaricious nature.
Arnold’s poem develops a second perspective on natural violence that is
antithetical to the progressive model, or perhaps simply the other side of the
same coin. It suggests that the Buddha did, and humankind should, culti-
vate compassion and insight in order to control the desire that produces striv-
ing, violence, and suffering. This desire is described in the first and second of
the Noble Truths, Dukkha and Samudaya, which state, very roughly, that to
live unavoidably involves suffering and that the origin of suffering is trishna
(literally “thirst”), the desire for everything that one does not and can never
possess, namely, unassailable comfort, security, identity, and fulfillment (see
appendix 2). Thus Arnold has the Buddha say, “So flameth Trishnā, lust and
thirst of things / Eager ye cleave to shadows, dote on dreams; / A false Self
in the midst ye plant . . .” (Arnold 8:220). This also is what Thomas Henry
Huxley meant by “fountain of desire” in Evolution and Ethics (1893): “IF the
cosmos ‘is just and of our pleasant vices makes instruments to scourge us,’ it
would seem that the only way to escape from our heritage of evil is to destroy
that fountain of desire whence our vices flow; to refuse any longer to be the
instruments of the evolutionary process” (Huxley 122). Huxley’s purpose was
to challenge Social Darwinist assumptions and to argue for controlling those
natural desires—celebrated by captains of industry and masters of empire—in
order to create a more civilized, equitable, and ethical society. Arnold was a
precursor of Huxley, or, more accurately, comparative religion was the precur-
sor, since Huxley draws on the scholarship of T. W. Rhys Davids, identifies the
origins of evolutionary theory in “the early philosophies of Hindostan,” and
writes that “it is a remarkable indication of the subtlety of Indian speculation
that Gautama should have seen deeper than the greatest of modern idealists”
(Huxley 111, 124). The Light of Asia also finds in Buddhism the call to see
natural competition and violence not as inescapable but precisely as that which
must be understood and controlled in order to escape the cycle of violence
that generates suffering in life. As Arnold’s young Siddhartha cries, “There
must be refuge!” (Arnold 4:97).
Phillips’s poem does not share either of these two perspectives on natural
violence and evolutionary progress. His argument expresses greater unresolved
ambiguity. It surfaces near the end of canto 7, which summarizes Gautama’s
six years of extreme asceticism, concluding that those years were “not wholly
barren of all good,” “For he, beholding the continual strife / Of all that
therein drew the breath of life—/ . . . felt compassion steal / Into his heart”
(Phillips 7.112). The narrator then shifts rather oddly to interrogation of a
generic modern Buddhist monk about his efforts to spare the lives even of in-
sects, addressing him in present tense as “Priest of the yellow robe and shaven
crown” (8.113). After the monk explains the precept against taking any life,
the narrator then turns directly to the reader, or the addressee of the poem,
with this admonition: “Be not too lavish of thy scorn on these / Deluded
heathen and their practices; / Nor slow to read herein the evidence—/ . . . Of
Buddha’s doctrine, which somewhat at least / Has changed the hard heart of
the cruel East” (7.114). Here, then, is a conflict that is reproduced throughout
the poem: the Buddha’s compassion is good, but it is deluded. The narrative
compounds this contradiction, first claiming that “No great voice bids you
let all creatures live,” then staging a debate between an Eastern voice (the ge-
neric monk?), which says, “ ‘But let all breathing things live on in peace,’ ”
and a Western “you” to whom “the voice” (God?) cries: “ ‘Freely take and
eat / Whate’er ye lust for; all things are your meat: / All things are yours, do
with them as ye will.’ / And yet amid your feasting, thinking still / Of blood-
less Eden, sigh ye for the same, / Nor be of those who glory in their shame”
(7.115). Whose side is the narrator on? There seems to be a genuinely con-
flicted dialogical exchange here about the merits of resisting the “natural order”
of violence, domination, and, yes, imperial conquest.
The Story of Gautama Buddha conducts this conflicted dialogue throughout
in relation to the topic of empire, with unavoidable reference to British colonial
occupation of India, for which the text both apologizes to the East and defends
the West.16 From its opening page, the poem reflects an uneasy consciousness
about the violent relationship of West to East, which it expresses through the
logic of paradox by inverting that relationship and making the Orient into the
imperial invader: “I sing not of great heroes who have warr’d, / And reapt
the harvest of the bitter sword: / And yet I mean to tell a wondrous tale / Of
Asian conquest, . . .” of Asia (Phillips, “Intro.” 1). From this opening on, one
subtext of the poem is the difficulty of justifying British imperial violence. The
dilemma that the poem is ambitious or honest enough to set for itself is how
to defend a theory that justifies aggressive conquest relative to a creed that pre-
scribes non-violence and compassion within a religion that is singular among
world religions in not having a history characterized primarily by violence.17 It
is as if the poem conceives of the Orient and, in this case, the Buddha as the
competition that the British must overcome in conquering the Orient in order
to save it from itself. This is of course similar to how some British missionaries
and colonial governors viewed the indigenous religions and peoples of Asia.
“Militaristic Social Darwinism” was a primary theory used to justify con-
quest, and, as Patrick Brantlinger has detailed, Victorian debates about Darwin-
ian theory and about empire unavoidably intertwined, as they do in Phillips’s
poem (Crook 271). Thus the debate in canto 7 is part of a subtext that ques-
tions and, with difficulty, justifies imperial violence as an expression of “natural
law.” This debate shows itself, again ambivalently, in the treatment in canto 11
of the third-century Buddhist emperor of northern India, Asoka, who dissemi-
nated Buddhism from the Mediterranean through Southeast Asia, “But not
with arguments of sword and flame / Did this man spread his creed—would
that the same / Were true of nations of the prouder West!” (Phillips 11.176).
The debate fully surfaces in the final canto, which struggles to praise Bud-
dha while condemning his teachings: “We will not hate him, but shall we be
blamed / If we admire and love the man who shamed, / By love and gentle-
ness in word and deed, / The hard disciples of a nobler creed?” (13.210). The
monological imperial “we” finally emerges, asserting that it is one thing for
Buddha to “rule the multitudes that dote and dream; / But we are children
of the North” (13.215). There is a hint here of concern about the possible
counter-invasion of the West by the East, of Christianity by the much older and
perhaps more populous Buddhism. But, no: “Our sires of old were worshipers
of Thor / And all the hearty Norse gods: they made war / Against the West
and conquered. . . . / . . . We have still / The olden vigour and the ancient will”;
thus, “we have not ceast / To hold the empire of the slothful East” (13.216).
Phillips succeeds at last in justifying the “natural” violence of imperialism, but
only through the strained methods of essentializing both East and West and
trotting out old stereotypes of the indolent Orient. What is more interest-
ing is the discomfort that the poem generates in arriving at this necessary
conclusion, which renders it less than fully convincing. One might think that
Victorians would rally to a poem that justified their society’s Christian and
imperial supremacy, but they did not. Perhaps what they read, accurately, was
the moral ambiguity, the “process of ambivalence, central to the stereotype”
(Bhabha 66). Perhaps they recognized the patriotism required to cover the
shame of aggression, the disturbing oscillation between condemnation of Bud-
dhist doctrine and praise of the Buddha’s compassion, the dialogical struggle
between the voice of the colonizer and the voice of the colonized, which the
poem to its credit includes.
Arnold’s Light of Asia—less gloomy and less self-justifying—provides a
third response to evolutionary theory and natural violence not included in
Phillips’s poem. Phillips subscribes to a dog-eat-dog natural order as the ines-
capable condition to which humans, and nations, must adapt or die. Far from
celebrating this “natural law,” he convinces himself to grasp that nettle only
because he cannot convince himself that any other alternative has as much
scientific or practical force. Arnold, in contrast, forwards the alternative that
Buddhism offers: the law of the Dharma. He first portrays the Dharma as a
sort of universal natural force, which he refers to as “a Power” and “the great
Law,” overseeing all living things and connecting them to “The ordered music
of the marching orbs” (Arnold 8:212). This is a combination of Romantic
organicism with Victorian progressivism, but it also is not entirely divorced
from Buddhist metaphysics, which does posit an interconnectedness not only
between all living beings but between each one of them and all of the actions
that he/she/it ever has committed.18 This is Karma. Arnold puts these words
into the mouth of the Buddha, who speaks for most of book 8 in rhyming
quatrains:
It seeth everywhere and marketh all:

Do right—it recompenseth! do one wrong—
The equal retribution must be made,
Though DHARMA tarry long.
It knows not wrath nor pardon; utter-true

It measures mete, its faultless balance weighs;
Times are as nought, tomorrow it will judge,
Or after many days.
By this the slayers’ knife did stab himself;

The unjust judge hath lost his own defender;
The false tongue dooms its lie; the creeping thief
And spoiler rob, to render.
Such is the Law which moves to righteousness,

Which none at last can turn aside or stay:
The heart of it is Love, the end of it
Is Peace and Consummation sweet. Obey!
(8.211, 214)
If not entirely Buddhist, here is a Buddhism-inspired alternative that not a few

late Victorians understood as having as much basis in natural law as the law
of the survival of the fittest. One 1890 study titled “Buddhism, Positivism,
and Modern Philosophy” compared Buddhism to the Law of Conservation
of Energy and argued that “Gautama Buddha’s doctrine . . . is the only doc-
trine as yet known that includes all the elementary processes of this world,
both physical and mental; it is the highest generalisation yet proclaimed by
man” (Salzer 8). Ernest J. Eitel, a noted scholar and fierce critic of Buddhism,
wrote indignantly in 1884 that a “Buddhist may adopt all the results of mod-
ern science, he may become a follower of Newton, a disciple of Darwin, and
yet remain a Buddhist” (Eitel 63). For this very reason, however, Victorians
ranging from liberal intellectual humanists to Broad-Church Anglicans to de-

vout Spiritualists or Theosophists approved of the assumed scientific nature of
Buddhism, however accurately or inaccurately understood. A more accurate
Buddhist conception than Arnold’s would remove his implication of a benevo-
lent inclination on the part of the universe, but it would adhere to an inexo-
rable natural order to the universe, one that is impersonal but just.
In the face of an understanding of nature as not only potentially hostile
but indifferent to the survival of the human race and a natural law regulated
only by the chances of “random selection,” The Light of Asia offered a positive
alternative: a universe governed neither by God nor by chaos or randomness,
but rather governed by an orderly and just natural law.19 While Phillips’s poem
projects the Victorian crisis of faith, the Darwinian debates, and reservations
about imperial violence back onto the story of the Buddha, Arnold’s poem pal-
liates these very anxieties by having the Buddha offer a comforting alternative,
partly Buddhist and partly Victorian. Surely this is one reason Victorian readers
preferred Arnold’s poem.
The Nirvana of the British Empire
The Story of Gautama Buddha and The Light of Asia differ significantly in their
representations of Buddhist doctrine and philosophy. Indeed, Phillips’s poem
contains very little indication of what the primary doctrines of Buddhism are,
despite the phrase “and his Creed” in its title. Phillips’s canto 12 is dedicated
to a baffling summary of a Buddhist cosmology (his source for which I do not
know), which is at best peripheral to the primary teachings of the Buddha and
says nothing of the central tenets of the Four Noble Truths, the Middle Way,
and the Noble Eightfold Path. The Light of Asia, in contrast, does summarize
those tenets and the moral precepts of Buddhism generally and spends much
more time on the ideas behind Buddhism than does The Story of Gautama Bud-
dha. Demonstrating that would require a thorough analysis of Arnold’s book 8
and a more detailed consideration of Buddhist philosophy than is appropriate
to my purposes here. Suffice it to say that The Light of Asia, unlike The Story
of Gautama Buddha, provided an extremely rudimentary but “substantially
accurate” primer on the basic teachings of the Buddha, which could account
for some of its appeal to interested Victorian readers (Clausen, “Light ” 273).
The more significant difference between the two poems is that Arnold’s
poem diffuses or reverses several of the most commonly held Victorian stereo-
types about Buddhism, which Phillips’s poem tends either to reinforce or to
redirect to yet harsher criticism. Three of those prejudices can be summarized
as follows: (1) Buddhists, like all Orientals, are weak-willed and passive when
they should be active; (2) as a result, they are fatalistic, subjecting humankind
to predetermination and thereby denying the power and responsibility of the

human will; and, (3) worst of all, they are pessimistic and nihilistic and deny
the value, not to mention the joy, of life, as evidenced by their inexplicable
longing for the annihilation of nirvana.20
In challenging the first of these stereotypes, Phillips and Arnold present a
Buddha who is far from passive, even if the motives of the two poets could not
be farther apart. Both show young Siddhartha winning the hand of Yasho-
dhara through the demonstration of his masculinity at riding and archery, for
instance; both show him asserting his will in defying his father’s wishes and
choosing to cast himself out of the relative Garden of Eden of the palace in
order to seek the truth. But there the similarity ends. From that early stage of
the story onward, Phillips’s Buddha becomes more virile and self-determined,
if also haunted by what the poem portrays as a morbid fixation on existen-
tial questions—an extremely odd portrayal to anyone familiar with Buddhist
literature. His Buddha emerges as possessed of great intellectual as well as phys-

ical daring, standing up to and out-thinking the most renowned Brahmins.21
The poem then casts the Buddha’s six years of asceticism as a very Victorian
but extremely non-Buddhist struggle over the unresponsiveness of God. He
fails to find God because he does not know the correct name by which to call
Him, as the narrator concludes: “Yet God is good, tho’ Baal hear us not, /
And Belus disregard, and tho’ our lot / Be nothing bettered by our cries to
Zeus / Tho’ prayer to Jupiter prove of no use; / Tho’ Brahm still slumber in
a slothful rest” (Phillips 7.109). The Buddha, whom according to all ancient
scriptures chose not to address such unanswerable metaphysical questions as
whether or not God exists because they merely distract from genuine practice,
then, according to Phillips, becomes an atheist. But, at least he is not a passive
atheist.
Here, if not before, is the point at which Phillips’s story departs entirely
from any source and differs most dramatically from Arnold’s account. Canto 8
elaborates a theory about the Buddha’s enlightenment that is entirely Phil-
lips’s invention. He represents the Buddha as one who believes that he has
confirmed the non-existence of God, reasons that he had best not reveal his
knowledge to humankind, since that might result in moral anarchy (precisely
what liberal intellectuals like Matthew Arnold feared), and concludes that the
most compassionate course, under these circumstances, would be to design a
new humanist religion. He muses to himself, “ ‘Thou shalt incur no guilt, /
Tho’ teaching error and concealing truth; / Because thou doest it from love
and ruth, / And these flow not from a polluted fount. / There is no God to
call thee to account’ ” (Phillips 8.128). Through a sort of reverse engineering,
Phillips builds a portrait of the Buddha systematically constructing the compo-
nents of what will become Buddhism, as in this representative stanza:
Concerning death I will invent a most

Refined and subtle doctrine that may boast
Of being better far than truth; for all
The elements of man at death shall fall
Apart for ever; yet what he has done
As a creative power shall still live on,
and build another life which shall inherit
Its predecessor’s merit or demerit.
(Phillips 8.131)
This Buddha is at once a representative Victorian liberal intellectual humanist—

a John Stuart Mill or an Auguste Comte—and an updated version of Milton’s
Satan. His heart is to some extent in the right place, but he is, as Phillips first
calls him in his “Preface,” “a willful deceiver, beguiling men to virtue” (Phil-
lips vi). If Phillips’s poem debunks the stereotype of the impassive Oriental, it
is only because he needs an ambitious Buddha in order to justify a uniquely
Victorian theory about the origins of Buddhism.
Arnold’s purpose is utterly different, and his diffusion of the active/passive
dualism more subtle. No doubt Tennyson’s “Ulysses” spoke more directly to
many Victorians than did Arnold’s response to that poem’s last line with these
lines: “To seek not, strive not, wrong not; bearing meek / All ills which flow
from foregone wrongfulness” (Arnold 6:166–67). At the same time, however,
Arnold also portrays an active Buddha, one who seeks the truth about human
suffering and who practices active compassion, not passive withdrawal from
the world. Starting on his search, Arnold’s Buddha says, “Since there is hope
for man only in man, / And none hath sought for this as I will seek, / Who
cast away my world to save my world” (4:108). He later rebukes the extreme
asceticism and apathy of fellow monks: “ ‘Twere all as good to ease one beast
of grief / As sit and watch the sorrows of the world / In yonder caverns with
the priests who pray’ ” (5:124). And here he celebrates the human freedom to
exercise will and thereby change one’s future: “If ye lay bound upon the wheel
of change, / And no way were of breaking from the chain, / the Heart of
boundless Being is a curse, / The Soul of Things fell Pain. // Ye are not bound!
the Soul of Things is sweet, / The Heart of Being is celestial rest; / Stronger
than woe is will: that which was Good / Doth pass to Better—Best” (8:210).
In thus providing a counter-image to the stereotype that Buddhists lack
active will, Arnold also addresses the second stereotype of Buddhist fatalism.
His Buddha presents karma not as inescapable fate but as the conditions that
one has made for oneself and from within which one can choose to advance
by intentions and actions in each present moment (a model not dissimilar
to George Eliot’s “web” of “sympathy” in Middlemarch).22 He shows “how
man hath no fate except past deeds, / No Hell but what he makes” (7:183).
Arnold understood Buddhist morality as placing greater responsibility on the
individual for his/her past actions and more, not less, emphasis on the exercise
of will and choice in every moment of life. As Helen McKerlie wrote in 1890,
“The hardness of attainment and apparent impossibility of Buddhist holiness
lies in this doctrine of free will and responsibility of action,” and Reginald
Copleston, Bishop of Colombo and no friend of Buddhism, lamented the Bud-
dhist evasion of God’s redemption in placing so much moral responsibility on
individual “ ‘Effort,’ ‘exertion,’ ‘self-training,’ . . . Gautama’s key to morals”
(McKerlie 129). Thus Arnold, whether unintentionally or shrewdly, appeals
in his portrait to the Victorian discourses of “improvement” and “self-help.”23
As one is responsible for one’s own actions and the resulting suffering—“Ye
suffer from yourselves. None else compels”—so one has the freedom to exer-
cise discipline and self-control in order to overcome suffering, enjoy life more,
and advance toward enlightenment: “Within yourselves deliverance must be

sought” (8:210, 208). At the same time, Arnold also calls upon those ele-
ments of Victorian middle-class ideology that privileged one’s work and wor-
thiness over one’s bloodline and status, as in this passage: “Each hath such
lordship as the loftiest ones; / . . . Act maketh joy and woe // . . . Who toiled
a slave may come anew a Prince / For gentle worthiness and merit won; /
Who ruled a King may wander earth in rags / For things done and undone”
(8:209). In these ways Arnold’s poem not only worked to undermined key
prejudices but to replaced them with appealing aspects of Buddhism presented
in recognizable terms.
One of the strongest prejudices against Buddhism that hardly could be
rebutted, since it is all but undeniable, is that Buddhism is atheistic.24 Arnold,
unlike Phillips, therefore chose largely to avoid confronting it directly. In one
of the few places where it does arise, Arnold’s Buddha, on the brink of his
renunciation, criticizes “Brahm,” not “God”: “How can it be that Brahm /
Would make a world and keep it miserable, / Since, if all-powerful, he leaves
it so, / He is not good, and if not powerful, / He is not God?” (Arnold 3:80).
Many Victorians had this very thought. For the most part, The Light of Asia
strives to ameliorate this concern in less direct ways. As already shown, it
mildly anthropomorphizes the Dharma, making it if not God then at least
benevolent and progressive in tendency. Arnold also enlists the commonly
acknowledged parallels between Jesus and Buddha, characterizing the Buddha
and his mission in the Christ-like terms of saving suffering humanity, thereby
figuratively preserving one part of the Christian deity.25 Moreover, the poem
never directly denies or defends the absence of a monotheistic deity from
Buddhism but rather redirects attention that might go to this issue to descrip-
tions of the doctrines within Buddhism that effectively take the place of God
(from a Western perspective). The descriptions of doctrines such as karma and
reincarnation then enlist terms from familiar Victorian discourses—self-help,

for example—to make those doctrines seem a reasonable and not unpalatable
alternative to the moral economy of sin/redemption or hell/heaven. Without
doing excessive violence to Buddhist concepts, though obviously appropriat-
ing them, Arnold skillfully translates them for Victorian culture and subtly
maneuvers through the minefield called “the death of God.”
These same strategies also serve Arnold’s presentation of the most troubling
of Buddhist concepts for Victorians: nirvana. Since there is “no way to isolate a
simple, primordial meaning of nirvana in the Buddhist usage,” and since differ-
ent schools of Buddhism themselves disagree over whether the Buddha offered a
definitive statement about nirvana, it is understandable that the Victorians failed
to arrive at a consensus definition (Welbon 299).26 Attempts to do so generated
tremendous debate among scholars of Buddhism and, following the publication
of The Light of Asia, “the nature of nirvana was a relatively common topic of
conversations among people more interested than knowledgeable” (Whitlark,

“Nineteenth” 17). Three understandings of the nature of nirvana dominated
nineteenth-century Western debates: (1) that nirvana is annihilation, the utter
cessation of being, sans afterlife, sans any continuing soul (especially since in
Buddhism there is no soul, in the Western sense, to continue); (2) that nirvana
is the merging of individual consciousness into the godhead or the universe,
Brahm or the Oversoul; and, (3) that nirvana is an enlightened state that one
can attain while still living on the earth, a transcendence of all attachment and
aversion. The first two of these were by far the most common, the former being
adopted by the first generation of Buddhologists and by those throughout
the century least sympathetic to Buddhism, and the second being adopted by
those who were sympathetic to Buddhism, if generally not very knowledgeable,
and who therefore wanted to believe that nirvana approximates the Christian
heaven.27 Phillips’s The Story of Gautama Buddha falls into the first camp; his
Buddha says, “ ‘Cessation of existence I will call / Nirvána and my rest” (Phillips
8.132). Arnold’s poem partially adheres to the second position, and its challenge
to the general opinion of nirvana as annihilation helped many of its first readers
to be open to a concept that otherwise would seem to them to be inconceivably
nihilistic. Here, for example, Arnold’s Buddha says, “Seeking nothing, he gains
all; / Foregoing self, the Universe grows ‘I’: / If any teach NIRVANA is to cease, /
Say unto such they lie. // If any teach NIRVANA is to live, / Say unto such they
err; not knowing this, / Nor what light shines beyond their broken lamps, /
Nor lifeless, timeless, bliss” (Arnold 8:226). As these lines illustrate, Arnold also
was either canny enough or knowledgeable enough—or perhaps purposefully
vague enough—to avoid simple definitions. The statements that his Buddha
makes skirt the abyss of annihilation while painting nirvana less as a facsimile of
heaven than as the cessation of earthly suffering, as in these stanzas:
He [who has ceased to cling to

life]—dying—leaveth as the sum of him
A life-count closed, whose ills are dead and quit,
Whose good is quick and mighty, far and near,
So that fruits follow it.
No need hath such to live as ye name life;

That which began in him when he began
Is finished: he hath wrought the purpose through
Of what did make him Man.
Never shall yearnings torture him, nor sins

Stain him, nor ache of earthly joys and woes
Invade his safe eternal peace; not deaths
And lives recur. He goes
Unto NIRVĀNA. He is one with Life,

Yet live not. He is blest, ceasing to be.
OM, MANI PADME, OM! the Dewdrop slips
Into the shining sea!”
(Arnold 8:216)
It is indicative of Arnold’s success in ameliorating Victorian trepidations about

nirvana that “the Dewdrop slips / Into the shining sea!” was the poem’s most
quoted phrase (Clausen, “Light” 271). The use here and elsewhere of familiar
Christian markers, such as “sin” (which does not exist in the Christian sense
in Buddhism), is less an attempt to make Buddhism into Christianity, I would
argue, than an attempt to express Buddhist concepts in terms recognizable to
a Victorian audience. For similar reasons, Arnold avoids dwelling directly on
the most incendiary topics while at the same time intimating them in non-
threatening terms. In “Foregoing self, the Universe grows ‘I’,” for example, he
alludes to the concept of anatman (“no self ”) but without rubbing his readers’
noses in a central Buddhist idea that is antithetical to Western metaphysics and
directly threatening to foundational beliefs of both Protestantism and capital-
ism, such as the body/soul dichotomy and the self-originating individual.28
Thus, in the face of arguments by early scholars and divines that Buddhism was
“a system of cold Atheism and barren Nihilism,” Arnold was able to provide a
much warmer and less barren counter-image (Eitel 97). However accurate or
inaccurate, his image was more influential than that of most of his critics, both
because of the circulation of The Light of Asia and because it simply was more
pleasing for late-Victorians to contemplate.
The Role of Woman
The final, significant difference between Phillips’s The Story of Gautama

Buddha and Arnold’s The Light of Asia is the representation of women. The
difference is dramatic in the first place because Phillips’s poem portrays no
significant female characters. Siddhartha’s mother, Mayadevi, gives birth and
dies; Yashodhara appears briefly as the sexually attractive wife; the only com-
ment about women made by Siddhartha is a slight to one of the other suitors
trying his manhood for Yashodhara’s hand: “Go home, thou girl, and help
the women spin” (Phillips I.37). Arnold’s poem, by contrast, gives mean-
ingful roles to three female characters: Yashodhara, Kisagotami, and Sujata.
Arnold spends much more time on Siddhartha’s married life with Yashod-
hara than do any of his sources. His Siddhartha not only expresses love for
Yashodhara but consults her in the early stages of his spiritual struggles. Seeing
him distracted, she asks, “ ‘Hath not my Lord comfort in me?’ ” He responds,
“ ‘Ah Sweet! . . . such comfort that my soul / Aches, thinking it must end, for
it will end / . . . And all my heart is fixed to think how Love / Might save its
sweetness from the slayer, Time” (Arnold 3:64 – 65). The entirety of book 4
concentrates on Siddhartha’s decision to renounce family and caste, but the
real focus is on the painful separation from Yashodhara, often from her per-
spective. She wakes him, saying “ ‘Awake, my Lord! / Give me the comfort
of thy speech!’ ” and reports three dreams of premonition that she has had.
He comforts her, asking her in future to remember that “Always I loved and
always love thee well, / And what I sought for all sought most for thee” (4:89,
93). More significantly, he then explains to her at length the reasons for his
pending renunciation, whereas in none of Arnold’s sources does Siddhartha
“conduct philosophical discussions with his wife” (Clausen, “Light ” 232). In
parting, “thrice he made to go, but thrice came back” to Yashodhara’s side,
a scene that appears in no primary source. Nearly all of this is sheer romantic
invention, but it served a very important function in relation to Arnold’s initial
readership. It provides an image of married love that spoke to Victorian read-
ers, recognizes Yashodhara’s partnership with Siddhartha, and acknowledges
the validity of a woman’s painful emotional experience in finding herself mar-
ried to a Buddha.
Kisagotami and Sujata are relatively minor characters in ancient accounts
to whom Arnold gives his own interpretation and significance. Kisagotami
was a woman who came to the Buddha in grief over the death of her child.29
The parable recounts how he told her that she would find relief from black
mustard seed (suggestive of the subsequent Christian parable), but only if
“Thou take it not from any hand or house / Where father, mother, child, or
slave hath died” (5:126). After many unsuccessful tries, she finds through the
Buddha’s compassionate teaching that “The grief which all hearts share grows
less for one” (5:128). Clausen’s comment on Arnold’s rendition is telling:
“A more crucial difference is that in Arnold the sorrow of Kisagôtami and of

those whose relatives have died is one of the motivations for Siddârtha’s quest,
while in the source it is simply a proof that ‘among all living things there is no
permanence’ ” (Clausen, “Light ” 246). In Arnold’s telling, Kisagotami func-
tions not only as the vehicle for a very touching story about the sorrow of
mothers but also as a spiritual guide to Siddhartha.
And this is very much how the poem presents the story of Sujata. In Arnold’s
telling, Sujata’s story is preceded by the Buddha witnessing on the road “a band
of tinseled girls, the nautch-dancers” who sing, “The string o’erstretched breaks,
and music flies; / The string o’erslack is dumb, and music dies; / Tune us the sitar
neither low nor high” (6:143, 144). Weakened from years of extreme asceticism,
he comments to himself “’I strain too much this string of life’,” and thus is
guided by a group of women toward realization of the Middle Way, the balance
between utter denial of desire and compulsive gratification of desire (4:144).
Near death, he sits beneath a tree to meditate and is encountered by Sujata, the
daughter of a local landowner, a recent mother herself, who offers him a bowl
of ceremonially purified milk. This, according to Arnold, is a major turning
point, more so than in any primary source.30 Sujata shows the Buddha The
Way in the act of giving him the sustenance essential to pursue it. Moreover,
the Buddha then asks Sujata for guidance: “Yet doest thou truly find it sweet
enough / Only to live? Can life and love suffice?” (6:149). What follows is a
multi-page soliloquy by Sujata about the joys and trials of her life, one full of
family and love and faith in the goodness of life, which ends, “ ‘What good I
see humbly I seek to do, / And live obedient to the law, in trust / That what
will come, and must come, shall come well’ ” (6:151–52). Gautama responds:
“ ‘Thou teachest them who teach, / Wiser than wisdom in thy simple lore. / . . .
In this is seen why there is hope for man / And where we hold the wheel of
life at will” (6:152). Sujata’s character replicates certain elements of Victorian
patriarchal ideology as the poem transposes the image of the domestic, middle-
class “good wife” onto ancient India. However, it also gives Sujata her own
story and, perhaps, her own voice, though this might be debated. Most impor-
tantly for the question of reception, it was these very elements of ideology and
this image of domestic sympathy that “hailed” Victorian readers and contrib-
uted to the success of Arnold’s poem.
The inclusion of women in The Light of Asia served several important pur-
poses for Arnold and for his Victorian readers. It was instrumental in providing
a humanized and life-affirming image of the Buddha. It suggested, regardless
of fealty to primary sources, that it was this life-affirming impulse, rather than
fatalism or nihilism, that prompted the Buddha to sit beneath the Bodhi tree
and attain enlightenment, which he commits himself to do following his en-
counter with Sujata. It made female characters integral to the Buddha story and
attributed to them the extremely important role of serving not only as com-
forters and providers but as spiritual guides. Finally, it thereby affirmed cer-
tain middle-class values concerning love, domesticity, and mutuality between
women and men (which of course is not the same thing as equality). Certainly
these features would have contributed to the greater appeal for Victorian read-
ers of The Light of Asia as opposed to The Story of Gautama Buddha.
How Victorians Preferred Their Buddha
The success of The Light of Asia compared to The Story of Gautama Buddha in-
dicates a preference on the part of a large number of late-Victorian readers for a
life of the Buddha that presents itself as objectively historical, as opposed to one
that presents itself obviously as a critical reinterpretation, even when (or perhaps
particularly because) that reinterpretation serves certain dominant Christian,
capitalist, and imperialist ideologies. These Victorian readers preferred the “his-
torical Buddha” over the supernatural Buddha, though a few devas, demons,
and miracles are good to spice up the story. They preferred a Buddha who
could be thought of as the original protestant reformer, a precursor and justifi-
cation for the majority of their own Protestantism. They preferred a sympathetic
portrayal of the Buddha over a critical characterization of him as a brilliant
and compassionate but misguided and unprincipled schemer. They preferred a
Buddha whose similarities to Jesus recommended rather than condemned him.
They preferred an accessible summary of the primary doctrines of Buddhism
over a reduction of them that precluded further assessment by the reader. They
sought an intellectual understanding of spiritual matters, and, as subjects of the
history of Protestantism, they felt capable as individuals of assessing spiritual
claims for themselves. It would appear that many preferred to hold open for
consideration an alternative religious or moral system rather than condemn it
peremptorily on the grounds that it was non-British and non-Christian, at least
in the case of Buddhism. They were interested in considering spiritual options,
not least because the Christian worldview increasingly was being called into
question. They preferred a story of the life of the Buddha that included sig-
nificant female characters and the domestic experiences they typically associated
with women, as opposed to one that excluded women and did not represent
romantic, matrimonial, or familial concerns. They preferred to see the Buddha
both as titillatingly exotic and, more importantly, as familiar, as a human being
who not only practiced great compassion but who also seems to have endorsed
certain cherished, middle-class ideals, such as moral earnestness, self control, re-
sponsibility for one’s actions, reward according to merit, improvement through
the exercise of will and choice, and discipline in achieving spiritual growth.
Victorian readers, it would seem, also preferred not to be confronted baldly
either with the most perturbing and threatening aspects of Buddhism or with
the most painful dilemmas facing their own society. Arnold therefore handles
with great discretion the atheistic nature of Buddhism, the potential nihilism
of nirvana, and the Buddhist conception of self as ever-changing, non-unified,
and non-continuous after death. Phillips’s poem instead takes “the death of
God” head on, and, though the purpose is to refute it, the effect is to stir up
a painful consciousness of an ongoing crisis within Christianity, in particular
Broad-Church Anglicanism. It is doubtful that the poem offered balm to any
other than those whose faith already had placed them beyond the need for it.
Similarly, Phillips’s poem thematizes Victorian anxieties over evolutionary sci-
ence and British imperial violence by enacting them in the life and time of the
Buddha; it brought into glaring focus some of the most troubling issues for
late Victorians. Arnold, to the contrary, soothed or sublimated those anxieties
while at the same time using them subtly to invite receptivity to Buddhism.
Arnold’s genius was not in his prosody or his story-telling ability but rather in
his ability to read the concerns of late-Victorian society and to respond to them
by “skillful means,” to use a Buddhist phrase. Thus he redirected potentially
inflammatory anxieties about God, natural violence, and empire in the process
of translating Buddhism into terms that both subtly addressed those anxieties
and constructed a Buddha that middle-class Victorians might embrace.
This is not to claim that The Light of Asia was less of a vehicle for Victorian
ideologies than The Story of Gautama Buddha, nor to say that Arnold’s poem
provides a platform for the voice of the colonized other while Phillips’s poem
only silences it with the monological voice of God/Queen/Empire. Each of
these poems is more complex than that. If Phillips’s poem finally reasserts the
supremacy of that monological voice, it also interjects an extreme ambivalence
throughout that undermines that authoritative voice and permits a Buddhist
voice to emerge, however faintly, from the background. Arnold’s poem intends
to destabilize certain prejudices and to offer a genuine alternative, but at the
same time it unavoidably reproduces elements of dominant ideology, for exam-
ple, in Christianizing Buddhism and in marshalling the middle-class discourses
of domesticity, progressivism, and self-help. In one sense, Phillips was more
direct and transparent and Arnold more subtle and manipulative, which only
made Arnold’s poem more palatable and convincing. Thus, for instance, while
Phillips directly expresses shame for the violence of British imperial aggression,
Arnold represses that issue, covering it with a positive image of the Buddha
that both refutes and partakes of Orientalist assumptions. Perhaps the fact that
Arnold gave Victorians a Buddha they might embrace only evidences a greater
complicity than Phillips in the cooption and conquest of the Oriental other.
I take the view that Arnold’s Buddha, and Phillips’s Buddha to a lesser
extent, is a genuinely hybrid figure and cuts both ways: toward imperial ap-
propriation and toward self-effacing acknowledgment of the other. Certainly
many concerned Victorian Christians recognized this latter point in viewing
The Light of Asia as heretical, as blasphemous in the sense described here by

Homi Bhabha: “Blasphemy is not merely a misrepresentation of the sacred
by the secular; it is a moment when the subject-matter of the content of a
cultural tradition is being overwhelmed, or alienated, in the act of translation”
(Bhabha 225). In the act of translating Buddhism into a form recognizable
within Victorian culture, Arnold also translated his culture away from its own
tradition, drawing it blasphemously toward Buddhism. To the extent that his
Buddha is “a narcissistic image of the Other,” it at the same time “effects a
comparable antithetical alienation of European selfhood” (Young, White 156).
The Victorian Buddha was an identification by Westerners with an Eastern way
of knowing, and “what is most graphically enacted in the moment of colonial
identification is the splitting of the subject in its historical place of utterance”
(Bhabha 46). Victorian identity was split by The Light of Asia, and many Victo-
rian readers found that experience exciting, instructive, and enjoyable.
Chapter 2
Buddhism and the Emergence of

Late-Victorian Hybrid Religions
The last quarter of the nineteenth century witnessed the generation of new,
alternative or syncretic religions in Europe at a rate perhaps unprecedented in
modern Western history. Examples include The Church of Christ, Scientist;
the Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn; the Theosophical Society; and An-
throposophy. Some scholars would challenge this broadened use of the term
“religion”; I would open the definition even further by including a number
of humanist institutions that likewise emerged during that period as surro-
gates for Christian institutions.1 For example, the Positivist Political and Social
Union, inspired by the writings of Auguste Comte (1798–1857), was founded
in London in 1867 and became so ceremonial that Thomas Henry Huxley

quipped that “Positivism was Catholicism minus Christianity” (W. Smith 92).
In a statement that now appears at least cultural-centric and at worst racist, one
commentator in 1889 observed that “for some reason that is not very im-
mediately apparent, the Anglo-Saxon is the only one among modern races that
has been fertile in the invention of new religions” (Legge 10). Though most
religions claim to have been revealed by a deity, all religions are in fact syn-
cretic, having been formalized through context-specific social processes within
history, and all societies invent religions, at the least by reshaping the beliefs
and rituals handed down to them to serve new social conditions and cultural
urgencies.2 Given that, the Victorians nevertheless appear to have been extraor-
dinarily active in the invention of new religions. Why? Explanations must come
from consideration of the convergence of events and discourses that occurred
in nineteenth-century England as in no other time and place. The reason that
Buddhism and Late-Victorian Hybrid Religions ~ 51
will be of particular interest here is the European encounter in the first half of
the century with Buddhism. Buddhism—the Western construction of it—was
a necessary though not in itself sufficient source for the formation of a number
of late-Victorian hybrid religions. Indeed, this was one of the most immediate
as well as most far-reaching impacts of the encounter with Buddhism upon
Western culture. The ways in which new hybrid religions sampled from and
modified elements of Buddhism is a study in cultural assimilation and, more
telling, failed assimilation.
After attempting to summarize the range of discourses and events that con-
tributed to the late-Victorian flurry of religion production, and after theorizing
a working definition of “hybrid religion,” this chapter focuses on a case study
of a representative example: Theosophy.3 I analyze the specific ways in which
the founders of Theosophy borrowed elements from Buddhism and combined
them with elements drawn from other theologies, mythologies, and contem-
porary ideologies for the purpose of synthesizing a new hybrid religion.
Background: Spiritualism versus Materialism
One of the most pervasive and persistent tensions within the history of Euro-
pean culture is the conflict between materialism and spiritualism, most broadly
conceived. One manifestation of this conflict finally erupted in the nineteenth
century in full-scale public combat between evolutionary scientists and Church
of England apologists following Darwin’s publication of The Origin of Spe-
cies (1859). The stage long had been set, not only by immediately preceding
scientists like Charles Lyell and Jean-Baptiste de Lamarck, nor alone by the
culmination in the preceding century of Enlightenment skepticism, but as far
back as the materialist philosophy of the pre-Socratics.4 Prior to the connota-
tion of “materialism” as a desire for material possessions, “materialist” meant

“one who denies spiritual substances,” according to Samuel Johnson’s 1755
Dictionary (Johnson, np). Throughout the first half of the nineteenth century,
commentators increasingly associated materialism in this sense with scientific
naturalism, the ideology of science’s truth-telling authority, as well as with
atheism. Many Victorians saw materialism as the historical nemesis not only of
Christian belief but of spirituality at the most fundamental level of belief in the
human soul. Indeed, “materialism was widely perceived as the arch-villain of
the [Victorian] age” (Oppenheim 61).
The Victorian “crisis of faith” was to no small degree the product of the
erosion of the credibility of key Christian truth-claims as a result of the widely
perceived failure of the Church of England to mount a convincing rejoinder to
the challenges of materialism and, in particular, scientific naturalism. Anglican-
ism, among all denominations, was compromised by the fact that from early
in its history it had accommodated the Natural Theology of Deism. Natural

Theology, defined as early as Aquinas (1224–74), subscribed to “a body of
truths about God and his relationship to the world discoverable by the use of
unaided human reason” (Byrne 1). Deists questioned not the existence of God
but rather the necessity of demonstrating the existence of God through revela-
tion, miracle, or the supernatural as opposed to the immanence of God in the
natural order of the universe. Enlightenment Deism thus was one source for
the organic naturalism of Romanticism and the Over-Soul of Transcendental-
ism, and it became an integral component of late-Victorian hybrid religions.
Deism drew upon a number of key distinctions, including these: (1) revealed
or supernatural religion versus Deism’s claimed natural religion; (2) historical
religion, founded upon revelation at a specific historical time and place to a
specific people, versus universal religion, the essential religiousness common
to humanity and thus to all religions; (3) religion founded on God’s judgment
and the fallenness of humankind versus religion founded on a model of the
universe as naturally just and of humans as innately religious; and 4) religion
wedded to the social and political agendas of human institutions versus religion
that claims, like Deism, to be original and therefore pure.5
Thus Deism represented a compromise between the traditional foundation
of Christianity in revealed theology and the rationalism and humanism of the
Enlightenment. From the seventeenth century, “natural religion was used to
uphold the centrality of a reasonable religion embodied in the faith and liturgy
of the Church of England” (Turner, Contesting 47). The signature expres-
sion of Deism was the well-known “argument from design,” which was given
clearest articulation in Natural Theology (1802) by William Paley, an Anglican
clergyman and naturalist. The large majority of eminent scientists in eighteenth
and nineteenth-century England were in fact good Anglicans; the history of
British science overlaps significantly with the history of the Church. That is,
until Darwin, when “the house of science so carefully constructed by the pri-
marily Anglican founders of the British Association [of Science] collapsed as did
the tradition of British natural theology that had flourished for two centuries”
(Turner, Contesting 57). The Descent of Man (1871) undercut the consoling
belief in a benevolent natural universe centered by its creator on the privileged
species, humankind. The failure at mid-century of natural theology to stand
up to scientific naturalism created a crisis within the Anglican establishment
and only confirmed the suspicions of those who from early in the century had
argued not only that the Anglicans were complicit with materialism but that
Christianity in general, however purified by the Protestant Reformation, had
lost touch with genuine spirituality.
The most direct rejoinder to materialism in the nineteenth century came
in the form of the Spiritualism movement. Spiritualism, which now may seem
easy to dismiss as little more than superstition and fraud, was a widespread
and immensely important cultural movement that expressed some of the most
deeply held doubts, fears, and hopes of the Victorians. As Hudson Tuttle, a pro-
ponent, argued in Arcana of Spiritualism: A Manual of Spiritual Science and
Philosophy (1867), if a few people are seeing ghosts, then we call them insane,
but if “it is not a single case of insanity, but of millions, all infatuated alike,”
then we must take such phenomena seriously (Tuttle 48). The movement was
sparked in New England in the late 1840s, and in certain ways it was a unique
product of North American Puritanism. However, it spread “like a contagious
infection” to the Continent and to England, where thousands of séances,
both private and public, were held over the course of decades (Brandon 43).
By the time the movement had begun to wane in the 1880s—or, rather, by
the time it was replaced by the “new occultism” of hybrid religions—it had
graced the lips of nearly every British citizen and had drawn royalty, eminent
scientists, literary luminaries, and even clergymen into the darkened room of
the séance chamber.6 It spurred the founding of a plethora of spiritualist so-
cieties, for example, Birmingham’s Midland Spiritual Institute, Nottingham’s
Association of Spiritualists, or the Union of London Spiritualists; caused the
founding in 1882 of an influential scientific society, the Society for Psychical
Research; and launched a dozen spiritualist newspapers, including the British
Spiritual Telegraph, Spiritual Magazine, Spiritualist, Medium and Daybreak,
which ran from 1870 to 1895, and Light, which began publication in 1881
and continues today.7
Though Spiritualism became institutionalized in various ways, and though
proponents claimed it as a religion, it was far from uniformly practiced or orga-
nized.8 Its true center, from beginning to end, was really a discursive network
linking thousands of parlors and kitchen tables (not unlike the internet today).
The tenets shared by Spiritualists of all persuasions were few and basic, as sum-
marized here by an advocate in 1875: “It is simply a belief, first, that man has
a Spirit; second, that this Spirit lives after death; third, that it can hold inter-
course with human beings on earth” (M. Davis 5). In addition, the Spiritualism
movement exhibited five characteristics that I would note because each of them
directly influenced the subsequent formation of hybrid religions: (1) a mission
to defeat materialism; (2) a claim to an empirical basis; (3) a commitment to
radical individualism, coupled with a progressive model of individual spiritual
evolution; (4) a debt to the history of European and Judeo-Christian occult-
isms; and, (5) a recentering of spiritual authority to empower women.
Spiritualism arose in part out of an historically specific cultural imperative to
disprove materialism. The Victorian séance was the acting out of that culture’s
own worst fears. Those fears were not of seeing ghosts; on the contrary, many
Victorians desperately wanted to see ghosts. The fear was of not seeing ghosts.
Not to see ghosts meant for the many followers of Spiritualism the extinction
of the human soul. The situation as spiritualists saw it was this: “There is no
alternative, material science is fast driving Christianity to the wall. It has taken
all the thinkers of the world. The church holds only those who do not think.
Spiritualism is the last stronghold against the tide of materialism, and if it fail
to establish its claims, the former will be supremely triumphant” (Tuttle 56).
However, Spiritualism drew substantial credibility from its claim to be founded
on the materialist grounds of empirical proof. The movement had been pre-
ceded by the “Mesmerism Mania” that swept through Europe in the first half
of the century (Winter 284). Mesmerism was founded on a purportedly sci-
entific theory “derived from the concept of an imponderable fluid permeating
the universe,” which was theorized variously as gaseous, magnetic/electrical,
or atomic (Tatar 4).9 Those who could master this “animal magnetism” could
impose their wills on receptive others through what would come to be called
hypnotism (which therefore represents a clear link between Mesmerism early in
the century and the “science” of psychoanalysis late in the century). Spiritual-
ism sampled directly from Mesmerism: the mesmeric trance translated into the
medium’s trance; mesmeric “table turning” morphed into table rapping; and
the “imponderable fluid” became the medium through which spirits commu-
nicated with the living.10 Spiritualism also retained Mesmerism’s claim to a sci-
entific basis.11 As Christians of various denominations struggled to defend the
unverifiable truths of faith in the face of scientific naturalism’s apparently verifi-
able truths, “many thousands of women and men became spiritualist believers
precisely because spiritualism did not demand faith, but instead offered actual
demonstration and thus objective ‘proof ’ of its claims” (Owen, Place 245).
Spiritualism was directly experiential; sensory contact with departed souls was
personal proof of the existence of one’s own soul, of the existence of a Spirit
World, and thus of life after death. As James Robertson put it in 1893, “one
single echo, a tiny rap from the [deceased] loved ones, was more value than
book revelations, more comforting than what without evidence were simply
speculations” (Robertson 66). There was no intended irony in the common ar-
gument forwarded on behalf of Spiritualism that it was anti-supernatural. Spiri-
tualists “believed that the erratic phenomena of the séance could be reduced to
natural laws and that their enterprises could thereby gain scientific credibility”
(Noakes 24). The central contradiction of the Spiritualism movement—one
subsequently inherited by hybrid religions—was that while vehemently decry-
ing the march of materialism, it founded itself on terms borrowed if not from
that very same materialism then from its assumed ally, scientific naturalism.
Also contradictory within Spiritualism was the fact that, on the one hand, it
was a product of the history of Protestant Christianity in Europe and, on the
other hand, a trenchant critique of that tradition. Many spiritualists contin-
ued to practice as Christians of one denomination or another.12 They argued
that it only revitalized Christianity, furthered a shared anti-materialist agenda,
and provided modern proof of the miracles performed by Jesus, whom they
claimed was but the most exemplary, early practitioner of Spiritualism. How-
ever, anti-Christian sentiment, with opposition in particular to Calvinist sever-
ity and the doctrines of original sin and eternal damnation, was widespread
among spiritualists. Anti-Christian spiritualists even so shared with Christian
spiritualists a thoroughly Protestant distrust of the “exoteric” trappings of in-
stitutionalized religion. Louisa Lowe, addressing a convention of spiritualists in
1877, exhorted her colleagues to “ ‘overthrow all external authority in matters
of thought; to free mankind from religious dogma and the trammels of priest
craft—in a word, to teach the individual to make his own reason an ultimate
court of appeal in all matters of personal concernment’ ” (Lowe, qtd. in Op-
penheim 99). And this is what Spiritualism asserted: the right of the individual
entirely to control his or her own spiritual practice. In striving for unmediated
personal contact with the Spirit World, spiritualists one-upped Protestantism.
Protestantism had claimed to remove the impediment of church-and-clergy
from between self and God; Spiritualism removed the further layer separating
humankind from Spirit, namely God Himself. Every spiritualist became his or
her own clergy, his or her own congregation, and, ultimately, his or her own
divine Spirit. The individual was freed from the strictures of divine judgment
to pursue what Arthur Conan Doyle, one of the last great public advocates for
Spiritualism, in his 1926 History of Spiritualism called the “Eternal progress
open to every soul” (Doyle, History 260). Frederic Myers, a champion of psy-
chical research whose lifework was to close the gap between post-Darwinian
science and Spiritualism, likewise championed the “progressive moral evolu-
tion” of the soul (Myers 37, qtd. in Oppenheim 269).13 Spiritualism was in one
sense the logical culmination of Protestant individualism, but to such an extent
that it appeared as the end-point of that historical trajectory and, therefore,
appeared from a Protestant perspective to spell the demise of Christianity.
The opposition between Spiritualism and Christian institutions was en-
demic to their shared history. The Spiritualism movement was the most recent
manifestation of a long history of occultisms in Europe, the most virulent per-
secutor of which had been the Catholic Church. The ashes of burned witches
smoldered nearly to the end of the eighteenth century; the Spanish Inquisition
officially ended as recently as 1834 when the Tribunal of the Faith was abol-
ished.14 A century earlier than this date, séance mediums would have been at
bodily risk; yet, some mid-Victorian mediums became highly-paid celebrities
courted by eminent men and women and invited by royalty. Frank Podmore’s
1902 history of Spiritualism starts from the position that it must be analyzed
as “an organic outgrowth from previous forms of mysticism” (Podmore xii).
His two-volume study traces the histories of witchcraft, alchemy, magicianship,
Rosicrucianism, and Mesmerism as the antecedents of modern Spiritualism.
The “recognition of the trance phenomena, as testifying to the existence of a
spiritual world” long preceded Victorian Spiritualism, and, therefore, “the raps
and movement of tables did not, in the ultimate analysis, originate anything;
they served merely to confirm a pre-existing belief ” (Podmore xiv–xv). In cen-
turies prior to the nineteenth century, entranced or ranting people were thought
to be possessed by angels or devils and to demonstrate this by speaking in for-
eign or unknown languages. Victorian Spiritualism replaced the witch with the
medium, replaced “possession” with “channeling,” and replaced “speaking in
tongues” with common English—sometimes delivered with a regional accent
and bad breath, as some séance sitters observed. Possession by devils and angels
gave way to visitations from the souls of dead family members (as well as by the
souls of famous people like Shakespeare and Napoleon), and indeed the séance
was, among other things, a dramatic new form of public mourning. Bolstered
by a reinforced ideology of individualism and armed with the modern discourse
of science (as opposed to the old science of alchemy), Spiritualism nevertheless
belonged to an identifiable lineage of European occultisms.
Representative of that lineage, the Spiritualism movement also was woman-
centered. The movement had been launched by the special receptivity of
teenage girls and young women; the majority of professional mediums were
women; the setting for most séances was the home, that bastion of a “woman’s
sphere.” The domestic séance brought the public, masculine domain of religion
back into the private, feminine domain of the dining table or the parlor. Re-
cent scholarship thus has focused on the central role of woman in Spiritualism
and the role that Spiritualism played in empowering women in the nineteenth
century. Alex Owen opens her study of the gendering of Spiritualism by not-
ing that the movement “emerged contemporaneously with the consideration
of women’s proper role and sphere which became known as ‘the woman ques-
tion’ ” (Owen, Darkened 1).15 Janet Oppenheim broaches the issue of Spiritu-
alism and female sexuality with this point: “Without exaggerating the extent
of sexual repression in Victorian society, one can surmise that the holding of
hands and caressing of spirit forms might have been stimulating not only to
the sitters, but also to the young women whose emerging sexuality was denied
natural means of expression” (Oppenheim 21). This observation, coupled with
Owen’s that the “years which witnessed the expansion of women’s horizons
and the forging of new forms of feminist political consciousness were paral-
leled by the rapid decline of [full-body] materialized ‘forms,’ ” cleared the way
for Marleen Tromp’s more recent argument that “full-form materialization
mediumship may have made itself obsolete by participating in a shift of codes
that made increased sexual freedom less a subject of spectacle and more a part
of the norm” (Owen, Darkened 234; Tromp 78). Tromp concludes that “Vic-
torian mediums were doing more than locating and carrying on conversations
with the angel in the house; they were channeling her to reshape their lives”
(Tromp 78). All that I would add to these studies is the broader observation
that the Spiritualism movement enacted the cultural assimilation, rebuttal, and
triumph over a long history of persecution of women’s heretical spirituality.
The witches—Wiccans—had come home at last, reclaiming a feminine strong-
hold for spiritual practice.
During the same decades in which the Spiritualism movement was striving
to staunch the spread of materialism, a new paradigm for religious scholarship
emerged that, while arising out of the long European tradition of theological
and exegetical studies, diverged from that tradition in critical ways that ap-
peared to align it with materialism. Comparative religion rose to prominence
in England in the 1860s, little more than a decade after the advent of Spiritu-
alism, and, along with Spiritualism, proved to be a critically important source
for the formation in the following decades of new hybrid religions. By mak-
ing widely available for the first time the histories and doctrines of a range of
Eastern religions, the discipline infused radically new concepts into European
discourse. Its rapidly expanding textual base of translations and analyses pro-
vided much of the raw material from which the founders of hybrid religions
acquired the knowledge of other traditions upon which they drew in synthesiz-
ing new ones. It also demonstrated a method for comparing and contrasting
diverse traditions that some founders of hybrid religions would apply in sam-
pling components from across those traditions.
Comparative religion, in conjunction with the most dramatic event con-
temporary to it, the Darwinian revolution, was an essential catalyst for the
formation of late-Victorian hybrid religions. Its practitioners in fact adopted
the general template of Darwinian science in shaping their research project to
find the origins of religions and trace their evolution. The very nature of this
project was threatening to some Christian observers and was to spiritualists but
further proof of the materialism of the age. To probe the origins of a religion is
to dwell upon its historicity, which cannot but cast doubt upon its status as di-
vine revelation. This of course also was what had made the Higher Criticism of
the Bible controversial, and, in adapting that same approach to other religions,
comparative religious scholars poured additional salt on the painful “European
awareness of the fragile historicity of their own God” (Silk 182). F. Max Müller,
the most outspoken advocate for the discipline, argued strenuously that all reli-
gions were equally worthy of historical and comparative analysis. His intention
was not to diminish Christianity, but, any such “discussion of another religion
in open-minded and favourable terms naturally weakened the exclusive hold of
Christianity, the assumption that the world was divided between one true faith
and many pagan cults” (Clausen, “Victorian” 13). Comparative study of reli-
gions provided a basis for a pros-and-cons discussion that was threatening by
way of its potential evenhandedness. It might provide a basis for the perceived
shortcomings of Hinduism, Islam, or Buddhism relative to Christian doctrines
and institutions—as indeed many public commentators used it to do—but by

the same token it might open Christianity to similar critical scrutiny, within
which there was no guarantee that some aspects of other religions might not
appear more convincing or attractive. Whether in subject matter or theory and
method the “science” of comparative religion, as Müller labeled it, seemed an
instrument of materialism that was wielded against spirituality.
This judgment was bolstered by the fact that the predominant object of
study of comparative religion in the nineteenth century was Buddhism, which
most Victorians understood as a materialist-humanist-atheistic religion, or as
no religion at all, merely a philosophy. As T. W. Rhys Davids, perhaps the most
prominent Buddhologist of the last quarter of the century, wrote in 1881,
Buddhism “proclaimed a salvation which each man could gain for himself, and
by himself, in this world, during this life, without any the least reference to
God, or to gods, either great or small” (Rhys Davids, Lectures 28). This is one
reason why the scholar Monier Monier-Williams coupled in the introduction
to his Buddhism, in its Connexion with Brāhmanism and Hindūism, and in its
Contrast with Christianity (1889) a claim to scientific disinterestedness with
this condemnation: “I hold that Buddhism . . . contained within itself, from the
earliest times, the germs of disease, decay, and death . . . and that its present
condition is one of rapidly increasing disintegration and decline” (Monier-
Williams xv). His summary of definitions of Buddhism is representative of the
range of commonly held views at that time: “It is under one aspect mere pes-
simism; under another pure philanthropy; under another monastic commu-
nism; under another high morality; under another a variety of materialistic
philosophy; under another simple demonology; under another a mere farrago
of superstitions, including necromancy, witchcraft, idolatry, and fetishism”
(Monier-Williams 13).
Monier-Williams defeated Müller in the highly politicized 1860–61 con-
test for the Boden Professorship of Sanskrit at Oxford. Müller represented the
“new continental tradition of comparative philology,” as opposed to Monier-
Williams’s more clearly British and Anglican allegiances, and did not appear
sufficiently committed to the Boden mandate of “ ‘enabling Englishmen to
proceed in the conversion of the natives of India to the Christian religion’ ”
(Beckerlegge 188, 198). Another well-known scholar, Ernest J. Eitel, in
his book Buddhism: Its Historical, Theoretical, and Popular Aspects (1884),
pointed to the feature of Buddhism, after its atheism, that most aligned it with
materialism: its perceived compatibility with evolutionary science. Eitel wrote
that “Buddhist scriptures have not observed the wise reticence with regard to
natural science by which our Christian bible is marked,” since Buddhism at-
tained “even so long as two thousand years ago, to that remarkable Darwinian
idea of a pre-existing spontaneous tendency to variation as the real cause of
the origin of species, but—like Darwin and his School—it stopped short of
pointing out Him, who originated the first commencement of the so-called
spontaneous tendency” (62, 66). Eitel alludes here to the central Buddhist
doctrine of the Dharma, which scholars often translated as “Law.”16 Many com-
mentators writing in the periodical literature assumed a parallel between scien-
tific law and the Dharma, its law of karmic causality, or between the evolution
of species and the evolution that many Westerners presumed occurred between
lives in the cycle of reincarnation. Buddhism and the first major vehicle for it
into the West, comparative religion, hit England arm-in-arm at the historical
moment when Christianity, or the main Protestant denominations, were de-
claring war on evolutionary science. Buddhism entered the fray both damned
by its perceived compatibility with that science and, from the point of view of
some looking for an alternative religion, advantaged over Christianity for the
very same reason.
The Spiritualism movement, the Darwinian revolution, the rise of compara-
tive religion, and the encounter with Buddhism—these were primary sources
for the formation of late-Victorian hybrid religions. Each of these broad cultural
and intellectual trends was part of the even broader dialectic between spiritual-
ism and materialism. The “spiritual science” of Spiritualism, the “science of
religion” of comparative religion, the “scientific religion” of Buddhism, and,
as will be shown, the “esoteric science” of Theosophy, participated in the same
cultural imperative: to resolve the long-standing and deeply embedded conflict
between materialism and spiritualism, science and religion. Figuratively speak-
ing, each functioned as a circuit, or a deconstructing third term, both joining
and separating the soul and the body of the Victorian era. The encounter with
Buddhism was especially catalytic. Victorians constructed Buddhism as exem-
plary of the possibility of bridging the gap between materialism and spiritual-
ism, as both apparently scientific and deeply ethical. Victorian Buddhism was
both a model of a just universe and a model of a universe without the need
for God.
Defining Late-Victorian Hybrid Religions
The traditional term for hybrid religions is “syncretism.” Among the oldest
uses of the term was that used by Plutarch to refer to the Cretans; his pejora-
tive connotation has dominated its use.17 It continues today as “a contentious
term, often taken to imply ‘inauthenticity’ or ‘contamination,’ the infiltration
of a supposedly ‘pure’ tradition by symbols and meanings seen as belonging
to other, incompatible traditions” (Shaw and Stewart 1).18 It rings with a tone
not far removed from that of “cult” or “sect.” These connotations were ce-
mented by nineteenth-century British discourse in which it came to be used by
clergymen and scholars to distinguish the “pure” religion of Christianity from
those—including Buddhism—whose “sacred origins” could be questioned

(Eliade 218; Pieterse 226).
As this distinction suggests, syncretism as a concept had been implicit in Nat-
ural Theology, according to which the same religious impulse is naturally shared
by all religions while the institutions and practices of each are context-specific
and thus limited.19 Missionary engagement with other cultures/religions, which
for Britain increased dramatically in the nineteenth century, “almost inevitably
lead[s] to syncretism” (Droogers 9). Empire is the historical vehicle of syncre-
tism. Understandably, then, it was from the beginning the ultimate subject of
comparative religion. Once one begins looking at the origins of religions and
the processes by which they distinguished themselves from pre-existing reli-
gions, one must recognize that all religions are syncretic. To say that a certain
religion is syncretic therefore “tells us very little and gets us practically nowhere,
since all religions have composite origins and are continually reconstructed
through ongoing processes of synthesis and erasure” (Shaw and Stewart 7).
The emergence of Christianity from Judaism and its formalization through a
series of councils in the third and fourth centuries was a long and highly politi-
cal historical process of religion building. However, all religions that claim an
origin in divine revelation disclaim their syncretic roots, focus attention on their
sacred origin, and strive to place it either outside of history or as the beginning
of historical time.
Thus it is that syncretism almost always refers to the religious other. A re-
cent trend in the postcolonial study of religion has been to reopen the topic of
syncretism for debate and to attempt to salvage the utility of the concept. The
outcome has been the useful recognition that it is best to use “syncretic” not to
designate a specific religion or type of religion but rather to describe a process
to be studied longitudinally as “a field of investigation” (Kraft 148). Syncretism
is a process, one shared by all religions but historically unique in each case,
through which different traditions and practices come into contact with one
another, interact (peacefully or violently), maintain certain boundaries, and in-
terpenetrate one another through influence, assimilation, domination, blend-
ing, creolization, etc. It concerns the identity boundaries of a religion and how
they change over time as a result of contact with foreign or alien peoples.
I propose not to jettison or replace the concept of syncretism but rather to
forward “hybrid religion” as a historically specific case, an event or trend that
occurred in the West in the latter decades of the nineteenth century. I choose
“hybrid” in part because it avoids the still pejorative flavor of “syncretic,” a
term that has been used to denigrate the religions about which I am writing,
but, more importantly, because it seems especially appropriate to the condi-
tions and phenomena under consideration. It is appropriate to the climatic
convergence of multiple, competing discourses of spirituality and of science
that occurred in the Victorian era. As the following analysis of Theosophy will
demonstrate, the hybridity of late-Victorian hybrid religions often was mani-

fold, mixing and matching elements drawn not just from two but from half-a-
dozen religious traditions, and not solely from religions but also from secular
discourses, such as scientific naturalism. Here I draw upon an observation by
André Droogers that syncretism is not limited to a relationship between two
religions but “may occur between currents of one religion, between a religion
and an ideology, between religion and science, and between religion and cul-
ture” (Droogers 13). All of these combinations are evident in late-Victorian
hybrid religions, which, in addition, did not limit the number of any of these
variables.
The concept of the hybrid also seems especially fitting for the pressurized
amalgamating of cultures precipitated by the British Empire. It is apt for de-
scribing the uneasy splicing of alien voices within late-Victorian hybrid religions,
a process that resonates with Mikhail Bakhtin’s description of “two languages,
two belief systems that intersect in a hybrid construction” (Bakhtin 305). The
term also draws upon its more recent connotations in the postcolonial theory
of Homi Bhabha, Robert Young, and others. Describing Indian responses to
Christian missionaries, for example, Bhabha writes, “When the natives demand
an Indianized Gospel, they are using the powers of hybridity to resist bap-
tism and to put the project of conversion in an impossible position” (Bhabha
118). As Bhabha would be aware, according to the same logic when a native
of whichever hemisphere demands an Eastern-Western, mystical-scientific reli-
gion, she too is using the powers of hybridity, and doubly so, both to co-opt—
as well as honor—another religion and to renew—and thus subvert—her own
religious tradition. Late-Victorian hybrid religions enacted this splitting/
splicing of both self and other simultaneously. Thus a final characteristic that
distinguishes late-Victorian hybrid religions is the unusual extent to which
their founders consciously set about designing and manufacturing them from
an array of components (which is not to deny the unavoidable effect of uncon-

scious cultural assimilation). The founders especially of Theosophy and An-
throposophy adopted an “intentional programme for syncretism” (Kraft 156).
Since syncretism most typically describes an unintentional historical process
that unfolds as the result of two religions coming into contact and, as it were,
naturally interbreeding, it is reasonable to distinguish these late-Victorian reli-
gions as a special case of arranged, hot-house breeding—hybridization.
What follows is a working definition of late-Victorian hybrid religions. It
is a theoretical model and therefore offers many opportunities for future cor-
rection and revision. Some of the listed features may apply more to one of
the hybrid religions than another. Given the fact that the primary example in
the current analysis is Theosophy, some of these features may most accurately
describe that hybrid religion, which is to acknowledge that a more detailed
treatment of each of the religions that I have grouped together because of
their historical proximity is warranted. Given these caveats, I propose that late-
Victorian hybrid religions exhibited these features:
1. They were a product of the nineteenth-century “crisis of faith” and the perceived
failure of Christian institutions to defeat materialism; thus they all shared a mission to
save spirituality from materialism. They strove either to renew or reinvent Christianity,
as in the case of Christian Science (and the fictional hybrid religion in Marie Corelli’s
novels), or to prove that Christianity was defunct and therefore needed a replacement,
as in the case of Theosophy. In both cases, they took part in a flight away from the
strictures of fundamentalist, Calvinist, or Puritanical doctrines.
2. They nevertheless were unavoidably a product of the history of Protestantism.
They carried Protestant individualism to its logical extreme, centering heavily on indi-
vidual vocation and will, and they distrusted the imposition of institutional structure
on spiritual practice. They also were inherently if not explicitly anti-Catholic.
3. They were a product of the history of Natural Theology or Deism. They shared
with the Spiritualism movement and American Transcendentalism a belief in Spirit as a
natural universal order or law that stands above and effectively obviates the traditional
anthropomorphic God. They claimed that they were an expression of the original and
innate religious impetus of humankind that underlies all religions.
4. They were a product of the history of European and Judeo-Christian occult-
isms and mysticisms. Some cited roots in ancient Hebraic Kabbalahism, early Christian
Gnosticism, the Knights Templar, or Rosicrucianism. All shared a debt to the immedi-
ately preceding occultisms of the Mesmerism and Spiritualism movements. At the same
time, they strove to distinguish themselves from modern movements by claiming privi-
leged access to a more original source (as in Deism) or an ancient wisdom tradition.
5. They combined elements not only from diverse religious discourses but also
from humanist and social discourses. They all unavoidably reproduced elements of
Victorian ideology, such as “self-help” and progressivism. Most significantly, all were
a product of scientific naturalism, enlisting its authority by claiming a scientific basis.

They enlisted the language of materialism to disprove materialism. More specifically,
all of them incorporated the language of evolutionary science by formulating versions
of spiritual progress.
6. They asserted the equality—if not the primacy—of women relative to men in
the realm of spiritual and religious practice. Some of them did this as a matter of
course at an operational level by the predominance of women in the leadership and
membership; some of them stated this explicitly at the level of doctrine. The (re)
emergence of woman-centered religion in the late nineteenth century can be viewed
as a correction to the history of Catholicism and then Protestantism. It can be viewed
both as a component of the emerging women’s rights movement and as a manifesta-
tion of the positioning within Victorian literary and cultural discourse of woman as
the “angel in the house.”
7. As the preceding features suggest, they tended to disclaim the very religious
and secular discourses to which they were most indebted. For example, they strove to
distance themselves from Spiritualism as too undisciplined and popularized while
drawing upon its formulation of Spirit.20 They lambasted scientific materialism while
claiming a scientific and entirely natural basis. In this (and like Deism), they claimed
to be anti-supernatural, yet some of them cited miraculous phenomena or ancient,
revealed origins.
8. Finally, they were the product of empire (which may be true for nearly all occur-
rences of syncretism). The lynchpin event for the formation of late-Victorian hybrid
religions was the influx to European cultures of Eastern religions. Buddhism, as both
the privileged subject of comparative religion and the non-Christian religion of great-
est interest to Victorians, was among the most important non-European sources for
hybrid religions.21
To amplify this last point, late-Victorian hybrid religions like the Order of the
Golden Dawn or the Anthroposophical Society could not and would not have
arisen as they did had the European imperial powers not invaded and colonized
Northern Africa, the Middle East, the Indian subcontinent, and Asia. The point is
familiar enough: empire provided the means and the motivation for collecting
and translating the artifacts and scriptures of ancient Egyptian polytheism, Zo-
roastrianism, Hinduism, Buddhism, and Islam, among others, and filtering them
back into Western cultures. A counter-invasion occurred as these artifacts and
translations streamed back toward the seats of empire and began to infiltrate
Western discourse. This process was well underway by the time of Charles
Wilkins’s landmark translation in 1785 of the Bhagavad Gı̄tā. That event alone
profoundly influenced Western thought, injecting concepts such as karma and
reincarnation—as well as vivid images of the “exotic Orient”—into the philoso-
phy of Arthur Schopenhauer, the literature of the Romantics, and the Tran-
scendentalism of Ralph Waldo Emerson. The signs of this counter-invasion can

be read throughout the literature of the nineteenth century in all of the Egyp-
tian, Hindu, Islamic, or Buddhist figures that appear in works by Samuel Taylor
Coleridge, Edward Bulwer-Lytton, Wilkie Collins, Edward FitzGerald, D. G.
Rossetti, H. Rider Haggard, Marie Corelli, George MacDonald, Rudyard Ki-
pling, Arthur Conan Doyle, Joseph Conrad, W. B. Yeats, and T. S. Eliot, among
many others.
The Case of One Late-Victorian Hybrid Religion: Theosophy
The Theosophical Society was launched on 7 September, 1875 in New York

City by a small group of ardent spiritualists, the most noted members of which
were Madame Helena Petrovna Blavatsky, Henry Steele Olcott, and William
Quan Judge.22 Blavatsky, the daughter of a Russian colonel and a noble-born
writer, had experienced paranormal phenomena and read Hermetic, alchemical,
Kabbalah, Rosicrucian, and other occult texts since girlhood. A well-traveled
citizen of the world who reportedly had studied mysticism in Egypt and rid-
den with a caravan of Buddhist pilgrims to Tibet, she followed the Spiritualism
movement to its epicenter in New England. Her apartment in New York be-
came an occultist gathering place known famously as “the Lamasery.” She and
Olcott met because he had been reporting in the press on the séances that were
occurring in 1875 at the William Eddy farmhouse in Chittenden, Vermont.
The founding principles of the Society, recorded in 1882 and restated here by
Olcott in 1889, were as follows: (1) “To form the nucleus of a Universal Broth-
erhood of Humanity, without distinction of race, creed, sex, cast or colour”;
(2) “To promote the study of Aryan [which then primarily meant originating
in northern India] and other Eastern literatures, religions, philosophies, and
sciences”; and, (3) “To investigate unexplained laws of nature and the psychic
powers of man” (Olcott, “Genesis” 210).23 Blavatsky recognized that the Spir-
itualism movement had peaked and was waning and that the Theosophical So-
ciety could be the vehicle for her ambition, which was to found a new religion
as an alternative to Christianity. She and Olcott decided to leave New York in
1878 and spread their new religion first to London and then on to India in
1879, where in 1882 they built the current headquarters of the Theosophical
Society International in Adyar (now Chennai). Judge, who became the presi-
dent of the American branch, broke with Blavatsky and the International in
1895. That branch subsequently moved its headquarters to California, where
today it operates as The Theosophical Society Pasadena (not to be confused
with the American branch of the International in Wheaton, Illinois). But it was
Blavatsky who became the most famous—and infamous—spokesperson for
Theosophy, and I therefore focus on her, Olcott, and A. P. Sinnett, another

primary British spokesperson for Theosophy.
Blavatsky furnished the Society with its spiritual doctrine, its historical un-
derpinning, and its textual foundation. Her major works, Isis Unveiled (1877),
The Secret Doctrine (1888), and The Key to Theosophy (1889), were best-sellers
representing over three thousand pages and became, in effect, the bibles of
Theosophy. She founded theosophical journals in Bombay, London, Paris, and
New York, and published, over the course of her career, an estimated one
thousand articles in English, French, and her native Russian in these as well as
in other, national newspapers and magazines (Zirkoff ix). At the time of the
Society’s Jubilee in 1925, over fifteen thousand theosophical “lodges” were
reported across 41 nations.24 Few other Victorians—or people of any period,
for that matter—can be said to have founded a religion that continues to be
actively practiced by thousands over a century later.
But Blavatsky’s accomplishments were overshadowed in the popular imagi-

nation by the scandals in which she was involved. Her detractors charged her
with plagiarism in her writings and with fabricating the “Mahatma letters,”
letters purportedly penned by spiritual guides, whom she and many followers
called “The Masters” or “The Mahatmas,” and delivered to her from Tibet
via psychic airmail.25 The largest scandal came to a head in 1884 when the
Society for Psychical Research, which had been formed in London in 1882,
sent Richard Hodgson to Adyar to investigate the authenticity of the Mahatma
letters. In his report, published in The Proceedings of the Society for Psychical
Research in 1885, Hodgson denounced Blavatsky as “one of the most accom-
plished, ingenious and interesting impostors in history” (Hodgson, qtd. in
Sinnett, Early Days 66). It is this image of Madame Blavatsky that dominates
popular and perhaps academic conceptions of her to this day. The concern
here is not with these scandals nor with the question of the authenticity of
the paranormal phenomena that Blavatsky marshaled, quite successfully, to
popularize Theosophy. Aside from the sensational publicity it generated, the
whole furor over the Mahatma letters is irrelevant to my purposes. “Surely,”
as one skeptical historian of religion put it, “the physical and mental effort
expended in incessant letter writing in various hands, the production of multi-
volume works of incomprehensible philosophy and pseudo-anthropology, the
continuous behind-the-scenes arrangement of marvels—and, interspersed, the
seemingly placid at-homes, charged with quiet electricity, delighting the most
unsusceptible of guests—surely all this was more than a great hoax or a great
joke” (W. Smith 154).
Indeed, anyone who reads Blavatsky’s work knows that she was in deadly
earnest, even if part of what she was doing elsewhere was smoke and mirrors.
Isis Unveiled and The Secret Doctrine are mammoth accomplishments, vertigi-
nous compendiums of arcane ancient and medieval philosophy and theology of
every variety, all packed together with the density of stream-of-consciousness

dictation, but all the while maintaining the appearance, if not the actuality, of
scholarly rigor. Blavatsky blazed the trail that would be followed by Sir James
Frazer, Jessie Weston, and Joseph Campbell, though they might not choose
to acknowledge her. I suspect that Blavatsky, though not always the wisest
publicist, understood both the coincidence and the difference between the
public spectacle she conjured out of thin air and her real work. Her real work
was to synthesize a new, hybrid religion, one that could stand up to what she
viewed as the hegemonic patriarchal institutions of Christianity, on the one
hand, and scientific materialism on the other. My concern is with the processes
and sources from which that hybrid religion was constructed and, in particular,
the nature of its debt to Buddhism.
Theosophy exhibited all of the features listed in the previous section as part
of the working definition of “late-Victorian hybrid religion,” and then some.26
Like the Spiritualism movement before it, Theosophy joined the Manichean
battle against materialism, as Blavatsky writes here in the first volume of Isis
Unveiled: “Deeply sensible of the Titanic struggle that is now in progress
between materialism and the spiritual aspirations of mankind, our constant
endeavor has been to gather into our several chapters, like weapons into ar-
mories, every fact and argument that can be sued to aid the latter in defeating
the former. . . . Our voice is raised for spiritual freedom, and our plea made for
enfranchisement from all tyranny, whether of SCIENCE or THEOLOGY”
(Blavatsky, Isis 1:xlv). A. P. Sinnett, in Esoteric Buddhism (1883), argued that
the “esoteric doctrine” of Theosophy was “really the missing link between
materialism and spiritualism,” because it was a “spiritual science” (Sinnett, Eso-
teric 66). In referring to the “tyranny of theology” Blavatsky meant what she
perceived as the repressiveness of “exoteric,” institutional Christianity, Christi-
anity that had lost touch with its spiritual origins and become about form and
ceremony, politics and power, instead of about “esoteric” spirituality. While
Theosophy was like other hybrid religions in responding to the apparent fail-
ure of Christianity to defeat materialism, Blavatsky’s brand of Theosophy was
the only one (of which I am aware) to posit Christianity itself as the major
culprit for the ascendancy of materialism. The “Preface to Part II” of Isis Un-
veiled launches itself in this way: “An Analysis of religious beliefs in general,
this volume is in particular directed against theological Christianity, the chief
opponent of free thought. It contains not one word against the pure teach-
ings of Jesus” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:iii, iv). Isis Unveiled is in one sense a history of
Catholicism in particular from the perspectives of all those whom, according
to Blavatsky, it had silenced or persecuted. It may be one of the most sustained
critiques of a religion’s historical record ever written. By contrast, Christian
Science, Anthroposophy, and even Christian Socialism, for example, tried to
revitalize Christianity itself in order to breed a more vigorous hybrid for battle
against materialism and skepticism.

Blavatsky positioned Catholicism as the primary straw figure to be knocked
down, in part for strategic reasons, using it as a foil against which to define her
alternative religion; in part because she honestly viewed the Catholic church as
the most repressive institution in history; and in part for what must have been
personal reasons, given the virulence of her attack on it. Though Theosophy
reflected the influence of the history of Protestantism in its emphasis on indi-
vidualized spiritual practice and its anti-Catholic stance, Blavatsky at the same
time disdained as undisguised narcissism the anthropomorphic Personal God
or “P.G.,” as she called it, that had come to be claimed especially by evangeli-
cal Protestants (Godwin 328). She likewise assessed the God of the Talmud
and the Old Testament as a small-minded, repressive patriarch who should not
be mistaken for the higher-order Divine Spirit that embraces the universe and
all of the life that It had created. This is not to say that Isis Unveiled casually
dismisses Christian belief. On the contrary, Blavatsky in fact wrote “toward the
Western and particularly Christian world” in order to offer it a spiritual practice
that she argues is more truly Christ-like than the institutional Catholicism that
had capitalized on the teachings of Jesus not long after the crucifixion and,
in the course of two centuries, consolidated its power in true Roman fashion
(Neufeldt 235). Thus Isis Unveiled claims to uphold the teachings of Jesus,
while simultaneously mounting a series of assaults on the institutions founded
in his name, the goal apparently being to convince a Christian readership that
Christianity is not the religion they might imagine. The teachings of Jesus
about the Holy Spirit, for instance, are the true, founding, esoteric roots of
Christianity and, as such, are linked to the “ ‘Secret doctrines’ of the ancient
universal religion,” which Blavatsky posits as the shared foundation for all re-
ligions and the source of Theosophy (Blavatsky, Isis 1: xi). But, according to
Blavatsky’s telling, the esoteric aspects were suppressed from the beginning,
then officially written out of existence, for instance, at the Council of Nicaea
(CE 325), and then violently persecuted as heresy in the Inquisition. As a result,
“the true Christ-like principles have been exemplified, and true Christianity
practiced since the days of the apostles, exclusively among Buddhists and ‘hea-
then,’ ” and “the Christian virtues inculcated by Jesus in the sermon on the
mount are nowhere exemplified in the Christian world” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:81).
The best thing that a true Christian could do, according to Blavatsky, would
be to adopt “Christism,” the worship of Jesus, “in place of Christianity, with
its Bible, its vicarious atonement” (through the crucifixion, as opposed to di-
rect karmic atonement), and its “personal devil,” Satan, that “patron genius of
theological Christianity” (Blavatsky, Isis 2: 472, 478, 506).
Theosophy was like other hybrid religions in reflecting a debt to Natural
Theology. Deism is evident in the conception, familiar from the Spirit World
of Spiritualism, of Spirit as the universal, divine source and essence of all being,
a concept not unrelated to that of “Providence,” which is both more general

and less gendered than the masculine “God.” Natural Theology also was one
source for the theory, central to Theosophy, of the ancient wisdom religion,
which is recognizable as a variant of what Peter Byrne in Natural Religion
and the Nature of Religion characterizes as innate “human religiousness,” with
“some of the meaning of ‘original religion’ ” (Byrne 10). Blavatsky writes:
“What we desire to prove is, that underlying every ancient popular religion was
the same ancient wisdom-doctrine, one and identical, professed and practiced
by the initiates of every country, who alone were aware of its existence and
importance” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:99). She summarizes the fundamental beliefs of
this ancient wisdom religion as follows: (1) “The unity of God”—though she
will define “God” not as the Judeo-Christian deity but rather as “the one infi-
nite and unknown Essence,” which predates and supersedes the anthropomor-
phic deity; (2) “the immortality of the spirit”—where “spirit” is the highest
element in a trinity with the “body” and the “astral body” (a partial corollary
to the traditional soul), both of which are perishable while Spirit is immortal
and unchanging; and, (3) “belief in salvation only through our works, merit
and demerit”—which flies in the face of most Christian models of sin and
redemption and alludes to the Hindu and/or Buddhist concepts of karma
and reincarnation (Blavatsky, Isis 2:116, 264). Blavatsky very cannily enlisted
a long-standing and widely disseminated popular belief, derived from Deism,
in something similar to an ancient wisdom religion. By founding Theosophy
upon that belief, she was able to position it as having historical precedence
over Judaism and Christianity and as being truer to the original, pure religion
(purer than Puritanism, as it were), which Judaism and Christianity had sup-
pressed and forgotten.
She also thereby set the agenda for one of the organizing objectives of Isis
Unveiled: to trace the history of the Secret Doctrine from around a thousand
years before the Common Era up to the nineteenth century as it had been
practiced and handed down by the “adepts” of each generation in an histori-
cal chain linking ancient Egyptian Isis worship to pre-Hindu Vedanta to Pla-
tonic idealism to Hebraic Kabbalah to Jewish and Christian Gnosticism, and so
on. By characterizing the vehicle for the ancient wisdom religion as “esoteric
knowledge,” knowledge known only to initiated adepts and kept secret from
the majority of the population, Blavatsky established a number of critical safe-
guards for Theosophy. She explained why the ancient wisdom was not common
knowledge. She placed verification or falsification of that knowledge beyond
access by her critics. At the same time, however, she enlisted as examples of
former adepts a number of landmark figures—Gautama Buddha, Pythagoras,
Plato, and Jesus of Nazareth, for example—whom she argued had been among
the most important adepts of the ancient wisdom religion and from whom she
therefore could garner immense credibility for Theosophy.
Isis Unveiled recounts the story of how the ancient esoteric knowledge was
shared and preserved among various ancient and then medieval visionaries and
sects. It does this through a strategy of pseudo-historicism that even so is
anchored here and there in recognizable facts and figures drawn from the his-
torical record. The book’s argument about cross-pollination between various
mythologies and esoteric doctrines across the ancient world is tied to a theory
of historical population migrations. The flavor of this approach is indicated
when Blavatsky writes, for example, “History tells us of the stream of im-
migration across the Indus, and later of its overflowing the Occident; and of
the populations of Hindu origin passing from Asia Minor to colonize Greece”
(Blavatsky, Isis 2:428).
The result is a sweeping historical saga, but a saga grounded in periodic
reference to events if not fully verifiable then entertained at least by some
trained historians, for example: the cross-fertilization in the sixth century BCE
between philosophers in what is now northern India and Pythagoras in Greece,

which later influenced the idealism of Plato (c. 427–c. 348 BCE);27 the cultural
transference from West to East effected by the march of Alexander the Great
(356–323 BCE) into northern India; the subsequent transference from East to
West effected by missionaries sent out by the northern Indian, Buddhist em-
peror Asoka (c. 299–c. 237 BCE), specifically the likely contact between Bud-
dhist thought and the neo-Platonists, the Essenes, and the Gnostics;28 and,
the influence of the Essenes and the Gnostics on the Nazarenes, as in Jesus of
Nazareth, suggesting the possibility of a partially Eastern source for the asceti-
cism and the doctrine of compassion for which he became known.29 Thus for
a large number of Victorian readers, as for many Theosophists today, Isis Un-
veiled succeeded in giving a believable impression of historicity, regardless of
whatever the actual historical basis may be.
The next step in Blavatsky’s genealogy of Theosophy was to trace the eso-
teric knowledge from the ancient world to the subsequent European oc-
cultisms, for example the Hermetic tradition, medieval alchemy, the Knights
Templar, and Rosicrucianism. Like other late-Victorian hybrid religions, The-
osophy unavoidably owed a debt to the history of European, Judeo-Christian
(or anti-Christian) occultism, especially the most recent manifestations, Mes-
merism and Spiritualism. Though Blavatsky had practiced as a spiritualist, and
though in a limited sense “theosophy originated in spiritualism,” once she
recognized that Spiritualism was in effect too populist and therefore would not
accommodate the doctrinal authority, textual basis, and institutional structure
necessary for her purposes, she worked to distance herself and Theosophy from
Spiritualism (Prothero “From,” 198). Some spiritualists returned the favor by
denouncing Theosophy as an appropriation of their ideas. She resented the fact
that “Theosophy seemed wedded in the public mind to Spiritualistic phenom-
ena instead of to the high ideals of true wisdom and brotherhood on which
the Society was based” (W. Smith 146). An early agenda of the first volume of
Isis Unveiled is to distinguish the basis of her new religion from the “strange
creed” and “fanaticism” of the table rappers and séance mediums (Blavatsky,
Isis 1:x). She replaces the apparitions of Spiritualism with a concept of Spirit
that is above parlor tricks; she replaces the petty (but, she held, authentic)
magic of spirit materializations, which might be exposed by scientific investiga-
tion, with the “law” of ancient “esoteric science”; and she replaces “medium-
ship” with the much more exclusive concept of “adeptship.” Near the end of
the second volume of Isis Unveiled, she finally provides a “Summary of the
points of the Wisdom-religion” in ten points, the sixth of which is: “Medi-
umship is the opposite of adeptship; the medium is the passive instrument
of foreign influences, the adept actively controls himself and all inferior po-
tencies” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:588). Blavatsky’s writings theorize an historical and
philosophical basis for a spiritualism (in the most generic sense) for the elite
“educated intellectual,” leaving the Spiritualism movement for “the masses,”

as one commentator observed in 1891 (Pember 50).
Yet, “Theosophy could not have made a serious bid for attention among
Londoners—or elsewhere—if a revival of Spiritualism had not preceded it”
(W. Smith 142). Blavatsky understood that Theosophy required not only an
historical pedigree but a supernatural endorsement, one more authoritative
than the phenomena of Spiritualism. The Masters or Mahatmas and their mi-
raculously materializing letters served that purpose. They provided the proof of
the authority invested especially in Blavatsky as a spiritual leader and of the le-
gitimacy of Theosophy as a path. As Blavatsky shrewdly argued, all of the major
religions, especially Catholicism, her chosen nemesis, rely for proof of divine
sanction on ancient “miracles,” which, if taken as true, must demonstrate the
efficacy of supernatural phenomena; therefore, the miraculous Mahatma letters
only similarly demonstrate the authenticity of Theosophy, as well as suggesting
that the miraculous now had gone out of Christianity by comparison. Playing
both ends against the middle, Theosophy remained necessarily wedded to the
supernaturalism inherited from Spiritualism while it just as necessarily claimed
to rest, in addition, on something more solid and demonstrable.
That solid and demonstrable something was the discourse of scientific natu-
ralism, another source to which all late-Victorian hybrid religions were in-
debted. Isis Unveiled opens by invoking the authority of science, if not exactly
the science of the Royal Institute: “The work now submitted to public judg-
ment is the fruit of somewhat intimate acquaintance with Eastern adepts and
study of their science” (Blavatsky, Isis 1: v). Those adepts had showed her, she
reports, “that by combining science with religion, the existence of God and
immortality of man’s spirit may be demonstrated like a problem of Euclid”
(Blavatsky, Isis 1:vi). Physics had failed to account for paranormal phenomena
not because they are inexplicable but because modern science, blinded by cen-
turies of religious dogma, had failed to retain or reach the level of understand-
ing that had been attained by ancient science. Blavatsky concludes the preface,
“We wish to show how inevitable were their [modern scientists’] innumerable
failures, and how they must continue until these pretended authorities of the West
go to the Brahmans and Lamaists of the far Orient, and respectfully ask them
to impart the alphabet of true science ” (Blavatsky, Isis 1: xlv). The first volume
then sets about showing how esoteric knowledge had been codified in an “al-
phabet of true science” that was shared by adepts all across the ancient world.
Not only had these scholar-priests gained insights that anticipated discover-
ies of modern science, they had discovered “laws of nature” that still eluded
modern scientists. “Law” becomes a critical term in establishing credibility for
Theosophy, as for some other hybrid religions. The first point in Blavatsky’s
“Summary of the points of the Wisdom-religion” is this: “There is no miracle.
Everything that happens is the result of law—eternal, immutable, ever active”
(Blavatsky, Isis 2:587). Here Blavatsky intends “law” simultaneously in two

specific, related ways: as the Buddhist Dharma or the “law of karma and rein-
carnation,” and as “natural law,” in particular the law of evolution or the “law
of survival of the fittest.”30
Theosophy was built upon an evolutionary model of spiritual development.
Sinnett carried this idea to its extreme in Esoteric Buddhism, writing, for ex-
ample: “But through successive incarnations in forms whose physical improve-
ment, under the Darwinian law of evolution, is constantly fitting them to be its
[the soul’s] habitations at each return to objective life, it gradually gathers that
enormous range of experience which is summed up in its higher development”
(Sinnett, Esoteric 14).31 Taking one additional step, Blavatsky and, following
her, Sinnett merged evolutionary spiritualism with Victorian progressivism.
“Progress” was for Blavatsky “simply another term for evolution”; her concern
was with “the laws governing spiritual progress” (Neufeldt 248; Sinnett, Early
Days 31). Theosophy, and popular conception beyond the Theosophical Soci-
ety, was attracted to the idea of a personality or consciousness that continues
after death and progresses from incarnation to incarnation, learning from past
moral errors and carrying that knowledge with it in order to make spiritual
progress in the next lifetime. However, this was not Darwinism; it was La-
marckian evolutionary theory seasoned with Social Darwinism.32 Nevertheless,
Blavatsky had enlisted if not Darwin then a popular conception of science at its
most powerful. Works by Darwin and Huxley are among the most frequently
cited sources in Isis Unveiled, and Alfred Russel Wallace, the co-discoverer of
evolutionary theory with Darwin as well as a famous spiritualist, returned the
favor by writing to Blavatsky, “ ‘I am amazed at the vast amount of erudition
displayed in [your volumes] and the great interest of the topics on which they
treat’ ” (Wallace 559, qtd. in Gomes, Dawning 143). Blavatsky thus garnered
for her hybrid religion a credibility with her contemporaries that was bor-
rowed from the very modern science she otherwise denigrated as materialism.
In effect, she immunized Theosophy from the threat of materialism by inocu-
lating spirituality with the most virulent strain of science: evolutionary theory.
The resulting amalgam of evolutionary theory with loosely compatible ele-
ments drawn from Eastern philosophy as well as from Victorian ideology is
characteristic of late-Victorian hybrid religions. New religions ranging from
Christian Science to Anthroposophy faced the challenge of merging an appeal
to a source of truth “higher” than science with an appeal to the authority of
science itself. In the nineteenth century, revelation needed to be bolstered by
scientific rationality or, as Marie Corelli wrote in the prologue to her novel
A Romance of Two Worlds, “men and women of to-day must have proofs”
(Corelli, Romance 2).
Another defining feature that Theosophy shared with other late-Victorian
hybrid religions was that if it was not explicitly woman-centered, it raised women
to equality with men in spiritual matters. This was but one of many outcomes
of the pervasive Victorian spiritualization of the feminine and “feminization
of religion,” which simultaneously idealized and constrained women but also
was an important historical event with real benefits for the women’s move-
ment (Dixon 7). Ann Braud, writing particularly about Spiritualism and Chris-
tian Science, notes that “instead of viewing the qualities that inclined women
toward piety as disqualifications for public roles,” these religions “made the
delicate constitution and nervous excitability commonly attributed to feminin-
ity a qualification for religious leadership” (Braud 57). Many hybrid religions
were founded or led by women, for example Mary Baker Eddy for Christian
Science; Katherine Tingley, who succeeded W. Q. Judge in the Theosophi-
cal Society Point Loma (later in Pasadena); and of course Blavatsky and her
successor, Annie Besant. The example of these women in roles of leadership
alone “suggested (a) that women could take full control of their lives, (b) that
such self-controlled female lives could be eminently productive and useful to
the world, and (c) that women in such cases could have direct, unmediated
access to spiritual truth and power, outside the male-written scriptures or man-
powered churches” (Ellwood and Wessinger 76). Not a few women in the
last quarter of the century in England mixed a progressive spiritual agenda
with a progressive social agenda in order to see the two as directly related.
Anna Kingsford, for example, one of the first women in England to be certi-
fied as a physician, was both an active feminist and an active Theosophist, and
Annie Besant was outspoken on women’s suffrage as a leading member of the
Fabian Society before converting to Theosophy and becoming first a disciple
of Blavatsky and then the president of the Society. As Diana Burfield notes,
“The renascence of the feminine principle (Isis, Sophia, the Great Mother)
with its mission of renewal was a dominant theme in the esoteric teaching
of the time, and one that recommended itself to mystical feminists” (Burf-
ield 41). Theosophy, in particular, was appealing to women seeking a spiritual

alternative, because, in the first place, its founding tenets explicitly decreed
against discrimination on the basis of gender, as well as race or creed, and, in
the second place, it recognized the female principle as co-equal to the male
principle in the Godhead and, therefore, in the order of the universe. The-
osophy thus provided “a theoretical legitimation at the highest cosmological
level for mundane notions of equality between the sexes” (Burfield 36). While
not programmatically feminist, Theosophy’s “links to the English feminist
movement were particularly marked,” and “the Theosophical worldview and
institutional expressions have been very supportive of the equal leadership of
women” (Dixon 5; Ellwood and Wessinger 83). Blavatsky cleared the way for
a range of twentieth and twenty-first-century woman-based spiritual practices,
such as the Wicca movement. Though she generally is not included in the list
of prominent Victorian feminists such as Barbara Bodichon, Josephine Butler,
or Frances Power Cobbe, she did work consciously for the equality of women,
if on what she would have considered a higher plane, and Anne Besant later
became a prominent spokesperson for a mixed colonialism-feminism in Indian
politics.33
Isis Unveiled works for the spiritual equality of women in two pronounced
ways: it defends occult and woman-based spirituality against its historical per-
secutor in Europe, the Catholic Church (thereby also participating in the anti-
Catholic discourse that was rampant in mid-Victorian England), and it centers
Theosophy on the figure of the Goddess. The true, historical enemy of esoteric
spirituality was Catholicism, which for Blavatsky meant the Church of inquisi-
tions and crusades, exorcisms and witch burnings. At its earliest stages, she ar-
gues, the Church undertook purgings of “heretics” in order to conceal its own
debt to pre-existing esoteric doctrine and to maintain its monopoly over the
miraculous: “In their insatiable desire to extend the dominion of blind faith,
the early architects of Christian theology had been forced to conceal, as much
as it was possible, the true sources of the same. To this end they are said to have
burned or otherwise destroyed all the original manuscripts of the Kabbalah,
magic, and occult sciences upon which they could lay their hands” (Isis 2:26).
This led before long to the burning of people, as the Inquisitors “persecuted
the Gnostics, murdered the philosophers, and burned the kabalists and the
masons” (Isis 2:37). Volume 2 of Isis Unveiled puts the Inquisition on trial.
The second chapter in particular moves from a list of the Church’s atrocities
to the Church’s own list of some of the estimated 600 burned at the stake in
Germany alone in the decade of the 1620s. The list includes both men and
woman, and many are listed anonymously, for instance, simply as “a stranger.”
However, many are children and women, as in “The wife of . . . ,” “A strange
woman,” and “The little daughter of . . . ,” generally giving names only for the
men to whom the women belonged (Blavatsky, Isis 2:62). Though Blavatsky
is protesting on behalf of all occultisms and all victims of the Inquisition, she
clearly views the Church as a masculine institution and its victims as the most
vulnerable and innocent. Isis Unveiled speaks at times from a place of deep
and bitter trauma—a personal dislocation of a perceived historical trauma—in
response to the long history of persecution by masculine religious institutions
of women and children.
This reading is supported by the way that Blavatsky tells her version of the
plight of the female deity at the hands of patriarchal world religions. A primary
mission of the second volume of Isis Unveiled is to reintroduce the female
component of the divine back into Western religious discourse. The first move
in the argument toward that end is to show how the Virgin Mary can be “un-
veiled” as a figure derived mythologically from Nari, the Universal Mother
in Brahmanism, and from Isis, whom ancient inscriptions describe with the
phrase, “ ‘Immaculate is Our Lady Isis’ ” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:41). The second move
is to show how in a range of ancient religions the Creator of the universe was
ungendered, but “whenever the Eternal awakes from its slumber and desires
to manifest itself, it divides itself into male and female” (Isis 2:170). Thus pre-
Hindu Brahmanism, the doctrine of the ancient Chaldeans, and that of the
Gnostics all recognized a “Double-Sexed Deity.” However, “as neither the
male nor female principle, blended into the idea of a double-sexed Deity in an-
cient conceptions, could be comprehended . . . the theology of every people had
to create for its religion a Logos, or manifested word, in some shape or other”
(Isis 2:171). The third move is to show, in short, how Judaism and then Catho-
lic Christianity had denied the ungendered, originating Spirit; collapsed the
double-sexed deity spawned from that Spirit into one gender by promoting the
masculine component to the Logos and demoting the female component to
human status; demonized the female component (Sophia, as in Theo-Sophy)
in the form of Eve while domesticating and unsexing her counterpart, the Vir-
gin Mary; and thereby rendered the deity as an entirely masculine authority,
“a spouseless Father with one Son, who is identical with Himself ” (Isis 2:2).
All the while Blavatsky forwards a parallel argument aimed at reestab-
lishing the historical-mythical foundation for the Goddess. That argument
culminates in passages such as this: “Sophia-Achamoth, the half-spiritual, half-
material LIFE, which vivifies the inert matter in the depths of chaos, is the Holy
Ghost of the Gnostics, the Spiritus (female) of the Nazarenes. She is—be it
remembered—the sister of Christos, the perfect emanation, and both are chil-
dren or emanations of Sophia, the purely spiritual and intellectual daughter
of Bythos, the Depth” (Isis 2:226–27). Thus the overall argument’s fourth
move, and its ultimate purpose, is to reinstate the female divinity by showing,
through a sort of archaeology, how the Goddess functioned in ancient religions
prior to repression by Judaism and Christianity, linking Her to the complex of
suppressed esoteric doctrines that Blavatsky is set upon resurrecting, thereby
building Her into the very foundation of Theosophy. Theosophy is unique

among late-Victorian hybrid religions and, for that matter, among world reli-
gions in being founded on a cosmology and a deity that is as much if not more
woman-centered as man-centered.
Buddhism and Theosophy
Buddhism was not the primary ingredient of Theosophy, but it completed the
recipe, so to speak. Selected and reinterpreted elements drawn from Buddhism,
as well as Hinduism, came to provide the ethical system, part of the cosmology,
and a central rhetorical justification for Theosophy. This was not necessarily
the case from the start. At its inception, the Theosophical Society committed
itself to study “Eastern literatures, religions, philosophies, and sciences,” but
at some point after that Blavatsky, followed by Olcott (but not by Judge),
chose to move from studying it to using it as a primary source of concepts
and terms from which to build the new religion (Olcott, “Genesis” 210). In
1877, the New York World published an interview with Blavatsky in which
she “proclaimed herself a Buddhist” (Gomes, Dawning 137). This became
technically true in 1880 when Blavatsky and Olcott became two of the earliest
Westerners to take Buddhist layman’s vows during a stay in Ceylon (now Sri
Lanka). Olcott would later become an outspoken champion of the Ceylonese
Buddhist revival and a public critic of the Christian missionary organizations
there.34 By Blavatsky’s account, her engagement with Buddhism began much
earlier, perhaps as early as the mid 1850s when she purportedly was trekking in
the north of the Indian subcontinent in or near Tibet.35 Whether intentionally
or through replication of what was becoming a cultural stereotype, Blavatsky
appealed to a popular conception of Tibet as the ancient seat of esoteric spiri-
tual knowledge. Peter Bishop observes: “Blavatsky’s all-wise, eternal mahatmas
were an obvious manifestation of this archetypal quality, but the fantasies of
theosophy reached a far wider audience than its followers. Time and again trav-
elers looked for the mahatmas—or commented upon their absence. Blavatsky’s
fantasies struck a chord in the Western psyche that continues to echo to this
day” (Bishop 181). By choosing to seat the Mahatmas in Tibet, Blavatsky had
chosen to wed Theosophy to Buddhism, as well as placing them conveniently
beyond the reach of almost all Westerners.
Thus Isis Unveiled places at the center of the ancient wisdom religion, as
the ur-religion from which all others had issued, something called “prehistoric
Buddhism.” Statements such as this appear throughout: “There is not one of
all these sects—Kabalism, Judaism, and our present Christianity included—but
sprung from the two main branches of that one mother-trunk, the once uni-
versal religion, which antedated the Vadaic ages—we speak of that prehistoric
Buddhism which merged later into Brahmanism” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:123). Bla-
vatsky’s claim to spiritual authority was that she had received “esoteric Bud-
dhism” through direct transmission from the Mahatmas, who, situated as they
were at the planet’s spiritual axis mundi, had privileged access to its ancient
roots. Prehistoric Buddhism, by which Blavatsky meant Buddhism long before
the Buddha named Siddhartha Gautama, had been the foundation for the an-
cient wisdom religion and, therefore, was the foundation of Theosophy.
However, whatever knowledge Blavatsky had about Buddhism appears to
have come less from the Mahatmas than from her reading in the literature
of comparative religion. Among the most frequently cited authorities in Isis
Unveiled are the works of the eminent Buddhologist F. Max Müller. The in-
fluence of comparative religion on Theosophy is clear even in the founding
tenets, the second of which Sinnett summarized as, “To encourage the study
of comparative religions, Philosophy and Science” (Sinnett, Early 13). While
the advent of comparative religion was significant for the founding of late-
Victorian hybrid religions in general, Theosophy adopted the methods as well
as the products of that scholarship. Blavatsky took those methods as a working
template as well as a justification for the approach she chose in comparatively
analyzing ancient and medieval philosophies and sects. Indicative phrases such
as this appear throughout Isis Unveiled: “Let us begin by once more compar-
ing the myths of the Bible with those of the sacred books of other nations, to
see which is the original, which copies” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:405). Comparative
analogy is one of her primary rhetorical strategies, and, though it is weak both
logically and historically, Blavatsky uses it to convincing effect. She sets a col-
umn of Pythagorean verses next to one of similar New Testament verses, for
instance, or a column of Hindu scripture beside analogous Old and New Testa-
ment passages. By juxtaposing the mythical/biographical events in the lives of
Krishna, Buddha, and Jesus, she suggests, not unpersuasively, a precedent for
the latter in the former two and builds an argument about the influence of the
ancient wisdom religion on every subsequent world religion.
In the process, Isis Unveiled enlists some of the rigor and credibility of the
“scientific study of religion.” At the same time, it replicates a prejudice of
comparative religion and, more generally, of Protestantism in favoring the pre-
sumed “purity” of primary sources, such as canonical scripture, over indigenous
practices, one outcome of which was to transfer authority over Buddhism from
practitioners and their countries to Western scholars and Europe—a form of
intellectual imperialism. Theosophy outdid comparative religion in this regard;
since its primary source was the Mahatmas and therefore unverifiable, Bla-
vatsky was licensed to make claims like this one: “When we use the term Bud-
dhists, we do not mean to imply by it either the exoteric Buddhism instituted
by the followers of Gautama-Buddha, nor the modern Buddhistic religion, but
the secret philosophy of Sakyamuni, which in its essence is certainly identical
with the ancient wisdom-religion of the sanctuary, the pre-Vedic Brahmanism”

(Blavatsky, Isis 2:142). Indeed, the Buddhism Blavatsky and Sinnett claimed to
derive from their arcane sources was not a Buddhism that Müller or the major-
ity of practicing Buddhist would recognize.
While many thousands of Blavatsky’s readers credited her historical argu-
ment and her alignment of Buddhism with the ancient wisdom religion, those
most knowledgeable about the history of religions or about Buddhism chal-
lenged her. Müller “acknowledged the Eastern provenance of Blavatsky’s doc-
trines, but was utterly scornful of her scholarship” (Oppenheim 163). He was
especially irritated by the fact that Sinnett’s Esoteric Buddhism had outsold his
own erudite works on Buddhism.36 Denouncing the entire concept of “esoteric
Buddhism,” he wrote: “If I were asked what Madam Blavatsky’s Esoteric Bud-
dhism really is, I should say it was Buddhism misunderstood, distorted, carica-
tured” (Müller, “Esoteric” 775). F. Legge, writing in 1889, argued that “the
system of the Theosophical Society has not been handed down from prehistoric
times by secret and mysterious means, but has, on the contrary, been copied en
bloc from the relics of Gnosticism” (Legge 21). In a published rejoinder, Olcott
argued as follows: “If, therefore, Theosophy is found identical with the Gnosti-
cism of Marcion [excommunicated for heresy around 144 CE] and his school, it
must have the same primal source, viz. India, which is exactly what the founders
of the Theosophical Society have affirmed from the first” (Olcott 212). Taking
a different angle of attack, Merwin-Marie Snell’s “Modern Theosophy in its Re-
lation to Hinduism and Buddhism” (1895) supported Blavatsky’s claim about
the Indian origins of Theosophy, though to nineteenth-century Hinduism, not
prehistoric Buddhism. Snell demonstrates that while Theosophy bears some
similarities to certain aspects of Tibetan Buddhism, “nearly all the elements of
its religio-philosophical system are distinctly Hindu” (Snell 264). Snell argues
that Theosophy became increasingly “Hinduized” after Blavatsky and Olcott
moved the headquarters to Adyar and became associated with the Arya Samaj,
a Hindu reformist group founded in 1875 favoring Vedic purism and, later,
Indian nationalism.37 Theosophists in India indeed did find it socially and po-
litically efficacious to revise the definition of “esoteric Buddhism” in the direc-
tion of Hinduism.38 But perhaps the most trenchant attack on Theosophy came
in Frederika MacDonald’s article “Buddhism and Mock Buddhism” (1885).
MacDonald systematically rebuts Theosophy’s primary misconceptions about
Buddhism, accurately noting that the Buddha of canonical scripture “distinctly
denies that he has any esoteric doctrine,” refers practitioners not to the author-
ity of any controlling clerisy of adepts but rather to the Four Noble Truths
and the Noble Eightfold Path alone, and explicitly disavows all mystical and
metaphysical speculations, prescribing instead the more modest and difficult
“practice [of ] self-control and self-culture” (MacDonald 713–14). MacDonald
concludes as follows: “We are able to prove all other statements concerning
the inner meaning and purpose of Gotama Buddha’s teaching made through
Mr. Sinnett by the Theosophical Society, or (if it be preferred) by the Tibetan
Brotherhood, to be one by one baseless and false” (MacDonald 713).
This much was clear in the late nineteenth century, at least to the minority
of readers sufficiently informed: Theosophy’s esoteric Buddhism was not Bud-
dhism. But this conclusion still leaves open for investigation questions such
as the following. What specific elements of Buddhism did Theosophy reject
and which did it appropriate and for what apparent reasons? Exactly how did
Blavatsky, Olcott, and Sinnett reinterpret those elements and what interests
did those reinterpretations serve? What do the answers to these questions teach
us not only about Theosophy but about the Victorian assimilation and failed
assimilation of Buddhism?
In the first place, Blavatsky and the other founders of Theosophy chose
to overlook much of the doctrinal and ethical foundation of Buddhism. The
founding teachings of the Buddha were the Four Noble Truths and the Noble
Eightfold Path, as delivered in his first sermon, “The Setting into Motion of
the Wheel of the Dharma” (and summarized in appendix 2). These are listed
and explicated throughout both the Theravada and Mahayana canons, and all
denominations of Buddhism observe them, though of course interpretations
vary. Along with central concepts like the Dharma, karma, reincarnation, and
nirvana, they are part of the historical and doctrinal consensus of Buddhism in
general. Blavatsky certainly was aware of them. They were detailed in multiple
works of comparative religion that she had read and cited. She had posted at
her London headquarters a shorthand version of the Five Precepts, the Bud-
dhist layman’s practical ethics derived from the Eightfold Path: “right thought,
right feeling, right speech, right action, and right living” (Dixon 49). It is
especially telling, then, that in shaping Theosophy she chose for the most part
to ignore these foundational teachings. If, as it appears, she relegated them to
the list of “exoteric” aspects of Buddhism that therefore were irrelevant to true
“esoteric Buddhism,” why did she?
Perhaps Blavatsky shared the most common Victorian prejudice against the
Four Noble Truths, the first of which, Dukkha, states to the effect that living
involves suffering.39 While practicing Buddhists—whether in the nineteenth or
the twenty-first century—tend to view this tenet as a relatively neutral statement
about the nature of reality, most Victorians considered it the blackest pessi-
mism. At the same time, however, most commentators praised the ethical sys-
tem prescribed by the Four Noble Truths—namely, the Eightfold Path and the
Five Precepts—as exemplary of the popular Victorian ideology of “self-help”
(Clausen, “Victorian” 5). They considered it to be a similarly practical and pro-
gressive prescription for living an ethically healthy life. The author of an 1899
journal article was representative in mixing admiration with reservation when
he wrote: “The perfect man was the sole ideal of the great Buddhistic sage,
and Gautama’s whole system is devoted to teaching how this ideal is reached.
It is thus more a system of ethics than a religion; its foundation resting on
four noble truths, as Buddha pronounced them” (Rattigan 307–8). It would
seem, then, that Blavatsky was less interested in founding a religion based on
the rigors of self-culture or the discipline of day-to-day ethical practice than in
building an occult spirituality. While she and others eventually did formulate
a practical ethics—for instance, in her book The Key to Theosophy (1889)—the
impetus for Theosophy remained the vast mysteries and the arcane knowledge,
access to which was closely guarded and breathtakingly exciting. Blavatsky was
compelled toward secrecy, high drama, contests of will, and battling Christian-
ity, as she conceived it. As Monier Monier-Williams accurately noted in 1889,
there are no “mystical teachings” and “no occult, no esoteric system or doc-
trine” in canonical Buddhism (Monier-Williams, Buddhism 224). Also, there
is no place in Buddhism for an aspirant more serious than a lay householder
outside of the anonymous cloister of a monastery. Thus Blavatsky could not

embrace the Buddhism either of comparative religion scholars or of practicing
Buddhists. Most elements of scriptural and monastic Buddhism did not truly
interest Madame Blavatsky.
However, Blavatsky, Olcott, and Sinnett did enlist the prevalent Victorian
conception that the “Law” of the Dharma made Buddhism a “scientific reli-
gion.” The Dharma is an immensely complex, overarching concept within Bud-
dhism (and, before Buddhism, in ancient Brahmanism). Reflecting its diversity
of connotations among Buddhists, Victorians described it variously as “the
ethics and philosophy” of Buddhism, the “the law of virtue,” “the whole duty
of man,” the “Laws of Cause and Effect,” and the “immutable laws underly-
ing the endless modifications of organic and inorganic life,” to take only a few
examples (T. W. Rhys Davids, Origin 44; Westminster 178; T. W. Rhys Davids,
Buddhist 132; Alabaster 157; Eitel 66). It is this latter connotation—Dharma
as the highest natural law governing and connecting everything spiritual and
material from the human mind to the galaxy—that appealed to Theosophists.
It appealed to other Victorians as well. After all, Enlightenment Deism—
followed by Romanticism and then Transcendentalism—already had made a
not dissimilar sensibility familiar. By the nineteenth century that sensibility had
become part of what one concerned Catholic commentator criticized in an
1875 article as part of “the modern idea”: “that the universe, which the celes-
tial sphere does not enclose, is a deity, eternal, immense, unborn, or uncreated,
and destined never to pass away” (Dublin 16). Understandably, then, Victori-
ans saw an obvious if superficial analogy between the Dharma and the invisible,
causal connectedness implicit in all three of the seminal scientific theories of
the age: evolutionary theory, Dalton’s atomic theory, and the law of conserva-
tion of energy.40
A critical feature of the Dharma as understood by Victorians was that it did
not describe the natural universe as a random machine—as Darwinism seemed

to threaten—but rather as a system regulated by its own laws of causal inter-
connectedness. For humans (or rather for all “sentient beings,” to use a com-
mon Buddhist phrase), this causality operates as the law of karma, which can
be translated as “action/reaction” or “choice/consequence.” Because karma
naturally and automatically links every action or choice to its consequences, it
indicates an inescapable, mutual responsibility linking each being to all other
beings. The Dharma and the system of karma therefore describe an inherently
ethical universe. As one 1870 journal article put it, the universe is governed by
“a law of inevitable moral causation” called “Kam,—i.e., moral necessity,” or,
as another commentator expressed the same idea in 1905, “the whole universe
is under one and the self-same law of causation which is ethical” (Littell’s 237;
Lilly 213). Even Thomas Henry Huxley—eminent scientist publicly known
as “Darwin’s bulldog”—adopted this understanding in both the title and the
content of his Evolution and Ethics (1893). Liberal intellectual humanists like
Huxley yearned to believe that there was an ethical order to the universe that
would continue to operate even in the absence of a creating deity. The founders
of Theosophy responded to this generalized Victorian yearning by capitalizing
on the connotations of the Dharma in order to offer a model of the universe as
naturally just and scientifically spiritual. Blavatsky enlisted Buddhism’s “theo-
logical dogmas of reincarnation and the law of karma on the grounds that they
reconciled the idea of a moral universe with the idea of a universe governed
by natural law in a way that could provide a basis for acting morally in an age
when the sanctions of Christianity had lost their force” (Bevir 764).
But even the Dharma was not sufficient to the model of the universe that
Blavatsky and Sinnett had in mind. They abstracted from it in order to theorize
a mystical cosmos, a multi-layered frontier designed for the individual soul’s
spiritual questing. This cosmology, which to my knowledge is antithetical to
Buddhism, is most evident in Sinnett’s writing.41 He summarizes Theosophy’s
“broad truths” as “the existence of the Masters, the growth of the Ego under
the law of Reincarnation, itself subject to Karma, and the stupendous magni-
tude of a planetary scheme to which we of this Earth belong” (Sinnett, Early
Days xx). The latter point refers to the theory, which came to be widely ac-
cepted by Theosophists, that the earth belongs to a “planetary union” and that
individual spiritual evolution occurs between incarnations as a journey upward
through ascending spheres, “a spiral progress through the worlds,” a notion that
foreshadows the “gyre” concept of William Butler Yeats, a member of the
Theosophical Society until a falling out with Blavatsky sent him to the Her-
metic Order of the Golden Dawn (Sinnett, Esoteric 77, 85). This combina-
tion of astronomy (or perhaps astrology) and spiritualism in effect proliferates
a traditional conception of heaven into a multiplex structure through which
human spirits travel according to their own merits without the oversight or
interference of divine judgment.42 One intermediate location or spiritual state

is “Devachan,” “the state between earth-lives into which the human entity,
human monad, enters and there rests in bliss and repose” before reincarnat-
ing (Purucker 36). The ultimate destination, after sufficient spiritual evolution
obviates the need for reincarnation, is union with or absorption into the divine
source. Critically, however, the divine is conceived neither as the anthropo-
morphic Judeo-Christian God nor as the entirely non-anthropomorphic Bud-
dhist Dharma, but rather somewhere in between as an approximation of the
Hindu Atman. William Peiris rightly argues that in Anglo-Indian Theosophy
“ultimate reality was seen more in Hindu than in Buddhist terms: all beings
were regarded as containing an inner ātman, or Self, which was a portion of
the universal One or Brahman” (Peiris 303).
At the same time, and perhaps in a parallel fashion, Theosophical doc-
trine multiplied the self far beyond the traditional dualism of body and soul.
Following the lead of Spiritualism, Blavatsky first adopted the triune structure
of body-soul-Spirit, the latter denoting the “Higher Self ” as an atom of the
universal Spirit, Atman, or, as it was called, the Ātma. She subsequently theo-
rized a sevenfold structure, detailed in The Key to Theosophy, composed of a
“lower quaternary” and a “higher trinity” (Blavatsky, Key 91–92). The former
consists of “the four principles which do not reincarnate, but are destined for
annihilation”: the physical body (rūpa), the life-principle (prāna), the astral
body (lińga-sárı̄ra), and the animal passions (kāma-rūpa) (Neufeldt 242).
The higher trinity consists of the mind or intelligence (manas), the spiritual
soul (buddhi), and the pure spirit (ātma), the latter two of which, along with
the most spiritual ideations of the manas, continue on as an essential identity
through multiple lives until worthy of merging back into the origin of the
Ātma. Sinnett solidified and simplified this model, and Annie Besant perpetu-
ated it but, especially after Blavatsky’s death, developed her own subsidiary
theory of the spiritual self as a layering of “sheaths.”43 Writers from Blavatsky to
present-day Theosophists have elaborately developed the split-and-multiplied
self, theorizing exactly what happens to each component upon earthly demise—
which disintegrate, which remain temporarily adrift in Kāma-loka (a realm en-
circling the earth akin to the Spirit World of Spiritualism), which proceed on
to Devachan, and how the “spiritual Ego”—the buddhi-ātma—reincarnates or
achieves ultimate divinity (Blavatsky, Keys 94). I am less interested here in the
details of such theorizing than in trying to understand from what motives and
sources Theosophists derived it and what purposes it may have served.
The most obvious model for Blavatsky’s sevenfold self was the Buddhist
skandhas (in Pali, khandhas), which is indeed the precedent she cites in her
writings.44 The Buddhist model of the mind, which received lengthy atten-
tion especially from Caroline Rhys Davids in such works as Buddhist Psychology
(1914), recognizes no unified, singular identity. Instead, it theorizes the self as
“an assemblage of different properties,” called the skandhas or The Five Ag-
gregates (T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 90). Monier-Monier Williams, writing
in 1888, gives this summary of the skandhas: “1. Form (rūpa), i.e. the orga-
nized body. 2. Sensation (vedanā) of pain or pleasure, or of neither, arising
from contact of eye, ear, nose, tongue, skin, and mind with external objects.
3. Perceptions (sañña = sañjñā) of ideas through the same sixfold contact.
4. Aggregate of formations (samkhāra = sanskāra, i.e. combination of properties
or faculties or mental tendencies, fifty-two in number, forming individual char-
acter and derived from previous existences . . .). 5. Consciousness (viññāna =
vijñāna) or thought” (Monier-Williams, Buddhism 109).45 To oversimplify a
model of selfhood as complex in its interpretations as any in Western psychol-
ogy, the skandhas interact and continuously change to produce all of the effects
of identity and psychological experience, including the impression within the
fifth aggregate, consciousness, that there exists in those effects a continuous,
unified personality. Suffice it to say that Theosophy’s model of the self was in
part inspired by but in fact very little modeled upon the Buddhist skandhas.
As in her use of the Dharma, Blavatsky used the skandhas as a justification for
her own purposes.
Other cultural currents moved Theosophists, along with other Victorians,
to view the self or the soul as manifold and fragmented. In the first place,
the foundations of Western metaphysics rest upon a series of models of split
subjectivity, including Platonic idealism, Judeo-Christian soul theory, and the
Cartesian cogito. Thus in one sense Theosophists only were extending a long-
standing and pervasive tradition of splitting and multiplying the self. The impe-
tus to amplify that tradition may have come in part from the perception that it
was failing. It is as if by the nineteenth century a singular spiritual entity called
the soul no longer held sufficient explanatory force to resist the fragmenting
pressures of modernization. Some Victorians apparently felt that a more adap-
tive, sophisticated, and scientific model of the soul was required in order to
stand up to the onslaught of materialism and science, which had thrown its
efficacy into question. Thus, following the lead of Spiritualism, Theosophy
and other late-century hybrid religions, in the process of rescuing what they
perceived to be the embattled soul-theory, demoted the traditional Judeo-
Christian soul to a component within the larger Spirit.
This demotion may have served a number of purposes. It posited a principle
higher than the soul and produced a potentially more powerful champion for
spiritualism against materialism. It also served the rhetorical purpose of claim-
ing superiority over the presumably failing institutions of Christianity. In then
multiplying the self beyond soul-and-Spirit, Theosophy produced a seemingly
more refined, systematic, and technical model of the self, one perhaps that
sounded scientific enough to stand up to science. As Sinnett wrote: “In esoteric
science, as in microscopy, the application of higher and higher powers will al-
ways continue to reveal a growing wealth of detail; and the sketch of an organ-
ism that appeared satisfactory enough when its general proportions were first
discerned, is betrayed to be almost worse than insufficient when a number of
previously unsuspected minutiae are brought to notice” (Sinnett, Esoteric 21).
Theosophy claimed to apply a higher power of perception and analysis to the
human soul.
Furthermore, in a century when the individual subject finally had claimed
the logical birthright of the Protestant Reformation to be its own spiritual
guide, but then had found itself precariously alone and exposed in a post-
Darwinian universe, multiplying the self may have been a method of giving
the individual strength in numbers, as it were. Theosophy’s multiple subjectiv-
ity, in combination with its concomitant cosmology, effectively extended the
boundaries of the self to those of the universe. It personalized an otherwise
increasingly alien and cold universe by projecting the self throughout it. As
Alex Owen’s The Place of Enchantment: British Occultism and the Culture of the
Modern argues in this regard, the last decades of the century in England saw
the birth of “a new spirituality that was intrinsically bound up with the self-
conscious exploration of personal interiority and the modern drive towards
self-realization” (Owen, Place 13). As a result, the “researches of the 1880s
and 1890s had the effect of postulating a new and unstable subjectivity that
bore only a passing resemblance to the dominant Enlightenment concept of
the unified rational subject” (Owen, Place 119). If Theosophy’s multiple self
was in some senses stronger, it also was more fragmented. It was both a symp-
tom of an increased sense of fragmentation in modern, urban, industrial, secu-
lar society and an attempt to understand and heal that sensibility by tying it to
a theory of a higher and more prolific self.
In a similar vein, John J. Cerullo’s The Secularization of the Soul: Psychical
Research in Modern Britain argues that late-century occultisms, followed by
the science they spawned, psychical research, strove to “preserve the soul”
apart from the Judeo-Christian tradition in terms amenable to science (Ce-
rullo 11). The resulting “secular soul” was based upon “a vision of the self
that incorporated what had been the supernatural qualities of the soul into the
worldly persona itself, with the vitalism religion would truly unleash only after
death operational in the here and now” (Cerullo xxi, 11). Cerullo considers
the impact of these efforts on the advent of modern psychoanalytic theory, sig-
naled especially by Sigmund Freud’s The Interpretation of Dreams (1900). The
pioneers of psychoanalysis effectively supplanted the attempts of Spiritualism
and psychical research to preserve an inherently spiritual aspect of subjectivity.
What is missing from Cerullo’s argument, however, is consideration of The-
osophy and other late-century hybrid religions. Prior to and then contempora-
neous with psychical research, Theosophy responded to these same pressures,
though neither by secularizing nor by reducing the significance of the soul.
Even so, Theosophy’s splitting and multiplying of the self was a precursor
of Freud’s well-known multi-component models of consciousness. Freud had
been a corresponding member of the Society for Psychical Research, but then
his theories scientifically explained away the Spirit World by relocating it from
outer space to the interior space of the human psyche, thereby obviating the
work of the Society for Psychical Research.46 Psychoanalysis fully secularized
the soul. Though Theosophy had the opposite objective in theorizing a mani-
fold subjectivity, it prepared the way for the hegemony of a materialist theory
of split-and-multiplied identity for which it likely served as one of the models.
The Theosophical subject can be read as a stage in the emergence of the secu-
lar, fragmented subject of modernism.
Theosophy almost entirely avoided several key Buddhist concepts, in par-
ticular, nirvana. Nirvana was inconceivable within Theosophy except as a ver-
sion of the Hindu Atman, as “absorption into the great universal soul” whereby
a person’s spirit “becomes a part of the integral whole, but never loses it indi-
viduality for all that” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:116, 117). Without delving here into
the Victorian nirvana debate (the subject of a subsequent chapter), I only will
note that the predominant interpretation of nirvana was that it signified noth-
ing more or less than nothingness, total annihilation. This “notion of Nirvana
tormented the nineteenth-century mind”; “how could a religion have ‘noth-
ingness’ or ‘annihilation’ as its summum bonum?” (Godwin 324). Like many
Victorians, Blavatsky could not accept the annihilationist interpretation of nir-
vana. She wrote that “it is useless and unprofitable task to offer to humanity
the choice between a future life and annihilation,” and that “it is not true that
Gautama never taught anything concerning a future life, or that he denied the
immortality of the soul”—the first statement being practical advice to anyone
building a new religion and the second being highly questionable to anyone fa-
miliar with Buddhist scripture (Blavatsky, Isis 2: 25, 319). In thousands of pages,
she makes very little use of the word “nirvana” and no use of the commentaries
on it that were attributed to the Buddha in the sutras. Instead she summarized
with an allusion to the famous line from Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia, that
“nirvana is the ocean to which all tend” (Blavatsky, Isis II 639).
But then the Christian alternative to nirvana as Blavatsky conceived it was
equally unacceptable, namely, the belief in divine judgment possibly resulting
in eternal damnation. This doctrine, which Blavatsky associated with Christian-
ity generally, but which was a feature especially of evangelical and fundamen-
talist Protestantism, is perhaps the one with which Theosophists took greatest
exception. Blavatsky could not tolerate the idea that a human is created for a
single, short lifespan, judged on such small evidence, and consigned on that
basis to an eternal and unrepealable state. To her—as in fact to many Victo-
rian Christians with Broad Church or latitudinarian leanings—this seemed the
opposite of justice. For this reason, Theosophical writings, while indicating
that the ultimate goal of reincarnation is reabsorption into the divine, concen-
trated not on any end-state so much as on the processes of reincarnation and
Devachan as themselves the goal. While in Buddhism, as well as Hinduism,
one predominant understanding of reincarnation is as a return to life neces-
sitated by unfinished karmic responsibilities, the Theosophical interpretation
emphasized the opportunity it presents as a second chance or fresh start. While
neither nirvana nor heaven/hell were tolerable concepts, Devachan offered a
much needed respite from the strife of lived existence followed by a promise
of continued existence. It evaded both the harshest aspect of life and the harsh
reality of death. Devachan, Sinnett writes, is “a life of being paid your earn-
ings, not of laboring for them,” a life where one is united with one’s loved
ones in “companionship with all that the true soul craves for, whether persons,
things, or knowledge” (Sinnett, Esoteric 129, 128). At the same time, how-
ever, Devachan is a state of self-reflection and processing, “the fulfilling of all
the unfulfilled spiritual hopes of the past incarnation” (Purucker 36). One goal
while there is to ready one’s monad or spiritual Ego through spiritual self-
improvement for ascending to a more realized state in the next lifetime. Thus
Devachan is part of the progressiveness of Theosophy in particular and of
Victorian ideology in general. It is progressive, evolutionary, and self-help
oriented. It is a very optimistically Victorian afterlife, and it offers the immea-
surably valuable benefit of functioning also as a prelife.
Blavatsky and other founders of Theosophy and of other late-Victorian hy-
brid religions developed models of the afterlife that they thought, whether
consciously or not, would be appealing to Victorians in search of an alterna-
tive. They wanted this in part, I would speculate, for practical reasons related to
attracting followers, but they also wanted this because they saw no alternative
but to believe in their model, being unable to brook either the Christian or the
Buddhist models as they perceived them. In comparison with the practices of
Buddhism (or, for that matter, devout religious practice of any kind), Theoso-
phy placed relatively little emphasis on spiritual or ethical discipline in the cur-
rent lifetime or on working in the present moment not to acquire additional
karmic debt. Theosophical karma and Devachan contain an element of deferral
of responsibility; they appear to shift karmic debt forward, as it were, without
accruing substantial penalties or interest.47 Devachan reverses the (reverse) psy-
chology that Victorians perceived in the Buddhist conception of reincarnation;
rather than being that which one should work to avoid, it became a reward, a
promise of a better next life. On the one hand, Victorian Theosophy may have
lacked accountability, whether the accountability of the Buddhist concepts it
borrowed or the more familiar accountability of the Victorian moral rectitude
drawn from a long Christian history. On the other hand, as Ronald W. Neufeldt
argues, it is not difficult to believe that Blavatsky worked as hard as she did to
propagate her adaptations of karma and rebirth because she truly believed in
the beneficial effects that “the teachings of Theosophy will have on mankind
and on nations” (Neufeldt 251). If the Theosophical system lacked the rigor
of Buddhist karma and reincarnation, it offered a forgiving and hopeful system
meant to inspire spiritual striving and compassion in an age tormented by its
own evangelical, imperial, scientific, and market successes.
In largely ignoring the founding tenets and canonical doctrines of Bud-
dhism while at the same time drawing upon the authority Buddhism had gained
within Victorian culture, Theosophy may only have been representative of a
broader Western response to Buddhism in the nineteenth century. Founding
Theosophists enlisted a certain credibility from the Victorian construction
of Buddhism. They amplified carefully selected elements of Buddhism that
served their purposes in building a new religion. Often those selected ele-
ments were those that coincided with elements of Victorian ideology. Thus
Theosophists emphasized the self-help aspects of the Buddhist ethical system.
They foregrounded the parallels between the Dharma and Western science,
especially evolutionary theory, but, at the same time, they drew upon an un-
derstanding of the Dharma within Buddhism that seemed to rescue the uni-
verse from the perceived randomness of Darwinism. They centered Theosophy
on the doctrines of karma and reincarnation, though they eschewed the most
demanding aspects of those doctrines within Buddhism while at the same time
using them to critique and remedy the shortcoming they perceived in the doc-
trines of sin, redemption, and heaven/hell. They similarly used the Buddhist
skandhas less for their own meanings than as a vehicle for theorizing a multi-
form self that could rescue the traditional Judeo-Christian soul, though by
demoting, supplanting, and improving upon it. In the process, they provided a
model for the fragmented modern subject. And, they articulated and advanced
Victorian progressivism in the realm of spirituality. Theosophy would not and
could not have taken the form that it did without the Western encounter with
Buddhism, but Buddhism then functioned more as a catalyst for the formation
of a uniquely Victorian religion.
Postscript
The international Theosophical movement, as well as some other late-Victorian

hybrid religions, not only was shaped by Buddhism but then became a vehicle
for a certain construction of Buddhism that disseminated throughout Western
culture. “Esoteric Buddhism” is virtually unrecognizable as Buddhism, and yet
it was this very non-Buddhism that was instrumental in disseminating a popu-
lar understanding of and fascination with Buddhism in the West. This may
be typical of the history of the Western encounter with Eastern religions: ele-
ments of Buddhism enter scholarly, literary, and popular discourses, become
embroiled with a complex array of pre-existing issues and ideologies, subtly but
profoundly shift the terms in which those issues and ideologies are contested,
but remain themselves largely unassimilated. Theosophy failed to assimilate the
majority of the foundational teachings of Buddhism, even those it claimed as its
own, yet it could not have taken the shape that it did without exposure to the
concepts of the Dharma, karma, and reincarnation, or without reaction against
certain other Buddhist doctrines. Exposure to these concepts and doctrines
altered what was possible. It made perceptible new possibilities for revising
or abandoning Christian doctrines and for adapting and combining elements
drawn from Natural Theology, the history of Western occultisms, and even
scientific naturalism. In hindsight, it also raises the perceptibility of what was
utterly inassimilable about Buddhism. It was beyond comprehension for The-
osophists, as for the majority of Victorians, to surrender either the promise of
an immortal soul or the primacy of individual spiritual identity, both of which
only were intensified within late-Victorian hybrid religions. Those aspects of

Buddhism that were most incommensurable, such as karmic responsibility for
all of one’s actions or reincarnation without continuing identity, are thrown
into negative relief in relationship to the dominant ideologies of individual
freedom and personal immortality, by which they were occluded.
Those ideologies in part explain why the cooption of Buddhism by The-
osophy must be recognized as an example of discursive imperialism, the ap-
propriation of the foreign other by turning it into the self. At the same time,
however, I have been most concerned with analyzing the ways in which the
other invaded the self, how Buddhism infiltrated and utterly changed Western
religious discourse. Indeed, in re-expressing Buddhism, Theosophy and other
late-Victorian hybrid religions contributed to a radical reorientation of the
West. While co-opting Buddhism and Hinduism, the founders of Theosophy
at the same time effected a partial re-centering of the mythic map of the an-
cient world from Greece, Palestine, and Rome to India. They backed up their
rhetoric with action in moving the Society to India, a move that both partici-
pated in colonization and also represented a reversal of the imperial impulse.
They worked to reverse a founding assumption of “Western civilization,”
namely, that the flow of civilizing ideas always had been from West to East.
After Blavatsky’s death, Annie Besant came to India as the new head of the
Theosophical Society International. The combination of her experience as a
secular activist and her commitment to the egalitarian principles of Theosophy
challenged the Christian hegemony of the British Raj and contributed to the
cause of Indian nationalism, while of course in other ways simultaneously sup-
porting the Raj and furthering the British colonial mission.48 The formation
of hybrid religions in nineteenth-century Britain performed the double-edged
cultural work of colonizing the religious Other while simultaneously subvert-
ing the authority of the dominant domestic and colonial religious institutions.
They functioned—to extend a metaphor—as mediums channeling the voices

of foreign religions. In doing so, they put both the domestic and the foreign
traditions in the “impossible position” of attempting to translate the self into
the other, the other into the self (Bhabha 118).
Chapter 3
Romances of Reincarnation,
Karma, and Desire
[T]he great empire of the Christian Religion is being assailed.

—MARIE CORELLI, A Romance of Two Worlds (1886)
Departed empire has a metempsychosis, if nothing else has.

—JAMES RUSSELL LOWELL, Fireside Travels (1864)
“No subject claims more earnest attention from religious thinkers in the
present day than the doctrine” of reincarnation, according to A. P. Sinnett, a
recognized late nineteenth-century authority on the subject (Sinnett, “Pref-
ace” v). T. E. Slater, in Transmigration and Karma (1898) argued that no
one can deny “that there is such a law as Karma” and that “it is clearly taught
in the Bible” (Slater 29, 30). I doubt reincarnation was the subject foremost
on the minds of the majority of late-Victorian religious thinkers, and I feel
confident that few Christians of any denomination saw the doctrine of karma
as fully consistent with their concepts of sin and redemption, but the state-
ments by Sinnett and Slater accurately reflected an increasing fascination
with reincarnation and karma as the turn of the century approached. Ac-
cording to Victorian sources, the doctrine of reincarnation had been intro-
duced into Western intellectual discourse through the writings of Pythagoras
(followed by Plato), who had been exposed to Egyptian and Brahmanic
sources.1 After centuries of disregard and suppression in Europe, reincarna-
tion resurfaced as a topic of debate in Britain among eighteenth-century
Platonists, who worked to de-Orientalize the doctrine, purging it of those
Romances of Reincarnation, Karma, and Desire ~ 89
Hindu and Buddhist features antithetical to Western soul-theory and sub-

suming it within Anglican Natural Theology or Deism.2 But it was only after
the encounter with Buddhism in the mid-nineteenth century that reincarna-
tion, attended by the doctrine of karma, fully entered popular consciousness
in the West, becoming a familiar topic in literature and the periodical press.
One primary vehicle for those doctrines was the Theosophical movement,
particularly through the writings of H. P. Blavatsky, A. P. Sinnett, and Annie
Besant. But interest spread far beyond Theosophical circles as reincarnation
and karma infiltrated the discourse of the late Victorian decades and early
twentieth century.
Reincarnation and karma entered popular consciousness especially through
the works of two of the period’s most widely read authors of romance novels,
Marie Corelli and H. Rider Haggard. Both Corelli and Haggard published
multiple best-selling novels, and Corelli is sometimes noted as the first modern
international blockbuster author in English. Over the course of her career, her
novels sold on average 100,000 copies a year, nearly seven times more than
those by authors like H. G. Wells and Arthur Conan Doyle.3 Both Corelli and
Haggard penned a series of novels in which reincarnation and karma figure
prominently, for example, Corelli’s A Romance of Two Worlds (1886), Ardath
(1889), Ziska (1897), and The Life Everlasting (1911) and Haggard’s Ayesha
series, including She (1887), Ayesha: The Return of She (1905), and She and
Allen (1920). As Carolyn Burdett has observed, “Throughout his work, but
with increasing intensity, Haggard explored the idea that the dead do indeed
live again via the process of reincarnation, an idea contemporaneously being
described and espoused by the emerging Theosophical movement” (Bur-
dett 217). The same can be said of Corelli’s work, as will be shown. My analysis
focuses on two novels by each author—Corelli’s A Romance and Life Everlast-
ing and Haggard’s She and Ayesha.
The purpose of this chapter is to investigate how each of these authors

adapted and reinterpreted reincarnation and karma for their readers, serving
as primary conduits for those modified doctrines into their culture. What do
their uses of those beliefs teach us about the hopes and fears of late Victori-
ans and early modernists in relationship to questions of the afterlife at a time
when the traditional notion of heaven had lost some of its surety? But the first
question to be asked concerns the sources from which each author derived
an understanding of those doctrines. What debates about reincarnation and
karma were active in Victorian culture, and what were the prevalent under-
standings? Clearly the ongoing encounter with Buddhism, which began in
the first half of the century with translation and scholarship, and spread in the
second half of the century to the popular and literary presses, was a primary
source. But, it was one among a number of other sources, and sorting out
exactly which aspects of reincarnation and karma came from direct and indi-
rect exposure to Buddhist doctrine is difficult to determine. The obvious next
question is how exactly the novels of Corelli and Haggard represent and use
reincarnation and karma in their plots and in the beliefs and ideologies they
forward. What are the similarities and differences in this regard between these
two authors, and how did the conceptions of each author change between
the early novel and the later novel? The third question, then, is this: in what
ways are the constructions of reincarnation and karma by Corelli and Haggard
consistent with Buddhist doctrines (as available to them in the most authorita-
tive Victorian sources) and in what ways does each author subtly or radically
modify Buddhist doctrine? Those modifications are of key significance in un-
derstanding the Victorian response to reincarnation and karma, in particular,
and to Buddhism in general. How, specifically, did Corelli and Haggard shape
those doctrines for their own purposes, and what were those purposes? How
did their constructions serve Victorian cultural imperatives concerning spiri-
tual life, the afterlife, and the ongoing contest between Christian, Buddhist,
and other alternatives?
The Buddhism of Marie Corelli and H. Rider Haggard
Marie Corelli’s A Romance and Life Everlasting and H. Rider Haggard’s She
and Ayesha are permeated with Buddhism, especially the later novel by each
author. It is quite possible, however, to read them without dwelling upon the
Buddhist content. This certainly is the case for Corelli, who always denied the
influence on her work of other belief systems than Christianity. These novels
are not “about” Buddhism, but Buddhism is pervasive in the margins and
in the background, much as it was coming to be in Western cultures. Each
author made use of certain adaptations of reincarnation and karma that in

ways were uniquely their own and in other ways highly representative of that
culture. These novels could not have been written, and would not have found
the large audiences they did, had the way not been so thoroughly prepared
by the intensified encounter with Buddhism in the immediately preceding
decades.
Corelli’s A Romance and Life Everlasting both focus on a female protag-
onist who is, as the reader comes to understand, spiritually ill. She at first
thinks her illness is physical or psychological. Her lack of health finds expres-
sion as a loss of creative force—artistic force and life force—and as an ennui
that, the novels show, must affect all who have not yet found their spiritual/
romantic soul-mates. It also is a product of the maladies of the age, as Corelli
and many of her contemporaries saw them: materialism, science, and atheism—
the ungodly trinity of the Victorian era. The novels show their protagonists
surrounded by characters who represent these cultural and social ills, that is,
until they encounter a spiritual guide who recognizes their adeptness and so
leads them out of the modern morass and into the hands of a spiritual master.
At the climax of each novel, the master initiates the female protagonist into an
ancient, esoteric spiritual tradition. While claiming that this is none other than
the original, pure essence of Christianity (as opposed to modern institutional
forms of Christianity), the novels prove that tradition to be heavily indebted
to Spiritualism, Theosophy, and Buddhism, as well as to scientific naturalism
and comparative religious studies. In other words, Corelli’s writing constructs
a fictional hybrid religion, as defined in the previous chapter. In both A Ro-
mance and Life Everlasting, the protagonist’s quest is at one and the same
time spiritual and romantic. Spiritual enlightenment is coterminous with find-
ing one’s destined and eternal lover—truly a “romance of two worlds.” The
spiritual progress each protagonist experiences—and progress is a key concept
here—relies upon belief in reincarnation and karma.
But the most obvious presence of Buddhism in A Romance is as a counter-
example to the kind of spirituality that Corelli hopes to exemplify for her read-
ers. Many of her readers recognized elements of Spiritualism and Theosophy
in her novels, and some wrote letters to her enquiring about them. She re-
sponds to them in the introduction to A Romance by vehemently denying
any debt to those sources, claiming precedence in “Christ alone” and citing
Buddhism as her foil: “Were I to initiate them—into some new or old form
of Buddhism—could I show them some poor trickery such as the vanishing of
a box in the air, the turning of a red flower to white, or white to red, or any
of the optical illusions practised with such skill by ordinary conjurers, I might
easily be surrounded by disciples of ‘Occultism’—persons who are generally
ready, nay, even eager to be deceived” (Romance xvii). The first paragraph of
the narrative then alludes to Buddhism as a negative example. It sets up as a
straw-figure to be knocked down a representative atheist and puts these words

in his mouth: “ ‘A candle when lit emits flame; blow out the light, the flame
vanishes—where? Would it not be madness to assert the flame immortal? Yet
the soul, or vital principle of human existence, is no more than the flame of
a candle’ ” (Romance 1). The allusion is to a common metaphor drawn from
Buddhist scriptures for entering nirvana. It was quoted frequently in the nine-
teenth century to summarize, usually in disbelief, that most difficult of Bud-
dhist concepts for Westerners to understand, as in this passage from F. Max
Müller: “True wisdom consists in perceiving the nothingness of all things,
and in a desire to become nothing, to be blown out, to enter into Nirvâna”
(Müller, Chips 227–28).4 The novel characterizes the source of modern reli-
gious doubt in terms of Buddhism.
More directly, A Romance attacks Buddhism as a threat to Christianity in
the following passage quoted within the narrative from the “Electric Creed of
Christianity,” which is the esoteric spiritual science into which the protagonist
has been initiated:
All religions, as known to us, are mere types of Christianity. . . . Buddhism, of

which there are so many million followers, is itself a type of Christ’s teaching;
only it lacks the supernatural element. Buddha died a hermit at the age of
eighty, as any wise and ascetic man might do to-day. The death and resurrec-
tion of Christ were widely different. Anyone can be a Buddha again; anyone can
NOT be a Christ. That there are stated to be more followers of Buddhism than
of Christianity is no proof of any efficacy in the former or lack of power in the
later. Buddhists help to swell that very large class of persons who prefer a flatter-
ing picture to a plain original; who, sheep-like by nature, finding themselves all
together in one meadow, are too lazy, as well as too indifferent, to seek pastures
fresher and fairer. (Romance 241–42)
Employing a line of argument familiar from other Victorian commentaries on

Buddhism (for instance, Richard Phillips’s poem The Story of Gautama Buddha
and his Creed [1871]), this passage first claims Buddhism, then appeals to the
standard West/East dichotomies of active/passive and individual/collective to
indict the inertia of the Buddhist masses relative to the action-oriented Protes-
tant individual, and ends by using that conclusion to underwrite colonization
of the greener pastures and the sheep around the globe. On the other side
of that coin, however, A Romance also posits Buddhism as an invading force
hostile to the West in general and to Corelli’s revitalized Christian mysticism
in particular. In scapegoating Buddhism, Corelli’s hybrid religion draws upon
the very sources it denies, including, in particular, Theosophy, scientific natu-
ralism, and Buddhism (as described in point seven of the definition of “hybrid
religion” in chapter 2).
The novels of H. Rider Haggard, as male-centered action-adventure ro-

mances of empire, were both antithetical and complementary to Marie Corel-
li’s woman-centered romance novels. Haggard himself, following the popular
culture, recognized the logic of being paired with Corelli in this way. In his
diary entry of 22 April 1924 he wrote: “Marie Corelli is dead. . . . I never met
her but once at a party in 1887, I think. . . . Nearly a generation ago there
was a craze for making absurd couplets about well-known people. One of the
best of these ran: Why was Rider Haggard? / Because he must Marie Corelli”
(Haggard, Private 270). He and Corelli had corresponded, and in one letter
she “wrote to Rider saying that she had been ‘dazzled to my very heart’s core
by the splendour of She ’ ” (Ellis 113). She and its first sequel, Ayesha, focus
largely on the same three characters: Horace Holly, a Cambridge don with
knowledge of ancient languages and archaeology; Leo Vincey, his adopted son
and, as we learn, both the genetic descendant and the reincarnation of an
ancient Egyptian priest named Kallikrates; and Ayesha, the “She” of the title,
whom her subjects address as “She Who Must Be Obeyed.” The reader, along
with Holly and Leo, first encounters Ayesha as a supernaturally powerful white
queen ruling in the heart of Africa and then learns that she has preserved her
devastating beauty for the two thousand years since she murdered Kallikrates
out of jealousy over another woman, Amenartas, Leo’s matrilineal forbearer.
Both She and Ayesha are quests by Holly and Leo to find Ayesha, first in ven-
geance to Africa, then in the second novel in adoration to Tibet, to which
Ayesha’s spirit has returned and assumed a different body.
The plots of Haggard’s two novels focus on travel and exploration, exotic
and sublime foreign settings, ancient civilizations and “primitive” religions,
and upon combating and defeating all kinds of racial others. However, both
ultimately are melodramas, perhaps in line with the nautical and military stage
melodramas earlier in the century. They are most concerned with the spiritual
and romantic ties between the major characters, which have been sustained
over the course of two millennia of multiple lifetimes. Both involve a love
triangle between Leo-Kallikrates, Ayesha, and Amenartas, who is doubled in
the first novel by the character of Ustane and reincarnated in the second as
Atene. The driving emotional tension concerns whether Ayesha ever can expi-
ate her former sins, whether Leo can forgive and then master her, and whether
the two can ascend to the spiritual/romantic union for which they are destined
as eternal soul-mates. Thus Haggard’s novels, though virulently masculine,
British, and imperialist, are no less romances than Corelli’s novels—“romance”
both in the sense of a genre category with a history and formal features, as well
as in the colloquial sense of focused on love, sex, and marriage.
Haggard’s novels make more explicit use of Buddhism than do Corelli’s.
Though he professed and his characters profess to be Christians at a most
general, non-denominational level (presumably Anglican), Haggard had no
qualms about recognizing the merits of Buddhism. This is especially true in

Ayesha wherein we learn that She has studied the doctrines “of the prophet
Buddha,” about whom Holly “has spoken to [her] so much” (Ayesha 172).
Early in the story, hoping to over-winter in a “Thibetian Lamasery,” Holly
quotes “sayings of Buddha” and chants “a long Buddhist grace” for the ben-
efit of the Lamas (Ayesha 5, 17). He claims that he and Leo are “Lamas sure
enough . . . who belong to a monastery called the World, where alas! one grows
hungry,” and the head Lama, Kou-en, remarks, “Their feet are in the Path!”
(Ayesha 17). Holly and Kou-en subsequently hold discussions about reincar-
nation and nirvana, and the latter recalls an encounter with Ayesha in one of
his previous lives as an initiate monk at that same monastery when She was
crossing those mountains at the head of a column of the army of Alexander the
Great. Holly comments, “After all, also, as Leo himself had once said, surely
we were not the people to mock at the theory of reincarnation, which, by the
way, is the first article of faith among nearly one quarter of the human race, and
this not the most foolish quarter” (Ayesha 22). In choosing to set the novel in
Tibet, Haggard was invoking common Victorian projections of Tibet as the
ancient seat of spiritual wisdom, ostensibly Buddhist wisdom, but in its West-
ern representation more occult and mystical even than in works like L. Aus-
tine Waddell’s Tibetan Buddhism (1894) (Ayesha 5).5 Haggard was drawing
upon the two most influential Victorian sources of the popular conception
of Tibetan Buddhism: H. P. Blavatsky’s Tibetan “Mahatmas” or “Masters,”
analyzed in the preceding chapter, and Rudyard Kipling’s Tesho Lama in Kim
(1901), analyzed in the next chapter. Like those authors, Haggard was enlist-
ing Buddhism for his own purposes, but, like them, he did not do so without
genuine interest, some knowledge, and respect for Buddhism.
Both Corelli and Haggard made it difficult to determine through which
sources they were exposed to Buddhist concepts and doctrines. Certainly each
of them would have read Edwin Arnold’s ubiquitous poem about the life of
the Buddha, The Light of Asia (1879), but neither of them cites it. Neither the
autobiographical writings by them nor the biographical writings about them
reveal the sources they obviously had consulted.
In his late autobiography, for example, Haggard links the Biblical suggestion
that Elijah returned to earth as John the Baptist to his belief in the resurrection
of Jesus to Buddhist reincarnation, about which he must have read. He wrote
that “some of us, already have individually gone through this process of com-
ing into active Being and departing out of Being more than once—perhaps
very often,” concluding that “like the Buddhists, I am strongly inclined to
believe that the Personality which animates each of us is immeasurably ancient,
having been forged in many fires, and that, as its past is immeasurable, so will
its future be” (Days ii.241).6 In contrast, Corelli, denied throughout her writ-
ings the influence of non-Christian sources upon her mystical Christian theol-
ogy, even though she obviously had sampled these non-Christian sources. Her
biographers followed her lead; none gives a hint of when and where she was
exposed to Theosophy or Buddhism, tending to support her own contentions
about the divinely inspired Christian basis of her spirituality.7 Yet it is clear
that Corelli had read works from comparative religion scholars on Buddhism,
certainly those by the Buddhologist F. Max Müller. In a single sentence from
the “Postscript” to A Romance, she reveals her debt to scientific naturalism
(and Deism), comparative religion, and Spiritualism in the process of deny-
ing them: “The greater and wider the discoveries of Science, the nearer shall
we feel the actual presence of God, and the more certainly shall we know that
what we call the ‘Miracles’ of the New Testament are no ‘legends’ or ‘histori-
cal coincidences,’ as Professor Max Müller has recently observed, but eternal
truths,—the most splendid and positive truth of all being the Resurrection of
Christ, which was intended as the lasting symbol and open manifestation of
the fact that each one of us holds the eternal germ of Spirit” (Romance 356).
Both for Corelli and Haggard, as for some other late Victorians, belief in the
resurrection of Jesus was a stepping stone to belief in reincarnation.
The debt of both Corelli and Haggard to the Theosophy of Madame Blav-
atsky deserves special note. Like Blavatsky, each had early experiences with spir-
itualist phenomena, which then materialized throughout their novels.8 Despite
her many disclaimers, Corelli, “with her adaptation of scientific discoveries,
such as electricity or telecommunication for the religious context . . . and with
her lecturing before the Theosophical lodge at Leeds,” “situated herself within
the creed of a Madame Blavatsky, Annie Besant or Arthur Sinnett” (Kuehn
185). Haggard’s attendance of séances at Lady Paulet’s, and the fact that Maria
Countess of Caithness, a devotee and supporter of Blavatsky, was a member
of that circle, “puts the group Haggard frequented at the centre of the new
occult and Theosophist movements of the 1870s and 1880s” (Coates 38–39).
But the real proof of the influence of Blavatsky on both authors resides in the
allusions to her and her work in their novels.
In the first place, the novels of both authors draw heavily on the figure
of “The Goddess,” Ayesha’s deity, the primary source of which in Victorian
culture was Blavatsky’s Isis Unveiled (1877) (Ayesha 181). Ayesha is a former
high-priestess of Isis and a demi-goddess in her own right, and female char-
acters in Corelli’s two novels approach that status. The spiritual “Master” in
A Romance, Heliobas, and Ayesha as the hierophant of an ancient “wisdom
religion” from Tibet are both unavoidable allusions to Blavatsky’s “Masters”
(Romance 163). Corelli’s characters sometimes clearly echo phrases common
in Blavatsky’s writings, as when Heliobas says, “The world is not ready for
wisdom, and the secrets of science can only be explained to a few” (Romance
210). Corelli, whether intentionally or not, wanted to build a new hybrid re-
ligion with a spirituality similar to Blavatsky’s. This necessitated denying the
influence of Blavatsky all the more. Haggard, far from modeling himself on
Blavatsky, does in part model Ayesha on the “pseudo-Egyptologist Madame
Blavatsky” (Gilbert 133). Ayesha is very much a comparative scholar of re-
ligions, like Blavatsky having “explored the religions of her day and refused
them one by one” in the process of synthesizing her own hybrid—part Egyp-
tian, part Buddhist, part Spiritualist (Ayesha 169). Haggard sets up Ayesha’s
occultism, in particular, her trafficking with the dead as a negative example of
what he saw as a dangerous treading on God’s prerogative. She and Ayesha are
punctuated by earnest religious debates between Holly and Ayesha, in which
Holly represents an ostensibly Christian but Buddhism-inflected position.
I would agree with John Coates’s argument that the ultimate focus of those
debates is, in effect, “the contradiction in Blavatskyan occultism between the
search for power and the quest for spiritual progress,” the two alternatives be-
tween which Ayesha must choose (Coates 51). Coates concludes: “The reader
can detect a coherent pattern in She and Ayesha in which one aspect of the
occult revival, involving the pursuit of power and the artificial prolongation of
life is examined and rejected. There is a corresponding movement through the
two novels towards the other [Buddhist] side of Blavatsky’s confused legacy.
Reincarnation and purification by suffering dominate and shape the narrative
of Ayesha” (Coates 53). My analysis queries and expands upon Coates’s latter
observation. The immediate point is that Blavatsky undeniably influenced both
Corelli and Haggard and that Theosophical texts were an important second-
ary source for those authors’ conceptions of Buddhism, as they were for many
thousands of late Victorians.
Victorian Reincarnation: Definitions, Debates, Types
Not only could Victorians who wrote about reincarnation not agree on the
definition of it, they were uncertain by which name to call it. Many used in-
terchangeably the terms “metempsychosis,” “transmigration,” “rebirth,” and
“reincarnation.” The Cyclopaedia of Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Lit-
erature of 1886 uses “metempsychosis” and “transmigration” as synonyms for
one another. Others recognized significant etymological, historical, or theo-
logical differences among these concepts. “Metempsychosis” was the term most
often used in discussing the ancient Egyptian variant associated with Osiris, the
“myth of the dying god” who returns from death to live again (Cook 37). In
his 1898 article, “The Philosophical Aspect of the Idea of Metempsychosis,”
Robert Cust argued that there were two primary ancient theories of it: “(1) The
continuance of this life in another World,” in which “the future life was very
much as the old one,” and “(2) Retribution, in which the future life depended
on conduct in the present” (Cust 48–49). The latter of these points to the
subsequent emergence in India of the doctrine of karma, which the New Inter-
national Encyclopaedia of 1902–1904 described in these terms: “The Hindu
system is an outgrowth from a general belief in transmigration of souls. There
is at first no notion of retribution connected with this belief. . . . About the sev-
enth century B.C., however, arose the doctrine of Karma . . . which turns this
belief into a system based on morality” (New 170). After the earliest forms of
reincarnation, “Later ages struck out new ideas: (1) Absorption of the Soul, and
practical destruction of its individuality. (2) The Transmigration of the Soul into
a new body. (3) The wandering of the Soul, free from its corporeal covering”
(Cust 49). Absorption of the soul is akin to some Hindu conceptions of the
Atman; the destruction of individual conscious identity between each rebirth
and the assumption of a different body in each points to Buddhist reincar-
nation; and belief in wandering souls suggests nineteenth-century occultism.
With historical precedence, then, interested Victorians debated these and other
distinctions between types of reincarnation, defending or decrying one type or

another.
One recurring debate about reincarnation centered on the question of the
sources from which ancient Grecian thinkers had adopted it, whether it had
originated more from Egyptian or from Indian sources. This was a histori-
cal question, but the answers said as much about Victorian culture as about
ancient history. The majority of Victorian writings that I have consulted em-
phasized the Egyptian origins, following the pattern set by Clement of Al-
exandria (c. 150–215), who in the following statement famously identified
Egypt as the place of origin of the belief in the immortality of the human soul:
“ ‘From Pythagoras Plato derived the immortality of the soul, and he from
the Egyptians’ ” (qtd. in Cook 35–36). A few commentators, especially those
with Theosophical leanings, argued against the Egyptian hypothesis, as did
John Wier, who in his 1894 article “Forms of Belief in Transmigration” wrote:
“At least two centuries before Pythagoras or Pherecydes it appeared in the
Brahmana texts of India. . . . If, as very recent investigation seems to disclose,
the Egyptian doctrine was of the nature of an immediate reward, that country
could not have supplied the pattern” (Wier 566).9 It is curious that Victori-
ans favored the Egyptian side of this debate in light of the fact that according
to some Egyptologists of the time metempsychosis was far from a prominent
feature of Egyptian belief. For example, John Wilkinson’s The Manners and
Customs of the Ancient Egyptians (1837), even in its long concluding chapter,
“Religious Opinions of the Egyptians,” makes absolutely no mention of me-
tempsychosis or transmigration or reincarnation, and the same is true of John
Hoare’s 1879 article, “The Religion of the Ancient Egyptians.” It therefore
is especially telling that some subsequent scholarly and popular commentators
aligned metempsychosis with Christian resurrection.
In Egyptian Ideas of the Future Life (1899), Wallis Budge, Keeper of the
Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities at the British Museum, argued that Osiris
was the first “God of Resurrection” (Budge 13). Far from fearing that this
might undermine the originality of the crucial Christian claim, Budge saw it
as confirmation in advance of the truth of Christ’s resurrection, and the editor
of the 1959 reprinting concluded anachronistically that thus “the Egyptians
were well prepared to absorb the teachings of Christianity” (Budge 7). For a
complex set of culturally embedded reasons, late Victorians felt that Egyptian
metempsychosis was more compatible with their own Christian history and be-
liefs than was either the Hindu or the Buddhist doctrine. This partially explains
why Blavatsky named her first book Isis Unveiled while between the covers
drawing more heavily upon Buddhist than Egyptian terms.
Egyptian metempsychosis was preferable in part because much less was
known about it. It therefore was more of a blank canvas onto which Victori-
ans could paint their own projections and fantasies, as evidenced in such works
as Austen Henry Layard’s Nineveh and Its Remains (1849), D. G. Rossetti’s

“The Burden of Nineveh” (1856), and Richard Marsh’s The Beetle (1897)—
not to mention Blavatsky’s books, Haggard’s novels, and many actual paint-
ings of Cleopatra, mummies, pyramids, etc. This also is to say that Egypt was
not India, about which perhaps too much was known. India was at once too
close and too far away. It was too close economically and politically, espe-
cially after the Indian Mutiny of 1857, and it had drawn uncomfortably close
linguistically and racially. Around the turn of the eighteenth and nineteenth
centuries, philologists had determined the membership of English in the Indo-
European language group. By the middle of the nineteenth century, “the
term ‘Aryan’ had gained common currency, not merely to denote the new
language group opened up through the discovery of Sanskrit, but as an ethno-
graphic concept” linking European people to a race in ancient northern India
(Batchelor 266).10
Some Victorians began to ask themselves in concern if the Indians must re-
place the Greeks as the genetic, cultural, and mythic forefathers of Caucasians.
Thomas Henry Huxley joined this debate with his essay “On the Aryan Ques-
tion and Prehistoric Man” (1890), which attempts to demonstrate that the
ancient Aryan conquerors of the northern Indian peninsula had migrated there
from Europe and, therefore, that “we” came from “us,” not from “them,”
because “they” came from “us” in the first place. Rider Haggard replicated
this move but revised the target from India to Egypt in having Leo trace his
exemplary British heritage back through the genetic and cultural lineage of the
English people to a blonde Egyptian, Kallikrates, and in portraying Ayesha as a
white queen ruling in darkest Africa over a lost civilization called Kôr, in which
“the white memories of a forgotten human history” are preserved as mum-
mies (She 183).11 Thus the small debate that pitted Egyptian metempsychosis
against Indian reincarnation was embedded in a much broader debate concern-
ing nothing less than the origins of the white race and its European heritage. If
not the Greek and Roman origins assumed for two millennia to be the basis of
“Western civilization,” Egypt apparently was a nearer East than was India.
A primary explanation for why metempsychosis was more appealing to
some Victorians than reincarnation was because it lent itself more readily to
alignment with the predominant theory of the soul in the West. By that I mean
the historical, doctrinal, and, ultimately, popular consensus within Christian-
ity most broadly conceived, as well as the causally related history of ontology,
ethics, and metaphysics from Plato to Descartes. To attempt to summarize this
immensely complex historical amalgamation of beliefs: Western soul-theory
depends first on the claim that something called the soul exists. The soul is
separate from the body, a spirit dwelling inside of a body, which in contrast
is mutable, if not in fact degraded, vile, the cause of the “sins of the flesh.”
Soul-theory relies upon a strict body/soul dichotomy. Also, the soul is unique
to human beings, not available to other “sentient beings,” as expressed in

Hinduism and Buddhism. The soul is immortal, eternal, and permanent, an
essential “atom”—the term some Victorians used for it—and thus irreducible
and unchanging. Part of the soul’s immortality is that it comes from the divine
or God and returns to the divine, though, importantly, it is not dissolved into
the divine, losing its singularity. Rather, each soul is individual and unique and
continues to be so eternally.
This belief in the individuality of the soul had significant ramifications for
Victorian debates about reincarnation. In the first place, it suggests that each
life is unique and singular, not repeatable. A soul is born into a body and lives
its single earthly life, upon which the body dies and the soul departs to reside
for eternity in one of two places, heaven or hell, according to the judgment
and grace of God. In the second place, the individual uniqueness of each soul
means that it is tied to personal identity, what some Victorians, prior to Sigmund
Freud, called “the Ego.” Identity continues after death through consciousness
and memory, which is the only practical way that heaven can be a reward or hell
a punishment. As T. W. Rhys Davids wrote in his 1896 analysis of Buddhist
reincarnation: “For two essential conditions of future life, as held in the West,
and indeed wherever the ‘soul’ theory is in vogue, are the continuation of mem-
ory and the consciousness of identity” (Rhys Davids, History 87). The issue
of memory—remembering and therefore being responsible for past lives—was
a recurring motif within Victorian debates about reincarnation. A productive
contradiction resulted, however, between two tenets of soul-theory: the body/
soul dichotomy and the individualism of the soul. Humans find it challenging to
conceive of their individual selfhood entirely divorced from their body. After all,
Jesus, like Osiris, arose from the dead initially in his same body—the “rebirth of
the body” as well as the “rebirth of the soul”—and the most popular concep-
tion of heaven, for obvious practical reasons, is of oneself not only thinking but
looking largely like one’s self but now in a paradisial state. Hence the question
of what exactly continues after death—the soul with identity, the soul without
identity, the soul with the body, or karma without identity—was central to Vic-
torian discussions of reincarnation.
Indian reincarnation, whether Hindu or Buddhist, could not be squared so
easily with Western soul-theory. Hindu reincarnation was somewhat more assim-
ilable for Westerners. Eighteenth-century Platonists—followed by Romanticists,
Transcendentalists, and then adherents of late-century hybrid religions—saw a
parallel between the final re-absorption of the soul into the Atman and the
Deistic conception of unity with the divinity of the natural universe. Of critical
importance was that Hinduism maintained the existence of the soul, its immor-
tality, and its dualistic relationship to the body. At the same time, however, Hin-
duism and Buddhism posited multiple lifetimes through reincarnation, and this
presented a series of troubling issues that were debated among those Victorians
interested in the subject. For the sake of convenience, I will treat these issues
as follows: the problem of heaven/hell, the problem of karma, the problem of
identity/memory, and the problem of progression/retrogression, though they
in fact were not entirely separable within Victorian discourse.
Reincarnation, accompanied by the doctrine of karma, appears to challenge
God’s prerogative of judgment in the first place by delaying any final determi-
nation until after many lifetimes (if in fact God—or Brahm, Vishnu, Shiva—
even exercises a final judgment). While Hindu reincarnation could be thought
to retain the carrot of something akin to heaven, it seemed to do away with
the stick of hell, replacing it with inescapable return to another earthly life—
not such a terrible option, a Westerner might think. This made what I will
call the moral economy of karma and reincarnation more appealing to some
Victorians than the economy of sin and redemption. As Haggard’s Ayesha puts
it when Leo suggests that “our faith” requires hell as incentive and punish-
ment: “ ‘Nay, . . . there is not hell, save that which from life to life we fashion for
ourselves within the circle of this little star. Leo Vincey, I tell thee that hell is
here—aye here! ’ as she struck her hand upon her breast” (Ayesha 115).
The nineteenth century witnessed a widespread turning away from Cal-
vinistic theology, even within evangelical churches and chapels. The idea of
eternal damnation increasingly became untenable as unjust to humankind and
unworthy of a loving God. Blavatsky did not mince her words on the subject:
“And now I advise you to compare our Theosophic views upon Karma, the law
of Retribution, and say whether they are not both more philosophical and just
than this cruel and idiotic dogma which makes of ‘God’ a senseless fiend; the
tenet, namely, that the ‘elect only’ will be saved, and the rest doomed to eternal
perdition!” (Blavatsky, Key 215). Both Corelli and Haggard, though professed
Christians, concurred. As Corelli’s protagonist insists in Life Everlasting, “the
idea of Eternal Punishment is absurd” (Life 222). While for the majority of
practicing Christians the problem of heaven/hell would have excluded rein-

carnation from consideration, for some indeterminate minority it made karma
and reincarnation more appealing as an alternative ethical system.
The problem of karma itself was yet more complex and troubling. Karma
directly supplants the hand of Providence and effectively obviates the neces-
sity of faith. As E. D. Walker succinctly defined it in Reincarnation: A Study of
Forgotten Truth (1888), “the doctrine of Karma is that we have made ourselves
what we are by former actions,” and T. W. Rhys Davids observed that accord-
ing to it “no exterior power can destroy the fruit of a man’s deeds, that they
must work out their full effect to the pleasant or the bitter end” (Walker 285;
Rhys Davids, Buddhism 103–4). Victorian karma emphasized the other side
of the historical dichotomy within Protestantism between faith and works. It
therefore appeared to some to reinforce certain of their key ideologies, namely,
self-help, ethical responsibility for one’s choices and actions, and the individual
freedom and right to reap the rewards of one’s own work/works. Proponents
of karma were quick to reference Saint Paul’s injunction, which Bertha Vyver,
Maria Corelli’s partner, cites in her biography of Corelli: “In Ziska she deals
definitely with the law of Karma, and, giving as her two chief characters a re-
incarnated man and woman, works out the hypothesis to its logical conclusion
that, ‘as we sow, so do we reap’ ” (Vyver 265). The “law of karma,” as Victo-
rians knew it, also appeared to promise something that many longed for as an
alternative both to the unpredictability of God’s judgment and the random-
ness of Darwinian selection: a justly ordered universe. Blavatsky summarized
the point: “For Karma in its effects is an unfailing redresser of human injustice,
and of all the failures of nature; a stern adjuster of wrongs; a retributive law
which rewards and punished with equal impartiality”; it is “that unseen and
unknown law which adjusts wisely, intelligently and equitably each effect to its
cause, tracing the latter back to its producer” (Blavatsky, Key 198, 201). But
these potentially attractive attributes of karma could not outweigh the fact that
it appeared to negate the essential singularity of the human soul by denying the
continuance of individual identity and its memory.
The problem of identity/memory was the largest concern that Victorian
commentators upon the subject had about karma and reincarnation. Even if
they might entertain the idea of the dissolution of the soul into the manifold
divine after the spiritual progress of many lifetimes, they could not accept the
loss of conscious selfhood between reincarnations. They understood that in
Buddhist reincarnation, in particular, the “personal connection between the
individual who died and the individual re-born is by no means viewed as a
physical or psychic identity, but simply as a moral and personal relation of
cause and effect,” “cause-effect” being one translation of “karma” (Eitel 74).
T. W. Rhys Davids summarized the situation bluntly: “In no case is there, there-
fore, any future life in the Christian sense. At a man’s death, nothing survives
but the effect of his actions; and the good that he has done, though it lives
after him, will rebound, not to his own benefit, as we should call it, but to the
benefit of generations yet unborn, between himself and whom there will be no
consciousness of identity in any shape or way” (Rhys Davids, Lectures 108–9).
Some Victorians challenged the fairness of holding a person responsible for ac-
tions in a previous life that one could not remember. But what disturbed them
at root was the idea that their identity might not be eternal, as promised by
Western soul-theory, since “people naturally think . . . their own self is so impor-
tant that it cannot possibly ever cease to be, and they are constantly concerning
themselves with the ways and means of making that little self of their own happy
and comfortable for ever” (Rhys Davids, History 82).
Those interested in the subject therefore fixed on the issue of memory as
the index of continuing conscious identity. Some commentators appealed to
this issue in rejecting especially Buddhist reincarnation. T. E. Slater argued that
it was “unphilosophical,” because “The human soul stores up its knowledge

in memory; it never loses an atom of the information which it has once ac-
quired”; how is it possible then “that the soul, having such marvelous powers
of recollection, never remembers anything of former births?” (Slater 22). Some
others, especially those concerned with merging reincarnation into a revised
Christianity, simply posited a version that retained identity and memory, as
here: “Reincarnation demonstrates that the personal ego, which permanently
maintains its identity amid the constant changes of the bodily casement and
the mental consciousness, must continue its individuality” (Walker 276). Yet
others acknowledged rare exceptions of people remembering former lifetimes
(the Buddha and the Dalai Lama were discussed as examples) or suggested
that all instances of déjà vu were lingering traces of past lives. Annie Besant,
in the section of her book Reincarnation (1893) titled “The Proofs of Rein-
carnation,” included these points as minor justifications among a list of four-
teen proofs. William Knight in “The Doctrine of Metempsychosis” (1878)
suggested that “If the soul has pre-existed, what we could . . . anticipate are
only some faint traces of recollections, surviving in the crypts of memory”
(one thinks of the crypts of Kôr) (Knight 430). And Mortimer Collins’s novel
Transmigration (1883) tells the story of a man who dies, sojourns in a celes-
tial spirit-world (where he flirts with an “Irish poetess, a flame half red half
green”), and returns to earth as a newborn with complete memory of his for-
mer life (M. Collins 114). The protagonist explains: “I leant that almost all
the spirits coming from earth, or any other star passed through the water of
Lethe, and forgot altogether what had previously occurred to them. None
were excepted, save those who heartily believed in the doctrine of metempsy-
chosis; I, being such a believer (the only one during more than a century),
was to be rewarded by a return to earth, with my memory of previous events
perfectly clear” (M. Collins 113). E. D. Walker’s conclusion on this subject is
especially telling, since it proposes to answer the identity/memory problem

by referring it to the progression/retrogression problem. Walker writes, “The
strongest objection to reincarnation, our ignorance of past lives, is met by the
fact permeating all nature and experience, that progress depends upon forget-
fulness” (Walker 305).
One form that Victorian progressivism took was as belief in progressive spir-
itual evolution. Commentators on karma and reincarnation agreed that it was
a system of ethical self-development, which to some seemed only a short step
from the idea of progressive spiritual evolution. A few objected to that idea
on the grounds that it implied a primitive, perhaps animalistic, origin for the
human soul, which Western soul-theory promises is eternal and unchanging,
but most who wrote about the subject agreed with E. W. Keely, who in the
1898 article “Christianity and Reincarnation” wrote: “If we accept physical
evolution why must we not also accept spiritual evolution? . . . As there must
have been a succession of improved forms, in an ascending scale, to bring

man to his present perfectness of form, so must there have been a succession
of incarnations, to make the soul that knows God, a fit soul for its improved
temple” (Keely 235). Keely, similar to nearly all others writing on the sub-
ject after Blavatsky, was influenced by the Theosophical model of karma and
reincarnation. That model, as outlined in the preceding chapter, was more
Lamarckian and Social Darwinist than Darwinian, but it succeeded in enlisting
scientific progressivism to support the notion of upward spiritual evolution
through multiple lifetimes. Blavatsky and her disciples argued for continuing
spiritual individuality and unified spiritual identity in the absence of conscious,
personal memory and identity. One of those disciples, Francesca Arundale,
summarized as follows: “The process of human interior growth, of that which
I have elsewhere spoken of as the Evolution of the Higher Self, is a process
of infusing the permanent consciousness—which is the Higher Self . . . —the
individuality of the man, the continuous individuality—with capacities, not
with specific recollections of events” (Arundale xxi). Another follower, William
Burnet Tuthill, in “Development Through Reincarnation” (1896), wrote that
“this development of the soul to its limit in God is the sublime teleology of the
universe,” and that such a process requires “countless ages of accumulation”
(Tuthill 256).
Arundale and Tuthill’s statements represent the basic logic underlying the
Theosophical argument: (1) as demonstrated both by ancient spiritual wisdom
and by modern science, the natural universe and the human soul were created
for the purpose of evolution toward spiritual perfection and union with the
divine source; (2) such evolution only could occur over a very long timeframe
and is not conceivable within a single human lifetime; therefore, (3) reincarna-
tion must be a divine/natural law of the universe.12 Many Victorians, whether
Theosophists or not, whether attracted to reincarnation or not, were quite
ready to answer Darwinian evolution with some form of progressive spiritual

evolution. Belief in progress, “the primary dogma of the Victorian period” that
was itself “almost a substitute religion,” offered a consoling promise of a rosy
future for Britons, not only as a people, a nation, and an empire but spiritually
too (Buckley 41, 42).
But some Victorians—not least among them Thomas Carlyle, Matthew
Arnold, and Thomas Henry Huxley—noted the complementary dark side of
progressivism. It was expressed, for instance, in the Darwinian observation that
a species or, by popular extension, a nation or a race might fail to adapt and
thus perish. It surfaced toward the end of the century in debates about “de-
generation,” which in the process of celebrating the superiority of Caucasian
peoples and nations revealed a horror (Kurtz’s word in Joseph Conrad’s Heart
of Darkness) of being overwhelmed by the masses of “inferior” races or classes,
or, worse, of degenerating back toward the dark-skinned origins of the species.
Hindu and Buddhist doctrines of reincarnation appeared to offer a corollary:

“karmic debt” resulting in spiritual devolution. The flashpoint on this subject
was the thought of being reborn as an animal, such as a pig or worm. This
violated Western soul-theory by denying the privileged status of human beings
within God’s creation: that humans were “created in His image.” As a result,
nearly all who advocated reincarnation and karma denied the Hindu or Bud-
dhist element.
Jerome A. Anderson, in Reincarnation, A Study of the Human Soul In its
Relation to Re-Birth, Evolution, Post-Mortem States, the Compound Nature of
Man, Hypnotism, etc. (1896), wrote that “reincarnation is quite distinct from
metempsychosis, when this is understood to mean the return of the soul to
earth through human or animal bodies,” because the soul can never “retro-
grade into an animal condition” (Anderson 66). The second of Annie Besant’s
proofs of reincarnation was that it explains why the human’s “persistent intellec-
tual and moral Ego, learning by experience, developing through millenniums,”
can evolve morally while animals cannot, “why a man progresses while animals
remain stationary” (Besant, Reincarnation 72). Besant also offered as her four-
teenth proof that the “rise and decay of races is best explained on the hypoth-
esis of reincarnation,” accompanied by the notion of collectively shared karma,
what Blavatsky had analyzed as “Distributive Karma” (Besant, Reincarnation
88; Blavatsky, Key 203). The degree of racism in this aspect of Theosophical
reincarnation is not transparent; Theosophists did not identify Anglo-Saxons
as the most spiritually evolved, and the potential for racial degeneration could
apply to them. Chi-ming Yang argues in this regard that in eighteenth-century
England “reasoning animals and reasoning Easterners—from Egypt to China—
thus seem to be the two sources of anxiety for theorists of transmigration; the
two represent a hybridity against which exemplary Western rationality, that of
Pythagoras, and of human uniqueness, must be defended” (Yang 23). This
may be borne out in the continued trend in the nineteenth century to de-
Orientalize reincarnation and karma by forcing them into alignment with West-
ern soul-theory. As Victorians imposed their progressivism upon reincarnation,
they tended to suppress its degenerative or devolutionary elements.
The least compatible element of karma and reincarnation with Western
soul-theory was the belief unique to Buddhism that the soul is not what con-
tinues from reincarnation to reincarnation because in the first place no such
thing as a soul exists. Within canonical Buddhism, belief in the soul is a delu-
sion counter-productive to spiritual practice that results from clinging to indi-
vidual identity or selfhood. The scholar Ernest J. Eitel outlined the distinction
between Hindu and Buddhist doctrine on this point:
In the place of Brahma, the fountain source and goal of Brahmanic metem-
psychosis, he [Buddha] substituted therefore the idea of Karma, i.e. merit and
demerit. Again, whilst the Brahmans believed each human soul to originate in
and to be part and parcel of Brahm, Buddha avoided the term soul entirely and
taught, that about the primitive origin of each human being nothing further
could be said but this: that each living being, after the dissolution of its previous
embodiment, comes again into mundane existence and is endowed with a new
body, in accordance with its moral merit or demerit accumulated in a previous
form of existence. (Eitel, Buddhism 73)
Also writing in the 1880s, T. W. Rhys Davids wanted to be very clear about
what Buddhist reincarnation was not. Observing that no mention is made
in the Pali canon of “transmigration of souls,” he concludes that he has “no
hesitation in maintaining therefore, that Gotama did not teach” that doctrine
(Rhys Davids, Lectures 91). What he did teach, “would be better summarized, if
we wish to retain the word transmigration, as the transmigration of character,”
but “it would be more accurate to drop the word transmigration altogether
when speaking of Buddhism, and to call its doctrine the doctrine of Karma,”
since “Gotama held that after the death of any being, whether human or not,
there survived nothing at all but the being’s ‘Karma,’ the result, that is, of
its mental and bodily actions” (Rhys Davids, Lectures 91–92). Victorians who
wrote about reincarnation and karma had a clear understanding of Buddhist
doctrine on this point, and the large majority of them rejected it. Buddhism,
the primary source of these concepts within nineteenth-century discourse, the
source that finally brought them into common usage, offered the version of
reincarnation with which Victorians least could agree.
Returning finally to the question of definitions, I propose the following
distinctions. They emerge less from any dictionary than from my reading of
British culture, but they unavoidably also reflect the demands of convenience
for a consist terminology, even at the risk of oversimplification. I do not offer
myself as an expert either on ancient Egyptian religion or on Hinduism of any

period; I therefore proffer these definitions as partial and provisional, if reason-
ably accurate to the context of nineteenth-century Britain. These, then, are the
types of “reincarnation”—most broadly understood—that I have observed in
Victorian discourse:
• Metempsychosis. Often used as a synonym to “transmigration” but with special

reference to ancient Egyptian doctrine. It may imply rebirth both of body
and of soul. Conscious identity continues intact. It is non-progressive in that
its primary concern is neither ethical development nor spiritual evolution.
• Hindu reincarnation. A soul-based system according to which after many dif-
ferent bodily reincarnations a soul sheds mundane attachments and is reab-
sorbed into the divine. Whether conscious identity and memory are retained
between lifetimes, they are dissolved back into the Atman upon the attainment
of moksha, or salvation. A soul may progress or retrogressive on the merits of

its karma.
• Buddhist reincarnation. A non-soul-based system involving multiple reincar-
nations between which one’s karma continues but in the absence of identity
or memory or of anything like a soul. Progression or retrogression may occur
on the merits of karma.
• Transmigration—Often used synonymously with other terms, this is a catch-
all term signifying any form of out-of-body travel. It may mean travel from
and return to the current body; travel by a spirit following death, whether to
the spiritualist Summerland, another planet, or anyplace other than the tradi-
tional heaven; or migration of one’s soul to another body (as in possession).
Identity and memory must remain, and this may limit ethical development
and spiritual evolution.
• Resurrection. The rising from earthly death of a deity or an elected soul to
fully assume divine status. Christian proponents of reincarnation argued that
“the birth of Christ is the proof of reincarnation” and that for all humans
“there will be many resurrections and not one, which is the transmigration
of souls” (Keely 237; Howard 143). It implies the “re-rising” of the origi-
nal physical body, as in the case of Lazarus, but is associated with spiritual
ascension to heaven, as believers expect to do at the Last Judgment. It is an
historically specialized variant of metempsychosis.
• Immortality. The eternal spiritual life attributed to the traditional Judeo-
Christian heaven or hell, but also involving transmigration, through which the
soul quits the body, travels to one of those locations, and resides there. Con-
scious identity and memory continue intact. It is not progressive in the sense
used elsewhere: faith supersedes merit or works, and a soul has no opportunity
following death to improve itself, remaining either blissfully or tormentedly
fixed for eternity.
• Demi-immortality. Perpetual earthly life in which the same body continues

to live indefinitely, usually without aging. The “demi-immortal Oriental”
became a common figure in the nineteenth century. The vampire (zombie,
mummy) is an unholy version in which the body continues without the soul.
Retained identity and memory are key. Wisdom may accrue, but not spiritual
evolution: the soul is stuck with itself.
• Inheritance. In a figurative sense reinforced by Victorians, genetic reincarna-
tion, the passing down from generation to generation of blood, property,
and aspects of identity, often involving the “sins of the father” or the privi-
leges of primogeniture and often assumed to be naturally fated or divinely
sanctioned. Theorists of reincarnation drew genetic inheritance into that de-
bate by frequently comparing and contrasting the two.13
I will use these definitions in the following analysis.
Reincarnation and Karma in Novels by Marie Corelli

and H. Rider Haggard
The novels of Corelli and Haggard each portray multiple forms of reincarna-
tion, and it is not always easy to keep them straight. Each author’s earlier
novel makes sometimes indirect but unmistakable allusions to Hindu and/
or Buddhist reincarnation and karma, but their later novels make explicit and
unapologetic use of those doctrines, both in plot and in theme. In the case of
Corelli, this may represent a surprising reversal. In her Life Everlasting, the
protagonist is given a vision of what could only be her karmic record: “I saw
more plainly than I have ever seen anything in visible Nature, a slowly moving,
slowly passing panorama of scenes and episodes that presented themselves in
marvelous outline and colouring. . . . I realized to the full that an eternal record
of every life is written . . . and that not a word, not a thought, not an action is
forgotten!” (Life 172). She then takes a transmigratory journey back through
some of her own past lives during which she views a filmic series of scenes of
herself and Santoris, her soul-mate, struggling unsuccessfully to realize their
immortal love in ancient Egypt, in early-Christian Rome, in Renaissance Flor-
ence, and so forth chronologically. She later says, “the soul pictures, presented
to me were only a few selected out of thousands which equally concerned us,
and which were stored up among eternal records” (Life 207). In each, she
“recognized my own face in hers!—and in his the face of Santoris! ” (Life 173).
Because bodies as well as souls have been reborn, this is more metempsychosis
than reincarnation. The same is true in Haggard’s novels in the case of the
reincarnation of Kallikrates as Leo Vincey, since the two share not similar but
identical physical bodies. As Ayesha pulls the sheet in a magician’s gesture from
the perfectly preserved mummy of Kallikrates, she turns toward Leo saying,
“Kallikrates is dead, and is born again!” (She 240). Leo’s metempsychosis is
further complicated by the fact that he also is the lineal descendent of Kal-
likrates. Thus three types of reincarnation are combined in him: metempsy-
chosis, inheritance, and a modified Hindu or Buddhist reincarnation. In both
Haggard and Corelli, the presentations of karma and of multiple rebirths with
spiritual progress between them clearly draws upon Indian reincarnation. The
novels of both authors mix-and-match Buddhist terms with Hindu concepts
with Egyptian metempsychosis with various types of transmigration.
Among a number of unexpected similarities between the novels of these
two very different authors are the terms they use to deny the existence of death
by referring to reincarnation. Corelli’s protagonist in A Romance has come to
learn that “There is no death,” a claim remarkably similar to Ayesha’s state-
ment in Haggard’s She that “There is no such thing as Death, though there
be a thing called Change” (Romance 215; She 149). This thread is picked
up again in Corelli’s Life Everlasting when Aselzion, the Master, tells the
protagonist that “there is no Death, but only Change” and later that “Death
is an impossibility in the scheme of Life—what is called by that name is merely
a shifting and re-investiture of imperishable atoms” (Life 251, 316). This does
not describe a single life and a single death, accountable before God, but a
series of lives at different stages of evolution accountable to one’s own soul.
Thus for Santoris in Life Everlasting, “each individual life is a perpetual suc-
cess of progressive changes, and he holds that a change is never and can never
be made till the person concerned has prepared the next ‘costume’ or mortal
presentment of immortal being, according to voluntary choice and liking”
(Life 140). “Change” is a coded term for the progressive transition between
lifetimes (and, perhaps, between worlds). In A Romance, Heliobas speculates
that if he fails in his current life to reach the same spiritual plateau as his be-
loved sister Zara, then “I might begin over again in some other form, and so
reach the goal” (Romance 216). This is reincarnation, though not Buddhist
reincarnation, since the implication throughout is of continuous memory and
identity between lives.
This denial of death correlates with a downplaying of heaven/hell and even
of God’s role as creator and judge. One might expect that heavenly immortal-
ity would figure prominently in works in which characters profess themselves
to be Christians, but even the word “Christian” is used infrequently in Hag-
gard’s novels, and Corelli makes heavier use of it in her prefaces than do her
characters in the novel. Though the life of Jesus is offered as an exemplar in
A Romance and by Holly in She, that too fades by the writing of Life Ever-
lasting and Ayesha. Both authors de-emphasize heaven/hell, or those terms,
especially Corelli, who strenuously argues against the Calvinistic “Gospel
of . . . Fear” and its hell in favor of the universal “Law of Love,” according to
which a benevolent Creator would not condemn His creations (Romance xxiv,
31). Though he periodically defends Christian ethics (sometimes merged with
Buddhist ethics) to Ayesha, Holly’s hope of heaven is itself very nebulous,

for, as he comments, it too may “prove but a kindly mockery given to hold us
from despair” and humans at death may “be gently lowered into the abysses of
eternal sleep” (She 119).14 The corollary of heaven in Corelli’s A Romance is
called the “Electric Circle,” the celestial/spiritual hub of the universe overseen
by the “Central Intelligence” (Romance 203, 236). Both Haggard and Corelli
use multiple euphemisms to revise the traditional “God,” for example “the
Power that made you” or “O Divine Power of Love and Life”—“power” being
a key term for both (She 12; Life 330). Death, God, and heaven have not been
removed, but they have been decentered to accommodate other alternatives.
In A Romance, when the protagonist takes her culminating “transmigra-
tion” into interstellar space to the “Electric Circle,” she herself is placed in the
role of the creator of a populated planet, witnesses the people’s slide into un-
faithfulness, and is ordered by a “Great Voice” to choose between destroying
them or “suffer[ing] the loss of heavenly joy and peace, in order to rescue thy
perishing creation” (Romance 172, 195). She assumes the self-sacrificing role
of Jesus, oversteps the judgment of God-the-Father, and effectively replaces
Him with a more thoroughly anthropomorphized and now feminized Christ-
figure, herself. She also encounters spiritual beings floating in space who are
“expiating sins of their own in thus striving to save others—the oftener they
succeed, the nearer they approach to Heaven”—a concept very loosely paral-
lel to karma (Romance 183). The backstage stand-in for death/heaven/God
is made clear in this passage in Life Everlasting from the creed of the occult
Christian order into which the protagonist has proved herself worthy for ad-
mittance: “We know that from the Past, stretching back into infinity, we have
ourselves made the Present,—and according to Divine law we also know that
from this Present, stretching forward into infinity, we shall ourselves evolve all
that is yet To Come. There is no power, no deity, no chance, no ‘fortuitous
concurrence of atoms’ in what is simply a figure of the Universal Mathematics.
Nothing can be ‘forgiven’ under the eternal law of Compensation [karma],—
nothing need be ‘prayed for’ ” (Life 330). Reincarnation and karma have all
but occluded God and heaven/hell.
Nevertheless, the types of reincarnation that are most apparent in the nov-
els of Corelli and Haggard are transmigration and demi-immortality. Trans-
migratory soul-travel is the central spiritual initiation in each of the Corelli
novels. In Haggard’s Ayesha, we learn late in the story that Ayesha’s soul had
not “reincarnated in Central Asia—as a female Grand Lama,” as Holly and
Leo first thought, but rather that a “transference of her spirit from the caves
of Kôr to this temple” in Tibet had occurred so that she might take posses-
sion of the dying body of the one-hundred-and-eight-year-old high-priestess,
whose position she then assumes (Ayesha 14, 135). After Leo passes the test
of the “loathly lady” by choosing Ayesha in a withered body over the young
and beautiful Atene, Ayesha prays to “Thou inevitable Law that art named
Nature . . . the goddess of all climes and ages” for the return of her “immortal
loveliness” (Ayesha 127, 128). Following dramatic lighting effects, her preter-
naturally young and beautiful body is restored to her through what appears
to be a form of resurrection. As we find, her body is not quite mortal, but,
then, it has not been for two thousand years. Ayesha is a case of the demi-
immortal Oriental, a figure that will reappear in Guy Boothby’s Dr. Nikola
(1896), James Hilton’s Lost Horizons (1933), and a range of twentieth-century
texts, especially films in what I call the martial-arts-Buddhism subgenre. She is
less reincarnated—though she has reincarnated prior to her current “last, long
life”—than perpetually incarnated (Ayesha 121). This was the result of her hav-
ing been led by the Goddess Isis to the “womb of the Earth” and there having
bathed in the phallic fire of the “Fountain and Heart of Life,” “the bright
Spirit of the Globe” (She 286, 287).15
This fiery fountain of youth has its corollary in the novels of Marie Corelli.
In A Romance, it is electricity, by which each individual’s “electric Germ of the
Soul” is plugged into the divine-universal energy source, the “Electric Circle”
(Romance 249). In Life Everlasting, Corelli has kept pace with science by shift-
ing her metaphor to atomic radiation, the recently recognized “Eternal Spirit
of Energy . . . throughout all Nature” (Life 35). The human “Spirit, called the
Soul” is “an exhaustless supply of ‘radium’ ” (Life 376). Corelli even uses ra-
dioactive half-life as a metaphor for the “change of form” the spirit undergoes
upon the death of one body, continuing into a new life (though she might
not have liked this comparison if she had known about the future problems
of radioactive waste disposal) (Life 20). In Corelli’s novels, as in Haggard’s,
contact with the naturally supernatural Power grants demi-immortality. San-
toris explains his preternatural youthfulness—a topic of fascination to all the
other characters (and apparently to the aging author)—by saying, “The soul
is always young,—and I live in the Spirit of youth, not in the Matter of age”
(Life 127). Spiritual health naturally leads to physical health, and any human
who accesses genuine spiritual energy can be demi-immortal, “can himself be
Divine, in the Desire and Perpetuation of Life” (Life 372). Thus Corelli, like
Haggard, foregrounds two types of reincarnation in particular: transmigra-
tion and demi-immortality. The broader point to be made is that in doing
so both authors invoke, respectively, “the spirit of Nature” and the “Spirit of
Life or Nature”—represented by radium and the “fire of life”—as a feminized,
natural-theological or transcendentalist alternative to the traditional patriar-
chal God (Life 17; Ayesha 103). The portrayal in these novels of other types of
reincarnation therefore participates in a Deistic worldview, and this in turn is
the foundation for forwarding Hindu and/or Buddhist karma and reincarna-
tion as the “natural law” of an ethically ordered universe.
In line with other Victorian interpreters of karma and reincarnation, Corelli,
and Haggard to a lesser degree, saw this ethically ordered universe as a pro-
gressive system. In Corelli’s electrical and then radiational theology, the divine
spark, “the germ of a soul or spirit,” “is placed there to be either cultivated
or neglected as suits the will of man”; it is “indestructible; yet, if neglected, it
remains always a germ; and, at the death of the body it inhabits, goes elsewhere
to seek another chance of development” in another lifetime and in another
physical form (Romance 114). Corelli departs from the interpretation pre-
ferred by many Theosophists and by Victorians in general: she recognizes and
endorses the possibility of spiritual retrogression. She writes in her “Prologue”
to Life Everlasting that “a faulty Soul, an imperfect individual Spirit, is likewise
compelled to return to school and resume the study of the lessons it has failed
to put into practice” (Life 34–35). Her system posits this doctrine: “Eternal
Punishment is merely a form of speech for what is really Eternal Retrogression.
For there is a Forward, so there must be a Backward. The electric Germ of the
Soul—delicate, fiery, and imperishable as it is—can be forced by its companion

Will to take refuge in a lower form of material existence, dependent on the
body it first inhabits” (Romance 249). Corelli theorized her own version of
hell as karmic devolution, which, she threatens, could lead all the way down
to lower life forms.
However, Corelli’s account is not Hindu karma and reincarnation, and it is
even farther from Buddhism. In the first place, Corelli remains wedded to the
faith side of the traditional Protestant faith/works dialectic. One of her key
terms, “will,” ultimately refers to faith, as she explains in her 1896 “Preface”
to A Romance: “To ensure Progression the Will must be guided by faith in
Christ,—and Christ only; equally to ensure Retrogression, the Will is cen-
tered on SELF,—and rapidly works degradation on the whole Spiritual Germ”
(Romance x). There is Christ, and there is self, and this leaves no place for com-
munity or society or accountability for one’s actions and intentions in relation-
ship to others, the latter being closer to a common understanding of karma. In
the second place, the punishment that Corelli attaches to spiritual retrogres-
sion is tied to continuation between lifetimes of individual consciousness and
personal identity as signaled by memory. In Corelli, there is one thing that the
reincarnating soul “can never escape from—Memory,” for “Eternal Retrogres-
sion means that the hopelessly tainted electric germ recoils further and further
from the Pure Centre whence it sprang, always bearing within itself the knowl-
edge of what it was once and what is might have been” (Romance 250). The
self becomes its own hell, or its own heaven. This doctrine is enacted in the
protagonist’s journey back through her past lives in Life Everlasting, in which
“each individual Spirit preserves its individuality and, to a certain extent, its
memory” (Life 395). Corelli revised reincarnation and karma to accommodate
her very Western and Protestant investment in redemption through faith and
in the sanctity of individual identity.
Related themes appear in Haggard’s novels, to which the issue of memory

is central. Ayesha repeatedly characterizes herself with phrases like “memory
haunts me”; she languishes, because for her “life cannot bring forgetfulness!”
(She 156, 165). Not only has she committed acts worthy of remorse and “kar-
mic debt”—the murder of her lover Kallikrates foremost among them—but
she has lived in a state of suspended memories for two millennia. This would
be Corelli’s “Eternal Retrogression,” except that there have been no rein-
carnations, no “change,” and that is the problem. It is as if Ayesha’s willful
choice to live perpetually without aging, death, or reincarnation has stymied
her spiritual growth by disallowing the development for which only multiple
lives might provide adequate opportunity for progress. Her soul has been stuck
in time, forced to relive without revising. Her demi-immortality stands in the
way of the spiritual progress that Haggard, like Corelli, saw as the potential of
reincarnation and karma. Perhaps this is why Haggard, at the end of She, chose
to regress Ayesha so dramatically. In showing Leo that it will be harmless to

him, she steps for a second time into the “fire of life” and in a moment is with-
ered to her actual age. Holly’s servant Job screams, “Look!—look!—look! She’s
shrivelling up! she’s turning into a monkey!” (S 293). If she will not progress
through death and rebirth, then she must devolve into that Darwinian form
that many Victorians most feared to find swinging in their family trees. While
Corelli concentrates on examples of spiritual progress, acknowledging spiritual
retrogression as a cautionary tale, Haggard focuses on spiritual stagnation and
the consequences of a failure to progress.
At the end of Ayesha, Ayesha does appear to progress, or at least to be re-
warded with the promise of eternal union with Leo in an after-death state, but
it also seems as if Haggard purposefully muddies the waters concerning her
spiritual condition. Early in that novel, the Buddhist monk, Kou-en, speaking
to Holly about his quest to find Ayesha, passes a judgment upon her that the
text supports: “Doubtless you will find her there as you expect, and doubtless
her khama, or identity, is the same as that which in some earlier life of hers
once brought me to sin [in desiring and worshipping her, as she has the power
to make any man do]. Only be not mistaken, she is no immortal; nothing is
immortal. She is but a being held back by her own pride, her own greatness
if you will, upon the path towards nirvana. That pride will be humbled, as al-
ready it has been humbled” (Ayesha 29). Ayesha had mocked not only Kou-en
but Buddhism as lesser than her power. Readers of She know that she has been
humbled, and readers of Ayesha witness her choice to humble herself to Leo
and to moderate her lust for global political and religious conquest. As crit-
ics have observed, Ayesha’s feminine power poses a threat to (white, British)
masculinity, and her potential for conquest poses a threat to Queen Victoria,
the British Empire, and the world, all of which she promises to conquer.16 The
text is clear: Ayesha’s dangerous powers and desires demand domestication.
Her love for a highly masculine and thoroughly British man, Leo, is the only
force on the planet capable of doing that. Yet, even after Leo takes her “sins
upon [his] head” and “redeem[s]” her with his love, figuratively converting
her pagan Goddess worship to his masculine Christianity, she persists in serv-
ing the “mighty Motherhood . . . of Nature” (Ayesha 142, 143, 195). What
is worse from the perspective of Haggard, who in his youth had “burned his
fingers at that game” of Spiritualism, Ayesha holds communion with the spirits
of the dead (Haggard, Cloak 16).
The dilemma that Haggard set for himself was how to redeem and reward
Ayesha, while still showing that her dabbling in realms of power—spiritual
and political—beyond the proper sphere of woman and of mortal is dangerous
to moral order and to spiritual evolution. For this purpose he turns in clos-
ing to Buddhism. The last word spoken in the novel is given to Kou-en, who
says, “Yes . . . doubtless you are all winning merit [“good karma”]; but, if I may
venture to say so, you are winning it very slowly, especially the woman” (Ayesha
198). Ayesha finally “is assessed by the standard of actual Buddhism,” and there
is “a toughness in this Buddhist coda to the novel” (Coates 53). Ayesha has
not, as she thinks, entirely slipped her responsibility for her karmic debt. Hag-
gard could not send Ayesha to heaven, and, despite mixed professions of faith
by himself and by his characters, he did not trust Christian doctrine to provide
sufficient correction and guidance. Though he remained skeptical about Bud-
dhism as well, he ultimately turned to karma and reincarnation as the source of
ethical order in the universe and the adjudicator of spiritual progress.
Especially in their later novels, Ayesha and Life Everlasting, Haggard and
Corelli turned to karma and reincarnation. They explored an array of types of
reincarnation, reflecting and constructing the Victorian fascination with and
confusion about this topic. But they each settled ultimately on their own ad-
aptations of the Victorian understanding of Hindu reincarnation and Buddhist
karma. They significantly reinterpreted those doctrines in order to maintain
certain ideological commitments. They each worked, though quite differently,
for at least passing compatibility with the spirit of Christianity as they very
liberally interpreted it. Each insisted on key tenets of Western soul-theory and
Protestant individualism, in particular, the continuation of identity and, there-
fore, memory between reincarnations and in the final state. Corelli decried
all non-Christian religion, while at the same time working to incorporate ele-
ments of Spiritualism, Theosophy, Hinduism, and Buddhism into her own
fictional hybrid religion. Haggard himself, as well as characters in his novels,
preached religious tolerance, but he struggled to understand the similarities
and contradictions between his tacit Anglicanism, his attraction to the occult,
and his belief in reincarnation and karma.
Though Haggard was more comfortable in acknowledging the Buddhist
origins of those doctrines, Corelli was more successful than Haggard at squar-
ing them with Christian faith, though Christian faith had to be significantly
modified for this purpose as well. Perhaps one explanation for this difference
is that Corelli felt much more comfortable then did Haggard with the femi-
nine aspects of the divine, to which both were deeply attracted. Corelli may
well have thought it blasphemous to speak in reverence of “the Goddess,”
but she worked in her writing to feminize God-the-Father and to portray a
woman’s religious perspective, though her definitions of femininity and wom-
anhood would have matched neither those of the New Woman nor those of
conservative Victorian propriety. Haggard’s novels sometimes appear to en-
dorse the Goddess, redefined in a Deistic sense as “universal motherhood” and
“Nature,” but at the same time he was terrified of female spiritual power and
ultimately aligned it with the occult as too divergent from order and author-
ity, both religious and social. Finally, though Buddhism was the most recent
and available source to Corelli and Haggard on karma and reincarnation, the
source with which they were most familiar, its version of those doctrines was
the one least assimilable by them and by Victorians in general.
The Economy of Sin/Redemption versus the Economy

of Karma/Reincarnation
One of the strongest associations that Victorians made between Christianity

and Buddhism was that both Jesus and the Buddha taught love, compassion,
and forgiveness. After that important similarity, however, the two religions
hardly could be more different. Speaking at the broadest level about what I de-
fined in the introduction to this book as the “historical and doctrinal consensus
of Christianity,” it is a religion of the soul that subscribes to a strict body/soul
dichotomy and relies upon the concept of sin (“fallenenss”), which is associ-
ated especially with the body. It is based ethically on the Ten Commandments
and other teachings of the Bible but places greatest emphasis—varying from
denomination to denomination—upon the necessity of faith, whether in the
God of the Old Testament, Christ of the New Testament, the Trinity, or a
Unity. Faith is the primary means of seeking divine forgiveness of sin, through
which the individual soul may receive “redemption” and “life everlasting” in
heaven. Summarized at a similarly broad level, the canonical Buddhism to
which Victorians were exposed views the concept of the soul as a self-delusion;
obviates the body/soul dichotomy; has no true corollary to the concept of
sin; posits no creating or judging deity and therefore no redemption; describes
lived reality in terms of the cycle of karma and reincarnation; offers no eternal
heaven but rather the liberation/annihilation of nirvana; and describes the
road to attaining nirvana through the founding teachings of the Buddha, the
Four Noble Truths, and the Noble Eightfold Path (as outlined in appendix 2).
The moral economy of sin/redemption and that of karma/reincarnation are

fundamentally and nearly irreconcilably different one from the other.
A second point concerns the place of suffering and desire in the two reli-
gions. To recall the story of the life of the Buddha, Siddhartha Gautama was
born a prince whose every desire was satisfied; he denounced the pleasures
of his wealth and position to take up the begging bowl and spent six years in
extreme asceticism, attempting to eradicate desire through disciplined medita-
tion and bodily mortification. When this failed to bring him enlightenment,
he conceived of the way of the Middle Path, avoiding both the extremes of
self-denial and the extremes of self-indulgence. Soon afterward he sat under
the Bodhi Tree until he attained enlightenment, and his realization became the
basis of his first sermon, which contains the revelation of the Four Noble
Truths. Summarized briefly, they are: (1) Dukkha, suffering exists, to live is to
suffer; (2) Samudaya, the origin of suffering is desire for perpetually fulfilled
desire, desire for permanence, which means clinging to the self and the soul, or,
in postmodern terms, the unsatisfiable longing for presence; (3) Nirodha, the
cessation of suffering is possible by adhering to the path of non-attachment and
non-aversion, equanimity, and openness; (4) Magga, that path is the Middle
Way, as detailed in the Noble Eightfold Path, in which neither gratification nor
mortification is either craved or feared.
Understanding the nature of human desire and suffering is a foundational
concern of Buddhism (which is one reason why some chose to think of it more
as a psychology than a religion). In contrast, in nearly all forms of Christianity,
human suffering is ascribed in part to human fallenness—“original sin”—and
ultimately is inexplicable except as “God’s will” and as his means of instruc-
tion, to which the appropriate response is deepened faith. According to this
logic, “Man’s suffering . . . means that God is seeking man’s good”; it should
be understood as “a Divine discipline, designed to bring us out of evil . . . ; a
means of training for perfection”; and “the proof of God’s love” (Slater 17,
18). Human fallenenss is tied also to the body/soul dichotomy, in that the
“desires of the flesh” are a source of sin, perhaps the original source in Eve’s
willful desire. The body and its desires always threaten to become sinful, and
they must be disciplined or corrected in order to permit the soul to be wor-
thy of redemption. The explanations for and responses to suffering and desire
within the economy of sin/redemption differ profoundly from those within
the economy of karma/reincarnation.
A third point concerns one of the oldest and most persistent stereotypes about
the Orient in general, about Indians especially, and perhaps particularly about
Buddhists: they are passive, tradition-bound, fatalistic, ruled by the masses, and
thus ultimately nihilistic, in contract to Westerners, who are active, progres-
sive, optimistic, individualistic, self-determining, and guided by certain faith in
future redemption. Victorians replicated and reinforced these stereotypes, even
if a few questioned them. Thus, for example, Ernest J. Eitel, in his 1884 work
on Buddhism, wrote: The Buddhist “counts death—if he may rest after that—a
blessing. To suffer, to suffer even the fiercest tortures of hell . . . is not half as
frightful an idea to him as to be forced to act, to labour, to work for aeons”
(Eitel 76). The respected Sanskrit scholar Monier Monier-Williams concurred:
“According to Christianity:—Work the works of God while it is day. According
to Buddhism:—Beware of action, as causing re-birth, and aim at inaction, indif-
ference, and apathy, as the highest of all states” (Monier-Williams, Buddhism
560). “Action,” or “action/reaction,” is one way to translate the word “karma”;
it is the total of what remains as a result of a sentient being’s “mental and bodily
actions” (Rhys Davids, Lectures 91–92). Because Buddhists hope to avoid the
generation of karmic debt, Victorians concluded that theirs must be a religion
of passivity rather than activeness in the face of suffering and thus naturally leads
to senseless annihilation rather than to heavenly reward.
To summarize, from one predominant Victorian point of view, Buddhists

utterly failed to recognize the urgency and rewards of faith in God; they settled
for “intellectual enlightenment” rather than genuine faith (Monier-Williams,
Buddhism 544). As atheists, they denied the existence of the soul, which put
them on the materialist side of the pervasive spiritualism/materialism dichot-
omy, the side of the body. Logically, then, like all Orientals, they might have a
tendency toward and aptitude for the pleasures of the body, or so one popular
imperialist fantasy runs. However, Buddhists, even more than other Orien-
tals, were too passive, too “languid,” to actively seek their ambitions and de-
sires. They lacked will (“will” being one of Corelli’s key words). They were
indolent when they should have worked, and they sought surrender—in the
spiritual as well as military sense—when “we” would have fought. These famil-
iar dualisms—body/soul, faith/works, active/passive—inform the following
analysis of how Marie Corelli and H. Rider Haggard struggled with issues of
suffering and desire. In that struggle, each author juxtaposed the economy of
sin/redemption to the economy of karma/reincarnation and could not resolve
the contradictions between the two.
The Suffering of Desire and the Desire for Suffering
Love and desire, sex and death—these are the perennial preoccupations of
romance fiction, as they are of the novels of Haggard and Corelli, though with
a superadded spiritual dimension. Another striking parallel between the novels
of these two authors is that they similarly invoke a universal “law of love.” In
Corelli’s A Romance, “The Universe is upheld solely by the Law of Love,”
and in Life Everlasting the “Force behind the Universe is Love” (Romance 31;
Life 371). In Corelli, romantic love between two people, in order to be more
than animal passion, must be a spiritual love originating from that universal,
divine Love. The plots of Haggard’s two novels are driven by the love between
Leo/Kallikrates and Ayesha, and Leo professes himself a believer that “Love
is the law of life” (Ayesha 29).17 Though Corelli’s law of love does not have
exactly the same referent as does Haggard’s, both authors take Buddhism as
one foil against which to define that law. In A Romance, the opposite of the
“law of love” is the “Law of Universal Necessity.” It signifies materialism and
atheism and alludes to a combination of the Darwinian “law of natural selec-
tion” and the Buddhist “law of the Dharma” (Romance 2). Cellini asks: “Who
portioned out this Law of Necessity? What brutal Code compels us to be born,
to live, to suffer, and to die without recompense or reason? Why should this
Universe be an ever-circling Wheel of Torture”—as in the title of the Bud-
dha’s first sermon, the “Setting into Motion of the Wheel of the Dharma”
(Romance 65). He characterizes this antithesis to the “law of love” in terms of
“eternal nothingness,” a reference to one Victorian understanding of nirvana

(Romance 65). In Haggard’s Ayesha, She mocks Kou-en and his Buddhism in
similar terms: “So your Path is renunciation and your nirvana a most excellent
Nothingness which some would think it scare worth while to strive so hard to
reach. Now I will show you a more joyous way, and a goddess more worthy of
your worship. . . . The way of Love and Life . . . that makes all the world to be,
that made you, O seeker of Nirvana, and the goddess called Nature” (Ayesha
22–23). But here is the first of a series of related, unresolved contradictions
that I will identity: both Corelli and Haggard tie their “law of love” to the
“law of karma,” the doctrine undergirding the naturally just and presumably
loving universe they theorize; yet, they derived karma in part from the very
Buddhism that supposedly also opposes the “law of love.” The “law of love,”
through its associations with Buddhism, is a conflicted concept in the novels
of Corelli and Haggard.
As one might predict, desire is a primary source of that conflict. Corelli
and Haggard confront the dilemmas of desire and suffering in a number of
strikingly similar ways. Each portrays characters—Zara and Leo, respectively—
who are romantically engaged with quasi-deities or demi-immortals and who
die in a rapture as a result of physical contact with them. Both authors insist
on the separation between “spiritual desire” and physical desire, while indis-
tinguishably intertwining the two (Romance 55). Both dwell upon the bodily
features of extremely sensual women who deny—if not loathe—sexuality: Zara
in A Romance and both Ayesha and Atene in Ayesha. Both situate their main
characters between two choices, surrender to desire and transcendence of de-
sire, and then show that neither choice is acceptable or achievable. In Corelli
it seems clear that the “animal passions of the mere man”—in this case, Prince
Ivan’s passion for Zara—are “to be met with pity and forbearance,” approach-
ing disgust (Romance 295, 297). Yet, Zara, whose tempting lips and “rounded
bosom” figure as prominently in this novel as Ayesha’s do in Haggard’s novels,

and who, like Ayesha, has received demi-immortal youth charged with sexual
magnetism, shares nightly embraces with a “beautiful and all-powerful angelic
spirit”: her destined soul-mate who jealously guards her against the touch of
mortal man (Romance 167). Spirits apparently are as passionate and sensual as
those with bodies.18 To complicate the issue further, Corelli develops a theory
of desire that aligns it to will, and, therefore, to faith. “We are the arbiters of
our own fate. . . . Our WILL is positively unfettered. . . . We must ourselves de-
sire to love and obey—desire it above all things in the world ” (Romance 337).
Indeed, desire demonstrates the existence of a blissful afterlife, according to
an especially tautological version of the Deist “argument from design”: “The
mere fact of the existence of a desire clearly indicates and equally existing capacity
for the gratification of that desire; therefore, I ask, would the wish for a future
state of being, which is secretly felt by every one of us, have been permitted
to find a place in our nature, if there were no possible means of granting it? ”
(Romance 336). It would seem, then, that gratification and denial of desire are
equally to be desired. Desire is all, and, because both unsatisfiable and poten-
tially sinful, it is the cause of all suffering.
Haggard makes this dilemma even more explicit and certainly more male-
oriented. Leo and Ayesha suffer one of the most protracted cases of unquenched
desire in literature, as Haggard chronicles two thousand years of delayed con-
summation. As Richard Pearson argues: “The narrative trajectory of Haggard’s
romances is usually towards this fulfillment of the male desire, towards orgasm
and the preparation for the possession of desire. And yet the narrative always
in the end thwarts this desire and leaves the male protagonist in a state of un-
satisfied frustration and prolonged repetition of desire” (Pearson 228). Near
the end of Ayesha, after Leo has redeemed Ayesha, physically as well as spiritu-
ally, with his love, he presses for the complete union of the marriage bed. But
there is a catch, and it is the same one that Zara experiences in A Romance:
“Man and spirit cannot mate” (Ayesha 133). The body/soul dichotomy must
be strictly observed. Therefore, the driving tension of the plot is the suffer-
ing of a desire that must not be satisfied. Corelli creates a similar dynamic in
Life Everlasting, in which the protagonist and her lover, Santoris, have been
struggling through many lifetimes to realize their union. The text focalizes a
desire in order to bar its fulfillment for reasons to which it repeatedly refers but
refuses to answer.19 We are told only that “It may be thousands of years before
such a meeting is consummated” (Life 170). In Haggard’s novel, Leo finally
is prepared to give up everything—even co-rulership of the world with Ayesha
as his warlord queen, even the demi-immortality that is guaranteed him when
they revisit the “fire of life”—for just one night of connubial bliss with “the
splendours of [her] breast” (Ayesha 187). Against Ayesha’s warning, Holly
performs a hasty, generic ceremony: the bride and groom embrace in both
“flesh and spirit,” and Leo is “withered in Ayesha’s kiss” (Ayesha 189). Sex
with spirits is at once irresistibly desirable and fatal. These novels fan desire—
that of the characters and, therefore, that of the readers—to a feverish pitch
only to demonstrate that it must never be gratified, not in this world.
This contradiction is restated in Haggard’s prequel written fifteen years
after Ayesha. In She and Allan, Ayesha says to Allan: “Hast never heard that
there is but one morsel more bitter to the taste than desire denied, namely,
desire fulfilled? Believe me that there can be no happiness for man until he at-
tains a land where all desire is dead” (She and Allan 276). Allan says, “That is
what the Buddha preached, Ayesha,” to which she responds: “Aye, I remem-
ber the doctrines of that wise man well, who without doubt had found a key
to the gate of Truth, one key only, for mark thou, Allan, there are many. Yet,
man being man must know desires, since without them, robbed of ambitions,
strivings, hopes, fears, aye and of life itself, the race must die, which is not the
will of the Lord of Life” (She and Allan 276).20 The Buddha was correct in
theory, but he was unacceptably passive for Westerners. British spirituality, like
British economic and foreign policy, must be progressive and active, if not in
fact manly and “muscular,” in the sense of Victorian “muscular Christianity.”
The “Law of Love and Life,” underwritten by the natural order of the universe
that Corelli’s protagonist honors, and Ayesha worships as the “Spirit of Life
or Nature,” demands the active pursuit of desire, even though—or especially
because—desire must lead to suffering.
In fact, this makes perfect sense within the moral economy of sin/redemption.
The apparent contradiction of the dual imperative to pursue desire actively while
with equal vigor suppressing it serves a particular logic. In short, to the extent
that suppression intensifies desire, it might double the pleasure, as Freud and
Foucault might have pointed out. This effectively translates within the econ-
omy of sin/redemption into increasing sin—as pleasure/suffering—in order to
increase redemption. Though simplistic, it is not inaccurate to say that sin must
precede redemption just as redemption requires sin. It follows that the greater
the sin, the greater the redemption and, therefore, the greater the glory and
grace of God. Within this paradigm, the proof of God’s existence depends ab-
solutely upon human fallenness and the divine redemption it necessitates and
justifies. Desire and suffering evidence the former and require the latter. Thus
desire and suffering are equally central to the economy of sin/redemption as to
the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism, but for diametrically opposed reasons. As
Monier-Williams summarized the point in 1889, while the Buddha urged his
follows to overcome suffering by overcoming desire, Christ “told them to glory
in their suffering—nay, to expect the perfection of their characters through suf-
fering”; while Buddhism strives for “annihilation of the suffering body,” Chris-
tianity undertakes the “glorification of the suffering body,” making the body
of Christ on the cross into a sacred fetish (Monier-Williams, Buddhism 545).
Within the economy of karma/reincarnation, one objective is to reduce human

suffering by way of understanding and controlling desire. Within the economy
of sin/redemption, desire, sustained and heightened by the perpetual deferral
of gratification, is good because it leads to suffering (as a form of pleasure), and
suffering is good because it is the means to and the proof of salvation.
Corelli and Haggard complicated the already immensely complex set of
paradoxes within the economy of sin/redemption not only by juxtaposing it
to the economy of karma/reincarnation but by working to reconcile the two.
The attempt at reconciliation required them to work both with and against
predominant Victorian assumptions about Buddhism, such as its assumed pas-
sivity, and criticisms of its doctrines, such as their materialism and perceived
emphasis on works rather than faith. Thus the phrase “acquiring merit,” most
familiar to Victorians from Tibetan Buddhism, came to signify selfish material-
ism. As Ernest Eitel argued: “For the theory of a man’s destiny, being entirely
determined by the stock of merits and demerits accumulated in previous forms

of existence, constitutes Buddhism a system of fatalism; whilst the idea of im-
proving one’s future prospect by works of supererogation, converts morality
into a vast scheme of profit and loss” (Eitel 83–84). Monier-Williams objected
to the Chinese Buddhist “determination of storing up merit—like capital at a
bank,” while William H. Rattigan wrote approvingly that Buddhism teaches
“that we be tolerant of others, that we never think or say that our own religion
is the best, that we do not esteem one’s self better than others, that we practice
reverence and humility, dwell free from hatred in the midst of those who hate
us, and that we do not love the wealth of the world but accumulate a merit
balance in the bank of Karma, or good works” (Monier-Williams, Buddhism
546; Rattigan 309). This shared terminology—“profit and loss,” “capital,”
“bank”—points to Max Weber’s thesis in The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of
Capitalism (1930), which concerns the parallel historical development in Eu-
rope of Protestantism and capitalism and the resulting ideological interpene-
tration of the two. With that in mind, Rattigan’s “do not love the wealth of the
world” points further to what I believe was the most insoluble contradiction
that the economy of karma/reincarnation highlighted within the economy of
sin/redemption. Here is one way of stating that contradiction: the body of
material banking and the soul of spiritual banking had to be in the same instant
mutually reinforcing and utterly dissevered one from the other.
One must not confuse body with soul or works with faith, which is precisely
what some Victorians perceived that Buddhism had done. The most appealing
feature of Buddhism to Victorians was the rigorousness of its ethical system,
but this also meant that Buddhism emphasized works over faith. As W. S. Lilly
wrote in 1905 on the topic of karma: “To say that what a man sows here he
shall reap hereafter, falls far short of this tremendous doctrine. His works are
himself: he is what he has sown” (Lilly 204). While this collapses the necessary
differences of body/soul and works/faith, it also points to the ethical active-

ness of Buddhism. It points out that the economy of karma/reincarnation is
less flexible and forgiving than the economy of sin/redemption. At the risk
of overextending the economic metaphor, according to the economy of sin/
redemption, human beings accrue the debt of sin upon birth and are extended
credit toward that debt by divine grace (Christ’s sacrifice), but, when the bill
comes due, one can appeal to God’s mercy for redemption and the debt will
be forgiven. In theory, however heinous one’s deeds may have been, a death-
bed confession or a genuine profession of faith will guarantee admission into
heaven. Some Victorians made this very criticism, as in this passage from Fran-
cesca Arundale in 1890: “Western systems of religious teaching lead men to
believe that eternal bliss or eternal misery is the result of one life upon earth—
that deeds of hatred and cruelty may be blotted out by repentance and faith at
the last moment before death, and that a life of evil may bring the same result
to the individual as a life spent in the exercise of unselfish devotion to others,

the evil acts of a whole life being shorn of their consequences by the belief of
an hour” (Arundale 35).21 In contrast, karma, as understood by the majority
of Victorians who wrote about it, never is forgotten or forgiven; it must be
relived until fully confronted, expiated, and understood, at which point its ef-
fects cease. Few envied this level of accountability: karma/reincarnation was
perhaps too demanding. It placed faith in danger of appearing as a convenient
out. It implied that faith, however passionately desiring and suffering for salva-
tion, may be passive in comparison to the system of karma and reincarnation.
It was not that Buddhism—the presumed exemplar of Oriental apathy and
fatalism—was too passive; rather, it was too active in its ethical standards and
spiritual practice.
And here is where the traditional dualisms upon which both Western soul-
theory and British imperial assumptions about East and West begin to un-
ravel. By drawing the economy of sin/redemption into comparison with the
economy of karma/reincarnation, Victorians like Haggard and Corelli drew
attention to a contradiction between the essential dichotomies of faith/works
and active/passive such that faith appeared relatively passive and works the
more appropriate sphere for spiritual activeness. To raise this contradiction was
to raise for critical scrutiny the implicit historical contract that had emerged
over the course of centuries in northern Europe between Protestantism and
capitalism. To simplify for the sake of argument, that contract was that the for-
mer would mind things spiritual, the soul, and leave the latter largely free—as
in laissez-faire—to mind things material: the body, the economy, the empire,
and works. But then the European encounter with Buddhism imported a new
threat that might expose and collapse that contract. The moral economy of
karma/reincarnation made explicit a claim that what Western culture increas-
ingly had sublimated as capitalism became the dominant ideology: that bank-
ing in the material realm of economics might pose an obstacle to banking on

redemption. If the pursuit of desire and the resulting accrual of material credit
might produce karmic debt, then a positive entry on the worldly side might
necessitate a negative entry on the spiritual side. This was all but inadmissible,
the Biblical camel and needle’s eye notwithstanding. Spiritual progressivism
was fine and good, but only as long as it did not pose a serious threat to the
progress of “the market” that in the nineteenth century began to assume the
abstract autonomy by which it would come to be invoked as a natural or God-
given force. Thus Buddhism had gotten things exactly reversed: it wrong-
headedly prescribed banking in the spiritual sphere while wrong-headedly
proscribing against banking in the material sphere. Its spiritual banking must
be wrong, because material banking had to be right. It was not that Buddhism
was too materialistic, as many Victorians charged; Buddhism was not materi-
alistic enough.
The economy of karma/reincarnation also foregrounded the discomforting

question, which concerned Christians across denominations long had raised,
that perhaps Christian institutions were not active enough in regulating those
aspects of industrialism and commercialism that were antithetical to the prin-
ciples of compassion, charity, and equality before God. As I have shown in
the previous chapter, a central concern of the age was the perceived encroach-
ment of materialism upon spiritualism. No one was more concerned than those
Christians in evangelical churches and chapels who throughout the century
were instrumental in effecting social reforms (for example, anti-slavery, “poor
laws,” child labor, temperance, suffrage, etc.). Nevertheless, by the nineteenth
century Protestantism had nearly completed the historical accommodation of
itself to coexistence within capitalism, an accommodation that effectively made
it into the ideological underpinning of capitalism and capitalism into an es-
sential complement to it.
Marie Corelli, throughout her writings, protested against this very condi-
tion of modern society as she saw it. She repeatedly casts as one of the primary
nemeses of spirituality the “magnificent institution of free trade, which has
resulted in a vulgar competition of all countries and all classes to see which can
most quickly jostle the other out of existence” (Romance 62).22 Corelli herself
might have pointed out that the major Christian “holy day” was well on its way
to becoming synonymous with the most important seasonal “holiday” in the
annual cycle of capital exchange. This accommodation depended upon keeping
up the traditional dualisms of soul/body, faith/works, and redemption/sin. It
was that split that made it possible for a society increasingly defined by laissez-
faire and consumer capitalism to maintain, and be maintained by, a Christian
based culture. It made it possible—nay, inevitable—that Scrooge repent and
be saved. It made it possible for the active pursuit of desire to be justified by
redemption in the end. It made it possible for the disproportionate suffer-
ing of a class, gender, race, or nation to be rationalized as “God’s will” to be

compensated not on earth but in heaven. To the extent that it might open this
arrangement to scrutiny, Buddhism and its economy of karma/reincarnation
hardly could have posed more of a threat to the established order of Church
and State.
The preceding argument also offers an answer to the question of why many
Victorians persisted in casting Buddhism as the epitome of passivity. In order
to sustain this stereotype, they chose to emphasize certain unassimilable ele-
ments of Buddhism, such as nirvana, and chose in the main to overlook the
foundational teachings of the Buddha, who in canonical scripture says relatively
little about nirvana. Perhaps some were stopped by the first of the Four Noble
Truths—that to live involves suffering—which instantly appeared too pessimis-
tic for their progressive optimism, or by the second, which seemed to them to
suggest that all desire, whether fervent spiritual desire or the desire for wealth
and progress, had to be squelched. What they ignored in particular was the
Buddhist response to the natural condition of suffering and desire offered in
the third and fourth Noble Truths, which prescribe the Middle Way, and in the
Noble Eightfold Path, which teaches how to live that Middle Way. T. W. Rhys
Davids, as well as other scholars, understood the centrality to Buddhist teach-
ing of the Middle Way, as he summarized it in this passage: “The discourse [of
the first sermon] laid stress on the necessity of adhering to the ‘Middle Path’;
that is to say, in being free, on the one hand, from ‘devotion to the enervating
pleasures of sense which are degrading, vulgar, sensual, vain and profitless’; and
on the other, from any trust in the efficacy of the mortifications practiced by
Hindu ascetics, ‘which are painful, vain, and useless’ ” (Rhys Davids, Buddhism
47).23 The Middle Way, according to sources available to Victorians, prescribes
avoiding the extremes of desire and suppression of desire in order to avoid the
extremes of suffering; it does not prescribe passivity in the face of suffering—
quite the contrary—nor the denial of all desire.24 As I have shown, it was in fact
the economy of sin/redemption that stressed the opposite of any middle path
by prescribing the intensification of both extremes at once: actively pursued
desire combined with mortification of desire. I therefore suggest that it was
not the perceived passivity (fatalism, pessimism, nihilism, etc.) of Buddhism
that was most threatening to Victorians, though this was the convenient an-
swer they frequently gave. It went deeper than that.
What made the economy of karma/reincarnation most threatening was that
it offered to obviate the foundational dualisms of body/soul, works/faith, and
active/passive upon which much within Western culture and society—its meta-
physics, its religions, its social philosophies—relied for historical validation and
ongoing justification. Two and a half millennia before postmodern theory,
Buddhism had deconstructed in advance the Judeo-Christian, Platonic, and
Cartesian dualisms as counterproductive to spiritual growth, precisely because
they increase the extremes of desire and suffering. Buddhism offered a third
term, a Middle Way. But to perceive it as such might be to perceive the po-
larities upon which Western thought depended as possibly unnecessary and
perhaps unethical. This would mean perceiving the twin imperatives of sin
and redemption, consuming desire and expiating desire, worldly accumula-
tion and spiritual purification, the work week and one weekend morning, not
as essential or natural but as artificial oppositions that served specific socially
constructed and ideologically maintained interests.
Because Buddhism discursively threatened those interests, it was naturally
necessary to read it as the opposite of the values of the institutions invested in
those interests, which included both the institutions of the economic powerbase
and the institutions of the spiritual powerbase.25 Thus once it entered Victorian
culture, Buddhism necessarily came to function as a straw-figure drawing fire
that might otherwise hit those institutions of materiality that operated under
the rubric of “the market” or those of spirituality that operated within church
and chapel. Neither could its Middle Way be acknowledged nor could it be
cast in the opposite direction from passivity as the ethical activism some Victo-
rians recognized it to be. To do the latter would risk highlighting the inability
of the economy of sin/redemption to curb the un-Christian aspects of. the
economy of capital. In a sense, Buddhism was necessary as an evil other, less
because of any radical differences from certain ethics of Christianity than be-
cause of its very similarities to those aspects of Christian doctrine and practice
that stood in direct opposition to capitalist ideology, but had not succeeded
in standing up to that ideology. In the second place, to dwell upon the ethical
activism of Buddhism might be to draw fire upon those arenas of British, mas-
culine, worldly activism that had to be kept above serious challenge at all cost,
namely, “the market” and its two great sources of wealth: the battlefield and
the Empire. By throwing into question the foundational Western dualisms, the
economy of karma and reincarnation indirectly threatened the most powerful
interests and institutions in Victorian England. By speaking as it did about suf-
fering and desire, Buddhism threatened the foundation of Western thought,
and therefore Western society, at its very roots.
Conclusion
The novels of Marie Corelli and H. Rider Haggard portrayed reincarnation

and karma almost as variously as the array of sources that were available to
them. They drew quite selectively upon Christian theology and mythology, but
also upon Natural Theology, Spiritualism, Egyptian occultism, Theosophical
synthesis, Hindu concepts, and Buddhist doctrines (not to mention Sweden-
borgianism, Mesmerism, astrology, etc.). With these they interwove elements
drawn from the pervasive secular discourses of scientific naturalism, progressiv-

ism, and Darwinism to produce pseudo-scientific and progressive-evolutionary
models of reincarnation and karma. On the basis of a survey of Victorian lit-
erary, scholarly, and periodical literatures, I have identified eight variants of
“reincarnation” that were in circulation in the discourse of the time: metempsy-
chosis, Hindu reincarnation, Buddhist reincarnation, transmigration, resurrec-
tion, immortality, demi-immortality, and inheritance. The novels of Haggard
and Corelli represent all of these types in varying degrees. It is telling that while
both authors dwelt with greatest fascination upon metempsychosis, transmi-
gration, and demi-immortality, their primary sources for understanding rein-
carnation and karma were Hinduism, as co-opted by Deist and Theosophical
thought, and Buddhism, which was the most widely circulated and debated
source of these doctrines in late-Victorian Britain.
Haggard and Corelli mixed and matched these religious and secular ele-
ments to create their own unique theories about the ethics and operation of
karma and reincarnation. At the same time, their theories shared similarities
that were equally significant. Both authors were influenced by Theosophy and
by its adaptations of Hindu and Buddhist elements. However, in opposition to
Madame Blavatsky, who strove to create a hybrid religion to replace what she
perceived as a degenerated Christianity, Corelli enlisted karma/reincarnation
to fashion a new—one might say “New Age”—Christianity, one both more oc-
cult and more scientific. In this she was influenced by the nineteenth-century
shift away from Calvinistic theology toward “incarnation theology,” a “shift
of emphasis from the death of Christ to the life of Christ—from a theology
centred on the Atonement to one centred on the Incarnation—and a shift
from the wrath and judgement of God to the love and Fatherhood of God”
(Parsons, “Dissenters” 109). For Haggard as well as Corelli, the resurrection
of Jesus modeled and justified the doctrine of reincarnation. Corelli strove
to reconcile her mystical Christian spiritualism with karma/reincarnation, but
this required deforming both Western and Eastern traditions virtually beyond
recognition by practitioners. Haggard apparently saw neither a necessary op-
position between his belief in karma/reincarnation and his Anglican practice
nor the necessity of reconciling the two; these diverse elements coexist in
his novels in dialogue with one another without full resolution. Holly, Leo,
Ayesha, and Kou-en all speak what the text presents as spiritual truths, some-
times Christian, sometimes Buddhist, sometimes an indeterminate combina-
tion. I believe that Ayesha, despite her trafficking with spirits, which Haggard
could not endorse, speaks for her author’s own latitudinarian and humanistic
beliefs when she says that “all great Faiths are the same, changed a little to suit
the needs of passing times and peoples” and that “in mercy it is given to us to
redeem one another” (Ayesha 141, 143). Even so, Haggard’s writings no less
than Corelli’s juxtaposed the economy of sin/redemption to the economy of

karma/reincarnation in such a way that the all but irreconcilable differences
between the two could not be left unaddressed.
Those differences generated a series of debates within late-Victorian cul-
ture, debates by which Haggard and Corelli were instructed and to which
their novels contributed, directly and indirectly. The overarching debate,
which was implicit in all others, concerned the relationship between West-
ern soul-theory and the doctrines of karma and reincarnation. Thus Victo-
rians were more attracted to Egyptian metempsychosis than either Hindu or
Buddhist reincarnation, because the former appeared more likely to retain
their own conception of the soul, its eternal individuality and remembered
identity. The Egypt-versus-India debate linked to a broader question about
the genetic and cultural origins of the Caucasian race and the British people.
Another recurring debate concerned the question of what exactly is passed on

from lifetime to lifetime in reincarnation, whether it be the soul with continu-
ing identity, the soul without identity, the body as well as the soul, or only
a karmic record without soul, identity, or memory. The latter of these was
considered horrifying, if not also blasphemous. A number of debates focused
on the nature of karma/reincarnation as an ethical system: whether it might
be compatible with or antithetical to the ethics of heaven/hell and sin/
redemption. Some Victorians were attracted to what they saw as the ethical
rigorousness and evenhandedness of karma/reincarnation and its compatibility
with their ideologies of self-help, individual responsibility for one’s own soul,
and a spiritual progressivism to match material progressivism. But then there
were insurmountable problems. Buddhist karma/reincarnation threatened to
supplant the authority of God and to obviate Western soul-theory. That was
inconceivable, almost literally so, since it was exterior to what the history of
Western theology and metaphysics had made thinkable. Karma/reincarnation
also appeared to privilege works over faith, which made it antithetical espe-
cially to evangelical Protestant Christianities, and it held the possibility not
only of spiritual evolution but of spiritual retrogression, perhaps even to lower
life-forms. Darwinism lurked in the background. As Victorians imposed their
progressivism upon reincarnation, so they tended to deny its de-evolutionary
potential, though both Corelli and Haggard enlisted that potential as a cau-
tionary tale. Both authors joined in these and other debates sparked by the
penetration of Western consciousness by karma and reincarnation.
Through this process, Haggard and Corelli synthesized a karma/reincarna-
tion that still retained the core of Western soul-theory. While drawing upon
Hindu and Buddhist elements, they fashioned a reincarnation that preserved
the soul—its individualism and conscious identity—and a karma that though
clearly tied more to works somehow remained loyal to the Protestant emphasis
on faith. Neither could achieve this synthesis, however, without encountering

serious contradictions. The situation was made yet more complex by the fact
that the contradictions between the ethical economy of karma/reincarnation
and that of sin/redemption happened to resonate with the historical contra-
dictions between the latter and the material economy of “the market.” Those
contradictions had become embedded and partially sublimated within Western
culture as a result of the necessity of accommodating the two primary ideo-
logical systems of Protestantism and capitalism. The encounter with karma/
reincarnation stirred up fundamental and deeply troubling contradictions that
long had existed within Western culture and society.
Whether they intended to or not, both Corelli and Haggard drew atten-
tion to those contradictions and generated new ones by juxtaposing karma/
reincarnation to sin/redemption. For instance, they each theorized a universal,
Deistic “law of love” that was based in part on the “law of karma,” which was
perceived as orderly and equitable, but at the same time was defined in op-
position to the mechanical and merciless “law of the Dharma,” of which the
doctrines of karma and reincarnation were definitive. Both authors similarly
addressed the immensely complex issue of the relationship between human
desire and human suffering in a way that demonstrated the essentialness of
active desire and, simultaneously, the essentialness of actively suppressing de-
sire. This contradiction expressed the conflicting ideological imperatives to
equally legitimate the material desire and activism of financial banking and the
spiritual desire and activism of faith. But doing this required keeping the two
spheres separated. That separation was signified by the slash in the middle of the
root dualisms of body/soul, works/faith, and active/passive. Not to maintain
that slash would be to imperil the foundations of “Western Civilization.” The
threat that karma and reincarnation posed was of dissolving that slash into a
Middle Way, which ultimately was inconceivable. Karma and reincarnation nev-
ertheless raised the disturbing possibilities that faith might be passive in the
face of material activism, that material banking might be antithetical to spiritual
activism, and that spiritual activism might be more beneficial for the individ-
ual and for society if conceived not through the ethics of sin/redemption but
through those of karma/reincarnation. While it therefore was essential for Vic-
torians to perceive the economy of karma/reincarnation as fatalistically passive
in the face of human suffering, I have attempted to show that the real threat it
posed was of appearing too spiritually and ethically active.
Marie Corelli and H. Rider Haggard struggled mightily, personally and in
their writings, to confront and represent these debates and contradictions. Their
works—more than their faith, I cannot resist saying—provide a vital record of
issues, questions, and concerns about spirituality and the afterlife that were
definitive of late-Victorian and early-Modernist culture in Europe. They could
not resolve those debates and contradictions. Analysis of their partial successes
and failures in attempting to do so provides a key to understanding which ele-

ments of Western belief—both religious and secular—were so sacred that they
could not be assailed and which elements of Buddhism were so threatening to
those that they could not be assimilated.
Chapter 4
Buddhism and the Empire

of the Self in Kipling’s Kim
And whoso will, from Pride release,

Contemning neither creed nor priest,
May feel the Soul of all the East
About him at Kamakura.
—RUDYARD KIPLING, “Buddha at Kamakura” (1892)
The world that exists is the result of the non-existence of any

independent self-established substance. This emptiness
of self-existence . . . is what the world is full of,
a fullness sometimes called the Void.
—NOLAN PLINY JACOBSON, Understanding Buddhism (1986)
The Critical Polarization over Kim
Criticism of Rudyard Kipling’s Kim (1901) has a history of polarization

that is familiar to Kipling scholars, though not all scholarship has participated
in this debate. The divide is between these two camps, oversimplified here for
the sake of argument: (1) those who celebrate the novel’s accomplishment in
portraying Indian peoples and Eastern religions with an evenhandedness and
sympathy that transcends its author’s well-known prejudices, and (2) those who
focus on the implicit racism of the novel, its assumption of British superiority,
and its polemic to the effect that wise Indians must recognize the God-given
rightness of British colonial rule.1 A few scholars, among them Alan Sandison
and Zohreh T. Sullivan, have suggested that both positions are supportable
Buddhism and the Empire of the Self in Kipling’s Kim ~ 129
and limited; each is necessary, neither sufficient. Ian Baucom goes so far as to
argue that “selecting either one of these interpretations amounts to an act more
of censorship than of reading” (Baucom 99).2 Even so, the critical polarization
persists to the extent that virtually no treatment of Kim, including the present
one, now can avoid addressing it.
The critical polarization, which of course I have had to simplify, emerges
most clearly in relation to two central interpretive questions: (1) how to read
the character of the Teshoo Lama, and (2) how to read the ending of the
novel, which amounts to how to read the character of Kim. Those who adhere
to the first position read the Lama as a sage scholar of Buddhism, a devout
pilgrim, and the most significant of Kim’s father figures. They argue that the
Lama’s search is equally if not more important for plot and for theme than
Colonel Creighton’s Great Game of espionage, noting that the novel ends
with the Lama’s sacrifice of nirvana in order to return and guide Kim and
gives him the closing words: “Just is the Wheel! Certain is our deliverance.
Come!” (289). Those who adhere to the second position read the Lama at
best as a well-intentioned but childlike old man and at worst as an infantile
dupe, a pawn in the Game whose “naiveté suggests an atrophied absence of
adulthood” and whose “absence of anxiety must be similarly read as an ex-
pression of complicity in . . . the imperial enterprise” (Suleri 117, 120). They
build upon Edward Said’s paradigm-shifting argument that the contest for
Kim’s allegiance between Creighton’s Game and the Lama’s Way is in fact
no contest at all because the latter is simply subsumed within and reduced to
the former.3 In reading the ending of the novel, these critics focus on Kim’s
penultimate crisis of identity and interpret the moment when he feels “the
wheels of his being lock up anew on the world without” as confirmation of
his vocation in the “active” world of the British Secret Service and necessary
rejection of the “passive” world of Buddhist renunciation (282). Prior to Said,
Irving Howe attempted to maintain a balance by concluding that “the parallel

lines” of the Great Game and The Way “cannot meet,” for they are “two ways
of apprehending human existence, each of which is shown to have its own ir-
reducible claims” (Howe 334). This balancing act, no less than the criticism on
both sides of the divide, utterly solidifies the dichotomy.
What interests me is the persistence of this polarization. The too ready ex-
planation is, “It’s in the novel—don’t you see that the novel itself juxtaposes
The Game and The Way?” But I question whether the text makes an exclusive
choice between the two either necessary or obviated by either side. Why has
the assumption of a dualism—whether agonistic, one-sided, or irreducible—
been virtually automatic in Western criticism? An overarching agenda would
be to argue that this polarization, regardless of the position taken, is symptom-
atic of a culture-specific critical blindness. My goal is to build a rationale for
a Middle Way of reading Kim, one that gives the text itself credit for drawing
upon and embodying the Buddhist concepts it represents.
An indication of the critical blindness to which I refer is the fact that few if
any interpretations of Kim have given substantial attention to the Buddhism
present in the novel.4 Certainly many critics have analyzed the character of
the Lama; many have noted the novel’s use of Buddhist concepts such as “the
Way” and “the Wheel,” though without seriously querying those concepts.
The level of this attention has gone very little beyond that of the explanatory
endnotes in scholarly editions of the novel. Here is a text saturated with Bud-
dhist figures and terms in which at least one if not both of the main characters
is a Buddhist, yet no one has demonstrated much interest in questions such
as the following. From what sources did Kipling derive his understanding of
Buddhism, and how informed and limited was that understanding? What were
the range of reasons that influenced his choice of Buddhism rather than Hin-
duism or Islam, aside from the frequently noted motive of evading the his-
torical violence between these two religions?5 Most importantly, how exactly
does the novel portray Buddhism and how accurate is that portrayal? What do
the inaccuracies tell us about the reasons behind that particular construction
of Buddhism? How is that portrayal informed by the history of Buddhism
in India, which only recently had been “discovered,” and by the history of
archaeological study of Buddhist sites and artifacts in India during the nine-
teenth century? How might critical understanding of the novel be informed
by those same histories? What would it mean to read Kim from a perspective
informed by knowledge of Buddhism, in contrast to the Christian, Hindu,
and Muslim perspectives that are evident enough between the lines of certain
studies of the novel?
In order to put the failure to ask these questions into perspective, consider
what the past hundred years of criticism of John Milton’s Paradise Lost would
look like if no one had inquired about the history of the Reformation and
Restoration nor analyzed the specific ways in which Milton’s epic is faithful
to and departs from the Bible. Or consider Nathaniel Hawthorne scholarship
that labels certain figures in The Scarlet Letter simply as representative of “Prot-
estant Christianity,” failing to reflect upon the origins of the beliefs cited by
the characters or upon the history of Puritanism in New England. I suggest
that just such an omission has occurred in the history of scholarship on Kim.
Thus, the primary purpose of this chapter is to remedy that omission by seek-
ing answers to the questions noted above. In the process, an explanation for
this massive critical lacunae will emerge. It will emerge from consideration of
Kim’s much-analyzed identity crisis, first as understood within the framework
of the Western metaphysics that has predetermined the critical polarization,
and then from the perspective of Buddhist philosophy, which suggests a quite
different reading.
Kipling’s Religions
In order to situate the representation of Buddhism in Kim, some consideration

of Kipling’s religious background and of the general role of religion in the novel
is warranted. Given the plethora of religious affiliations and figures in Kim, it is
surprising that the topic of Kipling and religion has received relatively little at-
tention. It is not surprising, given the history of the Indian subcontinent, that
the novel should open by juxtaposing the warring forces of Hinduism, repre-
sented by Chota Lal, and Islam, represented by Abdullah, the two separated by
and subjugated to the third term of which Kim is representative.
What does Kim represent? This is another version of the perennial, polar-
izing question. Certainly Kim knows he is of Anglo-Irish descent and assumes
the ability to exploit that advantage, though he also knows much more about
himself that exceeds that singular heritage. W. B. Parker, in an 1898 essay,
observed that Kipling’s religion was essentially “a matter of clan and family, of
company and regiment,” an “exclusively masculine” “religion of action” in a
post-Darwinian universe where struggle and suffering are assumed to be central
to the natural order of which mankind is organically a part (Parker 666, 667).
This is empire-as-religion. Writing more recently, Andrew Lycett recounts that
Henry James, after enthusiastically reading Kim, encouraged Kipling in a let-
ter to continue to avoid “the base humbug” of politics and instead to “ask
the Lama” for guidance in his choice of subject matter (Lycett 332). Lycett
concludes, however, that Kipling’s real “guru” was Cecil Rhodes, that figure-
head of empire in Africa whom Kipling revered and whom Lycett observes
was “much more demanding than any Tibetan lama” (Lycett 333). Scholars
on one side of the critical divide might argue that Kim ultimately subscribes to
his author’s religion of empire. Though this perspective is partially accurate, it
provides a very limited understanding both of Kipling and of Kim.
Kipling’s religion, like that of his protagonist, was too heterodox and syncre-
tistic to be reduced to any single belief. Both of his grandfathers were Method-
ist ministers, the influence of which appears to emerge contradictorily in his
distaste for evangelical Protestantism and, on the other hand, in an Old Testa-
ment and perhaps Manichean worldview that predisposed him favorably to the
Muslim conception of the deity, as he understood it. He opens his late auto-
biographical work, Something of Myself (1937), with this non-ironic benedic-
tion: “Therefore, ascribing all good fortune to Allah the Dispenser of Events, I
begin” (Something 355). Whatever Kipling’s religion was, it was not orthodox
Christianity of any denomination, and his sometimes evangelical vision for the
British Empire was not underwritten by and cloaked in evangelical zeal for
saving the pagans.6 As Sandra Kemp points out, his heterodox religious views
produced critical controversy from the beginning of his career. Some readers
of his poem “Recessional” (1897), for instance, recognized a discomforting
implication about “the potential abuse of power in the Empire by means of a

Christianity too closely interwoven with commerce and imperialism,” and this
contributed to charges that Kipling’s religion was really “muscular Paganism”
(Kemp, Hidden 82, 83).
After all, Kipling, like Kim, had a wide diversity of “pagan” influences. He
spent his earliest years in India, of which he recalled, “Meeta, my Hindu bearer,
would sometimes go into little Hindu temples, where, being below the age of
caste, I held his hand and looked at the dimly-seen, friendly Gods” (Kipling,
Something 355). In 1871, the Kiplings shipped the six-year-old Rudyard and his
sister, Alice, back to England, where they spent six years under the unhappily
strict Methodist tutelage of Captain and Mrs. Holloway at Southsea until lib-
erated, as the young Kipling saw it, by the return of their mother to England in
1877. They took up residence in Kensington, of which Kipling recalls that “the
Mother” got his sister and himself “season-tickets for the old South Kensing-
ton Museum which was across the road”: “From the big Buddha with the little
door in his back, to the towering dull-gilt ancient coaches and carven chariots
in long dark corridors . . . we roved at will” (Kipling, Something 366–67). There
Kipling must have studied the stone bas-reliefs salvaged (or plundered) from
the Amaravati Stupa in northern India, which illustrated scenes from the time
of the Buddha and were on display during Kiplings’ stay.7 This likely was his
first exposure to Buddhism. After schooling, Kipling returned to India in 1882
to work as the editor of the Civil and Military Gazette in Lahore, where his
father, Lockwood Kipling, was the Principal of the Mayo College of Art and
Curator of the Lahore Museum. This was the “Wonder House” as described
in Kim: “In the entrance-hall stood the larger figures of the Greco-Buddhist
sculptures. . . . There were hundreds of pieces, friezes of figures in relief, frag-
ments of the statues and slabs crowded the figures that had encrusted the
brick walls of the Buddhist stupas and viharas of the North Country and now,
dug up and labeled, made the pride of the Museum” (6). Kipling later wrote
that he painted the Wonder House directly from his memory of “the Lahore
Museum of which I had once been Deputy Curator for six weeks—unpaid
but immensely important” (Something 454). There “his father had told him a
good deal about the early traditions of Buddha Gautama’s sayings and travels
in India” (Mason 183). There, also, it is likely that he witnessed at least one
visit from a Tibetan Lama on pilgrimage, with obvious relevance for the writ-
ing of Kim.8 Thus Kipling, by the time he was a young man, had significant
exposure not only to Hindu, Christian, and Muslim cultures but also to Bud-
dhism. Though he was “far indeed from being a Buddhist, . . . that he felt . . . an
appreciation of what he believed to be Buddhism can hardly be doubted”
(Mason 184). He was perhaps no farther from being a Buddhist than he was
from being a Catholic or a Muslim, the two religions his writings most often
portray sympathetically.
Kipling’s syncretism was not limited to major world religions. Mixed with
them were elements of Freemasonry, Spiritualism, Theosophy, and occultisms
peripheral to Hinduism and Islam, all of which appear in his writings. In 1885,
Kipling was drafted by the Lahore Freemason lodge—Hope and Perseverance,
no. 782 E C—to which his father belonged. Thus Kim’s Masonic heritage
from his father is one part of the genuinely prophetic trajectory in Kim, lead-
ing him to Creighton, another Mason. In addition, Kipling had spent part of
five summers in the 1880s with his family at Simla in the Himalayan foothills
and there was exposed to nearly every religious hybrid that the interfacing
of East and West produced in the nineteenth century. As Andrew Lycett de-
scribes the scene, “These seekers after enlightenment ranged from the saddhus
and fakirs of the hills, the prototypes of the lama in Kim, to Westerners like
the enigmatic A. M. Jacobs . . . who featured later as Lurgan Sahib” (Lycett
111). Among the most celebrated figures to visit Simla was Madame Helene
Blavatsky, famed spiritualist and co-founder of the Theosophical Society, the
headquarters of which she moved to Adyar, India, in 1879. Blavatsky claimed
that she had received the spiritual authority underpinning Theosophy directly
from the “Brothers,” “Masters,” or “Mahatmas,” as they variously were called,
first during a pilgrimage in Tibet and then through telekinetic transmissions,
the famous Mahatma letters. Blavatsky and Kipling were perhaps the two most
important sources at the turn of the century for a growing European fascina-
tion with Tibet, “one of the last great sacred places of Victorian Romanticism,”
so much so that “references both to Blavatsky’s mahatmas and Kipling’s lama
abounded in Tibetan travel writing at the time” (Bishop 2, 143).9 My point is
not that Kipling subscribed unreservedly to any one of these various religions
or quasi-religions but that he did not subscribe to any one of them to the exclu-
sion of the others nor deny the legitimacy of any of them. In his life and in his
writing, he gave each its due, even, I would argue, Hinduism, though it is true
that his fiction tends to be more critical of Brahmins than of other religious
figures.10 He sampled from a wide range of beliefs and doctrines in building
an unsystematic hybrid matrix of religions, both for himself and for his most
well-known character.
Thus Kipling created Kim as a character who is able to embrace and move
between a variety of religious positions. He was careful to give Kim a father-
figure of every religious stripe: a Buddhist Lama, a Muslim in Mahbub Ali,
and a hybridized Hindu in Hurree Babu. Kim’s lesser father figures are Lurgan
Sahib, an occultist, and Father Victor, from the church of “Bibi Miriam,” the
Virgin Mary (117). He places Kim at the intersection of at least five religions
or spiritual practices, six if one argues that Creighton’s faith in the imperialist
mission of the British Secret Service is an ideological belief system functioning
in certain ways like a religion.11 There is one very telling exception, however,
and that is Anglicanism. One might expect Kipling as a champion of British
imperialism to embrace the official religion of the Empire. Yet Mr. Bennett, the
Anglican Chaplain in Kim, is the only utterly unsympathetic religious figure,
an anti-father-figure who disdains the Lama “with the triple-ringed uninterest
of the creed that lumps nine-tenths of the world under the title ‘heathen’ ”
(88). Why is this? In the first place, Kipling held strong opinions against the
cultural violence and political strife generated by dogmatic or overzealous mis-
sionaries in India and Southeast Asia. From Kipling’s perspective, such disre-
gard was a sign of irresponsible ignorance that soured cross-cultural relations
and made the job of governing more difficult. As Colonel Creighton tells Kim:
“Therefore, do not at any time be led to contemn the black men. I have known
boys newly entered into the service of the Government who feigned not to
understand the talk or the customs of the black men. Their pay was cut for ig-
norance. There is no sin so great as ignorance” (119). In a letter of 16 October
1895, Kipling criticized those who followed “a doctrine of salvation imper-
fectly understood by themselves and a code of ethics foreign to the climate and
instincts of those races whose most cherished customs they outrage and whose
gods they insult” (qtd. in Islam 33). Part of Kipling’s paternalistic guardian-
ship of India was a belief in the responsibility of knowledgeable Anglo-Indians
to protect “Mother India” from the wrong sorts of Europeans.12 As David
Gilmour suggests, “In Kipling’s eyes the real enemies of British India were
British: zealous and misguided missionaries (secular as well as religious) and
interfering politicians in England” (Gilmour 80).13 In contrast, the character
of Strickland, the District Superintendent of Police, who makes two appear-
ances in Kim and features earlier in Plain Tales from the Hills (1888), is rep-
resentative of the appropriately informed and empathetic Anglo-Indian. One
of the more glaring expressions of Kipling’s Orientalism is that he puts into
the mouth of Indian characters, such as the old Rassaldar or the Mahratta spy
on the train, endorsements of British occupation in the form of praise for such
exemplary Anglo-Indians, as when Gobind Sahai, the Sahiba from Kulu, says
of Strickland: “These be the sort to oversee justice. They know the land and
the customs of the land. The others, all new from Europe . . . are worse than
the pestilence” (76). As Parama Roy argues, through Kipling’s positioning
of them, the “Anglo-Indian . . . , because he is an (almost) unhyphenated In-
dian, becomes the native of the Indian nation,” a discursive displacement that
obviously served colonial interests (Roy 87). Nevertheless, the complexity and
ambivalence of Kipling’s views are indicated by his refusal to endorse Anglican
or even Christian occupation of Indian religions and in his creation of Kim as
a hybrid religious figure.
Kipling was an Orientalist in the nineteenth-century sense, as well as the
postmodern sense derived from it. Historians Fred Reid and David Washbrook
argue that “Kipling’s political ideas show strong affinities with those contained
in what might be termed ‘the official mind’ of the I.C.S.,” the “Indian Civil
Service, a small elite corps of a few hundred men who held exclusively the
highest posts in the government” (Reid 18). They disdained tampering from
London and disruption by missionaries, while at the same time remaining
wary of the growing number of Western-educated Hindus who presumed to
know how to rule themselves. They, like Kipling, saw the role of the colonial
government as “protective and conservative rather than active and interven-
tionist” (Reid 20). They conceived of themselves, however accurately or not,
as respecting and preserving indigenous cultures and religions. This mind-
set similarly characterized a growing body of Orientalist translators, philolo-
gists, archeologists, archivists, and curators (for example, Lockwood Kipling)
who were working in India at that time to find and preserve ancient Buddhist
manuscripts, artifacts, and sites.14
Victorian Orientalists defined their position in opposition to that of the “An-
glicists.” Prior to the 1830s, the British Raj aligned itself with the ruling Hindu
order, if generally for mercenary reasons and through systematic violence to
Indian peoples, and thus attempted an uneven policy of noninterference with
indigenous Hindu culture, as long as it operated under British oversight. Angli-
can, but also Nonconformist, missionaries and associated interests in London
saw this policy not as noninterference but rather as the opposite: government
interference with their freedom to intervene in indigenous cultures to recruit
converts. They wanted an open market of religions in India.
This debate culminated in Thomas Babington Macaulay’s infamously racist
Minute on Indian Education of 1835, which marked a victory for those Angli-
cists who wanted to “educate” the pagans. Anglicist policies eventually back-
fired. Later in the century, they gave Indian nationalists a target that begged
opposition. The Orientalist position “that Hindus had a great civilization whose
achievements could be compared to the highest ones of classical antiquity” and
therefore deserved to be studied with a similar respect and rigor contributed

to a revival of Hindu pride, the formation of the Arya Samaj in 1875, and the
associated move toward Indian nationalism (van der Veer 114). Thus Kipling,
however unintentionally, participated in the nineteenth-century Orientalist “dis-
course on ‘Eastern spirituality’ ” that subsequently was “reappropriated by the
Indian religious movements” fueling Indian nationalism (van der Veer 69).15
While Kipling’s Orientalism unavoidably was an appropriation of Indian
culture and religion for colonialist purposes, it also was a genuine expression
of respect for and celebration of that culture and those religions. Though
justifiably condemned by postcolonial scholars for its masking of cultural vio-
lence with paternalistic sympathy, nineteenth-century Orientalism neverthe-
less was sympathetic toward its construction of India, concerned about the
damage that Western encroachment brought (while being part of that same
encroachment), and open-minded toward difference in comparison with the

alternative Anglicist position. The ambivalence of this situation is the primary
source of the ongoing polarization of critical positions on Kim, either side of
which tends to oversimplify a very complex history and a very complex novel.
Kim’s Hybrid Buddhism and Religious Tolerance in Kim
The preceding consideration of Kipling’s religious syncretism lays the founda-

tion for understanding that of his protagonist. Kim is a hybrid figure in the
sense theorized by Homi Bhabha, or as employed by Ian Baucom in analyzing
him as “something of a monster: a putatively white but performatively Asiatic
hybrid,” or as Kipling himself signaled when he has the French spy describe
Hurree Chunder Moorkerjee, the Babu, in these terms: “He represents in
petto India in transition—the monstrous hybridism of East and West” (Baucom
98; Kim 239).16 As an educated Hindu who professes agnosticism, fearfully
believes in the occult, worships Herbert Spencer, spies for the Raj but has ties
to the Arya Samaj, the Babu is hybrid in more ways than one.17 His character
points to the Western-educated Hindu reformists who organized the Indian
National Congress in 1885 and led the nation out from under British colonial
rule in 1947, eleven years after Kipling’s death. It is Kim, however, who is the
figure of hybrid religion in the novel. Kim’s hybridity in term of national and
racial cultures is multiplied in the sphere of religion. It is not only that Kim
dresses as a low-caste Hindu one day and then changes the color of his turban
from red to blue and accompanies Mahbub Ali the next day as a Muslim ser-
vant. He is a mimic, but he is not merely a mimic, because he also is a seeker of
his own identity and his place in the world; his character is distinguished from
the majority of other Bildungsroman protagonists by the fact that his search
does not ultimately concern parentage or family, and certainly not romance
or marriage, but rather is focused to a degree rare outside of allegory on his
religious identity. “What am I,” Kim asks Mahbub Ali, “Mussalman, Hindu,
Jain, or Buddhist?” (143). Is Kim confused, undecided, or a nascent pilgrim
attempting to discern his religious affiliation in a world of multiple, shifting
religious positions? He is in the first place a boy, and he will move through
confusion and indecision toward religious vocation in the course of the novel.
But his religion will never be singular or exclusive. It will reflect a mixing of
cultures characterized on nearly every page of the novel by collision, overlap-
ping, and interpenetration of diverse religious positions.
Within this context, a crisis of identity would seem inevitable. Kim’s much-
analyzed identity crisis reaches its first climax in the liminal space of adoles-
cence and in transition between two worlds, the world of St. Xavier’s, where
he has just completed his training as a sahib, and the Lama’s world of Buddhist
pilgrimage, which he is on his way to rejoin as a chela.18 In a wonderfully bizarre

rite of passage, Kim is taken by Mahbub Ali to “the Bird-Cage,” a house of
prostitution, where Haneefa, the blind seer of this novel, puts him in a trance,
“charms” him with “Jadoo” magic for the “full protection of the Road,” strips
him of his clothes and his identity as a sahib, and changes his race with dye, de-
spite the resistance to Eastern occultism of his “White blood” (177–79). In an
orgiastic ceremony, which the Babu, who is there making ethnographical notes
from a safe distance, calls “ventriloquial necromanciss,” Haneefa invokes “Zul-
bazan, Son of Eblis, who lives in bazaars,” “Dulhan, invisible about mosques,”
and “Musboot, Lord of lies and panic,” among other devils and spirits. She then
endows Kim with “the keys of the Secret Things,” a phrase Kipling either borrowed
from Theosophy or else from the same sources as Madame Blavatsky (179). But
Kim’s rite of passage does not end there. Hurree Babu then initiates him for
espionage purposes into a secret society of a syncretic religious nature, making
him a “Son of the Charm” (183). These events culminate in the crisis of identity
and Kim’s famous question, “Who is Kim—Kim—Kim?” (185). Lingering then
in a trance-like state, he almost grasps an answer but falls out of the reverie with a
shake of his head, upon which he is approached by yet another seer, “a long-haired
Hindu bairagi (holy man),” who says, “I also have lost it. . . . It is one of the Gates
to the Way. . . . Thou wast wondering there in thy spirit what manner of thing thy
soul might be. The seizure came of a sudden. I know.” (185–86). The old man
then asks, “Of what faith art thou?” And this is the reply: “ ‘I too am a seeker,’ said
Kim, using one of the lama’s pet words. ‘Though’—he forgot his Northern dress
for the moment—‘though Allah alone knoweth what I seek’ ” (186). The old
man does not comment on the fact that Kim has confused Buddhist and Muslim
religious signs but only answers, “Go in hope, little brother. . . . It is a long road to
the feet of the One,” adding an ascetic Hindu blessing to the mix.
Kim now has completed his crucial transition. He is now truly on the “long
road,” which is both the road of the Great Game and the Way of the Lama’s
pilgrimage. This multi-stage rite-of-passage has immediate effect: Kim has
come of age. He is recognized as a holy man a second time by a Jat with a sick
child—“the very respect the Jat paid him proved that he was a man”—and
proceeds to rejoin his master the Lama as a more devout chela than perhaps he
knows he is (187). It is as if only such a passage through the most diverse ele-
ments of Eastern occultism and religion would be powerful enough to cleanse
Kim sufficiently of his whiteness and his Western, Catholic training and prepare
him for his new role. In the process, he is guided by a Muslim, a Westernized
Babu agnostic who invokes Herbert Spencer but believes in the occult, and a
Hindu ascetic. Kim has become a repository for an array of religious influences
without discounting any one of them.
But Kim’s deepest if still non-exclusive religious commitment is to Bud-
dhism. It begins as a commitment to the Lama, which grows over the course
of the story from curiosity and self-serving possessiveness to admiration, love,

and finally devotion. One exemplary moment occurs during Kim and Mahbub
Ali’s lengthiest conversation when the latter, who is not above showing his
jealousy of the Lama’s influence over Kim, asks, “Is it necessary to the comfort
of thy heart to see that lama?” Kim responds: “It is one part of my bond. . . . If
I do not see him, and if he is taken from me, I will go out of that madrissah
[school] in Nucklao and, and—once gone, who is to find me again?” (144).
Here he reverses the threat of his own cultural hybridity—the very quality that
makes him a useful tool to the British Raj for espionage—by saying, in effect,
“Don’t forget, I can use that very tool just as well against you.” More than
testifying to his love for the Lama, Kim makes it clear that his participation
in the Great Game, rather than being the true calling for which the Buddhist
pilgrimage is merely a cover, is instead contingent upon his freedom to follow
the Lama’s Way. However, the Lama’s Way is only “one part” or Kim’s bond,
the other part of course being the Great Game. Recognizing this, however,
need not precipitate an absolute dichotomy. Kim himself, following the Lama,
disclaims dichotomies. For example, after the Lama is injured by one sahib, the
Russian spy, he remarks to Kim that it is strange to be tended so faithfully by
“a [-nother] Sahib,” and Kim responds: “Thou has said there is neither black
nor white. Why plague me with this talk, Holy One? Let me rub the other foot.
It vexes me. I am not a Sahib. I am thy chela” (270). At this moment, Kim is
not a sahib; yet, the reader knows he also is a sahib. Though Zohreh Sullivan
ultimately argues that Kim privileges the Great Game over Buddhism, she
leaves the other interpretive pole open in these terms: “Kim as orphaned In-
dianized hybrid is both produced and initially despised by the [Anglo-Indian]
system; so that an alternative reading might allow us to read the very existence
of his love for the lama as an alternative to the system’s denial of such possibil-
ity” (Sullivan 150). Even Sullivan’s evenhandedness misses the point, however,
and it does so by failing to take the religious themes of the novel seriously and,
therefore, to analyze sufficiently its Buddhist content.
Scholars on both sides of the critical polarization have analyzed the relation-
ship between Kim and the Lama primarily in terms of the mutual love between
the two.19 Some celebrate the redeeming quality of this love as the ultimate
moral of the novel; others argue that this focus on love “in scenes with the
lama is used to counter and sacramentalize the insidiousness of the negotiation
with power” (Sullivan 166). Both miss the point. It is not the novel but rather
some of its readers who have been unable to permit the ambiguity that the text
itself accommodates: Kim’s love and devotion are genuine, and he is in part an
instrument of power. Placing primary emphasis on love, whether in defending
or attacking Kim’s or the text’s motives, obscures something else. Love has
functioned within Kim criticism as a means of evading the issue of the spiritual
foundation of the relationship.20 This evasion is perhaps predetermined by the
Romantic heritage of Western literature and criticism, but love is not a con-
cept sufficient to describe the level of devotion Kim approaches by the end of
the novel.
To offer one example from the middle of the story, after he emerges from his
rite of passage and heals the Jat’s child with a combination of Western medicine
and the weight of the Lama’s imprimatur, Kim finds himself alone for the first
time in years in the presence of his master. The Lama commends Kim’s wise
treatment of the Jat, and this exchange follows: “ ‘I was made wise by thee, Holy
One,’ said Kim, . . . forgetting St. Xavier’s; forgetting his white blood; forgetting
even the Great Game as he stooped, Mohammedan fashion, to touch his mas-
ter’s feet in the dust of the Jain temple” (189). There is no textual irony here,
and more is involved than either gratitude or love, namely, religious devotion.
The shift in Kim’s motivation for following the Lama away from interpersonal
and instrumental reasons to those befitting the religious seeker he becomes is
telegraphed early in the story during a conversation with the Hindu Rassaldar.
The old soldier asks, “But why should one whose Star leads him to war fol-
low a holy man?”—the very question underlying the critical polarization. Kim
answers: “But he is a holy man. . . . In truth, and in talk and in act, holy. He is
not like the others” (51). In a sense, then, it does not matter which religion
the Lama follows; what matters is that his religious practice is genuine, his piety
sincere. Genuine spiritual practice, as much or more than personal love, is what
Kim seeks. Buddhism is the vehicle Kipling chose for this message.
This message is key to understanding Kipling’s attitude concerning reli-
gion: he despised hypocrisy, whether of a Methodist who preaches the com-
passion of Christ while damning all unbelievers to eternal torment or of a
Hindu who uses false piety to extort donations. Corinne McCutchan argues
that Kim’s periodic mockery of religious figures, most frequently Brahmins,
is not intended as an condemnation of any one faith but is rather an indict-
ment of religious poseurs and hypocrites within all faiths, “not only those of
India, that substitute mechanical observance for vital piety” (McCutchan 139).
McCutchan concludes that between “the lama’s Buddhist teaching and Kim’s
ecumenical practice Kipling reaches toward a vision of Eastern piety as both
theologically profound and humanly practicable” (McCutchan 140). I concur.
This message is, finally, what Kipling was trying to accomplish with his creation
of Kim as a hybridized religious figure: to present the possibility of religious
piety, genuine devotion and practice, without religious intolerance or violence.
Thus in answering Kim’s question, “What am I?”, Mahbub Ali becomes
a perhaps unlikely mouthpiece for one of the novel’s central messages: “The
matter of creeds is like horseflesh. The wise man knows horses are good—that
there is a profit to be made from all; and for myself . . . I could believe the same
of Faiths. . . . Therefore I say in my heart the Faiths are like horses. Each has
merit in its own country” (143–44). As one scholar argues, this “appeal for
moderation and tolerance, such as Kipling himself had learned over the years, is
the dominant theme of Kim” (Rao 132). The novel suggests that all faiths are
equal within their respective contexts and, further, that perhaps context should
if not dictate one’s faith then provide the terminology—God, Allah, Brahma,
nirvana—that one uses to describe religious faith and practice within that con-
text. Though this attitude must be blasphemous to any religious fundamental-
ist, it was not so to Kipling nor to Kim, which, the novel suggests, need not
make him less capable of genuine religious experience. Kim indeed shows rev-
erence for at least two religions, Islam and Buddhism. Islam is his religious base
prior to encountering the Lama, so much so that even after embracing his role
as a chela he periodically mixes his religions. When he says, unmindfully, “Allah
be merciful,” Hurree Babu responds, “When next you are under thee emotions
please do not use the Mohammedan terms with the Tibet dress” (281). One’s
religious expression should be harmonious with one’s cultural context. It fol-
lows that Kipling’s purpose was not to place Buddhism above other religions.
Rather, Buddhism provided a suitable vehicle for the dual message of genuine
piety combined with religious tolerance, the only such vehicle Kipling perceived
in an India torn by religious conflict. Kipling chose Buddhism because it was
the only world religion without a history characterized substantially by violent
suppression of other faiths.21 Among world religions, only within Buddhism
does tolerance of other religions pose no threat to one’s own beliefs.
Gauri Viswanathan, among others, argues that British colonial interests
used discourses of religious tolerance and then secularization to undermine
Indian religious traditions and, in connection with them, Indian nationalist
movements. “Tolerance” indeed was the thin edge of one wedge by which
those on the Anglicist side of the early-nineteenth-century debate with the
Orientalists effectively made Anglican evangelicalism part of British colonial
policy in India. But Kipling was not an Anglicist, and his tolerance was not
identical to their “tolerance,” though I recognize that it may have contributed

nevertheless to some of the outcomes that Viswanathan describes. The dis-
tinction between the religious tolerance represented in and by Kim and that
of nineteenth-century Anglicists is worth maintaining. It is a distinction that
leaves open the potential long-term, global benefits of a form of religious toler-
ance that strives truly to respect difference. Tolerance that respects difference
does not use the rhetoric of tolerance as a disguise for imposing one’s own
religion on others (or, equally familiar from history, of forcing other nations
to open their markets for exploitation). Recognizing this distinction opens the
possibility of reading the message of religious tolerance in Kim without then
reducing it either to “love” or to nothing more than a cover for imperial vio-
lence. If one is able to resist the reductionism of the dualistic thinking that
equally characterizes both sides of the critical polarization, then one is reading
if not like a Buddhist then perhaps at least with adequate attention to the Bud-
dhist content of this novel.
Buddhist Pilgrimages and Archaeological Narratives
The Jain Temple where Kim reunites with the Lama after St. Xavier’s is located
in Benares, just outside of which is the Deer Park in Sarnath where the Bud-
dha delivered his first sermon, the “Setting into Motion of the Wheel of the
Dharma.” Southeast of Benares is Bodh-Gaya (or Buddha-Gaya), where the
Buddha sat under the Bodhi tree and attained enlightenment. Due north is
Kapilavastu country, the seat of the Sakya clan into which Siddhartha Gautama,
or Sakyamuni, was born in 563 BCE; Lumbini, just over the modern border in
Nepal, where his mother, Mayadevi, gave birth to him; Sravasti, where he and
his disciples gathered for each of 45 years during the rainy season; and Kushi-
nagar, where in 483 BCE he entered Paranirvana, the state those who already
have attained nirvana enter at death.22 Kim is set squarely in the historical Bud-
dhist holy land. For centuries before and after the beginning of the common
era, the modern-day borders of India with Nepal, Pakistan, and Afghanistan
were populated with thousands of practicing Buddhists and covered with hun-
dreds of temples, monasteries, shrines, and monuments. For a complex range
of historical reasons—including persecution by Brahmins, invading waves of
Muslims, and absorption into modern Hinduism—Buddhism began declining
in the land of its birth starting around the third century CE. By that time, it
had migrated north through Tibet and China and south to Ceylon and Burma,
and by the twelfth century, when it was extinct in India, it was the most widely
practiced religion throughout Asia. By the eighteenth century, however, the
physical traces of Buddhism’s existence in India had been erased, demolished
in persecutions, dismantled for building materials, and covered over by meters
of accumulating soil. No living Indian knew where the ancient sites of Kap-
ilavastu or Kushinagar were. Only after the British invasion and occupation
of India were the origins of Buddhism rediscovered, unearthed, cataloged,
and either restored or carted off to museums. The common but erroneous
theory among the few interested Europeans in the eighteenth century was that
Buddhism had been a primitive predecessor of Hinduism. Military engineers
and East India Company surveyors, represented in Kim by Colonel Creigh-
ton, were the first Orientalist scholars and amateur archaeologists to rediscover
many of the ancient sites of Buddhism. Charles Allen’s history of these events,
The Search for the Buddha: The Men Who Discovered India’s Lost Religion, states
the case most bluntly: “The European discovery of Buddhism and the subse-
quent resurgence of Buddhism in South Asia arose directly out of their [the
Orientalist scholars’] activities” (Allen 5). The curator of the Wonder House
of Lahore, though a partisan of British occupation and Western science, is not
bragging falsely when he tells the Lama “of the labours of European scholars,
who . . . have identified the Holy Places of Buddhism” (8). As part of its ap-
propriation of India, the British Empire served Buddhism by recovering its
historical roots, which were well on their way to being lost forever.
Clearly Kipling had read with great interest not only best-selling archaeo-
logical fictions like Sir Austen Layard’s Nineveh and Its Remains (1849) and
his friend Rider Haggard’s She (1887) but also accounts of the textual and
archaeological detective work in India of such figures as Sir William Jones,
“the father of oriental studies” and founder of the Asiatic Society of Ben-
gal, and James Pinsep, who in 1837 “broke the code” of the Asoka Brahmi
stone inscriptions found scattered throughout northern India, which opened
up the history of the Buddhist Emperor Asoka (ruled 268–233 BCE) and pro-
vided the key to decipher subsequently discovered Asokan pillars (Allen 69,
182). Most of the significant finds of ancient sites tied to events in the life of
the Buddha occurred in the last half of the nineteenth century, spanning the
period when Kipling was there covering such events himself.
To take one example, during the summer of 1875, the assistant to Colonel
Alexander Cunningham, who served as the Director and then Director-General
of the Archaeological Survey of India, was dispatched to make reconnaissance
diggings near the small village of Nagarkhas north of Benares. Digging down
to a depth of ten feet, an assistant, Archibald Carlleyle, struck a carved stone
surface that he continued to unearth and that turned out to be nothing less than
a reclining statue of Buddha 30 feet long and 12 feet wide lying on a decorated
platform bed inside of a collapsed temple (Allen 235). The size and traditional
posture of the figure identified this as the likely site of the Buddha’s Paranirvana,
Kushinagar. Cunningham already had made important discoveries, including the
relic caskets of two of the Buddha’s chief disciples, Sariputa and Maha Mogalana,
at the Great Tope at Sanchi in 1851—“the first ‘modern’ archaeological dig in
India”—and in 1863 he found the ancient city of Sravasti, which provided a fixed
point from which to locate other sites (Allen 216, 223). Far from immune to the
romantic aspects of the archaeological treasure hunt, Kipling enlisted some of
that romance in the character not only of the Curator but especially of the Lama.
The Lama experiences awe when he encounters statues found by those archaeol-
ogists on display in the Lahore Wonder House.23 The Lama’s search for the River
of the Arrow might be read as a re-Orientalized transposition of the archaeologi-
cal mission narrative. After all, one connotation of “Teshoo Lama” in Tibet is
“Learned One,” and the Curator recognizes the Lama as a brother scholar, “no
mere bead-telling mendicant, but a scholar of parts” (Hopkirk 40; Kim 1.8). In
place of the Western archaeologist, Kipling has substituted the Buddhist pilgrim
come to recover his religion’s heritage. This represents both an erasure of Euro-
pean intervention and a desire to return to Buddhists their own history.
From another perspective, however, Colonel Cunningham was less the his-
torical model for the character of the Lama than the Lama, or, rather, Buddhist
pilgrims like him were the model for Cunningham. The treasure maps that
Cunningham followed in order to make his discoveries were the pilgrimage
narratives written by two Chinese Buddhists: Fa Hian, who traveled overland
to Gandhara in 400 CE, recorded his visits to the primary holy sites in the life
of the Buddha, with locations and distances, and then sailed to China by way of
Ceylon in 414; Huan Tsang, who followed a similar course starting in 626 CE
but who was more of a scholar than Fa Hian, stayed longer in India, and
provided more detailed descriptions, including notation of changes since the
time of Fa Hian.24 In 1837, Jean Pièrre Abe Rémusat, founder of the Société
Asiatique de Paris, published a translation from the Chinese of Fa Hian’s narra-
tive, Foe Koue Ki, of which Cunningham acquired a copy in 1843. An English
translation titled The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe
Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth and Landresse appeared in 1848 from the
Baptist Mission Press in Calcutta, and in 1853 and 1857 a two-volume French
translation by Stanislas Julien of Huan Tsang’s pilgrimage narrative became
available, Voyages des Pèlerins Bouddhistes.
The importance of these documents to archaeological finds in India of Bud-
dhist holy sites cannot be overestimated. In turn, they were important sources
for Kipling’s writing of Kim. The Lama “had heard of the travels of the Chi-
nese pilgrims, Fo-Hian and Hwen-Thiang, and was anxious to know if there
was any translation of their record,” and, with these translations in hand, he
“drew in his breath as he turned helplessly over the pages of Beal and Stanislas
Julien” (8). Beal is Samuel Beal, author of a number of works with which it
is likely that Kipling was familiar, in particular Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-
Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) Translated
from the Chinese (1869).25 Kipling’s Teshoo Lama was inspired by and partially
modeled upon Chinese Buddhist pilgrims of the fifth and seventh centuries,
though it is likely that Kipling first was inspired both by contemporary Tibetan
travel narratives and by narratives of European archaeologists who followed
in the footsteps of those Chinese pilgrims.
One of the more curious aspects of the novel from a Buddhist perspective is
why the Lama’s pilgrimage is focused on the River of the Arrow, or the “arrow
well” as it is more commonly known. The Lama’s initially stated purpose,
“to see the Four Holy Places before I die”—Limbini Grove, Bodh-Gaya, the
Deer Park at Sarnath, and Kushinagar—would be the expected pilgrimage (5).
To then place so much significance on the arrow well simply does not make
sense from a Buddhist perspective. In the first place, the event of Siddhartha
shooting the arrow is a minor one in his early life; it occurred before he began
his religious quest and attained Buddhahood. In a number of ancient accounts
that I have consulted, little mention is made of the arrow and no mention is
made of the arrow well. Depending on which Beal Kipling intended the Lama
to look through, he might have found this account:
Outside the south gate of the city [Kapilavastu], on the left of the road, is a
stûpa; it was here the royal prince contended with the Sakyas in athletic sports
(arts) and pierced with his arrows the iron targets. From this 30 li south-east is
a small stûpa. . . . Here it was, during the athletic contest, that the arrow of the
prince, after penetrating the targets, fell and buried itself up to the feather in
the ground, causing a clear spring of water to flow forth. Common tradition
has called this the arrow fountain (Sarakûpa); persons who are sick by drink-
ing the water of this spring are mostly restored to health. (Beal, Si-Yu-Ki V.2,
23–24)
In Beal’s Romantic Legend of Sakya Buddha (1875), the most widely read of his
works, the greater portion of the description of the competitions between the
rivals for the hand of Yoshodhara is focused on contests in the “art of writing”
and the “art of calculating and arithmetic” (Beal, Romantic 85–87). The “com-
petition in martial exercises” is recounted in less detail at the end of the se-
quence and concludes thusly: “the prince shot his arrow right through the seven
[trees], and where his arrow entered the ground beyond the seventh, it pen-
etrated down to the very bottom of the earth . . . and there sprung up through
the hole it made a spring of water, which is called to this day the ‘Arrow Well’ ”
(Beal, Romantic 90).
Further, as these excerpts demonstrate, no mention is made of the well
washing away sins, as Kipling has the Lama proclaim throughout the novel.
Indeed, “sin” does not exist in Buddhism in any Christian sense. There is no
God to sin against or by whom to be redeemed; there was no original fall from
grace for which to expiate. Kipling knew this. His narrator understands the
difference when the bazaar letter-writer translates the Lama’s phrase “to ac-
quire merit” as “to ‘Almighty God’ ” (106–7). According to the ethical system
detailed in the canonical literatures of the major schools of Buddhism, humans,
as a result of ignorance, desire, and avarice, commit immoral or, to use a Ma-
hayana term, “unskillful” actions; these actions remain as part of one’s karmic
record; an accumulation of these actions leads to rebirth and continued suf-

fering, though not so much as punishment as an unavoidable outcome, until
one transcends the attachments and aversions that lock one into this cycle of
samsara. A summary of this sort cannot but grossly oversimplify a system that
complexly integrates cosmology and ethics, especially since there are as many
schools or sects of Buddhism as there are denominations of Christianity and
significant differences of interpretation exist between them. Suffice it to say
for the moment that Kipling is accurate at least in attributing the phrase “to
acquire merit” to his Lama, since it is much more common among Tibetan
Buddhists than among other Mahayana or any Theravada Buddhists. To some
Westerners, the phrase has suggested a simplistic accounting scheme of karma
by which, for instance, a past murder can be cancelled out by saving someone
else’s life. This is closer to some Christian, in particular Catholic, understand-
ings of sin/redemption than it is to karma. Father Victor is quite sympathetic
to the Lama’s search for, as he puts it, “A river that washes away sin!” (89).
Kipling, as I believe he knew, was closer to the Buddhist expression when the
Lama says to Kim “when we come to my River thou wilt be freed from all il-
lusion” than he is when he more frequently says that the river will make them
“free from all sin” (212, 289). Karma cannot be washed away in this manner;
it cannot be expiated by a moment of confession or repentance and so forgiven
and redeemed, as sin can be within Christian tradition (though of course very
differently within different denominations). Kipling chose here and in other
ways to Christianize the Lama. Whether he did this out of ignorance, or be-
cause he disagreed with a more Buddhist conception, or for the sake of reader
accessibility and approval, which I believe most likely, or some combination
thereof, we cannot know.
This still leaves unanswered the question of why Kipling focuses the Lama
on such an un-Buddhist search. One possible answer is precisely to Christian-
ize Buddhism. The metaphor of “wells of salvation,” from Isaiah 12.3, or “a
spring of water welling up to eternal life,” from John 4.14, is familiar from the
Bible.26 Another possibility is that a combination of Kipling’s own ideology
and interests and the thematic concerns of Kim in particular drew him to per-
haps the only moment in the story of Gautama’s life that directly involves mili-
tary prowess. An archery contest seems more in keeping with Zam-Zammah
and Kim’s Red Bull of war than would, say, a grove of meditation. This pos-
sibility adds support to the side of the critical polarization that argues that the
Lama’s search is subsumed into Kim’s search.27
Alternately, an explanation might lie once again in Kipling’s awareness
of contemporary archaeological narratives. One of the most dramatic and
publicized stories concerned the race between Dr. L. Austine Waddell, a
British physician who spent substantial spare time researching Buddhist sites
in India and monasteries in Tibet, and Dr. Alois Führer, a Viennese archae-
ologist working for the British Survey, to locate the last remaining unfound
holy sites from the life of the Buddha, Limbini and Kapilavastu. Both were
working from Huan Tsang’s narrative. To make a long story short, Waddell
did the painstaking detective work to correctly identify the sites in 1896
but was unable to document his findings sufficiently before Führer, who
used Waddell’s own research, mislocated what he believed to be those sites
and rushed into print in both India and Europe. He falsified his research in
order to hide his use of Waddell’s work and claimed sole credit for one of
the greatest archaeological finds of the end of the century.28 An acrimonious
series of exchanges in the public press followed. The Royal Asiatic Society
was involved in this scandal up until 1899, while Kipling was writing Kim. It
is unlikely that Kipling failed to notice these events, and it is highly likely that
he was familiar with Waddell’s several well-known books on Tibetan “Lama-
ism.” Waddell’s Tibetan Buddhism (1894), for instance, while often giving
an unsympathetic portrayal of Tibetan monks, applies Christian terminology

such as “sin” to Tibetan doctrines and details the lineage of the “Tashi-
lhunpo monastery,” “Tashi” being synonymous with “Teshoo” (Waddell,
Tibetan 231).29
With all of this in mind, it appears significant that Kipling’s Lama’s search
for the River of the Arrow is in effect a search for Kapilavastu, the object
of the Waddell/Führer contest. Huan Tsang had used the location of the
“Arrow Spring” in order to locate Limbini from Kapilavastu (Allen 271). Thus
Kipling’s choice to focus the Lama’s search on the River of the Arrow may
have been shaped by a combination of ancient Chinese pilgrimage narratives
and contemporary European archaeology narratives as a re-Orientalized re-
reenactment of the search for the birthplace and first home of the Buddha,
truly the spring of Buddhism.
Kipling’s Law and the Law of the Dharma
The most obviously Buddhist concepts in Kim are “the Law,” “the Wheel,”
and “the Way.” The former refers to the Dharma, which Victorian scholars
often translated as “Law” and of which the “law of karma” is part; the second
refers to the Wheel of Life, as portrayed in the Lama’s drawings of it, which is
a representation of the doctrine sometimes translated as “dependent origina-
tion”; and the latter refers to the Middle Way, a foundational tenet derived from
the Four Noble Truths in the Buddha’s first sermon, though Kipling often uses
“the Way” colloquially to indicate the path of Buddhist practice in general.
These figures point to three foundational doctrines within Buddhism at the
broadest level. The Dharma and the Middle Way appear throughout the can-
ons of both major schools, Theravada and Mahayana, portions of which were
available to Victorians in translation, especially the Theravada canon translated

from the Pali. The Wheel was most familiar to Victorians through the colorful
depictions of it brought back from Tibet by travelers and anthropologists (and
governmental intelligence gatherers), Tibetan or Vajrayana Buddhism being a
culturally and historically unique branching from Mahayana. Though of course
interpretations of these concepts vary significantly across schools and, within
schools, across the many denominations of Buddhism, the ubiquity of them
in Buddhist literature and the multiplicity of summaries and commentary on
them by Victorians permit discussion of them at a summary level. My purpose
here is to unpack Kipling’s representation and understanding of these concepts
and, where possible, to identify Kipling’s sources for them. I will use as a base-
line of comparison what might be called “consensus definitions,” which I draw
as much as possible from trends in Victorian usage and, in places, from defini-
tions that since the Victorian period have become more or less standardized in
the West (which I realize opens those definitions to challenge and, certainly,
to refinement).
To start, the Lama in Kim appears at times to mix and match the Law, the
Wheel, and the Way, and this overlapping use may suggest less an understand-
ing on Kipling’s part of the nature of their connectedness than a lack of under-
standing of significant distinctions. As Sandra Kemp comments, “Kipling makes
no distinction between Dharma (Law) as ‘the way things are’ and Dharma as
‘the Way’—a journey along an eightfold path to Nirvana . . . through a cycle of
existences” (Kemp, Kipling’s 26). However, Kipling would not be alone in this
confusion, given the fact that each of these concepts is as difficult to define as
the most challenging within Western theology or philosophy. Each has mul-
tiple connotations that are woven throughout a body of scripture in two major
canons that are more voluminous than the canons of Judaism, Christianity,
and Islam combined. This complexity, and the resulting Victorian confusion, is
reflected in Sir Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia. Being The Life and Teaching
of Gautama, Prince of India and Founder of Büddhism (1879), which Kipling
read and which was a primary influence on his writing of Kim, in particular his
characterization of the Teshoo Lama.30 The final section of that poem consists
largely of a monologue by the Buddha summarizing the principle tenets and
doctrines of Buddhism, including a paean to the all-encompassing justness of
the Dharma. Arnold’s Buddha summarizes aspects of the Dharma drawn clearly
from Arnold’s study of works in comparative religion, but at the same time he
Christianizes and anthropomorphizes the Dharma in ways not supportable by
Buddhist doctrine as found in the canonical scripture.31 Given Kipling’s debt to
Arnold, it is not surprising that his Lama similarly weaves together the Wheel,
the Way, and the Law, reinterpreting them in ways also found in Arnold.
To take one example, after Kim’s diversion of the Lama’s search for the
River of the Arrow into the foothills of the Himalayas has crescendoed in a vio-
lent encounter with the Russian and French agents, the Lama is struck on the
forehead and in one moment of passion nearly commits an extremely unskillful
action by not immediately checking the protective wishes of the Spiti hillmen
to shoot the two spies. This lapse motivates him to “meditate upon the Cause
of Things” and to recognize that “Just and perfect is the Wheel,” recognizing
that he has invited violence and suffering by his own previous actions and by
allowing his own desires to lead him away from his search (260). When Kim
tries to claim some responsibility, as the reader knows he should, the Lama says:
“No! It was because I was upon the Way—tuned as are sinen (cymbals) to the
purpose of the Law. I departed from that ordinance. The tune was broken: fol-
lowed the punishment” (261). The Lama is not being naïve here, as some crit-
ics have argued, though it is true that he is unaware that Kim designed to lead
him into the mountains. According to one Buddhist understanding of karma,
even if the Lama knew of Kim’s designs, he still would claim responsibility for
his own actions, his own karma, in precisely the same way. Also, his mixing of
Wheel and Way and Law, if muddled, is not unfaithful to Buddhist scripture
or practice at a very general level. Kipling’s knowledge of Buddhism was not
deep, but it was neither misguided nor entirely uninformed.
Considered separately, the Law of the Dharma is an immensely complex
doctrine for which there is no single definition and manifold interpretations. In
common usage among practicing Buddhists it has connotations that range from
“the natural order of the universe” to, most simply, “the teachings of the Bud-
dha.” At the most general level, it might be expressed as “true understanding
of the nature of reality,” the most comprehensive natural law of cause and effect
(karma) governing the universe. To be enlightened, to attain nirvana, is fully
to comprehend the Dharma, the way things really are. This is achieved not by
faith, in a Christian sense, but through knowledge, “Right Understanding,” the
first of the Noble Eightfold Path, the primary tenets of Buddhist ethics. This
knowledge is at once practical, philosophical, ethical, and scientific. Accord-
ing to the Dharma, the fundamental, inescapable nature of reality—from the
level of galaxies to the level of microorganisms, from global ecology to personal
relationships—is interconnectedness, the mutual dependence of all phenomena
through causes and effects. As W. S. Lilly wrote in his 1905 essay, “The Mes-
sage of Buddhism to the Western World,” “The truth is there is really one sole
dogma of Buddhism—that the whole universe is under one and the self-same
law of causation which is ethical” (Lilly 209). For many Victorians, Buddhist
thought appeared to fill the fearful gap between Darwinian evolutionary theory
and a Judeo-Christian moral universe in jeopardy from that theory. Lilly thus
continues in this way, addressing his contemporaries: “You have grasped the
fundamental fact that law rules everywhere throughout the phenomenal uni-
verse, whose secrets you have so largely explored. That is well, too. The religion
of the Buddha is not in conflict with modern science” (Lilly 213). The perceived
compatibility of Buddhism with science, Darwinian science in particular, but,

at the same time, its reassurance that the universe, rather than being governed
by “random selection,” is ordered by immutable law that is unswervingly just,
resonated strongly with the post-Darwinian British sensibility.32
At the same time, however, the Dharma rests equally on an understanding
that everything and everybody is impermanent, a doctrine profoundly threat-
ening to certain cherished Western beliefs. This foundational doctrine is articu-
lated especially in one of the traditional teachings especially within Mahayana
Buddhism called “The Three Marks of Existence,” summarized here: (1) duh-
kha (in Pali, dukkha), which translates as “suffering” or “unsatisfactoriness”
and is synonymous with the First Noble Truth; (2) anitya (in Pali, annica),
“impermanence,” which states that all things are conditioned by change, noth-
ing is constant or universal; and, (3) anatman (in Pali, anatta), which means
“no soul” or “not self,” the doctrine that autonomous, continuous, and eternal
selfhood, as in the Western conception of the soul or the Hindu Atman, is an

illusion.33 These concepts express the aspects of Buddhism that were and are
most threatening to Westerners and that therefore generated vehement charges
by Victorians of pessimism, fatalism, nihilism, and sheer absurdity. A few, such
as I. Salzer, writing from Calcutta in 1890, celebrated their understanding that
“Gautama Buddha’s doctrine of continuous Change, or tendency towards
Change within the Universe, is the only doctrine as yet known that includes all
the elementary processes of this world, both physical and mental; it is the high-
est generalisation yet proclaimed by man” (Salzer 8). Even if one were capable
of conceiving this universalization of the doctrine of impermanence, one would
be left with the very real dilemma it poses for lived human experience. That
dilemma, put most simply, is this: “The incongruity between the permanent
happiness we seek and the impermanence of the things in the world whose pos-
session and avoidance we think will bring happiness results in a life of craving
that is often frustrated and always at risk” (Gowans 133). Because the reality
of impermanence is not merely distasteful but terrifying, Buddhist doctrine, as
represented in the translations of canonical scripture made in the nineteenth
century, suggests that human beings tend to choose to live in denial rather than
face reality. As the second Noble Truth indicates, and as the Wheel of Life de-
picts, humans often cling to illusions: the illusion that one can escape suffering
by consuming one’s desires, the illusion that what one loves is permanent, and
the illusion that one possesses a socially autonomous self that corresponds on
the spiritual plane to an eternal soul.
Kipling’s Lama expresses some understanding of the Dharma’s doctrines of
interconnectedness and impermanence. He recognizes the effects of clinging
to illusions, as here: “But those who follow the Way must permit not the fire of
any desire or attachment, for that is all Illusion. . . . Now I am sorrowful because
thou [Kim] art taken away and my River is far from me. It is the Law which
I have broken!” (92). The Lama strayed from the Dharma by forgetting that
attachment to Kim, or to anyone, unavoidably produces suffering as the pain
of separation or loss (though part of Kipling’s motive throughout the novel is
to show that one must risk loving, regardless of this suffering). Elsewhere, the
Lama uses “Law” in a more colloquial sense. Since the Four Noble Truths and
the Noble Eightfold Path from the Buddha’s first sermon express the Dharma,
describing the implications of that natural order for human existence and pre-
scribing on that basis a plan for living harmoniously within it, “Dharma” and
“Law” most simply mean “duty” or “the Buddha’s teachings.” Thus when
the Lama says such things as “I bowed before the Excellent Law,” he simply
is saying, “I follow the teachings of the Buddha” or “I observe the duties of a
Buddhist monk” (13). Here again the Lama’s usage is at least not inconsistent
with Buddhist practice (most generally conceived without reference to school
or denomination).
However, there is one instance where Kipling’s use of “Law” clearly is in-
consistent with Tibetan Buddhism. In speaking to the curator in the Wonder
House, the Lama offers several reasons for his pilgrimage to India, one of which
is this: “For . . . years it was in my mind that the Old Law was not well followed
[in Tibet]; being overlaid, as thou knowest, with devildom, charms and idola-
try” (9). “Old Law” refers to Theravada, the original school of Buddhism as
preserved in the Pali canon, the predominant form of Buddhism in Southeast
Asia. The “Reformed Law” is Mahayana, the northern Buddhism of the San-
skrit canon of which Tibetan Buddhism was a variant. It is not credible that a
Tibetan Monk would denigrate Mahayana, “The Greater Vehicle,” relative to
Theravada, which Mahayanists dubbed “Hinayana,” “The Lesser Vehicle,” fol-
lowing the schism that formed Mahayana beginning around 100 CE. Kipling’s
choice to put these words into the mouth of the Lama marks a telling mo-
ment of self-consciousness in the text about its representation of Buddhism.
After all, Kipling could have chosen to make the Lama a Theravada Buddhist
from Ceylon (Sri Lanka) or Burma (Myanmar), for instance. Clearly he had a
range of other reasons for making the Lama Tibetan, including the proxim-
ity of Tibet to India and his personal knowledge of the territory and peoples
along the border northeast of Simla. Also, in creating the character of Kim, he
drew upon a news story of his day concerning Sergeant Tim Doolan, whose
son with a Tibetan woman was arrested in Darjeeling with identifying “papers
sewn up in a leather case of Tibetan workmanship . . . suspended from his neck”
(Hopkins 103).34 Of course, he also drew heavily upon the contemporary in-
trigue of the Great Game. Kipling had arrived in India just a decade after the
“classic age of Tibetan exploration” was inaugurated by the forays into the
Himalayas of Colonel Nikolai Prejevalsky of the Imperial Russian Army, which
sparked a “renewal of the ‘Great Game’ with Russia after 1875” (Bishop 145).
By the time of Kipling’s stay in India, Tibet had become “a cherished prize
in the Great Game played by Britain and Russia,” both of which “often sent
[hired Indian] spies, sometimes disguised as Buddhist pilgrims, into Tibet on
map-making missions” (Lopez, Prisoners 5). Colonel Creighton is modeled
on Captain Thomas Montgomerie, who in the 1860s and1870s was assigned
the mapping of parts of Afghanistan and Tibet, and the character of Mahbub
Ali shows signs of Kipling’s familiarity with espionage along the border in the
1890s (Kling 304; Parry 311). The reasons for choosing Tibet are clear, but
why then have the Lama effectively slander his own Tibetan Buddhism?
Kipling’s decisions first to make his Lama Tibetan and then to have him
deny the roots of his Mahayana (more specifically, Vajrayana) tradition reso-
nate with two specific contradictory positions within the discourse surround-
ing Buddhism in late-Victorian Britain. On the one hand, Kipling capitalized
on a growing fascination with Tibet, which Kim then helped perpetuate. As
Peter Bishop documents, from Madame Blavatsky’s Tibetan “Masters” in the
1870s to James Hilton’s Shangri-La in Lost Horizon (1933), Tibet grew in the
imperial and popular imagination from a place of strategic interest and a myste-
riously unexplored “Absence on the Map” to the seat of the Aryan race—“the
long-lost ‘ancestors’ ” of white Europeans—and the “storehouse of ancient
wisdom”(Bishop 102, 121, 182).35 Tibet became, and perhaps remains to this
day, the imagined spiritual utopian counterpart of modern, Western, industrial,
secular society.
On the other hand, Kipling’s use of Tibet flew in the face of a countervail-
ing treatment of Mahayana as opposed to Theravada Buddhism within the
field of comparative religion and an unsympathetic conception of “Lamaism”
within popular culture. The first wave of European translations of Buddhist
texts in the early decades of the nineteenth century focused on Mahayana
manuscripts in Sanskrit, but as the comparative study of religions became in-
creasingly institutionalized, scholars in England came to favor the more ancient
Theravada canon in Pali as being closer to the source. By the time the Rhys
Davidses founded the Pali Text Society at Oxford in 1881, the European tex-
tual colonization of Buddhism had been founded on the belief that Theravada
was “true Buddhism,” while Mahayana, and its Tibetan variant in particular,
was bastardized through hybridization with indigenous myths and practices.
Europeans traveled to Tibet hoping to find their fabricated ideal of the guru
on the mountaintop and were disappointment by what they perceived to be
dirty heathens chanting nonsense to demon-gods.
Waddell’s several books on Tibetan Buddhism confirmed and helped cre-
ate the view that “Lamaism is only thinly and imperfectly varnished over with
Buddhist symbolism, beneath which the sinister growth of poly-demonist su-
perstition darkly appears” (Waddell, Tibetan xi).36 What is more, Lamaism,
with its hierarchical structure, robes, and chanting, became synonymous with
“Popery” at a time of anti-Catholic sentiment in England, marked by the Mur-
phy riots of the late 1860s to early 1870s.37 Donald S. Lopez, Jr. summarizes
the contradiction between this conception of Tibetan Buddhism and the si-
multaneous idealization of Tibet: “Thus, Lamaism may be portrayed in the
West as the most authentic and the most degenerate form of Buddhism, Ti-
betan monks may be portrayed as saintly and rapacious, Tibetan artists may be
portrayed as inspired mystics and mindless automatons, Tibetan peasants may
be portrayed as pristine and filthy” (Lopez, Prisoners 10).
Recognizing these opposed late-Victorian responses to Tibet explains the
contradiction in Kim surrounding the Lama’s statements about the “Old Law”
and the “Reformed Law.” It is not, I suggest, that Kipling did not understand
the unlikelihood of a Tibetan Lama denigrating his own tradition; rather,
Kipling was aware of the contradictory constructions of Tibet and its Bud-
dhism prevalent at the time and incorporated that contradiction into his novel.
He therefore chose to make his Lama Tibetan but then to make him more
sympathetic to the contemporary reader by having him break from Tibetan

Lamaism.
One last comment on Kipling’s understanding of the Dharma as law: Sham-
sul Islam’s Kipling’s Law (1975) argued that Kipling built a conception of “the
law” throughout his writings as consisting of three components: “moral val-
ues, the Imperial Idea and the doctrine of disinterested suffering and positive
action” (Islam 9). No reader of Kipling can be surprised by the observation
that he was in specific ways a moral and political conservative who believed
in a stoic but non-fatalistic and action-oriented attitude toward the demands
of duty, as he conceived it. His model of the “Law”—natural and moral—as
“impersonal, stern and cruel” may be a distant analogue to karmic law within
the Dharma (Islam 92). Andrew Lycett observes that in the process of writ-
ing Kim, which spanned seven years between when he started a story about
Kim o’Rishti in 1894 and the publication of the novel, Kipling “acknowledges
something [to himself ] he had known but . . . had rejected while in India: the
similarity between Indian philosophy and his own metaphysical interests—
between the Buddhist concept of dharma (the law) and his own developing
ideas of a corpus of received wisdom, also known as ‘the law’, that is necessary
for the health of a community” (Lycett 331). Kipling may have seen in his lim-
ited understanding of karmic law a parallel to his own code of social conduct
and personal responsibility, his own “Old Law” of duties and consequences.
The Wheel and The Way
The first verse of the Dhammapada, a compilation of epigrammatic teachings

attributed to the Buddha and perhaps the most widely translated Buddhist text,
runs as follows: “Mind is the forerunner of all actions. / All deeds are led by
mind, created by mind. / If one speaks or acts with a corrupt mind, suffering fol-
lows, / As the wheel follows the hoof of an ox pulling a cart”(Dhammapada 1).
In a figurative sense, Kipling’s Lama’s “Wheel of Things” or “Wheel of Life” is
this wheel, and Kim’s Red Bull is this ox (41, 210).38 In his 1892 essay on a Ti-
betan painting of the Wheel, Waddell noted that “Buddha himself is reported
to have been the author of the original figure which, in order to illustrate his
oft repeated dogma of the Causes of Existence . . . he drew in diagrammatic
form with grains of rice from a stalk-in-ear which he had plucked while teach-
ing his disciples in a rice-field” (Waddell, “Pictorial Wheel” 135–36).39
In his book of two years later, Tibetan Buddhism, Waddell observes that
while the Wheel is “the chief corner-stone of Buddhism,” “scarcely any two
European scholars are agreed upon the exact nature and signification of some
of its chief links” (Waddell, Tibetan 106). Compare, then, Kipling’s presenta-
tion of the Wheel when the Lama first begins to teach Kim about it, saying,
“Sahibs have not all this world’s wisdom.” The narrator continues: “Men say
that the Bodhisat Himself first drew it with grains of rice upon dust, to teach
His disciples the cause of things. . . . Few can translate the picture-parable; there
are not twenty in all the world who can draw it surely without a copy; of those
who can both draw and expound are but three” (192). It again appears likely
that Kipling had read Waddell, and it is clear that he shared Waddell’s respect
for the teaching represented by the Wheel, as well as for the mastery of it on
the part of the Lama. As Kim says about the Lama’s painting, “This is a marvel
beyond marvels,” and the narrator later instructs us that “All Tibet is full of
cheap reproductions of the Wheel; but the lama was an artist” (192, 241).
Some Victorian Orientalists, including Waddell in his earlier writings, were
more fascinated by those elements of the Wheel culturally rooted in Tibet or
China than original to India, in particular, the giant fanged demon, Yama, the
Lord of Death, who often appears holding the Wheel, and the scenes between
the spokes of the Wheel of the six realms of existence into which sentient beings
might be reborn, depending on their karma.40 In Tibetan renderings, each realm
is teeming with colorful figures of demons, animals, and people, some segments
as fantastically grotesque as paintings by Hieronymus Bosch. They attract atten-
tion, both from Westerners unfamiliar with the underlying teachings and from
uneducated Buddhists, represented in Kim by the Spiti hillmen, whom the Lama
controls with a threat after being struck by the Russian: “I say there shall be no
killing—I who was Abbot of Such-zen. Is it any lust of thine to be re-born as a
rat, or a snake under the eaves—a worm in the belly of the most mean beast?”
(244). However, the aspect of the Wheel that is most important in terms of
centrality to the teachings shared by Mahayana and Theravada alike appears on
the less spectacularly figured outer rim. Depicted there are the twelve segments
of the chain of dependent origination, a doctrine the Buddha purportedly for-
mulated on the night he attained enlightenment. Thus it is appropriate that the
Lama is concerned especially with these images after the Russian rips his paint-
ing of the Wheel, as Kipling’s narrator describes it: “Kim stared at the brutally
disfigured chart. From left to right diagonally the rent ran—from the Eleventh
House where Desire gives birth to the Child (as it is drawn by Tibetans)—across
the human and animal worlds, to the Fifth House—the empty House of the
Senses. The logic was unanswerable” (262). The eleventh and fifth “houses”
refer to two of the twelve links in the chain of dependent origination, and the
Lama apparently knows precisely how to interpret the rip joining those two.41
The fact that in the course of the novel he never mentions Yama nor dwells on
the fantastical demons within the typical Tibetan Wheel suggests that he may be
informed by an Orientalist prejudice on his author’s part against these Tibetan
elements, but also perhaps that Kipling had enough of an understanding of the
importance of the doctrine of dependent origination not to undercut it by em-
phasizing other more sensational aspects of the Lama’s Wheel.
The doctrine of dependent origination (Paticca-samuppāda in Pali), also

sometimes translated as “conditioned genesis” or “interdependent co-arising,”
is considered by some experts, ancient and modern, to be “the foundation of
all of Buddhist study and practice” (Nhat Hanh, Heart 221).42 It integrates
and illustrates the Four Noble Truths, the Three Marks of Existence, the doc-
trine of karma, and the doctrine of reincarnation. Simply put, it is a model of
reality in its entirety—it describes the chain of causes and effects that govern all
existence. This chain is represented pictorially on the outer rim of the Wheel by
a series of images representing the twelve links in the chain of dependent origi-
nation (see appendix 2 for details). The model, as illustrated by the Lama’s
paintings, describes twelve stages or stations of human life in a cycle of rebirth
and death that has no beginning point and no end short of enlightenment. In
attaining enlightenment, one steps outside of this cycle, which is why in some
renderings a figure of the Buddha stands outside the Wheel in the upper right-
hand corner, showing the way out.
I will not attempt here a thorough enough exegesis of the Wheel or of the
doctrine of dependent origination to convey the dynamic reality that students
of Buddhism see in this densely symbolic picture. Suffice it to say that the
Wheel is a model of the operation of karma depicting the processes of cause
and effect by which human desire, ignorance, and avarice lead to a potentially
endless cycle of rebirth, suffering, and death from lifetime to lifetime. The es-
sential meaning of the Wheel, the dynamic reality that any static representation
can only hope to suggest, is the infinitely complex flow of causes and effects
that conditions absolutely everything in the universe. The meaning is in the
movement, the impermanence, the becoming. A taste of this meaning may
be suggested by a short excerpt from one of the Buddha’s many teachings on
dependent origination, as here in the Mahātaņhāsankhaya Sutta:
So, bhikkhus [monks], with ignorance as condition, formations . . . [of volitions

or actions come to be]; with formations as conditions, consciousness; with
consciousness as condition, mentality-materiality; with mentality-materiality
as condition, the sixfold base [of the senses]; with the sixfold base as condition,
contact [between the senses and the perceived world]; with contact as condition,
feelings; with feeling as condition, craving; with craving as condition, clinging;
with clinging as condition, being; with being as condition, birth; with birth as
condition, ageing and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, grief, and despair come
to be. Such is the origin of this whole mass of suffering. (Middle 353)
This sort of “if-then” or “because of ” formulation is common throughout

canonical Buddhist scripture in describing dependent origination.
When Kipling’s Lama says such things as, “We must think of the Cause
of Things,” he is referencing the doctrines of dependent origination and
karma (245). A central feature of these doctrines is the mutual conditionality

of all events and phenomena. As Major-General Dawsonne M. Strong, writing
from India in 1899, put it, it is the “connectiveness of everything with every-
thing” (Strong 77). Every effect has causes; every cause produces effects; every
cause is the effect of other causes, and every effect is the cause of other effects.
There are no self-originating, autonomous occurrences or beings and no first-
causes. The result is what might now be described as an ecological worldview
in which all systems are understood to be interconnected and mutually de-
pendent (hence the mutual attraction of environmentalists and Buddhists as
demonstrated by the growing body of literature that combines the two). Thus
Kim portrays the Lama as representatively Buddhist whenever he directs him-
self and Kim to consider the causes and the effects of their choices and actions
beyond those that are most immediately evident. The first obvious occurrence
of this takes place the morning after the Lama has first shown Kim a painting of
the Wheel and is awakened by the father of the child whom Kim has healed. He
lectures Kim as follows: “The thing [the healing] was done. A Cause was put
out into the world, and, old or young, sick or sound, knowing or unknowing,
who can rein in the effect of that Cause? Does the Wheel hang still if a child
spin it—or a drunkard?” (194).
A more significant example occurs after the climatic encounter with the
Russian and French spies. Kim’s response to that encounter is Mahbub Ali’s:
if they shoot at you, shoot back; action, not understanding, is what matters.
The Lama’s response is, “We must think of the Cause of Things” (245). The
next day, he tells Kim, “Had I been passionless, the evil blow would have done
only bodily evil—a scar, or a bruise—which is illusion” (252). Several days of
deep reflection later, he reports that he has “seen the Cause of Things” and
recounts a story from when he was close to Kim’s age, took part in a pen-case
duel between competing monasteries, and was struck on the forehead precisely
where the Russian just had struck him again (259). Two interpretations sug-
gest themselves. The first is that the Lama is appealing to a simplemindedly
deterministic model of karma, according to which a bad action subsequently
will be punished by an analogous payback that links cause to effect with linear
directness. This is indeed a prevalent understanding of karma in the West—for
instance as “instant karma”—and it may be that Kipling’s understanding was
little deeper than this. The alternative is based on a more thorough understand-
ing of dependent origination, one that recognizes that the Buddha “depict[ed]
the world of experience as one in which typically processes causally interact
with one another in complex ways: for a given effect, there are multiple causes,
and for a given cause, there are multiple effects” (Gowans 130–31). The text
suggests at least some of this understanding on the Lama’s part. His explana-
tion of the “Cause of Things” includes multiple causes: a recognition that it
is he who chose to come to the mountains, that he had come by neglecting
his search for the River of the Arrow, that he had passionately celebrated his
vigor as a mountaineer, becoming “strong to do evil and to forget,” that he
had sought to recapture something of his youth, in part out of a fear of the loss
of prowess that aging brings, and that his lack of mindfulness about these
desires, intentions, and fears conditioned his crossing of the Russian’s karmic
path, all of which led to a blow like a wake-up call (259). It is interesting to
read the Lama’s conclusion—“Who can read the Cause of an act is half-way to
Freedom!”—also as a prescriptive wake up call from the text to its readers: be
mindful of the complexity of causes and effects in this novel, as in the hybrid
world of colonial India, as in life in general (261).
The Wheel, like Buddhist teachings generally, is diagnostic and prescriptive;
“the paradigm chosen [by the Buddha] to represent the authority along the
way was the physician and not the priest” (Santina 150). The malady is every-
day suffering, the diagnosis is the conditionality and causality portrayed by the
Wheel, and the prescription is to practice preventative medicine by breaking
that cycle at any of the twelve points. A Buddhist might note, for example,
that one can choose to remedy ignorance by gaining understanding of the
Four Noble Truths, or one can prevent the automatic reflexes of grasping
and clinging that lead to addictive behaviors, for instance, by practicing mind-
ful observance of those impulses before acting upon them. This emphasis on
thinking before acting, contemplating causes and effects, is central to Bud-
dhism. Buddhist practice depends upon intention and mindfulness, contem-
plation and meditation. These activities, however, were not active enough for
the ideologies underpinning nineteenth-century British progressivism, market
capitalism, “muscular Christianity,” or imperial conquest, all of which were
more apt to urge, “Don’t just sit there, do something!” The perceived passiv-
ity of Buddhism, and the “indolent Orient” in general, not only discomposed
but threatened Victorian sensibility. It made Kipling, despite his sympathy for
Buddhism, squirm in his seat to get cracking, seize the day, and live life to the
hilt.43 Thus one finds in Kim a struggle to resolve contradictory responses to
the Lama’s practice of dispassionate contemplation, which the text worries
throughout by juxtaposing it to Kim’s lusty embrace of teeming, sensual In-
dian life, described repeatedly as “the world.” The novel draws upon the terms
of this debate as they existed within the discourse surrounding Buddhism in
Victorian Britain, namely: the active, masculine, progressive, optimistic West
versus the passive, feminine, tradition-bound, pessimistic East. But these terms
happen to be appropriate in a way that destabilizes this rigid dichotomy and its
slant. They point also to karma as “action/reaction” and to the continuously
available choice between creating more actions that perpetuate suffering and
refraining from doing so, which is the diagnosis and prescription of the Wheel.
For the Teshoo Lama, as for Buddhists in general, to choose not to act is itself
an action.
To take one example of the discourse of active/passive in Kim, Kim looses

two “Act[s] upon the world” by curing the Jat’s child and then saving the life
of the Mahratta on the train (209). The Lama approves of the first action, be-
cause it was done out of compassion “solely to acquire merit,” but disapproves
of the second action, because it appeared to him to be the use of a “spell,”
the “prideful workings” of which inflamed in Kim a passionate thrill of power,
which indeed it did (209). Thus the novel portrays neither the Lama nor Bud-
dhism as being opposed to all actions. He sees the former Mahratta, whom
Kim has transformed into a Saddhu, arrested by the police (without knowing
that this is the Mahratta’s purpose), and he is concerned that this has “loosed
an Act upon the world,” by which he means negative ramifications for others
and a karmic debt for Kim. Though he is ignorant of the Western techniques
of espionage used by Kim, he is not naïve: he recognizes covert methods and
prideful attachment, which his Buddhism tells him are misguided. Soon after,
the Lama commends Kim to cure other poor people if he is given the opportu-
nity, but to “by no means work charms” or repeat his display with the Mahratta
(212). Kim asks him, “Then all Doing is evil?” This means to ask, “Is the Great
Game contrary to Buddhism?” and the Lama answers, “To abstain from action
is well—except to acquire merit.” Kim then trots out the Western ideology he
has been taught in order to see what the Lama thinks of it: “At the Gates of
Learning [St. Xavier’s school] we were taught that to abstain from action was
unbefitting a Sahib. And I am a Sahib.” The Lama’s response is telling: “Friend
of all the World, . . . I am an old man—pleased with shows as are children. To
those who follow the Way there is neither black nor white, Hind or Bhotiyal.
We be all souls seeking escape. No matter what thy wisdom learned among Sa-
hibs, when we come to my River thou wilt be freed from all illusion” (212).
Once again, two readings of this exchange suggest themselves. The first,
from one side of the critical polarization, is that the Lama is a childishly pas-
sive old man, a dupe who is too simple to catch on that Kim’s action has saved
a man’s life and served the cause of the Great Game and, therefore, that the
novel portrays Buddhism as merely a cat’s paw of the British Empire. The read-
ing on the other side of the critical divide typically has been to state, in effect,
“But the Lama really loves Kim, and Kim reveres and loves the Lama, and
the novel portrays Buddhism with genuine respect,” which though true does
not answer the charge of the first reading. Between (or perhaps outside of )
these two readings is one that recognizes that the Lama’s ignorance of Kim’s
engagement in the Great Game need not be equated either with imbecility or
complicity, nor, more importantly, does it negate the Lama’s message. The
Lama’s typically Mahayana message is that action is skilful if it is compassionate
but unattached and unskillful if it comes from ignorance, clinging, or passion
(these are “The Three Fires,” represented by the pig, the cock, and the snake
in the hub of the Wheel). This suggests that the Lama’s personal ignorance
actually underscores his Buddhist message, since if he did understand that Kim
had saved the life of a fellow human being, he would consider Kim’s action to
have “acquired merit,” though he still would hold that Kim must work on his
prideful attachment to that action.
Those who feel that a strict dichotomy in the novel between the Great
Game and the Lama’s Way is the only possible basis for interpretation, and
those who think that the former “acts” upon the “passive” other, are at risk of
reifying the dualistic thinking and one-sided logic of the sahibs at St. Xavier’s.44
This represents a failure to hear the Lama’s point, which is that it does not
matter whether one is a sahib or an Indian or a Tibetan, whether one saves a
life in service of the Great Game or whether one saves a life for some other
reason, as long as one is mindful of one’s intentions and of the effects (karma)
that will be produced by one’s actions. Illusion is to act without understanding
that one acts out of ignorance, clinging, or passion. This is illustrated by Kim’s
pride and by the sahibs’ claim to mastery through action, or any claim to mas-
tery, including a Buddhist one, because these are considered to be “shows” to
entertain children and old men. Some critics will insist that this reading turns
a blind eye to the fact that Kim’s action, however well intentioned, serves
the Empire, which it does, and therefore demonstrates an utter complicity
with it, which it does not. This latter view again exactly misses the Lama’s
point by clinging to the sahib’s dualistic thinking. From one Buddhist perspec-
tive, dichotomies such as British and Indian, West and East, Great Game and
Buddhist Way are illusory to the extent that one believes they are categorical
rather than co-dependently arising, as the Wheel instructs. In other words, the
Lama’s perspective is a meta-view that is an order of magnitude broader than
the level of such dualisms. From this perspective, it is as possible to practice as
a Buddhist while working for the British Empire as it is to be a good Buddhist
while working for Indian nationalism. What matters is that one strive to think
non-dualistically, to bring an awareness of causes and effects to one’s actions, and

therefore to act only on the basis of these reflections as disinterestedly and com-
passionately as possible for all concerned.
The ending of the novel does not require Kim to make an either/or choice
between the Great Game and the Buddhist Way, between Mahbub Ali and
the Lama. Their conversation occurs after the Lama has found the River, or
rather, in a characteristically Buddhist way, after the River has found him once
he was ready to see it. He effectively had predicted this when he said, “if need
be, the River will open at our feet” (197). Mahbub, who is concerned that the
Lama’s “cleansing” of Kim’s “sins” in the River will make him too holy to act
any longer as a spy, probes Kim’s future vocation. Uncharacteristically for a
nineteenth-century Tibetan monk with a chela, the Lama does not expect Kim
to become a monk (which may reflect a consciousness on the part of the author
of the fact that the idea of a European Buddhist monk was almost unthinkable
in the nineteenth century). Rather, he expects Kim to “go forth as a teacher,”

with “teacher” holding multiple connotations. Mahbub sees his opening and
says: “Certainly he must go forth as a teacher. He is somewhat urgently needed
as a scribe by the State, for instance” (285). The Lama, who after all has “ac-
quired merit” by paying for an education to prepare Kim for that sort of ser-
vice, concurs with Mahbub in these terms: “Let him be a teacher; let him be
a scribe—what matter? He will have attained Freedom at the end. The rest is
illusion.” Again, some critics will be inclined to read this strictly as the Lama’s
unknowing capitulation, but a reading from a perspective informed by Bud-
dhism must recognize that the Lama’s response would be precisely the same
even if he knew that Kim was a spy. The point is that it does not matter what
Kim does as long as he does not violate the basic moral tenets of Buddhism
and strives to act mindfully and compassionately. The ending of the novel is,
therefore, indeterminate in a specific way, because it suggests that Kim will
continue as the Lama’s chela even after the Lama’s death, that he will continue
to play the Great Game, and that he will not feel compelled to construct a di-
chotomy or to see an irreconcilable contradiction between his Buddhism and
his espionage work. This indeterminacy is the Middle Way in and of this novel.
The Buddha formulated the Middle Way as lying between the indulgence in
sensual pleasures that he experienced in his youth as Prince Siddhartha and
the extreme asceticism and bodily mortification that he practiced for six years
prior to realizing that this too did not lead to ultimate truth. At the most basic
level, the Middle Way is the Buddha’s prescription for overcoming suffering, a
prescription issued as the fourth of the Four Noble Truths and detailed in the
Noble Eightfold Path. At the very broad conceptual level represented in Kim,
the “Middle Way” signifies non-dualistic thinking (and perhaps a partial corol-
lary to the “third term” of deconstructionist theory). As the Lama says to Kim,
“There is neither high nor low in the Middle Way” (20). The Middle Way is
neither the wheel of the road, with reference to the Great Game, nor the Wheel
of Buddhism, nor is it not these. It always is the path between any two sides in
any dualism, even if one of those is an ostensibly Buddhist side. By definition it
cannot be one side of any dichotomy; thus, contrary to the most common Vic-
torian assumption, it is not dichotomous to what the novel calls “the world.”
Especially for non-monastic lay practitioners such as Kim, the Middle Way does
not preclude active engagement in the cultural, social, and political worlds. Ac-
cording to the Devadaha Sutta, one engaged in “fruitful” striving and exertion
“does not give up the pleasure that accords with Dhamma, yet he is not infatu-
ated with that pleasure” (Middle 833). In the latter part of the novel, on the
road with the Lama, Kim is practicing the Middle Way.45 By refusing to force
Kim to one side of any dichotomy, Kim enacts the Middle Way.
Finally, the representation in Kim of the Wheel and the Middle Way is no-
table for several things that it does not include. While partially reproducing
the Victorian stereotype about Buddhist passivity, Kim does not solidify the
active/passive dichotomy but rather throws it into question. The Lama ap-
proves actions that “acquire merit” and do not generate karmic debt. The text
does chide the Lama throughout for his resistance to his attachment to Kim, as
when he says such things as “ . . . not because I was led by any affection towards
thee—that is no part of the Way,” the purpose of which is to communicate to
the reader via dramatic irony how much he does in fact love Kim (121). Kip-
ling cannot help but correct what he understood as a tendency in Buddhism
toward unhealthy dispassionateness. But the novel does not underwrite the
popular view, legitimated in the contemporary writings of prestigious scholars
like Ernest J. Eitel and Monier Monier-Williams, that a strong dichotomy natu-
rally exists and that the Orient suffers from an utter lack of practical activeness and
ethical activism.46 If anything, the novel characterizes the Lama as more active in
a masculine way than his Buddhism might predict. However, his final act in the
novel—returning from the brink of nirvana in order to guide Kim—rather than
demonstrating a breakdown of a presumed Buddhist commitment to non-
action, as has been argued by Zohreh Sullivan, is in fact prescribed by Ma-
hayana doctrine and illustrates the bodhisattva ideal that in part distinguishes
Mahayana from Theravada, as well as further demonstrating that a simple di-
chotomy of active/passive applies neither to Buddhism nor to Kim.47
Similarly, while the novel appeals to a clichéd conception of karma as “ac-
quiring merit,” it refrains from taking the typical next step within Victorian
discourse, which was to cast it as a doctrine of sheer determinism. As Eitel, a re-
puted expert, wrote in 1884, “For the theory of a man’s destiny, being entirely
determined by the stock of merits and demerits accumulated in previous forms
of existence, constitutes Buddhism a system of fatalism” (Eitel 83). There is a
strain of fatalism in Kim, but it issues not from the Lama but from the pa-
triarchal inheritance of Kim’s “father’s prophecy” of the Red Bull, which the
Brahmin outside Umballa confirms with his astrological prediction that Kim,
who was born in “the House of the Bull” (Taurus?), will find within three
days his Bull under “the sign of War,” which indeed comes true (16, 40). The
Lama in fact countermands this fate, at least in part. For him, the Red Bull is
simply the headstrong ego that must be disciplined, the ox pulling the wheel of
dependent origination, akin to the “Red Mist of anger,” because “All Desire is
red—and evil” (42, 93). As a Buddhist he opposes all killing, and thus, though
he is willing to pay to have Kim trained at St. Xavier to be a sahib, he directs
Kim specifically not to become a soldier, because “these men follow desire and
come to emptiness” (93). In the place of determinism, the Lama inserts choice,
not a choice that erases preexisting conditions but one that is capable of alter-
ing their direction. Many Victorians, like Eitel, held the misconception that
karma means an entirely predetermined fate that obviates the efficacy of the
will and the exercise of moral choice. In contrast, karma, accurately understood
on the basis of the sutras (or suttas, in Pali), places more, not less, emphasis
on responsibility for one’s actions to the future and thus on the importance of
moral choice in every moment of existence. Thus Lilly observed in 1905: “It is
curious that while so emphatically repudiating the existence of a soul, he [the
Buddha] teaches the extremist individualism. He held that every man is wholly
responsible for what he is and for what he does, and must work out his own sal-
vation, without reference to any Gods, great or small” (Lilly 205).48 As Doug-
las A. Fox has more recently put the same point: “Yet this idea [karma] is no
naïve determinism, because the individual still possesses the power to adopt a
moral or an immoral response to the circumstances which karma presents to
him, and that response becomes influential for the next karmic moment. This
limited power in us is not quite what is usually meant by ‘free will,’ for a really
‘free’ will would be outside the realm of karmic conditioning, a conception that
introduces a note of chaos into what is, in fact, a very orderly development”
(Fox 116). Whether Kipling understood this or not, he at least chose not to
reproduce a predominant stereotype of his age concerning karma. The novel
therefore leaves Kim with the indeterminacy of continuous choice, not the un-
conditioned choice of absolute “free will,” nor the surety that a fixed identity
guarantees, but with the uncertainty and excitement of becoming.
Western Metaphysics Compared to Buddhist Psychology
Questions of choice and identity constitute the pivotal crisis in Kim and in
ways that distinguish this novel from most other examples of the Bildungsro-
man. Kim’s identity is exceptionally splintered between multiple racial, na-
tional, and religious positions. The novel furthermore resists the closure of a
final synthesis, refusing to end with one of the repertoire of events that signals
finalization of the search for identity, most often marriage. The crisis begins to
come to a head after Kim has been taken from the Lama to St. Xavier’s and first
feels the pressure to remake himself as a full-fledged sahib. He holds the fol-
lowing conversation with himself: “But I am to pray to Bibi Miriam, and I am
a Sahib. . . . No; I am Kim. This is the great world, and I am only Kim. Who is
Kim?” (117). This question then haunts the rest of the novel. Kim “considered
his own identity, a thing he had never done before, till his head swam” (118).
No definitive answer ever emerges, and it is the open-ended nature of Kim’s
identity crisis that has been the occasion for the critical polarization over who
Kim is. While he is well aware of his genetic heritage, and Kipling lends his
character a strain of his own racial essentialism, having him play the race card
of his “white blood” whenever it is a useful move, Kim never does nor ever can
become a genuine sahib, anymore than he can be a genuine Indian. He never is
able to believe that he is possessed of a singular, fixed, essential identity.
This is to say that Kim is not able to realize himself as the subject of West-
ern, Christian, middle-class civil society. Kim is no Robinson Crusoe. His sense
of self is not predicated upon the twin ideologies of Protestant individual faith
and capitalist individual self-interest. These two individualisms, which, as Max
Weber tells the familiar story, developed as parallel strands in Early Mod-
ern Europe, converged between the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries in
the form of the bourgeois civil subject to become the foundation of the in-
dividualism upon which rests the dominant ideologies in modern Western
society. I oversimplify an immensely complex history in order to make two
points. First, Western individualism is historically constructed and unique to
the West. The apparent obviousness of this statement nevertheless still does
not prevent Westerners, even those most attuned to issues of difference within
the postcolonial world, from assuming their model of identity is universal. As
the Anthropologist Clifford Geertz points out, “ ‘The Western conception
of the person as a bounded, unique, more or less integrated motivational and
cognitive universe; a dynamic center of awareness, emotion, judgement, and
action organized into a distinctive whole and set contrastively both against
other such wholes and against a social and natural background is, however
incorrigible it may seem to us, a rather peculiar idea within the context of the
world’s cultures’ ” (Geertz 30–31, qtd. in Collins 2). Secondly, the Western
metaphysics of identity is profoundly conflicted, and in ways that will prove
significant for understanding Kim’s crisis of identity. This conflict emerged
historically from the process through which the Judeo-Christian conception of
the soul was incorporated into the Renaissance humanist conception of the so-
cially autonomous individual self. According to the Christian model, informed
by Platonic idealism, the self is split as a body/soul, the body half of which is
merely mechanical and thus corruptible, while the soul, created by and answer-
able only to God, is essential and eternal, continuous after death as a self-aware
consciousness. René Descartes translated this model into the split conscious-
ness of the “Cogito ergo sum,” but with a world-shifting difference: the indi-
vidual now became, in effect, self-creating, ultimately autonomous both from
God and from society.49 Thus liberated, the individual self, as prefigured by
Protestant individualized faith and realized in the “self-made man” (gender
intended) of emerging modern capitalism, became the defining social atom,
the essential unity. The resulting peculiarly Western ideology of identity posits
the self as both split and unified, both subject to God and self-determining.
This baseline definition of Western selfhood, which if unavoidably reduc-
tionistic remains serviceable, is necessary in order to understand how truly dif-
ferent the Buddhist philosophy of self is. And, this understanding is required
in order to consider which model of identity is most efficacious in explaining
Kim’s identity crisis. Rudyard Kipling, champion of the British Empire, cer-
tainly did not transcend the Western paradigm of identity that underwrites
invasion and occupation of the other, but Kim does. Works of art can exceed
their creators, and Kipling succeeded in creating a character in Kim whose
identity is at least in part from outside of the Western paradigm. The character
of Kim represents “a point of view and a personality almost at the furthest pos-
sible remove from Kipling himself ”(Kinkead-Weekes 441). Indeed, the model
of identity represented by Kim may be more thoroughly understand through
a definition of selfhood from outside the Western paradigm, specifically from
the perspective of Buddhist psychology. Kipling was aware of the Buddhist
doctrines of anatman (no-self ) and reincarnation, and it is likely that he had
encountered the theory of the Five Aggregates (the components of identity
within Buddhist psychology, defined below) in his reading in comparative re-
ligion. However, I do not rest my argument on author intention or degree of
familiarity with Buddhism; rather, the real test is which model of identity—the
dominant Western paradigm or the Buddhist paradigm—has greater explana-
tory power in this case and thus provides the most complete and convincing
reading of the character of Kim.
Some two thousand four hundred years before Sigmund Freud, Gautama
Buddha formulated a model of human psychology that is as systematic and
complex as any since then. Caroline Rhys Davids wrote Buddhist Psychology —
contemporaneously with Freud—to disprove the Western assumption that “the
observation and analysis of the mind began with the Pre-Socratics” (C. Rhys
Davids, Psychology viii). She observes that Buddhism is based upon a unique
psychology of non-essentialized identity, which she summarizes as follows:
“And thus, by learning habitually to break up the complex web of conscious ex-
perience, the Buddhist sought to gain a dual vantage-point: control over sense
and impulse on the one hand, and, on the other, insight into the compound
and conditioned nature of that which seemed to be a unitary Ego, or subject
of conscious experience” (67). Following Rhys Davids by a century, Nolan
Jacobson argues that “Buddhism, indeed, is the deepest and most persistent
reflection upon the nature of our concrete individualized experience ever to
make its appearance anywhere on earth” (Jacobson 134). It is extremely phe-
nomenological and practical, having originated from such questions as “What
produces suffering?” and “How can one overcome suffering?” These ques-
tions issue directly from the Buddha’s first sermon as The Four Noble Truths.
It is only to be expected that Victorian progressivism viewed the First Noble
Truth, Dukkha, which states that human life unavoidably entails suffering, as
sheer pessimism, since “pessimism itself was the dark side of the general facade
of optimism that the nineteenth century had erected” (Almond 83). But from
one common Buddhist perspective, acknowledgment of the existence of suf-
fering is merely a factual statement about reality (Dharma), neither pessimistic
nor optimistic, though perhaps hopeful to the extent that an accurate diagnosis
is the first step to a successful cure. Dukkha also names the first of the Three
Marks of Existence (outlined above), the second of which, anitya or imperma-

nence, informs the second Noble Truth’s statement about the origins of suffer-
ing in desire for permanence. Suffering occurs because people grow attached
to situations that are familiar, secure, or pleasurable, and, since impermanence
is a universal condition, these desirable situations invariably change. The thing
to which human beings cling most tenaciously and least reflexively is their own
self-conceptions, their sense of the permanence of their self, their own central-
ity to their perception of the world, and their own privileging of self over other.
Thus clinging to identity is in particular an obstacle to enlightenment. The first
of the ten “fetters” or “defilements” is “Belief in personality” (Snelling 66).
The “thirst” that is the cause of all suffering “has as its centre the false idea of
self arising out of ignorance” (Rahula, What 30). The “false idea” is that one
possesses a self in the first place and, then, that this self is constant, unified,
self-determining in its freedom from preexisting conditions, unitary and au-
tonomous in its separateness from others, and eternal in the afterlife. In other
words, the dominant paradigm of personal identity in the West is exemplary
of the misconception of self that Buddhism sees as the primary cause of human
suffering.50 As T. W. Rhys Davids summarized the situation, “the peoples of
the West have inherited a belief in spirits inside there bodies, and in other
spirits, good and evil, outside themselves, and to those spirits they attribute an
individuality without change, a being without becoming, a beginning without
end,” while Buddhism denies this “great soul-theory” and instead understands
the self as a process of becoming without being (T. Rhys Davids, History 80;
Lectures 28).51 One characteristically epigrammatic expression of anatman, the
no-self doctrine attributed to the Buddha, is his statement that all conceptions
of self should be addressed with, “This is not mine, this I am not, this is not
my self ” (Middle 123). One of the fuller discourses on this doctrine appears in
the Alagaddūpama Sutta, one conclusion of which is: “Since a self and what
belongs to a self [as in “mine”] are not apprehended as true and established,
then this standpoint for views, namely, ‘The self and the world are the same:
after death I shall be permanent, everlasting, eternal, not subject to change;
I shall endure as long as eternity’—would it not be an utterly and completely
foolish teaching?” (Middle 232). While the bhikkhus answer “yes,” as expected,
the vast majority of Victorians would have answered vehemently in the nega-
tive. Westerners in the nineteenth century found the doctrine of anatman
utterly unassimilable, and understandably so, since “eternalism,” the belief in
the immortal soul as a consciousness that continues intact after death, is the
center-post of Western theology and ontology, while according to Buddhism
that very belief is a form of ignorance that results from clinging to what is by
the nature of reality impermanent.52
Victorians horrified by such notions as these concentrated their rebuttals
on what they perceived as logical contradictions within the Buddhist theory
of identity. The least sophisticated of these rebuttals might be called the Car-
tesian or tautological conundrum, which can be expressed as, “If I don’t have
a self, then who is thinking this question?” For a Westerner, this reads like a
joke, the humor of which derives from the implicit assumption that all listeners
must share the Cartesian paradigm of selfhood according to which any fool
knows that thinking constitutes identity thus defined. The humor comes from
a form of “nonsense,” as defined by Susan Stewart, that throws unquestion-
able ideology into question. Within Buddhist philosophy, however, the action
of thinking is a process among others and does not necessitate the positing of
a permanent or unified self, nor prove its existence: “In other words, there is
no thinker behind the thought. Thought itself is the thinker. If you remove the
thought, there is no thinker to be found. Here we cannot fail to notice how
this Buddhist view is diametrically opposed to the Cartesian cogito ergo sum”
(Rahula, What 26). Stated by James Giles in terms perhaps more familiar to
Western philosophy:
I must exist, reasoned Descartes, because even when I doubt that I exist there is
still an I that is doing the doubting. But Descartes has become led astray by his
own language; for there is no need for the ‘I’ in ‘I think’ or ‘I doubt’ to refer
to anything. What Descartes was aware of, as both Hume and Buddha would
agree, was just thinking, not an I who was doing the thinking. Consequently
Descartes might just have as well said (and should have said if his concern was
with ultimate rather than conventional truth) ‘there is thinking, therefore there
are thoughts’. And such a deduction, if one may call it that, does not suffice to
prove the existence of an I. (Giles, No Self 132)53
In Buddhism, “I,” in effect, is a verb, a process of becoming inseparable from

all other processes in the universe.
Buddhism does not fail to recognize, however, that at a practical level indi-
vidual human beings exist and that given the limitations of language it is un-
avoidable and desirable in everyday life to refer to oneself and to others using
words such as “I” and “you.” In the Buhudhātuka Sutta, for example, Ananda
asks the Buddha to help him understand the difference between the “skilled”
understanding of the bhikkhu and common understanding, and this is part of
the reply: “He [the bhikkhu] understands: ‘It is impossible, it cannot happen
that a person possessing right view could treat anything as self—there is no
such possibility.’ And he understands: ‘It is possible that an ordinary person
might treat something as self—there is such a possibility’ ” (Middle 928). In
ignorance or denial of this distinction, some Victorian critics quoted passages
in which the Buddha uses personal pronouns and then claimed a logical incon-
sistency in regards to the concept of anatman. Christopher Gowans provides
a thoughtful rejoinder to this perennial misunderstanding with his theory of
“substance-selves” and “process-selves.” The former is recognizable as what I

have called the Western paradigm of identity, namely, that the self “is a single,
unified substance . . . ontologically distinct from other substances” and believed
to possess “a set of essential, unchanging properties” (Gowans 69, 70). With-
out doing justice to the rigor of Gowans’s philosophy, the present point is
served by one of his summary conclusions: “When the Buddha speaks of the
absence of any self he should be understood as meaning (in part) the absence
of any substance-self. On the other hand, when he appears to presuppose selves
in the doctrines of kamma [karma] and rebirth, and more generally seems to
refer to selves, he should be understood as referring to the dependent reality
of process-selves” (Gowans 72). Gowans also makes the suggestive point that
it is typical that “a process-self has false self-awareness” (not unlike “false con-
sciousness” in the Marxist sense) and therefore “mistakenly believes it is aware
of itself as a substance-self ” (Gowans 71). It is this very error that Buddhist
psychology attempts to describe and remedy. That task is made all the more
difficult by the fact that the limitations of language perpetuate the misunder-
standing. As Giles argues in this regard, the use within Buddhism of the Pali
word “ahamkara” to mean both “the utterance ‘I’ ” and “I-make” illustrates
the linguistic process by which identity reifies itself and suggests “not only that
the language of the self leads to the fabrication of a self but also that a fabricated
self leads to a misconstrual of the language of the self ” (Giles, “No-Self ” 197).
Thus in a sense that Descartes did not intend, “I think, therefore ‘I’ think I
exist,” and this licenses a perpetual, self-interested confusion of language with
reality, a condition that some varieties of poststructuralist theory describe as
inescapable but out of which Buddhist philosophy describes a path.
Perhaps the singularly most vexing conundrum in Buddhism for those Vic-
torians who cared to think about it was stated in 1890 by Helen Graham
McKerlie as “If there is no personal soul, what is to benefit by the good or
evil actions committed?” and again by W. S. Lilly in 1905 as “What is it then,

which transmigrates?” (McKerlie 213: Lilly 204). If there is no personal soul,
no eternal identity, then how does Buddhism describe the entity that is reborn?
A number of Victorian Buddhologists enlisted the concept of “character,” sep-
arated from personality and consciousness, to describe what is passed on as
karma from lifetime to lifetime.54 In the second place, if the person experienc-
ing rebirth is not the same person as he/she was in the previous life, then how
is it fair to expect that new person to bear the karmic burden of the previous
lifetime(s)? This issue provided some of those predisposed to champion Chris-
tianity relative to Buddhism with sufficient grounds for damning the latter
utterly. Writing in 1915, Frank Ballard, on the basis of the premises that good
and evil must be defined by divine judgment and that “an individual without a
self is a contradiction in terms,” concluded that “Karma is both non-moral—in
assuming a mechanical consequence which makes no distinction between good
or ill; and at the same time immoral—in visiting the consequences of one being
upon another being who is in no way responsible for them” (Ballard 131–32).
His views were representative of the majority, but even some among the more
informed and sympathetic minority also baulked at the concept of selfless
reincarnation.
Even McKerlie baulked at the idea of anatman and so strained in her de-
fense of Buddhism to bend it toward a Transcendentalist or Theosophical be-
lief in a “Supreme Essence” to which one’s own essence is rejoined at death
(McKerlie 208). The Theosophical Society itself responded to anatman not by
fleeing back to the Christian body/soul dichotomy but rather by one-upping
it with an even more multi-level nesting of selves. Annie Besant, the head of
the international Society after Madame Blavatsky’s death, wrote such works
as The Self and Its Sheaths (1895) to theorize identity as layers within layers
of “sheaths,” the kernel of which was, in effect, the Hindu Atman.55 Even so
knowledgeable a scholar as Caroline Rhys Davids began in her later writings
(and especially after the death of her husband, who would not have agreed)
to “assert condemnation of the dogma called Anatta [anatman] as being no
teaching of the first Buddhists” (C. Rhys Davids, Wayfarer’s 1137). Her “at-
tempts to turn the Buddha into an advocate of an Upanishadic style self ” may
have made Buddhism more assimilable to Victorian culture, but they only di-
minished her scholarly credibility (Santina 149).56 It would appear, then, that
the most difficult nut for Westerners to crack was the notion that one’s kar-
mic responsibility continues as a trajectory of becoming, while one’s conscious
being is impermanent and thus ceases to exist at the end of the present life.
After all, who wants to trade in the limited liability of redeemable sins and the
promise of eternal bliss for what appears as inescapable responsibility for one’s
actions and guaranteed erasure of one’s cherished self ? Henry Alabaster, in his
widely read work The Wheel of the Law (1871), compared karma and reincarna-
tion to the line in mathematics: it can have infinite length with a thickness of
zero and so is all but unimaginable to the average person (Alabaster xl).
The conundrum of “who is reborn?” is partially addressed by returning to
the basics of the Buddhist psychology of self. In place of the soul of Christian-
ity or the “enlightened self-interest” of civil society or the ego-based identity
of Western psychology, Buddhist psychology theorizes the Five Aggregates or
skandhas (in Pali, khandhas), as follows: (1) the aggregate of matter, including
the body as its five material senses: eyes, ears, nose, tongue, and the body/
mind complex; (2) the aggregate of sensations or feelings, of which there are
three types: pleasant, unpleasant, and neutral; (3) the aggregate of perceptions,
the recognition and processing of sensations and feelings; (4) the aggregate
of mental formations, a primary basis for karmic formations, which includes
intentions, the will or volition, and the idea of self, what in Western psychol-
ogy might include “emotions,” “attachments,” “projections,” etc.; and, (5) the
aggregate of consciousness, a sort of base awareness, perhaps a partial corol-

lary to the “unconscious.” Of course, these cursory definitions can be little
more evocative than would be a one-sentence definition of the Freudian “pre-
conscious,” for instance. For the purposes at the moment, the salient point is
that each skandha describes forms of energy, rather than matter, in a process
of becoming, and, though the five directly interact and influence one another,
they never constitute a discrete unified self.57 Thus the non-existence of an es-
sential self partially obviates the question of who or what is reborn. There is
no self to be passed on, though there are the effects of one’s intentions and
actions in the present life, one’s karma, the consequences of which continue to
have ramifications even after the present life has ended in a way analogous to
the Law of Conservation of Energy: no energy is created or destroyed.
The concept of the skandhas is exemplified by a story familiar to Victorian
readers like Kipling of the first-century CE Buddhist monk Nagasena, a mission-
ary to the Indo-Greek court of King Milinda (or Menandros, or Menander)
in Bactria, now northern Afghanistan.58 Over the course of many dialogues
recorded in the Malindapahna, Milinda cross-examined Nagasena on the very
same questions that vexed Victorians, such as: how can one accept reincar-
nation without also affirming the existence of a self who reincarnates? One
day the King thought he could trap Nagasena by asking him his name, but
the monk answered that his name was merely a convention, a sound or writ-
ten sign, which did not prove a permanent identity. He continued in Socratic
style by asking the King how he traveled to court that day; the King answered
that he had come in a chariot. Nagasena asked if the chariot was the pole,
the wheels, the body, the yoke, and so on through all the parts, to which the
King each time answered “no,” and if all of these parts were removed would
the chariot exist, to which the King answered “no.” Nagasena then asserted
that the chariot, as an essential entity distinct from all other entities, does not
exist.59 Nagasena was not naïve or stupid; he understood that a chariot exists at
a practical level as a means of conveyance. As Charles C. Everett attempted to
explain in 1882, “The lack of a permanent identity of the individual extending
from one life to another, or from one moment to another, did not affect the
Buddhist’s sense of personality” as a practical, everyday conveyance (Everett
432). Though conventionally useful, the chariot is not the ultimate reality;
it’s interdependent origination is the ultimate reality. Thus Everett goes on to
describe how the goal of enlightenment might be understood in relation to the
no-self doctrine: “If, however it [identity] is momentarily produced, the result
of a process, it may be supposed possible to find a method by which this pro-
cess may be stopped, and the I may cease to be, simply because it is no longer
produced. We may thus understand the great theoretical importance of the
lack of any personal identity, even though this did not affect at all the sense of
the relationship of the individual to his past and his future” (Everett 432).
In a related dialogue with King Milinda, Nagasena employs the well-known

metaphor for karma and reincarnation of a flame that is passed from candle to
candle as each previous candle burns out. Is the flame the same flame or a dif-
ferent flame? As Hermann Oldenberg, one of the most eminent Buddhologists
in nineteenth-century Europe, translated the answer from the Milindapahna:
“ ‘Without beginning, without end, the circle completes itself: therefore it is
neither the same being nor another being, which presents itself last to the con-
sciousness’ ” (Oldenberg 262).
Kim’s Identity Crisis and the Empire of Criticism
How might the preceding overview of Buddhist psychology inform our under-
standing of Kim’s identity crisis? Specifically, what is the difference between
reading the novel with the assumption that it conforms to the dominant West-
ern paradigm of identity and reading the novel with the possibility in mind that
it may be drawing upon a Buddhist understanding of selfhood? If one assumes
the Western paradigm, as indeed critics on both sides of the critical polariza-
tion have, then one will be predisposed to assume that Kim has an essential self,
which even if richly ambivalent and conflicted must “mature” in the course of
the novel and thus resolve into a singular, permanent, fixed identity possessing
clear allegiance either to the Game or the Way. The expectation of this is of
course reinforced by the tradition of the Bildungsroman, itself a product of and
producer of the Western metaphysics in question. If, however, one removes this
assumption and reads through the lens of anatman, then it becomes possible
to perceive a quite different reading, one invited by the text itself, namely, that
Kim’s identity—the narrative’s construction of his character and representa-
tion of his experience of his own selfhood—is not fixed but rather is inherently
impermanent. If one reads Kim’s character in relation to the Five Aggregates,

then it becomes possible to perceive it as just that: an aggregation of elements
in a process of becoming, which though functioning as a conventional per-
sonality cannot be reduced to a unified identity. This opens possibilities for
reading Kim’s character that tend to remain unrealized when reading from
within the traditional Western paradigm, which typically describes such char-
acters only negatively as “inconsistent” or “not unified.” For one thing, Kim’s
struggle to resolve the potential inconsistencies between his commitments to
the Great Game and the Buddhist Way then can be read as an enactment of
what Buddhism always has understood as the natural attempt by a “process
self ” to reify itself into a “substance self,” to use Gowans’s terms. From this
perspective, Kim’s identity crisis and failure to realize an essential self indeed
demonstrate the Buddhist point: there is no substance self there to be realized.
The more one attempts to force it into being the more self-destructive one
becomes—hence Kim’s illness at the penultimate moment. On the other hand,

if one can realize the non-existence of a substance self, then one approaches
enlightenment, as I will argue Kim does. Kim’s participation in both the Great
Game and the Buddhist Way need no longer be viewed as a contradiction or as
a one-sided contest or as a split that must eventually be unified by a choice in
one direction or the other.
I do not mean to imply that the critic therefore is freed from the responsi-
bility of analyzing this conflict, but rather that the Buddhist reading that I am
attempting to imagine opens the possibility for understanding it more fully
in the complexity that the text itself offers. As a foundation for this under-
standing, consider the interpretative options made available if one reads Kim’s
representation of British imperialism from the perspective of the Western par-
adigm as opposed to the Buddhist one. Western imperialism is discursively
founded on a dualistic logic of us/them, which in turn has as its base a defini-
tion of identity according to which the “I” or “we” must create, validate, or
protect itself through confrontation with and victory over a chosen other. This
is of course among the oldest and most frequently repeated stories in Western
literature, and to summarize its traditional features in this way is only to repeat
what postcolonial theorists have articulated since Edward Said’s Orientalism
(1978). The imperial self/race/nation therefore must define itself as the car-
rier of authentic identity, genuine humanness, while “they” must be defined
as ontologically other, not quite human like “us,” and so expendable if not
indeed utterly evil.
Furthermore, the history of Western imperialism is inseparable from the
history of Christianity. After all, the rise of the early Church from the declining
Roman Empire provided the conditions out of which the image of the com-
passionate Jesus was transformed into the Medieval conception of Christ as the
“Knight” of the “Lord.” This discourse justified the launching of the Crusades,
provided England with the Arthurian mythology of nationhood that under-

wrote the Empire, and continues to lend divine sanction to each generation
of “Christian soldiers.” Monier Monier-Williams triumphantly summed this
up in 1889 when he wrote: “According to Christianity:—Fight and overcome
the world. According to Buddhism:—Shun the world, and withdraw from it”
(Monier-Williams 559). No fan of Buddhism, he meant this as condemnation
of a religion that he perceived as posing a threat to Christianity in spite of the
clichéd Oriental passivity he attributed to it.
A more even-handed statement might be this: imperialism defines the self
by conquering the other; Buddhism dissolves that distinction by conquering
the self. Thus the discursive foundation of Western imperialism rests upon
its paradigm of the self. According to that model, every European male is a
Robinson Crusoe whose natural penchant for adventure evidences providential
sanction for carving out a little England in the heart of the colonized other.
Identity thus becomes manifest destiny. If one returns with this in mind to the
function of the critic, then one can see that the model of identity a critic re-
produces carries embedded in it assumptions about self and other that directly
impinge upon his or her reading of imperialism. Therefore, if one reads impe-
rialism in Kim either consciously applying or unreflexively assuming the domi-
nant Western model of identity, then one opens oneself to the risk of blindly
reproducing the understanding of imperialism that issues from that very model
of identity. Criticism of Kim of which this is true would be expected to find
in the novel a clear dichotomy between the poles of the Great Game and the
Buddhist Way based upon a strong self/other dualism that necessitates Kim to
choose one way or the other at the end of the novel.
In contrast, the Buddhist reading that I am imagining would challenge the
dualisms of body/soul and self/other in the novel. It would do this in the
first place because they are based upon illusory distinctions and a misguided
understanding of self and, in the second place, because the text itself makes
this reading available by restraining the authoritative, monological voice and so
refusing to force a resolution of these dichotomies.60 The natural bridge joining
self/other to Great Game/Buddhist Way—the very bridge that “hails” a dual-
istic reading within Western discourse—must then also come into question.61
Though no one would question that these dichotomies are represented in the
novel, nor that Kipling himself held a highly interested and biased position on
these issues, one still can find in the text the basis for a non-dualistic reading of
them, which is invited by and implicit in the Buddhist influence on the novel.
In order to perceive this reading, however, one must resist the pressure from
one side of the critical polarization to discount the aspects of the novel that
clearly champion British colonial rule of India and, in the other direction, resist
the pressure to read a phrase like “non-dualistic thinking” as merely another
cover for soft imperialism that duplicates Kipling’s own sympathetic paternal-
ism toward India.62 Achieving this perspective is vexed, to say the least, since
the dualisms cannot but appear natural within the context of Western discourse
and since critics on both sides will be attracted by their respective high moral
grounds: the critic on one side celebrates the novel’s transcendence of the body
of the Empire; the critic on the other side savors the satisfaction of outing Kim’s,
and therefore Kipling’s, complicity in the evil Empire—his betrayal of the soul
of the Indian people’s right to liberty and self-determination. A Buddhist read-
ing would have to resist both of these poles and work to read the dependently
arising interconnectedness between them, resisting in particular the side of the
dualism that appears to champion Buddhism itself, since from a Buddhist per-
spective even a Buddhist dogma is a trapdoor into dualistic thinking.63
For example, in a dialogue with Vacchagotta about the nature of the self,
the Buddha chooses, as he does in other key instances in the sutras, to remain
silent, confirming neither that “I have no self ” nor that “I have a self.”64 When
later asked by Ananda why he remained silent, the Buddha explains that Vac-
chagotta was not ready to comprehend anatman and so would have clung to
the dualism of self/not-self rather than understanding the teaching, which
is that both views and all dualisms “are fetters, both arising out of the false
idea ‘I AM’ ” (Rahula, What 66). The Buddhist paradigm of self is based on
both-and-neither logic, while the Western paradigm of identity is based on the
dualistic logic of either/or, self/other. The dialogue then takes up the related
dualism of “eternalism,” as in the eternal soul and heaven, versus “annihi-
lationism.” Annihilationism, according to the Buddha, is an inverse form of
clinging to self and thus is not synonymous with anatman.65 Most Victorians
failed to understand this, and many who opposed Buddhism therefore did so
with the claim that it was nothing but a philosophy of nothingness, sheer nihil-
ism. Like Vacchagotta, they were not ready to grasp Buddhist logic.
One corner post of Western logic, the Aristotelian logic of identity (A = A)
and non-contradiction (A ≠ B), “asserts itself through confrontation, in accor-
dance with the principle of the excluded middle” (Faure 48). Thus if eternalism
ceases to be an option, as in the so-called death of God, then the only alterna-
tive is annihilationism, the terror of nihilism with which Buddhism became
synonymous for many caught up in the Victorian crisis-of-faith. But Buddhism
resides in the excluded middle, the Middle Way. The Buddhist logic exempli-
fied by its use throughout the sutras is the logic of the tetralemma. At the most
basic level, tetralemma logic describes these alternatives: “A; B; both A and B;
neither A nor B” (Faure 36). Douglas A. Fox summarizes the positions within
that logic as follows: “1. Being, or Affirmation 2. Non-being, or Negation
3. Both Being and Non-being . . . 4. Neither Being nor Non-being” (Fox 89).66
Buddhism uses the tetralemma as a heuristic to exemplify the range of logi-
cal traps of dualistic thinking. The point is not to force a choice between the
four lemmas but rather to explode the illusion of ultimate separation between
them; the point is to step outside of the clinging to identity and confrontation
of opposites that is definitive of Western metaphysics. In terms of reading Kim,
the tetralemma invites non-dualistic readings that permit all of the following posi-
tions, simultaneously: 1. Kim serves the Middle Way (or the Great Game); 2. Kim
does not serve the Middle Way (or the Great Game); 3. Kim both serves and does
not serve the Middle Way (or the Great Game); 4. Kim neither serves nor does
not serve the Middle Way (or the Great Game). From the perspective of Aristo-
telian logic, this is “nonsense,” again recalling Susan Stewart. The third lemma
in particular—both A and B, both the Middle Way and the Great Game—is
impossible, inconceivable, unassimilable. But it is precisely this alternative that
Kim makes available to readers, if they are able to perceive it.
Few critics of Kipling have been able to perceive it. There are two primary
reasons for this. In the first place, Western and Western-educated critics have,
understandably and perhaps unavoidably, reproduced the dominant ideology
of Western metaphysics, unreflectively projected it onto the novel, and thus

have found mirrored in the text their own assumptions about the nature of
self and the nature of imperialism, which have in turn predetermined dualistic
readings. This applies equally to those on both sides of the critical polariza-
tion. In the second place, criticism has neglected the Buddhism in this novel,
treating it as either transparent or negligible. As Corinne McCutchan has ar-
gued for a different but related purpose, “that Kipling might have modeled
his book on Eastern art and narrative is never considered” (McCutchan 132).
This culture-specific critical lacuna is in part a result of that same reproduction
of Western metaphysics, which invites the assumption that it is not necessary
to consider any other model of subjectivity either because no other genuine
alternative can exist or none other is worthy of consideration. This is a form
of critical imperialism, the invasion and occupation of another’s domain of
knowledge without adequate attention to the differences that define that do-
main. The critic most vulnerable to this charge is he or she who attacks Kipling
and Kim for undeniable imperialist tendencies while in that very action repro-
ducing the attitudes of Western imperialism, first by discounting the Buddhist
content of the novel and secondly by projecting a dualistic logic that issues as
much or more from the critic’s discursive foundation as from this text. This is
to enact the very blindness to one’s own imperialist assumptions that one is in
effect accusing Kim of failing to see in itself.67
As a range of postcolonial theorists have demonstrated with convincing force
and insight, there is more at stake in how one reads and writes about literature
than intellectual chit-chat or academic careerism. The obscene violence and in-
justice of imperial conquest does not occur independently of the discourses used
to describe it. By the same token, the discourses used to describe it can per-
petuate that violence or create potential alternatives. To reproduce the dualistic
thinking of imperialism, even in literary criticism, may be to perpetuate imperial
violence. Thus, while I would argue that the non-dualistic reading of Kim that
I am building is warranted alone on the basis that it provides a more complete
reading of this text instead of condescending to it, I also am aware that a Bud-
dhist reading, whether of novels or of social conditions, carries with it the poten-
tial for imagining a way out of the dualistic impasse. The effects of that impasse
are demonstrated to us in the early twenty first century on nearly a daily basis by
the examples of suicide bombers who claim God’s imprimatur and state-funded
terrorism that calls itself “freedom fighting” or “peace keeping.” At that point,
no one is right, and, as Mohandas Gandhi, a student of Buddhism, understood,
only a view that recognizes the interconnectedness of all parties involved can
lead to a peaceful solution. The Buddhist term for this is dependent origination,
according to which it is impossible for me to do violence to you without also
doing violence to myself, not in some airy-fairy mystical sense but in a very real,
ecological sense that can have both immediate and long-term effects.
A more familiar expression for this might be the concept of process thinking
(contrasted to product thinking), as reflected in Gowans’s theory of “process-
selves” and “substance-selves,” or as described here by Jacobson: “Buddhism
has the distinction of having formulated the first process philosophy. It anti-
cipated by over two thousands years the efforts of a whole series of philoso-
phers of the West—Bergson, Dewey, Darwin, Fechner, James, Hartshorne,
Whitehead, and Peirce—to construe the world as events in their novel, emerg-
ing forms of togetherness. Reality is in transition; process is more basic than
being. . . . The original discovery of the Buddha is that reality is a social process,
no element of which is either separate, independent, or of a self-established
nature” (Jacobson 48–49).
If one understands that “reality is a social process” constructed by the entire
history of causes shared by all of the participants, then one cannot interpret
an act of aggression by any one party as the inexplicable madness of an isolated
act of an individual, racial, religious, or national other that must therefore be
revenged. Rather, one must interpret such an act as causally connected to one’s
own karma, meaning to the history of the actions and intentions of the indi-
vidual, racial, religious, and national self. We must learn to read history non-
dualistically. To force a dualistic reading, whether of Kim or of current world
events, is to perpetuate the violence of imperialism and war. To recognize the
non-dualistic reading that Kim itself makes available is, in part, to cultivate the
seeds of non-dualistic solutions to real-world ethnic and religious conflicts.
These seeds exist in Kim, in spite of and contrary to some of Kipling’s own
prejudices. They exist not only in the Buddhist elements that are obvious to
any reader but also as a more subtle influence of Buddhist thought on the writ-
ing of the novel, a grounding in Buddhist sensibility that shows through the
text. For example, and to give Kim the last word, I return in closing to the pe-
rennial question about how to read Kim’s final struggle to resolve his identity
at the ending of the novel. That moment is set up by a liminal passage from the
mountains back to the plains. The Lama is injured and lectures Kim on the il-
lusory nature of the body, but then Kim grows ill as the Lama “live[s] upon his
strength—eating him,” eucharistically (273). The depth of the love between
the two is openly acknowledged and, what is more, “Kim really becomes a
chela . . . and begins to deserve the comparison with Ananda, living the role he
acted so long” (Kinkead-Weekes 438).68 This liminal passage culminates in the
Lama’s finding of the River and, likewise, Kim’s parallel epiphany, his finding
of . . . of what? That is the question. Kim first finds that “his soul was out of gear
with its surroundings—a cog-wheel unconnected with any machinery” (282).
In the subsequent paragraph, however, his soul will reaffirm its commitment
to the body, the physical, material “world” of “Mother Earth.” In one of the
most balanced readings of this passage, Mark Kinkead-Weekes affirms the as-
cendancy neither of the Great Game nor of the Buddhist Way, arguing that,
“as the ‘gear’ imagery makes clear, this is commitment not to the Game, with
which we are no longer concerned, but at a far more fundamental level, to
the Wheel of earthly and human life, against the [Buddhist] view which holds
that all these things are illusion, and one must keep oneself apart from them”
(Kinkead-Weekes 439).
But even this reading fails to take account of something else that occurs in
the gap during Kim’s apparent swing between soul and body. Again comes the
failed attempt to assert identity, and again it is followed by the unanswerable
question: “I am Kim. I am Kim. And what is Kim?” The “what,” not “who,”
here is critical. In the next moment, which is the moment that most begs in-
terpretation, “He did not want to cry,—had never felt less like crying in his
life,—but of a sudden easy, stupid tears trickled down his nose.” Something
very significant has happened here, an insight, a realization, a change. The ide-
alized Buddhist reader that I have come to imagine sitting behind me as I write
this would simply nod and smile at this moment in the novel. “There,” he or
she would say, “is a moment of enlightenment, a little opening onto ultimate
reality.” Kim has found the “what” of the “who.” He has realized that it does
not matter who he is, since there is no separate “Kim” to be, no self. He has
dissolved the body/soul dualism, seen through it into non-dualistic thinking.
In that moment, Kim and the novel as a whole finally dissolve the dualism of
the Great Game and the Buddhist Way.
From a perspective informed by Buddhism, what happens next then makes
perfect sense. Buddhism, as the most practical of religions, focuses practitioners
on being mindful of each present moment of existence, not being distracted
either by second thoughts about the past or cravings for the future. Present re-
ality is the only door to ultimate reality. Thus when Kim sees that the elements
of the material world around him “were all real and true—solidly planted upon
the feet—perfectly comprehensible—clay of his clay, neither more nor less,” he
is not disclaiming Buddhist spirituality, as some critics have argued, but rather
recognizing the givenness of each material moment and expressing a gratitude
that is consistent with a Buddhist understanding of being fully in the present.
It is in this same way that King Malinda’s chariot, in its immediate physicality,
is also an image of impermanence. When Kim then looks out, the first thing he
sees is “an empty bullock-cart on a little knoll half a mile away, with a young
banian tree—a look-out, as it were” (282–83). A Buddhist reading would re-
cognize an allusion here to the Malinda story, as well as to the opening verse
of the Dhammapada, which was available to Kipling in multiple translations:
“Mind is the forerunner of all actions. / All deeds are led by mind, created by
mind. / If one speaks or acts with a corrupt mind, suffering follows, / As the
wheel follows the hoof of an ox pulling a cart”(Dhammapada 1). Kim’s cart
is empty and still. Thus in the next sentence Kim appreciates the “good clean
dust—no new herbage that, living, is half-way to death already, but the hopeful
dust that holds the seed of all life” (283). This is more than familiar mother-
earth imagery; the phrase “half-way to death already” and, more than that, the
tone of the text at this point carry with them a Buddhism-inflected awareness
of the cycle of samsara. Rather than replicating the expected celebration of
rebirth, this passage recognizes the suffering that rebirth brings and a desire
to step out of that cycle. Finally, and most tellingly, this enigmatic paragraph
draws toward closing with this sentence: “The many-rooted tree above him,
and even the dead man-handled wood beside, knew what he sought, as he
himself did not know.” Not merely the organic world, but the very dust, the
atoms of cellulose in the firewood, all particles of the universe, are aligned
with Kim’s new search, one set to commence as the novel closes, one utterly
different from the search with which he started the novel. In most Western
discourse, this level of integration and connectedness typically is dismissed ei-
ther as a form of irrational mysticism or as a Romantic fantasia, a fit of pathetic
fallacy.69 From a Buddhist perspective, Kim simply is experiencing the Dharma
as expressed in the doctrine of dependent origination—the Lama’s Wheel—
which is to experience the reality of what is.
Conclusion:
The Afterlife of Nirvana
Damn heaven. Damn holiness. Damn Nirvana. Damn it all.

—D. H. LAWRENCE (1921)
There is no thing that is Nirvana; there is only the word “Nirvana.”

—HERMANN HESSE, Siddhartha (1922)
And, nothing himself, beholds

Nothing that is not there and the nothing that is.
—WALLACE STEVENS, “The Snow Man” (1923)
The Victorian Nirvana Debate

Nirvana is everywhere, and in more senses than one. I recently heard the
word used three times within a day: once by a radio DJ to indicate the state
induced by a particular group’s music (not the group Nirvana), once in an
advertisement for a health-and-beauty spa, and once by my teenage daughter
parodying valley-girl-speak on the telephone. How many nirvanas must there
be in the air of twenty-first-century Western culture? All of this “nirvana talk”
started with the Victorians, and thus began in terms of a more earnest set of
debates (Whitlark 17). Indeed, one of the most sustained and contentious
debates about Buddhism throughout the nineteenth century concerned the
meaning of nirvana. Thus Charles C. Everett, writing in 1882, observed that
“the most important controversies” surrounding Buddhism concerned “the
great questions in regard to Nirvana” (Everett 421).1 Nirvana is an especially
telling boundary marker at the interface between Buddhism and the Victorians
because of the specific ways they did and, more tellingly, did not assimilate it.
The nineteenth-century nirvana debate was split between two predominant
interpretations, for which I will use the terms attributed in the sutras to the
Buddha more than twenty-four hundred years before the Victorians: annihi-
lationism versus eternalism.2 Each of these two strands directly influenced a
cultural movement that emerged in the nineteenth century. The afterlife of
nirvana—a phrase I use with verbal irony and historical sincerity—consists of
the ramifications of the Victorian nirvana debate as they have continued to
reverberate throughout Western cultures over the past hundred years.
If one picks up the threads of the nirvana debate at the middle of the nine-
teenth century, one encounters warnings about the vexed nature of the sub-
ject, such as this one drawn from the Reverend Spence Hardy’s Manual of
Buddhism (1853), a semischolarly guide for missionaries, as summarized here
by a subsequent commentator:
If anyone hopes to arrive at a full understanding of this subject [nirvana], let

them be well forewarned of its impossibility. Mr. Hardy states that there are
forty-four Buddhist sects, each holding different views of the future [after death].
1–16. Those who hold a future state of conscious existence. . . . 17–24. Those
who hold a future state of unconscious existence. 25–32. Those who hold a
state between consciousness and unconsciousness. 33–39. Those who hold
that death, at once, or ultimately, is annihilation. 40–44. Those who reason
on the mode in which perfect happiness is to be obtained [in the current life].
(Hauser 301)
Westerners always have struggled against their own desire to mystify nirvana
even beyond the considerable difficulty of it as a concept. Mystification is in-
vited by the fact that the Buddha offered no singular definitive description of it;
he strategically refused to do so.3 The sutras record many passing references to

nirvana, such as the following from the Makhādeva Sutta, though the sum of
these references does not constitute a unified definition: “But there is this kind
of good practice that has been instituted by me now, which leads to complete
disenchantment, to dispassion, to cessation, to peace, to direct knowledge, to
enlightenment, to Nibbāna” (nirvana in Pali) (Middle 696–97).4 The sutras
also show the Buddha on a number of occasions being pestered by disciples
for an unambiguous definition, and in each instance he turned the question
back upon the questioner in a way that makes his message plain: obsessing
on metaphysical issues like those concerning the creation and the afterlife is
a distraction from genuine practice. Indeed, the Victorian debate about Bud-
dhism as a “cult of nothingness” represents a fascination with that subject
that likely exceeded the level of concern with it among practicing Buddhists.
It is no surprise that the debate tells us less about Buddhists than about the
The Afterlife of Nir vana ~ 179
Victorians, that “in the many pages from the nineteenth century that dealt
with Buddhism, Asia, and the cult of nothingness, the only thing at issue was
really . . . European identity” (Droit 161). In the nineteenth century, European
identity became tied, peripherally but significantly, to understanding nirvana.
Resisting the attraction of an utterly mystified nirvana, which found ample
expression in Romantic poems and then Romance novels, the scholarly con-
tributors to the nirvana debate struggled to demystify it. They labored to de-
termine exactly what, according to this doctrine, happens after death. From
early in the century, the debate became polarized. In 1827, Henry Thomas
Colebrooke, in the first European monograph based on Sanskrit texts, char-
acterized nirvana either as annihilation or as eternally happy but apathetic
bliss, and “the question has remained for Western Europeans substantially as
Colebrooke framed it” (Welbon 27).5 The earliest Orientalist scholars estab-
lished this polarity but left the question open. However, the most influential
Buddhologist of the first half of the century, Eugène Burnouf (along with
his student Jules Barthélemy Saint-Hilaire) then weighed in heavily on the
side of nirvana as annihilation. Citing the etymology of the word as “extin-
guish” or “extinction,” their dark assessment provided the authority behind
what became the predominant philosophical and popular understanding of
nirvana in the West. Their definition came to serve the argument made by
some defenders of Christianity that Buddhism was “a system of cold Atheism
and barren Nihilism,” a religion based absurdly on the worship of nothingness
(Eitel 97). F. Max Müller, another eminent student of Burnouf ’s, imported
the annihilationist thesis into British comparative religion. In Chips from a
German Workshop (1867), he wrote: “True wisdom consists in perceiving the
nothingness of all things, and in a desire to become nothing, to be blown out,
to enter into Nirvāna. Emancipation is obtained by total extinction, not by ab-
sorption in Brahman, or by a recovery of the soul’s true estate” (Müller, Chips
227–28). He actively argued against the other predominant understanding of

nirvana as eternalism, rebutting those who strove to assimilate Buddhism to
Christian culture by remaking nirvana as a version of heaven or, if not quite
that, as “absorption” into the divine essence, ostensibly of God but similarly
of the Transcendentalist’s Over-soul or the spiritualist’s Spirit World. At the
same time, he defended Buddhism against his own conclusion by developing
an argument, which then was replicated as a common claim by Orientalist
scholars, for the greater purity or authenticity of the textualized Buddhism of
the West over the “degraded” indigenous Buddhism of actual practitioners in
Tibet or Ceylon (now Sri Lanka).6
The generation of comparative religion scholars that followed Müller,
armed with a much larger body of translated scripture, developed a more
sophisticated understanding of nirvana. Hermann Oldenberg countered the
annihilationists in his influential Buddha: His Life, His Doctrine, His Order
(1882), arguing as follows: “Entry into nothingness for nothingness’ sake is

not at all the object of aspiration which has been set before the Buddhist. The
goal to which he pressed was . . . solely deliverance from the sorrowful world of
origination and decease” (Oldenberg 265). He likewise refused the eternalist
position, turning to language worthy of Wallace Stevens: “The longing of the
heart that craves the eternal has not nothing, and yet the thought has not a
something, which it might firmly grasp” (Oldenberg 284). T. W. Rhys Da-
vids subsequently argued for a third understanding of nirvana, which, unlike
either annihilationism or eternalism, has clear support in the sutras, namely
that the “victory to be gained by the destruction of ignorance is, in Gota-
ma’s view, a victory which can be gained and enjoyed in this life, and in this
life only” as a result of “the Buddhist system of self-culture and self-control”
(Rhys Davids, History 108).7 He attempted to follow the Buddha’s example
by removing nirvana from metaphysical debate, theorizing it as an ethical state
achievable in the current life, as exemplified by the Theravada Arahant and,
differently, by the Mahayana Bodhisattva ideal.8 Oldenberg and Rhys Davids
had arrived at the more accurate understanding that neither the annihilationist
nor the eternalist position is supported by Buddhist scripture, but it was too
late. Both philosophical and popular conceptions of nirvana already have been
determined by this polarization.
A primary reason for the polarized response was that the nirvana debate had
been drawn into and made to serve one of the most pervasive and disruptive
cultural schisms in modern European discourse, that between spiritualism and
materialism, most broadly conceived. Having analyzed this schism at length
in a previous chapter, I only will point out that Victorians aligned Buddhism
with the latter. Undeniably atheistic and perceived to be compatible with Dar-
win’s science, Buddhism appeared to heap Eastern materialism upon Western
materialism. The Victorians thus were predisposed to read nirvana as further
grounds for their deepest fear: the extinction of the human soul. These con-
cerns partly determined the annihilationist side of the nirvana debate.
This predominant interpretation was cemented by Arthur Schopenhauer,
whose philosophy came to be known in the popular conception of many
Victorians—however little they may have known about his work or about
Eastern philosophy—as “European Buddhism” (Shanks 127). Schopenhauer
claimed, near the end of his career, that “ ‘Buddha, Eckhart, and I, we basically
teach the same things’ ” (Schopenhauer, qtd. in Dumoulin 468). Though he
published the first edition of his major work, Die Welt als Wille und Vorstellung
(The World as Will and Representation) (1818), before sufficient translations
were available in Europe for him to have known very much about Buddhism,
he revised and expanded it in 1844 with a “supplement” of six hundred pages
that makes frequent reference to Buddhism. By that time, he had read, among
other contemporary texts on Buddhism, Burnouf ’s L’introduction à L’historie
du Buddhisme Indien (Legends of Indian Buddhism) (1844), a primary source

of the annihilationist interpretation of nirvana, which Friedrich Nietzsche and
Richard Wagner would also read somewhat later.9 Though Schopenhauer’s
well-known philosophical pessimism originated from his own life and thought,
he became convinced that his “critical thinking had led him to the same conclu-
sions that centuries before Indian and Buddhist teachers had intuited through
allegory and mystical insight” (Batchelor 257). Thus his work is littered with
passages such as the following:
As a rule, the death of every good person is peaceful and gentle; but to die will-
ingly, to die gladly, to die cheerfully, is the prerogative of the resigned, of him
who gives up and denies the will-to-live. For he alone wishes to die actually and
not merely apparently, and consequently needs and desires no continuance of
his person. He willingly gives up the existence that we know; what comes to
him instead of it is in our eyes nothing, because our existence in reference to that
one is nothing. The Buddhist faith calls that existence Nirvāņa, that is to say,
extinction. (Schopenhauer 2:508)
My concern is neither primarily with the content of Schopenhauer’s philoso-

phy nor with the extent of its debt to Buddhism, but rather with the historical
effects of its influence. First, after Schopenhauer, the popular conception that
had been predisposed by the materialism-spiritualism divide became fixed on
the idea that Buddhism was a “cult of nothingness” and nirvana sheer nihil-
ism.10 The establishment of this concept required that “an atheistic, nihilistic,
and provocative [European] philosopher claim the Buddha as an ancestor, if
not as a precursor” (Droit 92). Second, the union of Schopenhauer’s pessimism
with the annihilationist interpretation of nirvana was an essential basis for the
philosophical nihilism that would be articulated by Nietzsche, a disciple of
Schopenhauer’s, and spread into other forms of Western philosophical nihilism

through Nietzsche’s far-reaching influence. For the moment I will leave this
point with Roger-Pol Droit’s summary observation, which his book demon-
strates in relation to Schopenhauer, Hegel, Nietzsche, and Heidegger: “This is
a primary fact: when they spoke of the Buddha, nineteenth-century philoso-
phers were dealing with nothing: regularly, explicitly. ‘Buddhism’ and ‘wor-
shipping nothingness’ became synonymous, or equivalent, in their writings”
(Droit 20).
During the same decades of the mid nineteenth century, those on the other
side of the nirvana debate built arguments in defense of the eternalist inter-
pretation of it. Some found it inconceivable that nirvana would not be similar
to familiar conceptions of immortality in heaven. When John Stuart Mill ob-
served sensationally that, given the large number of Buddhists on the planet,
perhaps “not annihilation but immortality may be the burdensome idea,”
the Reverend M. L. Gordon responded with an argument that became com-

mon as a defense of the eternalist interpretation of nirvana: “ ‘This longing after
immortality’, is one of the ineradicable instincts of the human soul” (Mill, qtd.
in Gordon 527; Gordon 535). Human nature innately longs for immortality;
therefore, the Buddha surely formulated nirvana as such and, regardless of
what latter-day Buddhist metaphysicians may have theorized regarding it, the
masses of practicing Buddhists surely bank on some sort of blissful eternity, just
like “us.”11
Other defenders of eternalist nirvana used terms effectively shared with
Spiritualism’s conception of the Spirit World. Though it is unlikely that Bud-
dhist nirvana could have influenced the emergence of Spiritualism in upstate
New York in the 1840s, it is likely that the Hindu concept of Atman—which
is part of the definition of nirvana as its foil—did exert influence via New
England Transcendentalism. Like Schopenhauer and many other intellectuals,
Ralph Waldo Emerson had read translations of the Avaita Vedānta and Bhaga-
vad Gı̄tā, and he filtered into his formulation of the Over-Soul the Atman,
understood as the universal Self or Godhead from which individual selves issue
and back to which they return at death.12 Spiritualists constructed the Spirit
World along similar lines as an eternal spiritual limbo considered ecologically
part of the natural universe but parallel to and in contact with the material
world. Some saw parallels between this eternalism and eternalist nirvana.
But the amalgamation of various blissful eternities with eternalist nirvana
only became explicit with the formation of late-Victorian hybrid religions, and
most clearly in Theosophy. Madame Blavatsky—who started as a spiritualist
medium, who was adamantly both anti-materialist and anti-Christian, who re-
ceived Buddhist vows in Ceylon in 1880, and who claimed that “prehistoric
Buddhism” was the Ur-religion from which Theosophy had issued—integrated
the eternalist interpretation of nirvana into Theosophy. In Isis Unveiled (1877)
she made ample use of the scholarship of comparative religion, frequently ref-
erencing Max Müller’s work, but took exception with his annihilationist read-
ing of nirvana, arguing instead for an Atman-like “absorption into the great
universal soul” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:116). The appropriation and mixing of ele-
ments of Spiritualism and Buddhism is obvious in such statements by Blavatsky
as this: “Nirvana means the certitude of personal immortality in Spirit, not in
Soul,” soul being a limited Christian concept and only an atom of the larger
Spirit (Blavatsky, Isis 2:320). “Spirit” had become the Soul (in upper case),
sans Christianity and inflected by Buddhism. In sum, a range of non-Christian
eternalist concepts circulating in Victorian discourse amalgamated (or perhaps
blurred) into an Oversoul-Spirit-World-eternalist-nirvana matrix and were dis-
seminated throughout that culture, filling any gaps created by doubt about the
promise of heaven and the threat of hell.
As I have indicated and will argue further, the annihilationist side of the
Victorian nirvana debate was an important source for modern Western philo-
sophical and popular nihilism, and the eternalist side, in conjunction with a
broad range of other sources, provided part of the foundation from which the
New Age movement of the mid-twentieth century emerged. Both forks of the
debate contributed to far-reaching cultural events and discourses.
What Nirvana Is Not
What is nirvana? The Buddha of the sutras suggests that the answer may come
only with enlightenment and that the way to enlightenment may consist, in
part, of not fixating upon such metaphysical questions but rather focusing
upon spiritual practice and ethical living. The sutras provide a somewhat clearer
understanding of what nirvana is not, and that understanding reveals the con-
tradictions inherent in the polarized Victorian response to nirvana. Nirvana is
neither eternalism nor annihilationism. At the very least, both the eternalist
and the annihilationist stances represent misinterpretations. Neither side could
have been supported by a careful reading of Buddhist scriptures available to
late-Victorian commentators on the subject. In canonical Buddhism, there is
no final heaven in which enlightened souls might reside in eternal bliss, and,
what is more, there are no eternal souls to reside anywhere.13 There is no eter-
nalism in any Judeo-Christian sense.
The annihilationist position is more difficult to dispel, because in very partic-
ular ways, and in part due to the limitations of language (to which the Buddha
made reference), nirvana cannot but appear in the sutras as a kind of nothing-
ness, though, critically, not the nothingness of Western nihilism. Christopher W.
Gowans, in Philosophy of the Buddha, summarizes one stage of his painstaking
analysis of scriptural representations of nirvana in this way: “It is evident from

these passages . . . that Nibbāna is something real. Therefore, the contention
that Nibbāna is simply nothingness, and hence that in this respect Buddhism is
ultimately nihilistic, is mistaken. The terminology of absence—Nibbāna as not
earth, not born, and so on—is intended to show that Nibbāna is completely
beyond the conditioned world, not that it is nothing at all” (Gowans 150).
And Droit opens his history of nirvana in Western discourse unequivocally:
“Let us say it straight out: Buddhism is not a religion that worships nothing-
ness” (Droit 1). Yet, neither the availability of a more accurate understanding
of nirvana in translated scripture nor the fact that the most eminent Buddholo-
gists of the latter part of the century disclaimed eternalism and annihilation-
ism prevented philosophical adaptation and popular conception from casting
nirvana primarily as nihilism.
Why? I have offered one partial answer in terms of the pervasive cultural
schism between spiritualism and materialism. Buddhism was atheistic, which
meant non-eternalistic, and so materialistic; therefore, it must be nihilistic,
because if one does not believe in God, heaven, and the soul, then the only
alternative must be belief in utter nothingness. This dualistic way of thinking
excludes consideration of a great many other alternatives. It is those that are
of most significance in understanding why Westerners cast nirvana primarily as
nihilism. Limiting nirvana to nihilism contained its potential to undermine the
dualistic thinking of soul/body, faith/works, active/passive, and self/other,
upon which the dominant power structures within Western, Judeo-Christian,
capitalist societies depended. Channeling nirvana into nihilism directly served
specific cultural urgencies and social interests that existed in the West long
before Buddhism entered.
Thus the Victorian polarized response to nirvana, far from being a naïve
or nonchalant misinterpretation, was a deeply invested denial. Nirvana was, as
Müller once labeled it, a form of madness, but the madness was not, as he in-
tended, among Buddhists; it was the madness of Westerners confronted with
concepts and doctrines so utterly incommensurable with their most cherished
ideals that they could not be assimilated. Foremost among those ideals, the
one most critically threatened, was that of individualism. I use the term “in-
dividualism” as an unavoidable general catchall for a range of individualisms:
the spiritual individualism of the essential soul and the eternal individualism
of heaven; the doctrinal individualism of Protestantism; the humanistic indi-
vidualism of Enlightenment self-interest; the self-governing individualism of
civil society; the self-divided but self-creating individualism of Cartesian phi-
losophy; the self-regulating individualism of Adam Smith’s capitalist state; the
self-made man14 of the Victorian self-help movement, which came to flourish
especially within American ideology; the existentially isolated individualism of
modernism; and the “self-maximizing individual of competitive ‘hedonic’ con-

sumer society” (Gagnier 321). These individualisms, if distinct, are causally
related within Western history. The nexus they form is part of the fascia of the
body of Western culture and society, the elastic and connective web of tissue
encasing the muscles, bones, and organs of postindustrial modernity. It was
nothing less than this, then, that nirvana discursively threatened.
The threat derived in part from the fact that nirvana, similarly to karma
and reincarnation, assumes anatman, the “no self ” doctrine. Having treated
anatman in previous chapters, I will summarize here only a few points relevant
to its relation to nirvana. According to the Four Noble Truths and the Three
Marks of Existence (listed in appendix 2), if one clings to the illusion of the on-
tologically distinct self—akin but not identical to “Being” as defined through-
out Western philosophy—then one suffers and causes others to suffer, thus
producing the karmic debt that will be reborn as another suffering self. If, to
the contrary, one can realize that the naturally attractive idea of self—“me,
my, mine”—is an illusion, then there is no self to be reborn. This is nirvana,
whether in the present lifetime or thereafter.
Such an understanding of nirvana also recognizes the nonseparateness—the
non-individualism, in effect—of one’s self from the social and natural worlds.
One translation of the Buddhist term for this is “dependent origination,” the
connectedness of one’s self with all other selves in an unavoidably mutually inter-
dependent process of becoming. This selfless ecological unity is the ultimate na-
ture of reality, which is one translation of “Dharma.” According to the Dharma,
the “world that exists is the result of the non-existence of any independent self-
established substance,” and this emptiness of self-existence “is what the world is
full of, a fullness sometimes called the Void ” (Jacobson 52).15 This “void”—also
referred to as sunyata by some Mahayana Buddhists—is the emptiness of self
that is nirvana. For Buddhists, such emptiness is the highest form of fullness or
wholeness. Full-emptiness is liberation, a liberation that comes only from self,
not for a self. Understood in this way, nirvana is a neatly auto-deconstructing
paradox: there is no self not to be reborn. Nirvana is the not-nothingness.
Guy Richard Welbon’s The Buddhist Nirvāna and its Western Interpreters
aptly captures this paradox and the Western blindness to it. Welbon analyzes
Müller’s failure to understand nirvana, noting that he had dismissed the “ab-
solute annihilation of all modes of existence for an individual personality as a
myth . . . grounded in the ambiguity of the very word nirvāņa” (Welbon 126).
Welbon argues that there was “a measure of irony in this of which Müller was
presumably never aware,” because while for him, “nirvana-as-annihilation is a
myth: a name without a reality that corresponds to it,” for the Buddhist “ ‘self ’
is a myth: a name, a convention to which no thing corresponds” (Welbon
126). Thus from “remarkably similar attitudes regarding the weaknesses of
language, Müller and the Buddhists reinforce two radically different conclu-
sions,” and “one cannot suppose that this paradox would surprise a Buddhist”
(Welbon 126). Müller, like virtually all Victorians, could not assimilate the idea
that the self as essential Being is a myth. To do so would require transcend-
ing the very conception of selfhood that is the basis of the Judeo-Christian
soul, the focus of Western ontology since before the Greeks, and the core of
the central ideology of individualism. For the Victorians—for most Westerners
then and now—no-self can mean only utter annihilation, because if there is no
individual autonomous self, there can be no world. The doctrines of nirvana
and anatman threw into question the ideal of the individual, autonomous self,
the self-made man, the traditionally masculine loner of the battlefield and the
boardroom, upon which depended the primary institutions of market and em-
pire that constituted the social order of modern Western society.16 “Buddhist
nihilism,” as Müller labeled nirvana in the title of his widely read 1872 work,
hardly could have posed more of a threat.
Nirvana is not individualism; it is not progress, not survival of the fittest,

not market competition, not a promise of endless consumption, not imperial
conquest, and not a rationale for the superiority of any religion, nation, or race.
It must be nothing. But, as such, it served a number of vital functions first
within Victorian culture and then in the modernism of the early twentieth cen-
tury. In the first place, it exemplified the not, the most extreme example of the
not us. At a deeper level, and more significantly, it also was the doppelgänger,
the necessary twin, to the indigenous Western nihilism that observers includ-
ing Thomas Carlyle, Matthew Arnold, and Thomas Henry Huxley noted as
the complementary dark side of Victorian progressivism. If progress was the
promise of endlessly fulfilled expectation, horizonless advancement, and the
superiority of Western commerce and Christian reward, then Western nihilism
was the shadowing doubt behind that promise and the active response to it. As
progress was the promise of future fullness or completeness, Western nihilism
was an expression of the accompanying emptiness or hollowness, as T. S. Eliot
named it in his 1925 poem “The Hollow Men.” Anthony Giddens summarizes
the basis of modernism in familiar terms as the “break with providential views
of history, the dissolution of foundationalism, together with the emergence
of counterfactual future-oriented thought and the ‘emptying out’ of progress
by continuous change” (Giddens 51). Some part of this “ ‘emptying out’ of
progress” was linked to and expressed through the Victorian nirvana debate.
Modern hollowness was the “I want” that never can be filled, however much
wealth, technological advancement, and military superiority one amasses. But
to admit that hollowness would be to open our individualism and our progress
to doubt. Thus Buddhist nihilism came to fulfill an essential function, which
was as a straw figure for nascent Western nihilism, a target other than our own,
drawing the fire that otherwise might land too near to home. Buddhist nihil-
ism was a necessary not.
To briefly consider one Victorian example, as early as 1875 an article by

an unidentified author in the Dublin Review titled “Modern Society and the
Sacred Heart” lamented the rise of “the Modern Idea.” The author identi-
fies the Modern Idea with the writings of men such as Auguste Comte, John
Stuart Mill, Friedrich Strauss, and Charles Darwin. He writes, “What we know
is that for the infinite, these men mistook the finite, and brought the spiritual
down to the level of matter” (Dublin 15). The Modern Idea is materialistic,
scientific, and atheistic, just like Buddhism; it is “paralleled with the overpow-
ering imaginations of those Oriental mystics to whom we owe Buddhism”
(Dublin 13). However, one should not confuse the Modern Idea with the
“affinities with Buddhism, however startling and undeniable they may be”
(Dublin 17). Though “Buddhism agrees with the moderns in considering this
visible universe as the only reality, and as neither beginning nor ending ever;
[and though] it is further consistent with Hegel in alternately declaring that

nothing is,” the critical difference is this: “The Eastern withdraws himself into
contemplation, subdues every movement of passion, and longs vehemently for
one only consummation, that the semblance of life, which he has, may be taken
from him, and pain may cease with annihilation. The Western cannot learn this
hopeless asceticism; he believes that the cycle of things is an evolution from
mere potentiality to some large perfection; he worships progress, and looks out
for the means of advancing society and mankind in its onward path” (Dublin
17–18, my emphasis). The author proceeds to juxtapose his solution, Christian
eternalism combined with Victorian progressivism, to the stereotyped annihi-
lationism of nirvana. But, to his credit, he was insightful enough both to see
the parallels between Buddhist nihilism and Victorian progressive materialism
and not to confuse the two. He recognized the Western hollowness at the
heart of progressive individualism, which, as his thesis now appears prescient
in predicting, was on its way to becoming the basis for the disillusionment of
the “modern existential condition.” He understood, as many Victorians did
not, the difference between the emptiness of nirvana and the hollowness that
was uniquely a product of the history of European scientific, industrial, and
economic progress.
The majority of Victorians who considered the question at all instead found
it much more serviceable simply to scapegoat Buddhist nihilism in the act of
denying the possibility of Western nihilism. In this sense, the appearance of
Buddhism at midcentury proved to be convenient, as was the Darwinian rev-
olution with which it was associated: the middle classes could blame these
for the decline of spirituality rather than recognizing the engine of their own
progress as the cause. That engine was the league formed between corporate
and state interests in industrialism, finance or the stock market, and colonial
expansionism. I will refer to this league hereafter as “corporate-state capital-
ism.” It posed a much greater threat to spirituality than scientific materialism

ever had; however, it was too powerful to become a target of sustained criti-
cism (despite the best efforts of late-century socialists). Capital had become
the ultimate materialism and, by the end of the century, held sway over the
old materialism, which had consisted of unbelief and science. Even so, Darwin
and the atheists, including the Buddhist atheists, would go on serving as the
necessary scapegoats. Only in this way could the modern partnership of Prot-
estant Christianity and capitalism be kept from appearing as the giving away of
the bride of spiritualism to the bridegroom of materialism. For the Victorians,
to recognize capital as the new materialistic Satan might mean to give up on
progress and to face their own hollowness. Better to bank on progress, redi-
rect criticism to, among other things, Buddhist nihilism, and leave facing that
hollowness to modernism.
Nietzsche and the Self-Made Man
Friedrich Nietzsche, though he died in 1900, was perhaps the first modernist,
and his diagnosis as well as prescription for the modern hollowness, the dark
side of progress, was nihilism, which, though European, owes its formation in
part to the Victorian nirvana debate. His writings replicated the polarization of
that debate and fashioned, in response to perceived Buddhist nihilism, a new,
uniquely Western and positive nihilism. The “Preface” to the collection of Nietz-
sche’s notes published posthumously in 1901 as The Will to Power (1883–1888)
states Nietzsche’s purpose clearly: “I describe what is coming, what can no lon-
ger come differently: the advent of nihilism” (Will, Preface §2.3).17 I will not
pretend to give a full consideration here of the meaning of nihilism in Nietz-
sche’s writing, a task I leave to professional philosophers; rather, I make two
summary observations that the philosophers whom I have consulted support.18
First, nihilism for Nietzsche, as later for Martin Heidegger, meant the logical
culmination and endpoint of Western metaphysics and Christianity, the point
of the failure of those systems to support their own truth claims. “What does
nihilism mean? That the highest values devaluate themselves. The aim is lacking;
‘why’? finds no answer” (Nietzsche, Will §2.9). As Richard Beardsworth neatly
puts it, this “marks the historical coming-to-be of metaphysics as the (historical)
event of nihilism” (Beardsworth 37). Second, nihilism in Nietzsche describes
the nature of one’s response to that historical fact. He drew a strong distinction
between two types of response to the demise of traditional metaphysical and
Christian ideals: “passive nihilism” and “active nihilism” (Will §22.17).
Nietzsche’s passive nihilism has been summarized variously as the symptom
of the loss of traditional values and ideals, a form of denial of that loss, and the
resulting degeneration of will in the face of the suffering of life, now unjustified
by either deity or reason. It was for Nietzsche the modern malaise, “the sort of
modernity that made us ill,—we sickened on lazy peace, cowardly compromise,

the whole virtuous dirtiness of the modern Yea and Nay” (an allusion to Thomas
Carlyle) (Antichrist 1:42). Nietzsche’s diagnosis set the stage for existentialist
philosophy and the modern existential condition. From the writing of Thus
Spoke Zarathustra (1883) forward, Nietzsche relied on two primary examples
of passive nihilism. First and foremost is the faith and morality of Christianity,
of which his entire oeuvre is a critique, culminating in the last book he wrote,
The Antichrist (published in 1895). “Nothing is more unhealthy, amid all our
unhealthy modernism, than Christian pity,” which is “the technic of nihilism”
that hollows out the “the self-preservative instincts of sound life” and replaces
them with “the rottenness of man” (Antichrist 7:48-9, 5:45, 6:46). Christianity
is “the greatest of all imaginable corruptions” (62:180).
Nietzsche’s second recurrent example of passive nihilism is “the weary nihil-
ism that no longer attacks; its most famous form, Buddhism; a passive nihilism,
a sign of weakness” (Will §23.18). Nietzsche took his understanding of Bud-

dhism in part from Schopenhauer and then from reading major works of com-
parative religion by Burnouf, Oldenberg, and others.19 He, like many at the
time, aligned Schopenhauerian pessimism with Buddhism, as here: “The will
to nothingness has the upper hand over the will to life—and the overall aim
is, in Christian, Buddhist, Schopenhauerian terms: ‘better not to be than to
be’ ” (Will §685.364). And yet, for Nietzsche Buddhism was far superior to
Christianity: “Buddhism is a hundred times as realistic as Christianity. . . . [I]t is
the product of long centuries of philosophical speculation. The concept, ‘god,’
was already disposed of before it appeared. Buddhism is the only genuinely pos-
itive religion to be encountered in history” (Antichrist 20:69). Beyond a be-
grudging sympathy toward Buddhism, Nietzsche’s philosophy also resonates
in limited ways with elements of its doctrine. His emphasis on confronting suf-
fering bears comparison to Buddhism’s Four Noble Truths, the first of which
states, in short, that to live unavoidably entails suffering. While according to
Nietzsche Christian morality is merely a form of denial of this truth, his “au-
thentic Dionysian wisdom,” characterized by “the joyful acceptance of what-
ever amount of suffering may prove to be the price of a life lived to the full,” is
not incompatible with the Buddhist emphasis on non-avoidance and mindful
transformation of suffering (Shanks 130). But, even if Nietzsche was partially
sympathetic to Buddhism, he could not excuse its emphasis on compassion,
surrender, and self-abnegation. Buddhism remained an enervating threat to
the will to power; the “probability of a new Buddhism” arising in Europe was
“the greatest danger” (Will §69.45 n. 39). Thus Nietzsche largely followed
the predominant Victorian interpretation of Buddhism and its nirvana by cast-
ing them as ultimately passive and therefore antithetical to the series of related
tenets he championed throughout his writings.
One of those tenets was active nihilism, the curative counterpart to the
“values of décadence, of [passive] nihilism, [that] now prevail under the holi-
est names” (Antichrist 6:46). In short, active nihilism smashes the old idols,
casts aside the twin crutches of supernatural God and metaphysical Truth. It
is honest and brave enough to “behold the world in its painful, amoral im-
manence,” and, by force of will, acts in that world despite these conditions
(Conway 125). Active nihilism is “a sign of increased power of the spirit,”
“a sign of the strength” of the will to power (Will §22.17).20 It affirms life as a
moment-to-moment process of individual self-creation, of becoming, despite
the suffering that is an unavoidable condition of living. Active nihilism can be
related back to Nietzsche’s earliest major work, The Birth of Tragedy (1872),
in which he similarly used Buddhism as a foil, writing that “tragedy should save
us from Buddhism” (Nietzsche, qtd. in Droit 20).
Indeed, Nietzsche’s signature concepts—active nihilism, the will to power,
the Übermensch, the Dionysian, eternal recurrence—are developed and linked
across multiple works.21 The Übermensch (the overman or superman), which

is traceable forward from Thus Spoke Zarathustra, might be thought of at once
as the hero of Nietzschean tragedy, the embodiment of the will to power, the
most active of active nihilists, and the human as his own suffering god—truly
the ultimate self-made, as opposed to divinely made, man. Nietzsche himself
“insisted on the close relationship of both concepts” of the Übermensch and
eternal recurrence, though the two might appear to be antithetical (Kaufmann
276). Eternal recurrence effectively subjects the Übermensch to a natural uni-
verse beyond his powers, one characterized by an infinitely “ ‘eternal recurrence
of the same’ and the affirmation of the self-destroying and self-creating cycles
of energy” (Beardsworth 39). Nietzsche dramatized eternal recurrence in The
Gay Science (1882) in this way: “This life, as you now live it and have lived it,
you will have to live once more and innumerable times more; and there will
be nothing new in it, but every pain and every joy and every thought and
sigh . . . and even this moment and I myself ” (Nietzsche, qtd. in Kaufmann
280). Eternal recurrence might be understood as the greatest test of the active
nihilist’s will to power, because it requires him to embrace his life, including
all of its suffering, with such fierceness that he would choose to relive it infi-
nitely: “This new man affirms not God but himself, Man, creative will, who,
in the face of decay and decline, wills his own existence again and again for all
eternity” (Ratschow 64).
Thus, though active nihilism is defined in opposition to Buddhism, the
eternal recurrence that is the condition that necessitates active nihilism bears
some striking similarities to certain Buddhist doctrines, in particular karma and
reincarnation. Walter Kaufmann concludes that in formulating eternal recur-
rence Nietzsche “returns to the visions of Pythagoras, Heraclitus, the Stoics,
and the Buddhists” (Kaufmann 286). Bret W. Davis observes that previous
scholars have “suggested that Nietzsche may have first conceived of the idea
of ‘die ewige Wiederkehr des Gleichen’ [the eternal recurrence of the same]
when reading Hermann Oldenberg’s Buddha in 1881” (Davis 93). Eternal
recurrence, as a cosmology in which the “Übermensch would also realize how
inextricably his own being was involved in the totality of the cosmos,” is un-
mistakably similar to the doctrine of dependent origination (Kaufmann 276).
But the strongest parallel is between eternal recurrence and the doctrines of
karma and reincarnation. The similarity is at the least analogical and may rep-
resent direct influence (mediated through Nietzsche’s sources), though here is
not the place to substantiate the latter possibility.
But then there also is a crucial difference between eternal recurrence and
reincarnation. While reincarnation is rebirth without continuous identity,
eternal recurrence implies continuous identity without rebirth—eternal non-
reincarnation (which I have discussed in terms of the figure of the demi-
immortal Asian, an example of the Western failure to assimilate reincarnation).
This same logic, however, draws a comparison between eternal recurrence

and nirvana, only to the extent that both provide an escape from the eternal
cycle of rebirth. This same observation led Guy Richard Welbon to argue that
“there is no basic conflict between Nietzsche and Buddhism on several im-
portant issues” and that “Nietzsche was more profoundly Buddhist—and not
in some hybrid European transformation, but rather in an authentic sense—
than either Schopenhauer or Wagner” (Welbon 189, 187–88). However,
again there is a definitive opposition between eternal recurrence and nirvana
that I already have analyzed in relationship to anatman: in nirvana there is
no self; in eternal recurrence there is, in one limited sense, nothing but self,
replayed for eternity.
This apparent emphasis on the individual autonomous self is the link be-
tween the Nietzschean Übermensch and the middle-class Victorian ideology
of the self-made man. The two might seem to be diametrically opposed, and
certainly they were, though perhaps as one stands opposite one’s reflection in a
mirror. Certainly the Victorian middle class only could have viewed both Bud-
dhist nihilism and Nietzsche’s “death of God” as the grossest assaults upon its
values and ideals. Certainly Nietzsche’s nihilism was a brutal critique of those
very values and ideals. But each championed forms of individualism that were
complementary by their very opposition.
The most well-known statement of the doctrine of self-help was Samuel
Smiles’s Self Help (London, 1859). It famously opens in this way: “ ‘Heaven
helps those who help themselves’ is a well-tried maxim, embodying in a small
compass the results of vast human experience. The spirit of self-help is the root
of all genuine growth in the individual; and, exhibited in the lives of many, it
constitutes the true source of national vigour and strength” (Smiles 2). Here,
and throughout the book, God is linked first and foremost to individualism—
the heritage of Protestantism—that is linked to “national vigour” and that in
turn requires both individual and market freedom from state regulation. God
and free-market economics are united through individualism, as Max Weber
and many others have argued. The body of Self Help consists of a series of
exemplary biographical summaries of the rise of “great, but especially of good
men” (Smiles 4). Smiles emphasizes that “great men of science, literature, and
art—apostles of great thoughts and lords of the great heart—have belonged to
no exclusive class nor rank in life,” that some “of God’s greatest apostles have
come from ‘the ranks’ ”: “Take, for instance, the remarkable fact, that from
the barber’s shop came Jeremy Taylor, the most poetical of divines; Sir Rich-
ard Arkwright, the inventor of the spinning-jenny and founder of the cotton
manufacture; Lord Tenterden, one of the most distinguished of Lord Chief
Justices; and Turner, the greatest among landscape painters” (Smiles 4). The
story to which Smiles gave definitive articulation was well on its way to becom-
ing one of the founding myths of corporate-state capitalism and, in particular,
of “the American dream”—the ideology of the self-made man, the man who,
entirely by his own will, “pulls himself up by the bootstraps” through indi-
vidual hard work justified by individualized faith in himself.
If Nietzsche scorned such idealisms, he theorized a form of individual self-
creation through active nihilism that was not merely the opposite of Victo-
rian self-help. Each was the necessary evil twin to the other in opposition to
which each defined itself. Maintaining the foundational dualisms of soul/
body and faith/works, Smiles’s model is self-made only in terms of character,
society, and economics, leaving the spiritual realm to God, who happens to
underwrite the former. Nietzsche exploded the distinction between mate-
rial and spiritual self-creation. His active nihilist is self-made ontologically,
ultimately, even at the cost of being isolated within society and left alone
in a universe of alienation. Thus, while the individualism of the active nihil-
ist exceeds that of the self-made man, the two still share a core doctrine of
self-creation independent from outside determination, whether social or di-
vine. Understood in this way, nihilistic individualism might suddenly appear
as Protestant individualism freed from the religious and ethical strictures of
Protestantism. After all, the distinction between the Nietzschean Übermensch
and the modern head-of-state who claims justification from God or Allah
for his (or her) military invasion of another nation for its natural resources
might come down only to this: the former refuses to justify self-maximization
with ideals, while the latter forces ideals to justify self-maximization. If by
opposite means, both negate the same ideals. As Buddhist nihilism served as
a dark twin to Western progressivism, so Nietzsche’s active nihilism might
be considered as the necessary other to the progressive individualism of the
Victorian self-help movement.22
In the nineteenth century, “nihilism emerges as a psychologically neces-
sary affect of the decline of belief in God,” and thus from “1870 to 1940,
the experience of nothingness swept through the educated class of Europe”

(Pearson and Morgan ix; Novak 2). Nihilism signaled the beginning of the
end of Christian and Enlightenment idealisms, according to which humanity
occupied the privileged center of creation, its science would explain and con-
trol the natural universe, and its science of “political economy” would solve
all social ills. Nietzsche’s nihilism is widely credited as the source of the mod-
ern “nihilistic problematic,” the early twentieth century’s “culture of nihil-
ism,” as it subsequently was expressed and refined in the diverse philosophical
and creative writings of the modernists (Goudsblom 43; Beardsworth 38).
The existentialist nihilism of modernism appears through the lens of hind-
sight as a predictable outcome of the conditions of the nineteenth century
that this chapter and this book have detailed. Nietzsche was prophetic to the
extent that modernist culture did in part fulfill the promise—or threat—of
his nihilism.
The Hollowness of the Modern Existential Condition
The Victorian nirvana debate, in particular its annihilationist side, was one
source for the emergence of Western nihilism, and that nihilism, still bearing
the marks of Buddhism, contributed significantly to the shaping of European
modernism. Bits of Buddhism are scattered throughout modernist literature,
most notably in works by Joseph Conrad, T. S. Eliot, Hermann Hesse, and,
to a lesser degree, W. B. Yeats, D. H. Lawrence, and E. M. Forster, among
others. But these clear signs of Buddhism are much less significant for tracing
the residual impact of the Victorian nirvana debate than is the ubiquity within
modernism of a range of forms and expressions of nihilism, whether directly
by that name or as “the void,” “nothingness, “emptiness,” or “hollowness.”
These echo throughout the literature of the period like the “terrifying echo”
of the “ou-boum” in the Marabar “Buddhist Cave” (or Jain cave) in Forster’s
A Passage to India (1924) (Forster 162, 164, 247). They are the signature of
modernism’s sensibility of human alienation within a universe divested of spiri-
tual order, its focus on the fragmentation of subjectivity, and its recourse to an
existentialist individualism that persisted in appearing hollow at the core. That
hollowness is one of the defining subjects of modernist literature: the failure
of its own media—language, and art more generally—to represent adequately
the realities of modern life. Modernism “is distinguished by this incessant the-
matization of its fundamental disengagement from strict designation—by its
ongoing encounter with the presence of its own nothingness” (Kevin Bell 9).
Some modernist authors directly thematized nihilism, notably Samuel Becket,
Albert Camus, Franz Kafka, and Thomas Mann.23 For others nihilism was more
understated and ambivalent; the British writers who belong to this category are
most relevant to my purposes.
Well-known examples include the wounded and hollowed-out (non-)he-
roes of literary modernism, such figures as Conrad’s protagonist in Lord Jim

(1900)—perhaps all of Conrad’s protagonists—and Eliot’s Fisher King in “The
Waste Land” (1922). Conrad and Eliot, like many other intellectuals and art-
ists, had read Buddhist and Hindu scripture, works of comparative religion
on Buddhism, Nietzsche’s philosophy, and, certainly in the case of Conrad,
the manifestos of Russian and European nihilistic anarchism.24 Thus Conrad’s
Mr. Kurtz in Heart of Darkness (1901), having ventured too close to the empty
center of non-meaning and having recognized the failure of human progress to
remedy it, was hollowed out by that contact and that knowledge: “It echoed
loudly within him because he was hollow at the core” (Conrad, Heart 74).
Eliot then gave his poem “The Hollow Men” an epigraph from Conrad’s novel
that he had intended to use for “The Waste Land”: “Mistah Kurtz—he dead.”
Eliot’s work uses the “notion of spiritual hollowness” “to bring a devastat-
ing castigation of his own age” (Gillis 464). That critique, which became one
of the features of modernism, was refined in the writings of Lawrence, who

loathed “the ultimate nothingness of the egoist,” the modern self-centered
producers and consumers of mass culture, as “vitally below par, hollow” (Law-
rence, Phoenix 193, 210).
Both Conrad and Lawrence became more explicit in their later writings
about the correlation between this modern hollowness and nihilism. Conrad’s
The Secret Agent (1907), for example, characterizes the double agent, Adolf
Verloc, as a “moral nihilist,” which generally describes the characters and so-
ciety portrayed in the novel (Conrad, Secret 12). Karl Yundt, the “Perfect An-
archist,” who moves among the citizens of London with an explosive device
in his pocket, clearly is modeled on one interpretation of the Nietzschean
Übermensch. As an active nihilist, he disdains “the weak,” “the multitude” of
unreflecting consumers who passively buy whatever is fed to them as ideology
and as products (Conrad, Secret 303). Echoing Kurtz’s infamous exclamation,
“Exterminate all the brutes!” Yundt concludes: “Exterminate, exterminate!
That is the only way of progress” (Conrad, Heart 66; Conrad, Secret 303).
These and characters from many other works of the period provided the tem-
plate for the modern existential condition. Their hollowness was inherited in
part from Buddhist nihilism, reconstructed as Western nihilism, and that nihil-
ism was at once the opposite and the necessary complement of progress.
Progress, civilization—“humanizing, improving, instructing”—this was
“the idea” that Kurtz and perhaps even Marlow had intended to bring to the
savages of the dark places of the earth (Conrad, Heart 21, 48). Kurtz, fol-
lowed by Marlow, comes to understand that he and all humans are savage, that
progress and civilization are a thin veneer and a rationalization for “aggravated
murder on a great scale,” the “conquest of the earth, which mostly means the
taking it away from those who have a different complexion or slightly flatter
noses than ourselves” (Heart 21). Kurtz “represents the (dis)illusion of prog-
ress, the false rational principle which both Eliot and Conrad believe lies at the
‘heart of darkness’ of the modern world” (McConnell 147). He is transformed
by this realization into another representation of Conrad’s understanding of
the Übermensch; he possesses the will to power to hold a tribe in thrall, to post
human heads on stakes, to explode all ideals. Kurtz represents Nietzsche’s ac-
tive nihilism at its apocalyptic extreme as “a part of that virulent materialism
that runs through Occidental civilisation in perpetual, absolute opposition,
destroying idols, pronouncing the end of ideals, renouncing states, smash-
ing superstitions” in the process of building a “new world order” (Albert 8).
Kurtz began the novel as the most representative modern, Western, Christian,
free-trading, self-made man; Conrad’s point is that he ends the novel under
the same designation. No mere madman, Kurtz is the fullest realization at its
extreme of the West’s corporate-state capitalism and imperialism and continues
to the end to be the “representative Western self ” (Brown 17).
Marlow, to the contrary, struggles to retain the ideals of humanitarianism

and compassion for weakness that the Übermensch explodes, ideals that Nietz-
sche associated with Christianity and with Buddhism. It makes perfect sense,
then, that the novel should open with Marlow sitting on the deck of the Nellie
in the position recognized as that of “the teaching Buddha”—“lifting one arm
from the elbow, the palm of the hand outwards, so that, with his legs folded
before him, he had the pose of a Buddha preaching in European clothes and
without a lotus-flower” (Caracciolo, “Typologies” 69; Conrad, Heart 21).
The last sentence of the novel replicates this image: “Marlow ceased, and sat
apart, distinct and silent, in the pose of a meditating Buddha” (Heart 95). Yet
Marlow does not transcend Kurtz. Rather, he retains his ideals only through
a lie; his lie to Kurtz’s Intended about Kurtz’s last words (not her name but
rather “The horror! The horror!”) is but a token of the big lie. He, along
with the reader, is left in the utterly untenable position of maintaining negated
ideals. This is the modern existential condition: trapped midway between the
brutal truth of the Übermensch about self-interest and acquisitiveness and the
lie that modernist literature detects behind the promise of progress and civili-
zation. Marlow is weak, passive before the lie. He is the Buddha of Nietzsche’s
passive nihilism and the eternalist side of the Victorian nirvana debate. Kurtz
is the active nihilist, self-made, though his self-fashioning comes up against
greater forces that destroy him. While he has freed himself of “restraint,” he
cannot celebrate his will to power or exercise it with impunity. His destruction
is mandated less by his personal excesses than by the absolute necessity of the
lie to the political and economic interest behind the “Western civilization” he
thought he represented. Therefore he is hollowed out by the lie, as Marlow
nearly is. Kurtz and Marlow embody the two sides of the Victorian nirvana
debate, annihilationism and eternalism, reconstructed as Nietzsche’s active ni-
hilism and passive nihilism. The modern existential condition is that of being
suspended between the two.

I am far from the first either to note the bits of Buddhism in modernist cul-
ture or to note the prevalence of nihilistic themes and figures in its literature.
I may however be the first to observe that all of these bits and themes and
figures are linked by a common debt to the Victorian nirvana debate and its
shaping of Western nihilism. To the extent that nihilism and the modern exis-
tential condition are defining components of modernism, that massive cultural
paradigm shift was itself shaped at least in small part by the Victorian nirvana
debate.
The author who above all others placed nihilism at the center of modern ex-
istentialist thought, Jean-Paul Sartre, must have received the influenced of the
Victorian nirvana debate, if only second hand from two of his philosophical fa-
thers, Nietzsche and Heidegger. Sartre’s formulation in Being and Nothingness
(1943) of the freedom of the modern existential individual draws significantly
upon the nirvana-inflected nihilisms of his predecessors. Two of Sartre’s cen-

tral concepts, “nothingness” and “nihilation,” bear comparison not only to
Nietzsche’s active nihilism but to Victorian nirvana. Hazel D. Barnes, in her
translator’s introduction to Being and Nothingness, implies this by comparing
and contrasting Sartre’s nothingness to Buddhism, noting that “the goal of
Buddhism is part of Sartre’s human data,” his source material (Barnes xxviii).
I believe that Sartre’s existentialism is, among many other things, an expression
of the Western failure to assimilate the Buddhist understanding of nirvana, a
topic for further research.
Nihilism and Individualism in D. H. Lawrence
The writings of D. H. Lawrence, both fiction and nonfiction, were a subtle

conduit both for Nietzsche’s thought and for the polarized Victorian construc-
tion of nirvana into modernism. Early in his career, Lawrence studied works of
comparative religion on Buddhism and the writings of Nietzsche.25 His close
readings in adolescence of Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia; his long-term
friendship with Earl and Achsha Brewster, who lived in Ceylon and practiced
Buddhism; his collected correspondence with them, which frequently men-
tions Buddhism; his decision in 1922 to travel to Ceylon, in part to investigate
Buddhism at close range; his subsequent disillusionment about and then, later,
partial re-embracing of Buddhist nirvana, as I will show; and the appearance of
Buddhist elements throughout his mature fiction all evidence an engagement
with Buddhism that spanned the entirety of his writing life.
Lawrence’s fascination with Buddhism was paralleled by his fascination
with Nietzsche (as well as with Freud). Indeed, as Gerald Doherty’s Orien-
tal Lawrence argues, his reading in Nietzsche and Schopenhauer, which was
encouraged by his German wife Frieda, was one of the primary sources of his
knowledge about and attitude toward Buddhism, along with his reading of
theosophical texts and his cultural exposure to “the common lore about Bud-
dhism, which English colonists propagated through semi-popular books and
tracts” (Doherty, Oriental 16). As Kingsley Widmer concludes, “in essential
ways, Lawrence had thus become an English Nietzsche” (Widmer 121). I con-
tend that at the same time he became an English Buddhist. I do not mean that
he professed or practiced Buddhism; he certainly did not. I mean that his pri-
mary failure to assimilate Buddhism, his limited but still significant incorpora-
tion of certain Buddhist concepts, and his fierce struggle to rationalize nirvana
and anatman to his conceptions of individualism and desire are representative
of the modernist relationship to Buddhism.
Lawrence had at first an essentially Nietzschean response to nirvana, which
is to say that he replicated Nietzsche’s categories of active nihilism and passive
nihilism. His relationship to Nietzsche and to Buddhism, and his prediction

of philosophical existentialism, is captured in miniature in a passage from his
letter to Earl Brewster from Sicily written 2 January 1922: “More and more
I feel that meditation and the inner life are not my aim, but some sort of action
and strenuousness and pain and frustration and struggling through. All the
things you don’t believe in, I do. And the goal is not that men should become
serene as Buddha or as gods, but that the unfleshed gods should become men
in battle. God made man is the goal” (Lawrence, qtd. in Brewster 43). Here,
clearly, is Nietzsche’s opposition between the active nihilist’s embracing of
suffering—the Übermensch’s audacity and courage to become his own God—
and the passive nihilist’s withdrawal from life into contemplation and nirvana.
Earlier that year, Lawrence had written from Baden-Baden: “I believe in wrath
and gnashing of teeth and crunching of coward’s bones. I believe in fear and in
pain and in oh, such a lot of sorrow. As for your white nirvana, my boy: paint
stripes on it, and see how it looks. I’ll bet it has a tiger’s hungry sides and buzz-
ing, disagreeable tail” (Lawrence, qtd. in Brewster 22–23). “White Nirvana”
points to passive nihilism (and, perhaps, to race), and Lawrence testifies here,
as in many other places, to active nihilism, which it seems appropriate to label
“black Nirvana.”
Here I will range lightly through Lawrence’s works in order to suggest over-
arching patterns. Nietzschean and Buddhist nihilisms are scattered throughout
Lawrence’s writings, from Sons and Lovers (1913) to Lady Chatterley’s Lover
(1928). In the last pages of Sons and Lovers, for example, Paul Morel, devoid
of religious faith, following the death of his mother and the failure of his at-
tempts to establish a lasting partnership with any other woman, approaches
“annihilation”: “The real agony was that he had nowhere to go, nothing to
do, nothing to say, and was nothing himself ” (Lawrence, Sons 456). At the
penultimate moment, he is at risk of sliding into passive nihilism—literally
suicide—but does not: “On every side the immense dark silence seemed press-
ing him, so tiny a speck, into extinction, and yet, almost nothing, he could not
be extinct” (Sons 464). Like Conrad’s Marlow after experiencing the heart of
darkness, he was “at the core a nothingness, and yet not nothing”—this is the
modern existential condition (Sons 464). There the novel ends. Lawrence, in
this early work, had not yet formulated an alternative between passive and ac-
tive nihilism. For Lawrence, passive or white nihilism is the denial of life and
is, therefore, opposed to his famous vitalism, his belief in the divine origin and
generative effect of genuine human desire.
By the time of Women in Love (1920), Lawrence had become more explicit
about the basis of passive nihilism in Buddhist nirvana and about the existence
of multiple, competing nihilisms. I would not be the first to read the contest
of will between Gerald Crich and Gudrun Brangwen as a contest between ac-
tive nihilism and passive nihilism. Gudrun is the most apparent Buddha-figure
in the novel: “Gudrun had waded out to a gravelly shoal, and was seated like
a Buddhist” (Lawrence, Women 122). She is the figure of passive nihilism,
the will to resist desire, to withhold love, to deny life (literally by closing her
womb), which the novel will show has the power to annihilate Gerald’s mascu-
line, active nihilism. In Lawrence’s world, the passive nihilist is either female or
a man who has become feminized by the enervating forces that Lawrence saw
as the threat posed by modern industrial society to the essentially sexual root of
human vitality. One example is Michaelis in Lady Chatterley’s Lover, who, Lady
Chatterley observes, exhibits “that momentary but revealed immobility, an im-
mobility, a timelessness which the Buddha aims at . . . something old, old and
acquiescent in the race! Aeons of acquiescence in a race destiny, instead of our
individual resistance” (Lawrence, Lady 23). Lawrence’s potential racism aside,
here the opposite to passive nihilism is a form of individualism that is theorized
throughout his fiction, to which I will return. For him, as for Nietzsche, pas-
sive nihilism is antithetical to individualism and progress.
This is not to say that Lawrence therefore follows Nietzsche in championing
active nihilism—far from it. Gerald, and later Sir Clifford Chatterley, are typi-
cal representatives of active nihilism, which Lawrence associates throughout
his work with the modern captains of industry and commerce—the self-made
man, as discussed above.26 They are as much a threat to authentic selfhood and
vital sexuality as is passive nihilism. They intellectualize, mechanize, standard-
ize, and dehumanize, negating all individualism but their own; they exercise
mastery over Nature and natural desire, as Gerald does over his horse. They
are the Übermenschen, those with the will to power, as Gerald puts it to him-
self: “The will of man was the determining factor. Man was the arch-god of
earth. His mind was obedient to serve his will. Man’s will was the absolute,
the only absolute” (Lawrence, Women 241). The lover in Lady Chatterley’s
Lover, Mellors, puts it this way, with reference both to the British middle class
and to Clifford Chatterley’s industry: “Tin people! It’s all a steady sort of
bolshevism—just killing off the human thing, and worshipping the mechani-
cal thing. Money, money, money! All the modern lot get their real kick out
of killing the old human feeling out of man, making mincemeat of the old
Adam and the old Eve” (Lawrence, Lady 217). This “money-deadness” is
the sign of the nothingness of value at the heart of modern society, just as
ivory was in Conrad’s Heart of Darkness, and Lawrence seats Gerald in the
same boat with Kurtz, separated by degree but not by kind (Lady 261). This,
then, is Lawrence’s response to Nietzsche’s active nihilism, with Gerald as the
“the bad-Nietzschean” (Widmer 119). Lawrence enacts Nietzsche’s greatest
fear in portraying the demise of active nihilism at the hands of passive nihil-
ism: It is Gudrun, not Gerald, who in the end, in the snowy wasteland, feels
“übermenschlich—more than human”; she has conquered and usurped mas-
culine, active power (Lawrence, Women 410). White nirvana, the “icy will of
annihilation that killed Gerald Crich,” is strengthened by contact with a

depersonalized nothingness that ultimately overcomes the active, black nirvana
of any egoistic will to power (Widmer 120).
Individualism and self are concepts that recur throughout Lawrence’s work
and therefore throughout the criticism of it.27 The subject is vexed by the fact
that Lawrence had a very complex and strongly divided understanding of these
concepts. He recognized, for instance, the powerful individual will of the Über-
mensch but saw its limitations. He opens the essay, “Blessed Are the Powerful,”
with the provocatively Nietzschean claim that “The reign of love is passing,
and the reign of power is coming again,” but he then clarifies his difference
from the popular understanding of Nietzsche: “We have a confused idea, that
will and power are somehow identical. We think we can have a will-to-power.
A will-to-power seems to work out as bullying. And bullying is something de-
spicable and detestable” (Lawrence, Reflections 145). Lawrence wanted indi-
vidual will without power over others, self without destroying the other, desire
without lust or greed. He likewise recognized the individualism of Protestant
faith, which he compares to the nirvana he assumed Buddhists seek: “ ‘Alone
I did it!’ is the proud assertion of the gentleman who attains Nirvana. And
‘Alone I did it!’ says the Christian whose soul is saved. They are the religions
of overweening individualism, resulting, of course, in our disastrous modern
egoism of the individual” (Lawrence, Phoenix 188). “Egoism” is a term that
Lawrence often couples with “mechanical,” “greed,” and “money.” He also
recognized the “cult of Individualism, Liberty, Freedom, and so forth,” which
he understood was the essential ideology of modern consumer-based civil so-
ciety. Within that construction of “individual freedom,” “consumer choice”
takes the place of any potentially more authentic liberty from hegemonic so-
cial control. Lawrence writes: “Individualism! read the advertisements! . . . ‘No
man could lack individuality in Poppem’s pyjamas.’ Poor devil! If he was left
to his own skin, where would he be!” (Lawrence, Reflections 189). This is
the individualism both of “bolshevism” and of corporate-state capitalism: the
proscribed, mass individualism of the revolutionary mob as of majority public
opinion, “the innumerable myrmidons of nothingness” (Lawrence, Phoenix
685). Lawrence was a great champion of individualism, but none of the above
kinds. What, then, was his individualism?
The characters of Rupert Birkin in Women in Love, Rowdon Lilly in Aaron’s
Rod (1922), and Mellors in Chatterley give clues to Lawrence’s ideas of in-
dividualism (and both Lilly and Mellors are figured in terms of the Buddha).
Here is an excerpt from Lilly’s first major lecture on individualism to Aaron:
I think a man may come into possession of his own soul at last—as the Bud-
dhists teach—but without ceasing to love, or even to hate. . . . I’m learning to
possess my soul in patience and in peace, and I know it. And it isn’t a negative
Nirvana either. And if Tanny [his wife] possesses her own soul in patience and
peace as well—and if in this we understand each other at last—then there we
are, together and apart at the same time, and free of each other, and eternally
inseparable. I have my Nirvana—and I have it all to myself. But more than that.
It coincides with her Nirvana. (Lawrence, Aaron 104)
When Aaron fails to understand, Lilly clarifies: “You learn to be quite alone,
and possess your own soul in isolation—and at the same time, to be perfectly
with someone else—that’s all I ask” (Aaron 105). This is individualism as unity
with the other, nirvana as desire fulfilled, not denied. This is what Rupert,
Lilly, and Mellors prescribe and struggle to enact with their romantic partners.
This is what Lilly, sounding very much like the Lawrence of “Blessed Are the
Powerful,” summarizes at the closing of Aaron’s Rod: “We’ve exhausted our
love-urge, for the moment. . . . We’ve got to accept the power motive, accept it
in deep responsibility, do you understand me? It is a great life motive. . . . It is
a vast dark source of life and strength in us now, waiting either to issue into
true action, or to burst into cataclysm. . . . The will-to-power—but not in Nietz-
sche’s sense. Not intellectual power. Not mental power. Not conscious
will-power. Not even wisdom. But dark, living, fructifying power” (297). Law-
rence had rewritten Nietzsche.
This “dark, living, fructifying power” is experienced first and foremost by
humans through the un-self-conscious and so total sexual union of two entirely
independent individuals. While Paul Morel and Miriam Leivers fail to achieve
this in Sons and Lovers, fifteen years later in Lady Chatterley’s Lover Mellors and
Connie do. They surrender their selves without losing their souls, their essen-
tial, separate individuality. As Rupert describes that state to Ursula in Women
in Love, “It is death to one self—but it is the coming into being of another”
(and Ursula sometimes misinterprets as passive nihilism what Rupert is asking
for, as when she says, “What you want me to serve, is nothing, mere nothing”)
(Lawrence, Women 42, 260).28 This is the basis for Lawrence’s reinterpreted
nirvana. It issues from his distinction between “false desire”—egoistic and in-
tellectualized and, therefore, possessive, greedy, and mechanical—and “true
desire,” which was for Lawrence the most sacred realization of what it means
to be human, the physical and spiritual root of life—his vitalism (Lawrence,
Phoenix 715; Doherty, Oriental 6). This conception of desire is in certain ways
compatible with the treatment of it within Buddhism as signaled by the Four
Noble Truths. His false desire is effectively the Buddhist trishna, “thirst,” or
tanha, “grasping” or “craving,” ultimately for psychic completeness, which
is the primary cause of human suffering. For Lawrence, true desire comes with
the overthrowing of false desire and the willingness to embrace the suffering
that true desire may exact. If achieved, true desire has the potential to generate
a “nirvanic state” to the extent that it supersedes common orgasmic release
or postcoital bliss but rather entails simultaneous surrender and realization

of the self as both in and apart from the other (Doherty, Oriental 6). Mellors
and Connie achieve this state, which the text signals in this way: “And softly,
he laid his hand on her mound of Venus, on the soft brown maidenhair, and
himself sat still and naked on the bed, his face motionless in physical abstrac-
tion, almost like the face of Buddha” (Lawrence, Lady 212). No longer solely
a negative figure of passive nihilism, the Buddha now has a potentially positive
character.
Lawrence eventually arrived at resolution, if partial, to the primary problems
that occupy his writing: individualism without egoism and union with the
other without denial of the self. Solving those problems required transcending
the foundational Western dualistic thinking of body/soul, physical/spiritual,
and self/other. In this, Lawrence was closest to Buddhism. And so his theory
of individualism bears comparison to the Buddhist concept of anatman. Ac-
cording to that doctrine, the self, rather than being an essential, unified, and
eternally fixed “substance-self,” as it is in Western soul-theory and in the domi-
nant paradigms of individualism, is a process of becoming, a “process-self,” as
Christopher Gowans defines it in Philosophy of the Buddha. As Lawrence writes
in this regard: “Be Thyself ! is the grand cry of individualism. But individualism
makes the mistake of considering an individual as a fixed entity. . . . Even the
Nirvanists consider man as a fixed entity, a changeless ego, which is capable
of nothing, ultimately, but remerging into the infinite” (Lawrence, Reflections
185). This passage demonstrates that Lawrence, having followed Nietzsche
and subscribed to his culture’s stereotype about Buddhist passivity, failed on
the surface to comprehend nirvana and that he absorbed enough Buddhism,
and was on his own grounds opposed enough to the least-Buddhist aspects of
Western individualism, that he arrived at conclusions about the self compatible
with Buddhism.29 Lawrence struggled to embrace the freedom and responsi-
bility of creating one’s self as a continuous process of becoming. In the context

of his relentless critique of his society, Lawrence’s individualism frequently ex-
hibits the isolation and alienation of the existentialist individual. At the same
time, however, the defining moment for the Lawrencian individual is not in
utter isolation but rather through dissolution of egoism in relationship to the
other. Transcending the little isolated ego is, for Lawrence, the means to real-
izing individualism, which is a reasonably Buddhist perspective.
Thus Lawrence’s (in)famous “obsession with sex” was not limited to con-
cern with sexual union between two isolated but equally strong and open in-
dividuals. It was about the individual realizing his or her unity with the vital
source of all life, which was for Lawrence the basis of spiritual connectedness.
The Buddhist term for this is dependent origination, the unavoidable inter-
dependence of one’s self with all others and with the natural universe. Law-
rence worked to reduce this understanding to what he intended as its most
primal form—vitalism—but his writings demonstrate a more sophisticated

conception. In the essay “A Propos of ‘Lady Chatterley’s Lover,’ ” for example,
he critiques the “world of our little consciousness, which we know in our pet-
tifogging apartness” and which is “how we know the world when we know it
apart from ourselves, in the mean separateness of everything” (Lawrence, Lady
331). He continues: “But the two great ways of knowing, for man, are know-
ing in terms of apartness, which is mental, rational, scientific, and knowing in
terms of togetherness, which is religious and poetic. The Christian religion
lost, in Protestantism finally [and Protestant individualism], the togetherness
with the universe, the togetherness of the body, the sex, the emotions, the
passions, with the earth and sun and stars” (Lady 331). Despite Lawrence’s
tendency to follow Nietzsche in pairing Buddhism with Christianity as simi-
larly life-denying idealisms, here he effectively points to the Buddhist doctrine
of dependent origination.
Lawrence came to the position near the end of his life that “while ‘Bud-
dhistic inaction and meditation’ must be repudiated, ‘Buddhistic peace’ must
be sought after” (Doherty, Oriental 58). In his essay “The Reality of Peace,”
he approaches a Buddhist position when he writes that the “condition of free-
dom” is the understanding that “I fear neither love nor hate nor death nor pain
nor abhorrence,” when “I am absolved from desire and made perfect,” when
“I balance for a space in pure adjustment and pure understanding” (Lawrence,
Phoenix 677, 680). Some Mahayana Buddhists call this freedom and balance
“equanimity,” as in one translation of a popular Tibetan prayer, “may all be-
ings come to rest in the great equanimity that is free from attachment and
aversion.” He likewise sounds Buddhist (with a touch of Hinduism) when he
answers his own question—“Where, then, is there peace?”—by saying that
“there is peace in that perfect consummation when duality and polarity is tran-
scended into absorption,” when the duality of soul/body, the polarity of self/
other, that defines Western individualism is transcended (Phoenix 693). And he

concludes by imagining, in effect, his own nirvana in terms that are familiar to
any reader of his novels because of the pervasiveness of flower imagery in them:
“There is a new heaven on the earth, there is new heaven and new earth, the
heaven and earth of the perfect rose” (Phoenix 693).
One might call this Lawrence’s “red Nirvana”—after the rose and after
the focalization on desire.30 Lawrence began his career under the influence of
Nietzsche’s distinction between passive nihilism and active nihilism, and so
he replicated the categories of the Victorian nirvana debate, as modified by
Nietzsche. While he categorically rejected what he perceived as the asceticism
and quietism of passive nihilism, with which he tended to associate Buddhism
in general, he ultimately sought a transcendence recognizable as partially Bud-
dhist. While he prized individual self-creation and responsibility, he could not
endorse the individualism of the active nihilist, the self-made Übermensch,
which he perceived as egoistic, power-obsessed, and mechanism-and-money

fixated. Lawrence could accept neither white nirvana nor black nirvana, and
yet, rather than be satisfied with dismissing them, as most would have done,
he was determined to confront the contradictions and to find a position of
his own between them. Thus one finds throughout his writings a sustained
and fierce struggle to resolve the dualism of soul/body and self/other that
is expressed in part by the juxtaposition of characters who represent passive
nihilism and active nihilism. Lawrence felt it necessary to resolve the polarities
of the Victorian nirvana debate in order to achieve his goal of understanding
human desire and its potentially contradictory relationship to individualism,
on one hand, and to the originary vitalism of life, on the other. Thus Lawrence
“nihilated” himself (to borrow a term from Sartre’s Being and Nothingness)
into the anti-individual individualist, the anti-nihilism nihilist, and the anti-
nirvana advocate for nirvana. He posited red nirvana as a not-nirvana, which
is about as close to the Buddhist understanding as a modernist possibly could
have come.31
Final Reflections
The nineteenth-century encounter with nirvana and anatman was a traumatic

one for Western culture for the reason that it was a direct and profoundly
disturbing challenge to the core identity of the West: the essential individual
and its eternal soul. It therefore was inassimilable. Instead, two interpretations
developed, eternalism and annihilationism, both of which represented failures
to assimilate and therefore involved projection, denial, and scapegoating. The
annihilationist side of the nirvana debate contributed to the development of
Western nihilism and, thereafter, to modern existentialism. The Victorian nir-
vana debate certainly did not “cause” nihilism; the elements of it were present
in suspension in Western culture long before the nineteenth century. But the
exposure to Buddhism acted as an essential catalyst that ignited a reaction from
which much of the Buddhism then precipitated out, as it nearly had by the
time Sartre took up nihilism.
At the prelude to modernism, the perceived passive nihilism of nirvana
required the response of an active nihilism that would defend Western in-
dividualism against the annihilation of anatman by strengthening it into an
Übermensch. The Victorian corollary was the super-self-made-man: a myth—
supported by such figures as Cecil Rhodes, Teddy Roosevelt, and Henry
Ford—that underwrote the promise of similar opportunity for the self-made
everyman. However, as the story often has been told, Victorian progressive
optimism passed through decadence and then, with World War I, into grim-
ness, and the woundedness of the paradigmatic modern individual increased
relative to his powers of self-creation, the result of which was the modern ex-
istential condition. The super-self-made-man had acquired a shadow, become
wounded and hollow at the core. That woundedness—the source of existential
dread or nausea, as Sartre named it in his novel Nausea (1938)—was in part
a symptom of the uniquely European hollowness at the heart of progressive
individualism and in part a symptom of the sustained effort required to repress
its ultimate other, the not-self of anatman.
As anatman was a foil for modern Western individualism, so it made per-
fect sense that denial of self as personality came to be aligned with totalitarian
repression of individual freedom, as represented in Franz Kafka’s The Trial
(1914–1915) or George Orwell’s Nineteen Eighty-Four (1949), and as pro-
jected onto the “atheistic and nihilistic” Communism of the Soviet Union
(which is not to suggest that repressive regimes do not exist or that the Soviet
regime was not one of them). The cultural response was to cling all the more
fiercely to the increasingly embattled and isolated “individual freedom.” I have
tried to suggest that this occurred both in popular culture and in the modern-
ist nihilism of existential philosophy, the most sophisticated and convincing
argument for the absolute value of individual freedom. The modern existential
condition is the afterlife of nirvana.
My critique might seem to suggest that I am opposed if not to individualism
and freedom then at least to existentialism. Not so. Unlike Sartre, who wrote
from a modern Europe wedged between Communism and Nazism, I write
from within a society where “individual freedom” has become the ubiquitous
public representative of the dominant ideology. It is the slogan used to sell
cars and to sell wars. Its hegemony has become the potential instrument of
repression in a sense quite different from repression by force, to recall Michel
Foucault. Though Søren Kierkegaard’s passionate individualism, Nietzsche’s
active nihilism, and Sartre’s existentialist freedom were radical philosophies of
their times, their basic principles have become primary ingredients of main-
stream Western culture, certainly in North America.32 This has occurred not
because they were like the Molotov-cocktail-throwing, Russian-revolutionary,
atheistic nihilism that became one predominant association for “nihilism”
starting in the nineteenth century.33 On the contrary, they have become per-
vasive because they are in specific ways the logical outcomes of the convergent
historical trajectories of Protestant individualism, Enlightenment rationalism,
and laissez-faire capitalism. Thus I agree with those like Justin Clemens and
Chris Feik who argue that “nihilism designates the status of the era in which
we are now living” and Jean Baudrillard who writes that “today’s nihilism . . . is
indissolubly that of the system” (Clemens and Feik 20; Baudrillard 159).34 It
is not difficult to see how one popular conception of existentialist freedom,
as in “realize the potential of yourself by following your desires,” might be
appropriated and instrumentalized as, for example, “Be all that you can be” or
“Just do it!”—advertisements for the U.S. Army and Nike athletic wear, re-
spectively. At the same time, I am only following the prescription of existen-
tialist freedom and of American democratic freedom at its best by exercising
my individual freedom to choose whether or not I choose “individual free-
dom” as it has come to be defined in my culture and society. I am willing to
nihilate “freedom” with which I do not agree in order to imagine freedom
that I believe is more authentic.
Throughout this book, I have pointed out the limitations of certain West-
ern conceptions of individualism, human will, and self-definition. Theories
of individualism considered to be within the enclosure of dominant Western
ideology—for example, Protestant individualism or the self-made man—as
well as theories critical of those—Nietzsche’s will to power or existentialist
freedom—share a common limitation from a Buddhist perspective: They tac-
itly assume or actively defend the isolation and autonomy of the individual,
whether from nature, God, or society. Whether for Nietzsche, Lawrence, or,
I would argue, Sartre, freedom means separation and isolation. Individualism
thus defined produces an atomized society, a society of separate individuals
each working for his or her own benefit without any necessary regard for or
obligation to the greater good of the community, the society, or the planet
(which is not to deny that many individuals do choose to act charitably and re-
sponsibly). Such a social order comes with benefits for certain institutionalized
interests. It has the greatest potential of any system for maximizing individual
consumption; at the same time, it has a natural inhibitory effect on the forma-
tion of organized opposition by citizens to the interests that similarly benefit
from that consumption. Thus, to take a single example, greenhouse gases are
produced as a direct result of individual and corporate pursuits of self-interest,
where no one is held accountable for resulting ecological disasters. Indeed,
any such collective responsibility must be censured heavily, because it would
constitute direct violation of “individual freedom,” which is precisely why cer-

tain interests have made “regulation” into a dirty word. “Individual freedom”
is the highest principle of twenty-first-century U.S. society for more reasons
than the oft-repeated one of defending the rights of individuals. The economic
and political stakes could not be higher, and the highest stakeholders are the
most powerful organizations on earth. This is why what Buddhism and nirvana
represent has been considered so threatening by so many in the West.
At the same time, the ethical system of Buddhism—the Four Noble Truths,
the Five Precepts, the Noble Eightfold Path—was the feature that most appealed
to Victorians. Here was an ethics that did not depend on a supernatural source,
did not involve sin and damnation, yet made each individual fully responsible
for his or her moral choices. Its justification was largely practical—“you will live
a happier life while creating a healthier society by following these guidelines”—
and its approach was less prohibitive than prescriptive of a process of living
ethically.35 Buddhism is founded on a belief in the unavoidable interconnected-

ness of all sentient beings, not in some abstract ethereal sense but grounded in
social and global reality. Nothing and no one is independently self-originating;
everything and every individual is conditioned by mutual interdependence
within a society, a natural planet, and an ordered universe. Every action and
intention of mine is causally related to—but not predetermined by—past ac-
tions and intentions of mine and of many other beings and is causally related to
consequences for me and for many others in the future (most directly, my chil-
dren). This ethics directly challenges—and offers an alternative to—the indi-
vidualized faith of Protestantism, the progressive individualism of the self-made
man, and the individual isolationism of the modern existential condition.
According to Buddhist ethics, while I must be responsible for my own
karma, it is not possible for me to act “just for myself.” It is not possible to be
“individually responsible” in the sense that I only have to think about my own
freedom and the consequences of my actions and intentions only for myself in
the immediate future. According to Buddhism, that is not merely self-centered
and shortsighted; it is dangerously ignorant of the way the real world actu-
ally operates and therefore threatens the well-being—not to say the contin-
ued existence—of the social and natural worlds. To “canonize self-concern is
the very opposite of rationality” to the extent that rational choice may mean
choosing long-term, sustainable, and collective well-being over immediate, in-
dividual self-realization or pleasure (Jacobson 59). Does this worldview limit
individual freedom? It most certainly does question the wisdom of absolute
“individual freedom,” the freedom to be absolutely nothing but an isolated
and therefore alienated self in a universe perceived as largely hostile to that
self, an empty nothingness. The Buddhist alternative is to seek non-individual
and therefore genuine freedom by de-essentializing personality in order to re-
alize oneself as naturally part of absolutely everything and everybody in the
world—a full nothingness. Buddhism imagines a type of freedom that domi-

nant Western culture has as yet been unable to imagine.
And this returns us, finally, to the other half of the Victorian nirvana debate,
the eternalist interpretation of nirvana. My portrayal in the preceding para-
graphs of the Buddhist alternative partakes of that discourse, unavoidably so.
Writing from within my cultural time and place, I cannot help but appeal not
only to Buddhism, as I understand it, but at the same time to uniquely West-
ern, correlative concepts derived from Romanticism, American Transcenden-
talism, the hybrid religions of the late nineteenth century, and the synthesis
of these and other sources within the New Age movement. For that matter,
the modern New Age movement effectively began in the second half of the
nineteenth century with the confluence of the spiritualism movement and the
European encounter with Buddhism, though its clear emergence was not until
the hybrid religions of the 1870s–1890s.
Robert Bellah and other sociologists describe the existence of an American

“civil religion,” an amalgamation of non-denominational and folkloric Judeo-
Christianity with elements of cultural mythology, such as the “Promised Land”
of America and the “Chosen People” spreading the message of democracy (Bel-
lah, qtd. in Swenson 297). Civil religion is ritually celebrated on holidays such
as Thanksgiving and the unabashedly militaristic nationalism of the Fourth of
July, Veterans Day, and Memorial Day. I theorize that the Victorian encoun-
ter with Buddhism fed into what has become a Western “un-civil religion,”
a non-nationalistic, globally oriented, and egalitarian ethical and spiritual ethos.
According to that ethos, human beings belong to a larger unity with all other
beings in the natural universe, which is not the same thing as the old deistic
universe designed with humankind privileged at its center. This, then, is the
second half of the afterlife of the Victorian nirvana debate, the half that issued
from the eternalist interpretation of nirvana.
Most alternative, occult, New Age, Green, and pro-peace subcultures par-
ticipate in and contribute to this shared ethos. I would speculate that a large
number of average Western middle-class citizens, especially those not active in
one of the traditional world religions, also unreflectively subscribe to this world-
view. I may as well go further here at the end of this book in suggesting that the
early twenty-first-century American cultural and political landscape appears to
be divided very roughly between the individualistic, patriotic, national-identity
politics of American civil religion and the ecological, tolerance-and-equality-
based ethos of un-civil religion. This meta-level cultural division, though cer-
tainly not determined by the nineteenth-century encounter with Buddhism,
corresponds to the two forks of the Victorian nirvana debate and may in small
part be correlated with the annihilationist and the eternalist interpretations of
nirvana.
After Victorian fascination with Buddhism peaked in the 1890s, it partially
submerged within Western culture until the resurgence of interest that began
in the mid twentieth century. All the while, beneath the surface, Buddhism
was being refashioned for Western consumption. I am inclined to think that
it was precisely during this period that Buddhism cemented its significance
as a permanent influence on both Western philosophy and popular culture in
the West. Buddhism also continued to surface periodically in various stages
of assimilation and distortion in novels such as Herman Hesse’s Siddhartha
(1922), Somerset Maugham’s The Narrow Corner (1932), James Hilton’s Lost
Horizons (1933), Aldous Huxley’s The Doors of Perception (1954), Jack Ker-
ouac’s The Dharma Bums (1958), Robert Pirsig’s Zen and the Art of Motorcycle
Maintenance (1974), and, now, in films like Little Buddha (1993). Films in
the recently popular martial-arts-Buddhism subgenre—for example, The Ma-
trix (1999), Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon (2000), and The Last Samurai
(2003)—demonstrate just how intensely Western culture is struggling not yet
to resolve but to rationalize the contradictions between its individualism and

progressivism and the selflessness of anatman and organic unity of dependent
origination. I doubt that either most of the hippies of the 1960s or the major-
ity of the thousands of Westerners practicing meditation as I write understand
Buddhism much more thoroughly than did some late Victorians. However,
they did and do recognize, as Victorians perhaps did not, that Buddhism is
inherently revolutionary, not only in relationship to the institutions of Chris-
tianity but also in relationship to the more powerful institutions of corporate-
state capitalism. Figures such as The Dalai Lama and Thich Nhat Hanh have
become internationally renowned not only as great teachers and spiritual mas-
ters but as social and political activists. The “engaged Buddhism” movement
is reversing the Victorian stereotype of Buddhist passivity.36 After 150 years of
gradual infiltration, Europe and the United States are perhaps marginally more
prepared now to receive Buddhism. The religion sections of bookstores over-
flow with material on Buddhism, and the number of Buddhists in the West in-
creases every year.37 The cultural forms of novels, poems, and cinema continue
to feed this process, as they first began to do in the late-Victorian decades. The
cultural counter-invasion of the West by Buddhism is ongoing.
Appendix 1
Selective Chronology of Events in the

European Encounter with Buddhism
The following chronology is highly selective, representing a very small per-

centage of pertinent events, translations, and publications. Furthermore, it is
Anglo-centric. Particularly for the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, I have
selected works and events that in my opinion had a significant impact on the
reception of and response to Buddhism in England. Thus substantial and im-
portant work in other languages, especially French and German, is only mar-
ginally represented here. A more complete chronology can be found in Droit
(191–259). In building this chronology, I consulted, in addition to Droit,
Almond, Bachelor, Fields, Marshall, Rawlinson, Schwab, and Welbon.
BCE
6th c. Greek colonies established in the northwest of the Indian penin-

sula during the lifetime of Siddhartha Gautama, the Buddha.
327–325 Alexander the Great occupies Bactria on the northern border of
current-day India.
291 Megesthenes, Greek ambassador to the court of Chandragupta,
writes Indika.
268–233 Rule of Asoka, Buddhist emperor who dispatched missionaries
westward.
ca. 200 Clement of Alexandria, Stromata, perhaps the first Western writ-
ing that mentions “Boutta.”
210 ~ Appendix 1
150–135 Reign of King Milinda (Menander I) of Bactria, author of the Mil-

indapanha, dialogues with the Buddhist monk Nagasena.
CE
1245 John of Plano Carpini, Franciscan missionary, perhaps the first

European to travel as far east as Mongolia.
1255 Willem van Ruusbroec (William of Rubrock), Franciscan Friar,
provides the first substantial documentation of a European en-
counter with Buddhism.
1293 Marco Polo hears the life story of “Sagamoni Borcan” while in
Sri Lanka.
1549 St. Francis Xavier, Jesuit missionary, encounters Zen Buddhism in
Japan.
1681 Robert Knox, An Historical Relation of the Island Ceylon in the
East Indies.
1691 La Loubere, envoy of Louis XIV, Description du royaume de
Siam.
1716 Ippolito Desideri, a Portuguese Jesuit, establishes a mission in
Tibet.
1727 Englebert Kaempfer, History of Japan Together with a Description
of the Kingdom of Siam, first book in English to describe Zen
Buddhism.
1767 John Zephaniah Holwell, Interesting Historical Events relative to
the Provinces of Bengal and the Empire of Indostan, “The Religious
Tenets of the Gentoos.”
1768 Alexander Dow, History of Hindustan.
1784 Sir William Jones presides over the first meeting of the Royal Asi-
atick Society of Bengal. Sir Charles Wilkins publishes the Bhaga-
vad Gita, the first complete Sanskrit text translated into English.
1787 F. Galdwin, Dictionary of the Religious Ceremonies of the Eastern
Nations.
1788 First issue of William Jones’s Asiatick Researches published.
1799 Francis Buchanan, “On the Religion and Literature of Burma,” in
Asiatick Researches, later a source for Schopenhauer and Hegel.
1800 Samuel Turner, An Account of an Embassy to the Court of the
Teshoo Lama in Tibet.
1808 Robert Watson Frazer, A Literary History of India.
1815 Rev. W. A. Ward, A View of the History, Literature, and Mythology
of the Hindoos (Serampore).
Léonard de Chézy occupies the first Sanskrit Chair in Europe at
the Collège de France.
Chronology ~ 211
1817 Robert Tytler, Inquiry into the Origin and Principles of Budaic
Sabism (Calcutta). Michel-Jean-François Ozeray, Recherches sur
Buddou ou Bouddou.
1823–27 A. W. Schlegel, Indische Bibliothek, discusses the “Boudhomanes.”
1825–27 Henry Thomas Colebrooke, five monographs in Transactions of
the Royal Asiatic Society give the first overview in English of the
systems of thought in India, including Jainism and Buddhism.
1826 Brian H. Hodgson, Notices of the Languages, Literature and
Religion of Nepal and Tibet.
1827 William Francklin, Researches on the Tenets and Doctrines of the
Jeynes and Buddhists Conjectured to be the Brahmans of Ancient
India.
Hegel, Encyclopédie des sciences philosophiques en abrégé defines the
basis of Buddhism as “nothingness.”
1828 Brian Houghton Hodgson, Sketch of Buddhism.
1829 Edward Upham, The History and Doctrine of Buddhism.
1834 Alexander Csomo de Körös, A Dictionary, Tibetan and English.
1836 George Turnour, The First Twenty Chapters of the Mahawanso: and
a Prefatory Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature. Jean-Pierre Abel-
Rémusat, Foé Koué Ki, ou Relation des royaumes bouddiques, trans-
lation of medieval Chinese pilgrimage narratives that help locate
the ancient holy sites of Buddhism (trans. in English in 1839).
1837 Henry T. Prinsep and James Prinsep begin publishing translations
of the inscriptions on Asokan columns, which locate the ancient
holy sites of Buddhism.
1841 Philippe Edouard Foucaux, translation into French of the Tibetan
Lalita Vistara, a primary source on the life of the Buddha. Sir Al-
exander Cunningham, begins publishing archaeological reports
of the ruins of the ancient holy sites of Buddhism.

1842 Ralph Waldo Emerson publishes excerpts of Charles Wilkins’s
Heetopades of Veeshnoo Sarma in Dial.
1843 Wilkins’s translation of the Bhagavad Gita first arrives in Cam-
bridge, MA; Emerson confuses it with Buddhism, which he will
criticize as nihilistic.
1844 Eugène Burnouf, Introduction à l’historie du Buddhisme indien.
Henry David Thoreau publishes in Dial part of the Lotus Sutra
excerpted from Burnouf.
Arthur Schopenhauer, The Will as World and Representation, is
an expansion of the 1818 edition and includes many references to
Buddhism.
1848 Sir Alexander Cunningham, Verification of the Itinerary of the Chi-
nese Pilgrim, Hwan Thsang verifies locations in the pilgrimage
narrative translated by Abel-Rémusat.
212 ~ Appendix 1
1851 Henry T. Prinsep and James Prinsep, Tibet, Tartary, and Mon-
golia: Their Social and Political Condition and the Religion of
Boodh.
1853 R. Spence Hardy, Manual of Buddhism in Its Modern Development.
1854 Thoreau’s Walden comments upon the “Bhagavat Geeta” and
Buddhism.
1855 Jules Barthélemy Saint-Hilaire, Du Bouddhisme.
Michael Viggo Fausböll, Dhammapadam.
1859 Paul A. Bigandet, The Life, or Legend of Gaudama, the Buddha of
the Burmese.
1860 Jules Barthélemy Saint-Hilaire, Le Bouddha et sa religion.
1862 F. Max Müller, Buddhism.
1867 F. Max Müller, Chips from a German Workshop.
1871 Henry Alabaster, The Wheel of the Law.
Richard Phillips, The Story of Gautama Buddha and his Creed:
an Epic.
1872 F. Max Müller, Lectures on the Science of Religion.
1875 Samuel Beal, The Romantic Legend of Sākya Buddha.
Robert Caesar Childers, A Dictionary of the Pāli Language.
1877 T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism.
1879 Sir Edwin Arnold, The Light of Asia.
1880 T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhist Birth Stories, or Jataka Tales. Ma-
dame Helene Blavatsky receives Buddhist vows in Ceylon, linking
Theosophy to Buddhism.
1881 T. W. Rhys Davids and C. A. F. Rhys Davids found the Pali Text
Society at Oxford. T. W. Rhys Davids, Lectures on the Origin and
Growth of Religion as Illustrated by some Points in the History of
Indian Buddhism. F. Max Müller, Buddhist Nihilism.
1882 Hermann Oldenberg, Buddha; His Life, His Doctrine, His Order.
1884 Ernest J. Eitel, Buddhism: Its Historical, Theoretical and Popular
Aspects.
1883 A. P. Sinnett, Esoteric Buddhism, rewrites Buddhism as Theosophy.
1885 Samuel H. Kellogg, The Light of Asia and the Light of the World.
1889 Monier Monier-Williams, Buddhism, in its Connexion with Brah-
manism & Hinduism, and in its Contrast with Christianity.
1893 Thomas H. Huxley, Evolution and Ethics makes significant use of
Müller’s scholarship and Buddhist thought.
1895 The Buddhist Society founded in London.
1901 Charles Bennett takes vows as Ananda Metteyya, the first British
Buddhist monk.
Appendix 2
Summary of Selected Buddhist Tenets
Reflecting the Buddhist penchant for enumeration, this appendix consists

largely of a series of lists: the Four Noble Truths, the Noble Eightfold Path, the
Five Precepts, the Three Marks of Existence, the Five Aggregates (or skand-
has), and the Twelve Stages of Dependent Origination. These are itemized
and explicated throughout both the Theravada and Mahayana canons. Many
sources available to Victorians summarized these tenets. Any current introduc-
tion or handbook to Buddhism includes them.
The Four Noble Truths
Among the Victorian sources that summarize this foundational teaching from
the first sermon of the Buddha are Ambereley 311; Bloomfield 322; Eitel 86;
Hardy 496; Monier-Williams, Buddhism 43; T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 48,
106–7.
Here is Rhys Davids’s clearest summary:
1. Suffering or sorrow. Birth is sorrowful; growth, decay, illness, death, all are
sorrowful; separation from objects we love, hating what cannot be avoided,
and craving for what cannot be obtained, are sorrowful; briefly, such states
of mind as co-exist with the consciousness of individuality, with the sense of
separate existence, are states of suffering and sorrow.
214 ~ Appendix 2
2. The cause of suffering. The action of the outside world on the senses excites
a craving thirst for something to satisfy them, or a delight in the objects
presenting themselves, either of which is accompanied by a lust of life. These
are the causes of sorrow.
3. The cessation of sorrow. The complete conquest over and destruction of this
eager thirst, this lust of life, is that by which sorrow ceases.
4. The path leading to the cessation of sorrow is the Noble Eightfold Path briefly
summed up in the above description of a virtuous life.
(T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 48)
More recent introductions to the Four Noble Truths can be found in Erricker,
Buddhism 35–59; Nhat Hanh, The Heart of the Buddha’s Teaching, 3–46; Ra-
hula, What the Buddha Taught, 15–50; Smith, Radiant Mind: Essential Bud-
dhist Teachings and Texts, 65–102; Snelling, The Buddhist Handbook, 43–46.
These and many other sources of a similar sort also cover the other sets of
tenets included in this appendix; thus, I will not cite them again here.
Cross-referencing between Victorian and recent sources suggests the follow-
ing summary for the Four Noble Truths: (1) Dukkha, suffering is a natural and
unavoidable part of the human experience; (2) Samudaya, the origin of suf-
fering is “thirst,” craving, or clinging to that which is by nature impermanent,
whether that be one’s pleasures/pains or one’s self-conception; (3) Nirodha,
the cessation of suffering is possible if one can relinquish that craving for per-
manence and achieve non-attachment and non-aversion; (4) Magga, the way to
do that is to practice the Middle Way and to live according to the tenets of the
Noble Eightfold Path.
The Noble Eightfold Path

Victorian sources also treat the Noble Eightfold Path (Bloomfield 322; Lilly
201; Quarterly Review 337; T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 108–9; T. W. Rhys
Davids, History 89). Here is the relevant excerpt from Rhys Davids’s transla-
tion of the Buddha’s first sermon:
Right Aspirations (high, and worthy of the intelligent, worthy man)—

Right Speech (kindly, open, truthful)—
Right Conduct (peaceful, honest, pure)—
Right Livelihood (bringing hurt or danger to no living thing)—
Right Effort (in self-training and in self-control)—
Right Mindfulness (the active, watchful mind)—
Right Rapture (in deep meditation on the realities of life).
(T. W. Rhys Davids, History 89)
Selected Buddhist Tenets ~ 215
Many ancient and modern commentaries offer exegeses and interpretations

of the tenets of the Noble Eightfold Path. Often the eight are grouped as fol-
lows: the first three concerning ethical conduct, the second three concerning
mental discipline, and the remaining two concerning wisdom. The sources
I have consulted—Victorian in combination with contemporary—suggest the
following summary of the Noble Eightfold Path:
1. Right Understanding or Right View—understanding the true nature of re-

ality, a summary of which is provided by the Four Noble Truths.
2. Right Thoughts (or Aspiration)—cultivating thoughts of selflessness, com-
passion, and non-violence.
3. Right Speech—refraining from falsehood, slander, harsh words, frivolous
talk (gossip), or using the power of language to mislead or harm others.
4. Right Action—acting only in ways that do not harm oneself or others, the most
harmful actions being murder, stealing, and sexual violence or misconduct.
5. Right Livelihood—making one’s living in a way that does not harm others,
society, or the world, in particular refraining from making or selling weap-
ons, intoxicants, or poisons.
6. Right Effort—to prevent unwholesome states of mind from arising, to rid
oneself of them, to cultivate new wholesome states of mind, and to perfect
those already present.
7. Right Mindfulness (or Awareness)—of one’s deeds, words, and thoughts so
that one is present in each moment.
8. Right Concentration—the discipline of training the mind through the prac-
tice of meditation.
The Five Precepts

The Five Precepts, which apply both to lay and monastic Buddhists, as well as
an extended list for monks and nuns, constitute the practical rules for day-to-
day ethical living. They are less prohibitions or commandments (though they
partially overlap with the Ten Commandments) than “the minimum essential
‘prescription’ for treating the human condition, and an antidote to the three
poisons: greed, aversion or hatred, and ignorance or delusion” (Erricker 6–7).
Here is a poetic and somewhat Christianized expression of them spoken by
the character of the Buddha in Sir Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia:
1. “Kill not—for Pity’s sake—and lest ye slay / the meanest thing upon its
upward way.”
2. “Give freely and receive, but take from none / By greed, or force, or fraud,
what is his own.”
216 ~ Appendix 2
3. “Bear not false witness, slander not, nor lie; / Truth is the speech of inward
purity.”
4. “Shun drugs and drinks which work the wit abuse; / Clear minds, clean
bodies, need no Soma juice.”
5. “Touch not thy neighbour’s wife, neither commit / Sins of the flesh unlaw-
ful and unfit.”
(Arnold 227)
The Zen Master, scholar, and author, Thich Nhat Hanh, has written a version
of the Five Precepts adapted especially to address the conditions and concerns
of postmodern Westerners. To give a single example, here is his modernized
translation of the second precept, which taken in its most reduced form might
be “don’t steal”: “Aware of the suffering caused by exploitation, social injustice,
stealing, and oppression, we are committed to cultivating loving kindness and
learning ways to work for the well-being of people, animals, plants, and min-
erals. We will practice generosity by sharing our time, energy, and material
resources with those who are in need. We are determined not to steal and not
to possess anything that should belong to others. We will respect the property
of others, but will try to prevent others from profiting from human suffering
or the suffering of other beings” (Nhat Hanh, Interbeing 21).
The Three Marks of Existence
These are “fundamental doctrines which are to be understood as underlying all

Buddhist statements” (T. W. Rhys Davids, History 88). They provide the phil-
osophical foundation work upon which rest many of the other tenets listed in
this appendix. In one of Rhys Davids’s summaries, they are “the three doctrines
of Aniccam, Dukkham, and Anattam, that is to say, of The Impermanence of

every Individual, The Sorrow inherent in Individuality, The Non-reality of any
abiding Principle” (T. W. Rhys Davids, History 88).
Both Victorian and contemporary sources suggest the following summary:
1. Duhkha (in Pali, dukkha), which translates as “suffering” or “unsatisfactori-

ness” and is synonymous with the First Noble Truth.
2. Anitya (in Pali, annica), “impermanence,” which states that all things are
conditioned by change, nothing is constant or universal.
3. Anatman (in Pali, anatta), “no soul” or “not self,” the doctrine that au-
tonomous, continuous, and eternal selfhood, as in the Western conception
of the soul or the Hindu Atman, is a counter-productive and often harmful
illusion.
Selected Buddhist Tenets ~ 217
The Five Aggregates
The Five Aggregates, also referred to as the skandhas (in Pali, khandas), are
in effect the Buddhist response to the following question. If, as the doctrine
of anatman teaches, there is no essential, unified self, then what constitutes
the psychological and practical experience of personhood? How does the indi-
vidual’s psychology, which tends to assume itself as a unified identity, operate?
As Walpola Rahula observes in this regard, “what we call ‘I,’ or ‘being,’ is only
a combination of physical and mental aggregates, which are working together
interdependently in a flux of momentary change within the law of cause and
effect” (Rahula, What 66).
Rev. Spence Hardy summarized them in A Manual of Buddhism in 1853:
“The elements of sentient existence are called khandas, of which there are five
constituents. . . . 1. The organized body, . . . or the whole of being, apart from
the mental processes. 2. Sensations. . . . 3. Perception. . . . 4. Discrimination. . . .
5. Consciousness” (Hardy 388). “Sensations” includes what might be called feel-
ings or emotions, and “discrimination” more often is referred to as the aggregate
of “mental formations,” which includes volition or will as well as the conditions
or complexes posited by modern psychoanalytic theory. Here is a slightly fuller
summary based on the combination of Victorian and recent sources:
1. The aggregate of matter, including the body as its five material senses: eyes,
ears, nose, tongue, and the body/mind complex.
2. The aggregate of sensations or feelings, of which there are three types: pleas-
ant, unpleasant, and neutral.
3. The aggregate of perceptions, the recognition and processing of sensations
and feelings.
4. The aggregate of mental formations, a primary basis for karmic formations,
which includes intentions, the will or volition, and the idea of self, what
in Western psychology might include “emotions,” “attachments,” “projec-
tions,” etc.
5. The aggregate of consciousness, a sort of base awareness, perhaps a partial
corollary to the “unconscious.”
The Twelve Stages of Dependent Origination

as Shown in The Wheel of Life
The doctrine of dependent origination (Paticca-samuppāda in Pali), also some-

times translated as “conditioned genesis” or “interdependent co-arising,” is
nothing less than a model of reality in its entirety, which is to say that it is the
218 ~ Appendix 2
Dharma. It describes the chain of causes and effects that govern all existence.
This chain is represented pictorially by the Wheel of Becoming or the Wheel
of Life (Bhavachakra). The outer rim of The Wheel consists of twelve pictures,
and these depict the twelve links or stages in the cycle of dependent origina-
tion. The most widely read Victorian summaries of The Wheel were those
written by L. Austine Waddell about the Tibetan Wheel. T. W. Rhys Davids
also dedicated a chapter in The History and Literature of Buddhism to depen-
dent origination and The Wheel within Theravada. These in combination with
modern sources suggest the following summary:
Pictorial Representation Very Rudimentary Interpretation

1. A blind person with a stick ignorance as the root cause of suffering.
2. A potter making pots volitional actions creating karmic
formations.
3. A monkey clinging consciousness, psychological awareness
of self.
4. A boat with passengers body/mind. The body is the boat carrying
the one who steers. The mind is one’s
purposeful individuality.
5. An empty house the empty house of the senses: the five
senses plus the mind (as empty windows
and door).
6. A person with an arrow contact between the senses and the per-
ceived sticking in his/her eye—world—
the resulting feelings blind one to
reality.
7. An embracing couple sense-impressions create feelings and
attachments.
8. A person drinking thirst or desire. The Second Noble Truth.
9. A person picking fruit grasping, clinging, attachment to earthly
things.
10. A pregnant woman becoming, coming into existence, rebirth.
11. A woman giving birth birth as the beginning of a new cycle of
samsara.
12. An old man carrying his life as a result of birth, decay, and death; for to
live burdens or a corpse, himself—involves
suffering—the First Noble Truth
Note that there is no standardized interpretation of The Wheel and that the
pictorial representations and the sequencing of them vary between, for in-
stance, the ancient Ajanta fresco, the Tibetan Wheel, and later Japanese illus-
trations as analyzed by Rhys Davids History, 101–8.
Notes
Introduction
1. As this ordering of languages suggestions, the first serious Western engage-

ments with Buddhism began not in England but in other European countries, in
particular France and Germany, but, as I subsequently discuss, the center of Buddhist
studies shifted to England by mid century. For key events, dates, and people, see
appendix 1.
2. As here with my use of “Siddhartha Gautama” instead of the Pali “Siddhatta
Gotama,” I have chosen to standardize throughout this book on the Sanskrit rather
than the Pali terminology. This does not reflect a preference but rather a practical rec-
ognition that a greater number of Westerners are more familiar with “Dharma” than
“Dhamma,” “karma” than “kamma,” and “Nirvana” than “Nibbana,” for instance.
3. Victorian authors who commented upon Christian missionaries in Buddhist
territory include Alabaster and Eitel. Among twentieth-century studies, see Jacobson,
Jensen, and Prothero, The White Buddhist.
4. My primary source for places and dates concerning the Stupa at Amaravati and
Colonel Colin MacKenzie is Robert Knox, Amaravati: Buddhist Sculpture from the
Great Stupa, especially 18–20. I also draw in this paragraph on Charles Allen, The
Search for the Buddha: The men who discovered India’s lost religion, and the argument
here about the role of Europeans in preserving the ancient history of Buddhism is
developed further in chapter 4.
5. On Olcott and the Ceylonese Buddhist revival, see Godwin, 321–22, and, as the
best general source, Prothero, The White Buddhist.
6. Sources on the earliest contacts between Greeks and Buddhists along the north-
western border of current-day India include Bachelor, 7 and 26; Clarke, 37; Dejong;
and Fields, 13).
220 ~ Notes to Pages 10–21
7. The earliest contacts between European missionaries and Buddhist nations

starting in the thirteenth century have been documented and discussed in (Almond, 7;
Bachelor, 229; Dejong; Droit, 15; Jacobson, 150; Jensen, 42; Welbon, 11).
8. For an introduction to the influence of exposure to Eastern religions and phi-
losophies on the American Transcendentalists see Dejong; Godwin 309; Schwab,
200; and Fields, 60). The best sourcebook I have found on the impact of Eastern
thought on the United States is Tweed and Prothero.
9. My primary source on the 1851 census is McLeod, Religion and Society in En-
gland, 1850 –1914, in particular, the first chapter, “Patterns of Religious Belonging.”
10. My primary sources for facts about the history of Nonconformity in Britain are
McLeod, Religion and Society in England, 1850 –1914, and Parsons, “From Dissent-
ers to Free Churchman: The Transitions of Victorian Nonconformity.”
11. These trends did not apply to Catholicism, which almost alone resisted plu-
ralism, maintaining unity of doctrine and church, and did so while reestablishing
bishops in England for the first time in centuries in 1850 and while the number of
Catholics increased to the end of the century as the number of Anglicans declined.
Catholic commentators, though not theologically pluralistic, generally tended to be
intellectually curious and thorough in their treatments of Buddhism.
12. This claim is supported by the fact that a search of the PCI (Periodicals Con-
tent Index) database for articles published with “Buddha” or “Buddhism” in the title
reveals this pattern: 3 in the period 1840 –1850; 0 in 1851–1860; 13 in 1861–1870;
74 in 1871–1880; 148 in 1881–1890; 367 in 1891–1900; 287 in 1901–1910; and
243 in 1911–1920.
13. See for example Green, “Christianity and Buddhism,” in the Proceedings of the
Literary and Philosophical Society of Liverpool in 1890; Monier-Williams, “Buddhism
and Christianity,” which appeared in the Evangelistic Repository in 1891; and Max
Müller, “Christianity and Buddhism,” in The New Review of 1891.
14. Other articles that discuss the presumed similarities between the histories of
Protestantism and Buddhism include Clarke, “Buddhism: or, the Protestantism of
the East,” in Atlantic Monthly in 1869; Bode, “Women Leaders of the Buddhist
Reformation,” in Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland in
1893; and, Rattigan, “Three Great Asiatic Reformers: A Study and a Contrast” in the
London Quarterly Review in 1899.

15. The following articles are representative of a body of others that recounted
the life of the Buddha: Kellogg, “Kingdom of, Life of, and Legend of Buddha,” in
Bibliotheca Sacra in 1882; McKerlie, “Western Buddhism,” in Asiatic Quarterly Re-
view in 1890; and, Lilly, “The Message of Buddhism to the Western World,” in The
Fortnightly Review in 1905. A number of other articles focused on the Jataka, a col-
lection of folkloric tales about the past lives, birth, and childhood of the Buddha, one
example of which is Cowell, “Jataka: or stories of the Buddha’s former births,” which
appeared in Westminster Review in 1896.
16. On Mill and Buddhism, see the works by Gordon and Salzer. On Arnold and
Buddhism, see Littell’s Living Age and Whitlark, “Matthew Arnold and Buddhism.”
17. Other articles that discuss Buddhist ethics included, for example, Bloomfield,
“Essentials of Buddhist Doctrine and Ethics,” from the International Journal of
Ethics in 1891; Foley, “The psychological basis of Buddhist ethics,” from the Jour-
nal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland in 1894; and, Rattigan
(cited above).
Notes to Pages 22–30 ~ 221
18. For example, the traditional Christian parable of Saint Josaphat appears to be
derived at least in part from the story of the Buddha. As T. W. Rhys Davids wrote,
“Gotama the Buddha, under the name of St. Josaphat, is now officially recognized
and honoured and worshipped throughout the whole of Catholic Christendom as a
Christian Saint!” (T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhist xli). For twentieth-century support,
see Clarke, 39; De Jong, 60; and Welbon, 5.
1. The Life of the Buddha in Victorian Britain
1. On Arnold’s influence on Kipling, see Caracciolo and Whitlark. For a discus-

sion of the influence of Orientalist writings on Yeats, Eliot, and others, see Clarke,
101, as well as Eliot’s own response to Arnold in On Poetry and Poets.
2. The four rebuttals to The Light of Asia were Collins, Flanders, Kellogg, and
Wilkinson. For a discussion of them, see Clausen “The Light of Asia”, 31–36. At least
two other Americans wrote book-length verse narratives of the life of the Buddha fol-
lowing the success of The Light of Asia; see Niles and Root.
3. The threshold event in the translation of Buddhist scriptures came in the 1830s
after Brian Houghton Hodgson, under the auspices of the East India Company, col-
lected ancient Sanskrit manuscripts and delivered them to the Royal Asiatic Society in
London, where they initially were disregarded, and to the Société Asiatique in Paris,
where Eugène Burnouf used them to write his ground-breaking work, L’introduction
à L’historie du Buddhisme Indien (1844).
4. For examples of Victorian scholars and commentators who drew an equals sign
between Buddhism and Darwinism see Dublin Review, 19; Eitel, 63– 66; Lilly, 213;
Literary Digest, 162; and T. W. Rhys Davids, Lectures, 94.
5. See for example Dall’s “Legend of Buddha and Life of Christ,” published in
the Unitarian Review in 1882, or Johnston’s “Christ and Buddha; resemblances and
contrasts,” from the Methodist Review in 1898.
6. See for example Carpenter’s essay “The Obligations of the New Testament to
Buddhism” which appeared in Nineteenth Century in 1880, or E. J. Dillon’s “Ecclesi-
astes and Buddhism” in Contemporary Review in 1894. Ernest de Bunsen, The Angel-
Messiah of Buddhists, Essenes, and Christians, argued that “the remarkable parallels
in the most ancient records of the lives of Gautama-Buddha and of Jesus require
explanation” (Bunsen vii-viii).
7. Clausen has done the laborious and valuable foundation work of comparing
The Light of Asia to the primary sources upon which Arnold relied and then annotat-
ing the poem, identifying specific passages where Arnold drew on each source. See
Clausen, “The Light of Asia,” 210 –89. Among other sources that he identifies are
Hardy’s A Manual of Buddhism and Rogers’s translation of Buddhaghosha’s Para-
bles. Naravane argues additionally for the influence on the poem of the Lalitavistara,
“a Sanskrit text of the Mahayana school” (24).
8. The primary source on this point is Almond.
9. The Light of Asia was both praised for its accuracy and criticized for its inac-
curacy. Rhys Davids commented that the poem “ ‘has caught with commendable ac-
curacy and sympathy the spirit of the ancient faith’ ” (Rhys Davids, qtd. in Clausen,
“Sir” 184). Müller, took the opposite stance: “And we must premise that the reader
who would study Buddha in the Vinaya [the Vinaya Pitaka, one of three foundational
scriptures] must not bring his ‘Light of Asia’ with him. The Sir Edwin Arnold of the
forth or fifth century BCE had far slighter materials at his command: he was nearer the
facts”; see Müller, “Buddhism,” 330.
10. Nineteenth-century scholars were able to determine with relative accuracy the
dates of the Buddha’s birth and death using references in Buddhist scripture to non-
Buddhist historical events with known dates. Most modern scholars fix the dates as
either 566 – 486 or 563– 483 BCE, as summarized in Ling, 45.
11. Perhaps the earliest printed life of Buddha was recorded by Ashvaghosa be-
tween the first and second centuries; see Ashvaghosa. My sources include many of
those available to Arnold, mainly Alabaster and T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism. In ad-
dition, I have consulted twentieth-century retellings, for example, Snelling, and the
exhaustive scholarly biography by Nakamura. I am aware that any short summary of
this sort opens itself to criticism both for inaccuracy and for the particular interpretive
slant of the author; this is unavoidable.
12. Along these lines, McKerlie wrote in 1890: “To consider the individual [Bud-
dha] one must look on, not the miraculous conditions and fables related concerning
him, but the historical facts of his existence” (McKerlie 303). See Caracciolo on the
reception of the Jatakas. On the preference for the Pali canon, see Brear, 149.
13. For a summary of the “Eight Great Events” illustrated with ancient art, see
Menzies, 33–51.
14. See, for example, Arnold, 4:85, and Phillips, 2.40 and 3.41. Graham provides
a counter-point to my claim here, arguing that “part of Arnold’s attraction to the East
is in the eroticism he ‘discovers’ there” (Graham 128).
15. This is not the place to attempt a fuller treatment of the varieties of Lamarck-
ism, Darwinism, Social Darwinism, and Spencerism that were part of the massive
complex of discourses to which Phillips and Arnold, like many other Victorians, re-
sponded by confusing the distinctions between them. Though I hope not to per-
petuate those confusions, I use the terms “Darwinism” and “evolution debate” to
signify this complex of discourses at a general level. My primary sources, other than
Darwin, are Beer and Crook. My discussion also is both indebted to and at variance
with the treatment of Arnold’s “spiritualized, creative evolution” in Clausen, “Sir
Edwin Arnold,” 179. For a somewhat more thorough consideration of these issues,
see Franklin, “Memory.”

16. It should be noted that Arnold too describes Buddhism in his “Author’s Pref-
ace” as a “magnificent Empire of Belief,” a “stupendous conquest of humanity” (Ar-
nold, “Preface” 1, 3). The difference from Phillips is that Arnold does not carry the
imperial conceit throughout the poem, nor does the poem portray East and West in a
conflict for supremacy. Many readers, including Indians and Buddhists, have felt that
the poem lives up to the author’s claim that it “is inspired by an abiding desire to aid
in the better mutual knowledge of East and West” (Arnold, “Preface” 6). For support
of this claim, see Naravane.
17. The caveat to this claim concerning Buddhist non-violence is the history of
Buddhism in Japan and the marshalling of it to serve Japanese imperial ambitions
leading up to and during World War II. See Victoria, Zen at War.
18. On the Buddhist conception of the interconnectedness of all living beings and
all actions, see Jean Smith 43, 100, 204, and 260. Especially illustrative is Thich Nhat
Hanh’s Interbeing, which places that doctrine at the center of Buddhist teaching.
A not dissimilar concept can be found in the post-Darwinian theory of an organic
interdependence between all life forms within an ecosystem, as discussed in Crook

(269). This, too, is why Buddhism and modern Western environmentalism have
found much in common in the centuries following Darwin.
19. C. A. F. Rhys Davids, Buddhism, 99–100, comparatively analyzes the histori-
cal roots of these two alternative worldviews and ties them to a divergence between
ancient Greek philosophy and ancient Indian philosophy.
20. Monier-Williams, an eminent scholar and critic of Buddhism, made this repre-
sentative statement about Buddhist passivity in 1889: “According to Christianity:—
Fight and overcome the world. According to Buddhism:—Shun the world, and
withdraw from it” (Monier-Williams 559). One defender of Catholicism wrote in
the Dublin Review in 1875: “The Eastern withdraws himself into contemplation,
subdues every movement of passion, and longs vehemently for one only consum-
mation, that the semblance of life, which he has, may be taken from him, and pain
may cease with annihilation. The Western cannot learn this hopeless asceticism; he
believes that the cycle of things is an evolution from mere potentiality to some large
perfection; he worships progress, and looks out for the means of advancing society
and mankind in its onward path” (Dublin Review 18). Note Eitel, 83–84, on Bud-
dhism as fatalism.
21. See, for example, Phillips, 5.89. Phillips was not alone in viewing the Buddha
as a great intellect, since, according to Brear, one appeal of Buddhism to some Victo-
rian thinkers was “the sheer intellectual power of the system” (Brear 144).
22. On this understanding of karma and individual responsibility, see Fox, 116.
23. The traditional concept of Bhavana, mental or spiritual development, “pre-
sumes that the latent capacity we have needs to be cultivated,” and “in Theravada
Buddhism the way of escape from ignorance and craving is emphatically one of self-
help” (Erricker 10; Fox 145). Some Victorians found this aspect of Buddhism com-
patible with their own ethic.
24. This did not stop some pro-Buddhist Victorians from trying to deny Buddhist
atheism. See, for example, McKerlie and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, Buddhism.
25. See, for example, Arnold, 4:97. In addition, The Light of Asia often puts
phrases into the mouth of the Buddha that are Biblical allusions. Clausen identifies
many of these in his annotated critical edition of Arnold’s text.
26. As Hauser, in annotating an 1890 edition of The Light of Asia, wrote in relation to
Arnold 8:301: “If anyone hopes to arrive at a full understanding of this subject [nirvana],
let them be well forewarned of its impossibility” (301). Others who joined the debate
over the meaning of “nirvana” included Armstrong 187; Hardy 390, 395; Müller, Chips
227–28; Müller, Lectures 143; Rattigan 309; and, T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 94).
27. The early French Buddhologists Burnouf and Bathélemy Saint-Hilaire strongly
adhered to the interpretation of nirvana as annihilation, and it was their heavy influ-
ence on Müller (see Chips, 227–28, for instance), and his heavy influence on all sub-
sequent scholars of comparative religion, that set the tone until the 1880s and1890s,
at which point other theories of nirvana began to gain prominence, especially in the
writing of the Rhys Davidses.
28. For one clear summary of anatman, see Rahula, 51–66. For a characteristically
Victorian argument that Buddhist selflessness is nothing more than selfishness, see Eitel,
79, 83–84. For a discussion of Victorian distaste for this concept, see Almond, 88.
29. This parable was recounted in multiple sources available to Victorians, includ-
ing T. W. Rhys Davids’s widely read Buddhism, 133–34.
30. Clausen, “The Light of Asia”, 251–52, outlines the ways in which Arnold’s
telling of Sujata’s tale varies in significant ways from his primary sources.
2. Buddhism and the Emergence of Late-Victorian

Hybrid Religions
1. Without delving into the history of the term “religion,” I note that “the cen-
tral explanatory category of religious studies, namely the notion of ‘religion’ itself,
is a Christian theological category . . . forged in the crucible of inter-religious conflict
and interaction” (King 40). As a result, one of the most common assumptions in the
Victorian period and perhaps today is that a genuine religion must be based on cre-
ation and revelation by a monotheistic deity. In contrast, I use “religion” to mean
any spiritual or ceremonial practice that is observed by an identifiable community
over time and organized around agreed upon doctrines or rituals. The generality
of this definition is unavoidable if one is to include the tribal religions of the upper
Amazon as well as ancient Greek pantheism, not to mention Buddhism. Thus refer-
ence sources on religion tend to demur from offering any single definition. While,
Émile Durkheim says religion is “ ‘a unified system of beliefs and practices relative to
sacred things,’ ” R. N. Bellah says it is “ ‘a set of symbolic forms and acts which relate
man to the ultimate conditions of his existence’ ” (qtd. in Bowker, Oxford Dictionary
of World Religions xv). Such definitions exclude none of the religions discussed here,
and I would challenge any definition that does.
2. Various scholars concur with the statement that all religions are syncretic; see
Byrne, 99; Kraft, 143– 44; and Shaw and Stewart, 7).
3. All references to Theosophy are to The Theosophical Society International,
which should not be confused with the Theosophical Society Pasadena. Like all re-
ligions, Theosophy has experienced schisms. The most significant occurred in 1895
when William Q. Judge, one of the founders of the society in 1875, along with Hel-
ena Petrovna Blavatsky and Henry S. Olcott, chose to separate the American branch
from Blavatsky’s Eastern influence. Blavatsky and Olcott had moved their headquar-
ters in 1879 to India where they built a center at Adyar in 1882. In 1929 the North
American branch moved to Point Loma in California and later relocated to Pasadena.
To confuse matters, there also is a major lodge belonging to the Blavatsky side in
Wheaton, Illinois. I have chosen to focus on the international branch and not to
include direct consideration of the California branch, even if there are significant
similarities between the two.
4. Jean-Baptiste de Lamarck’s Zoological Philosophy (1809) and Charles Lyell’s
Principles of Geology (1830 –33) prepared the ground for the evolutionary theories of
Charles Darwin and Alfred Russel Wallace after midcentury. My primary sources on
the history of materialism are Frank Miller Turner, Contesting Cultural Authority,
262, and Richard C. Vitsthum, Materialism: An Affirmative History and Definition.
Victorians were exposed to the pre-Socratic materialist philosophy and atomic theory
of Democritus (c. 460—c. 370 BCE) and Epicurus (c. 340 –c. 270 BCE) largely through
contemporary translations of De Rerum Natura by the Roman poet Lucretius
(98?–55 BCE). One well-know translation was made by H. A. J. Munro, in response to
which Alfred Tennyson penned his less than flattering poem, “Lucretius.”
5. These distinctions are evident throughout F. Max Müller’s widely influential

work Natural Religion (1889), which argues that it always had been his “endeavour
to show that religion did not begin with abstract concepts and a belief in purely extra-
mundane beings, but that its deepest roots can be traced back to the universal stratum
of sensuous perception” (Müller, Natural 141). In other words, religious sentiment
originated from the experience of the numinous in nature, awe and wonder at natural
phenomena such as mountains, storms, the ocean, fierce animals, etc.
6. A version of this claim was made by Hudson Tuttle, Arcana of Spiritualism:
A Manual of Spiritual Science and Philosophy: “A list of the names of those who have
embraced Spiritualism would include the leading men of the nations—statesmen who
wield the most power, scientists, and almost all the advanced and radical thinkers”
(Tuttle 48). However, Tuttle does not note the largest category of eminent Victorians
to dabble in Spiritualism: literary authors. That list includes but is not limited to Eliz-
abeth Barrett Browning, Mary Elizabeth Braddon, Wilkie Collins, Edward Bulwer-
Lytton, Charles Dickens, George Eliot, Alfred Tennyson, Elizabeth Gaskell, Margaret
Oliphant, Marie Corelli, Thomas Hardy, Bram Stoker, Robert Louis Stevenson, and
Arthur Conan Doyle. On the “new occultism” that followed the Spiritualism move-
ment, see Alex Owen, The Place of Enchantment.
7. For more on spiritualist societies, see Oppenheim, The Other World, 49–57.
On spiritualist publications, see Alex Owen, The Darkened Room, 22–24.
8. As evidence for Spiritualism as an organized religion, the United States saw the
formation of the National Spiritualist Association of Churches in 1893, and Gordon J.
Melton, Encyclopedic Handbook of Cults in America, defines “Spiritualism” as a re-
ligion, “a religion based upon the belief that mediumship, the ability demonstrated
by a few selected persons to contact the world of spirits, proves that the individual
survives bodily death” (Melton 118).
9. Mesmerism and hypnotism appear throughout subsequent literature, for exam-
ple, in Edward Bulwer-Lytton’s A Strange Story (1866) and as Marie Corelli’s “Elec-
tric Principle of Christianity” in A Romance of Two Worlds (1886) (Corelli 211).
10. Frank Podmore, Modern Spiritualism: A History and Criticism (1902), makes
this claim unequivocally: “Historically, moreover, Spiritualism is the direct outgrowth
of Animal Magnetism” (Podmore xiv). Also see Oppenheim, 218–22.
11. As Maria M. Tatar, Spellbound: Studies on Mesmerism and Literature, puts this
point, mesmerists “repeatedly stressed the empirical basis of animal magnetism in
much the same way that Christian Science and spiritualism, lineal descendants of mes-
merism, persistently underscore[d] the scientific foundations of their persuasions”
(Tatar 6). Spiritualists claimed to practice a “scientific religion,” as in Epes Sargent’s
The Scientific Basis of Spiritualism (1881).
12. Oppenheim organizes her invaluable study around the categories of Christian
and anti-Christian Spiritualism. See Oppenheim, 63–110.
13. On the relationship between Spiritualism and Victorian progressivism, see
Cottom, 130 –31; Oppenheim, 94 –96; and Turner, Between Science and Religion,
192–93. Turner also provides substantial consideration of the life and work of Fred-
eric Myers.
14. Current scholarship speculates that between 40,000 and 110,000 witches
were burned in Europe between 1450 and 1750; see Gibbons. According to the web
source, “Major Events in the Burning Times” (which may have limited reliability), the
last witch was burned in Europe in 1782.
15. It also is telling that, as Owen notes, “cross-cultural studies have indicated
that major factors in determining the recipients of spirit possession are low status ac-
companying powerlessness, combined with a sense of personal deprivation”; in other
words, poor women subjected to repressive men saw the séance as a ticket out of that
condition (Owen, Darkened 49).
16. The use of “law” to designate the Dharma can be seen, for instance, in the title
of Alabaster’s influential 1871 work, The Wheel of the Law, and throughout Arnold’s
1879 best-selling verse narrative of the life of the Buddha, The Light of Asia, which
uses terms like “the great Law” (Arnold 8:212). For Victorian works that equate the
Law of the Dharma to the law of evolution, either criticizing or celebrating the “scien-
tific” qualities of Buddhism, see Eitel, 62 and 66; Lilly, 209, or Literary Digest, 162. For
an analysis of the Victorian conflation of Buddhism and Darwinism, especially within
Theosophy, see Clausen, “Victorian Buddhism,” 7, and Bevir, “The West,” 764.
17. My source here is Droogers, 9.
18. Shaw and Stewart further note that “many in religious studies now feel that
the term is so tarnished that it is no longer usable” (Shaw and Stewart 5). The
mid-twentieth-century trend in the study of religion was to dismiss “syncretism” as “a
term of dubious heritage and limited usefulness, often employed to ascribe insincerity,
confusion, or other negative qualities to a nascent religious group” (J. Smith 1042).
Related observations can be found in Droogers, 9; Kraft, 142; and van der Veer,
“Syncretism, Multiculturalism and the Discourse of Tolerance,” 197.
19. I take this point from van der Veer, ibid.
20. Alex Owen, The Place of Enchantment, argues in this regard that “In certain
respects the ‘new’ occultism,” which encompasses what I analyze as late-Victorian hy-
brid religions, “represented a somewhat elitist counterpoint to the hugely successful
Victorian spiritualist movement that had preceded it” (Owen, Place 5).
21. One exception to this claim may be Christian Science, which, like all late-
Victorian hybrid religions, claimed a scientific basis but which did not to my knowl-
edge derive this claim with any reference to Buddhism. The only treatment of Christian
Science that I have read is Braud.
22. My primary sources on the early history of the Theosophical Society are Mead,
Washington, and especially Gomes, The Dawning of the Theosophical Movement.
23. The term “Aryan,” which since its adoption by the Nazis has been unavoid-
ably considered racist and genocidal, referred in the nineteenth century to the ancient
people and area of what is now Northern India or Pakistan, from which Siddhartha
Gautama (c. 563–c. 483 BCE), and therefore Buddhism, issued. The “Aryan ques-
tion” that interested Victorians, which was stimulated by the earlier discovery of the
membership of English in the Indo-European language group, concerned the extent
to which Northern European peoples were genetically or racially related to the people
of Northern India, a question with implications for British occupation of India See
Bachelor, 266, and van der Veer, Imperial Encounters, 134.
24. These statistics come from the website of the Theosophical Society Interna-
tional Headquarters in Adyar, India: http://ts-adyar.org/history.html. According to
data provided via personal correspondence by Mr. Conrad Jameson, the Public Rela-
tions Officer in Adyar, in 2001 there were 1,081 Lodges across 51 different nations
with a total of 31,996 memberships.
25. On the Mahatma letters and the related scandal, see Gomes, Theosophy in the
Nineteenth Century, chap. 6. The letters themselves are preserved in The British
Library. The most vocal of Blavatsky’s critics was William Emmette Coleman, who
viewed Theosophy as an interloper on the territory of Spiritualism and who attacked
Blavatsky in a series of articles with titles such as “A Splendid Fraud. Sources of Theo-
sophical Literature—Where Blavatsky Got her Book.” Blavatsky undeniably bor-
rowed freely from a dizzying array of sources, and it is true that she did not quote or
footnote according to Modern Language Association standards. On the other hand,
Isis Unveiled contains between three and four thousand quotations and over 2,400
substantially accurate footnotes (Gomes, The Dawning of the Theosophical Movement
153). I would argue that regardless of Blavatsky’s sloppy citation practices the end
product is an original synthesis and a unique cultural artifact of the late nineteenth
century. For a direct rebuttal of the plagiarism charge, see Hastings.
26. I am far from the first to describe Theosophy as a synthetic, if not hybrid,
religion. An 1895 essay in comparative religion notes that Theosophy “professes to
explain the doctrines and myths of all religions, and is in fact the boldest attempt
ever made to achieve the colossal task of reconciling all the religions and philosophies
of the world” (Snell 205). Isis Unveiled is nothing less than “The Key to all My-
thologies,” and while George Eliot’s Mr. Casaubon was not up to the task Madame
Blavatsky was.
27. As Blavatsky notes in this regard, “Plato never claimed to be the inventor of
all that he wrote, but gave credit for it to Pythagoras, who, in his turn, pointed to
the remote East as the source whence he derived in information and his philosophy”
(Isis 2:39). These claims are supported by Clarke: “Pythagoras, who had a profound
influence on Plato, is believed to have spent some time in Egypt where he learned
about Indian philosophy; the synosophists were objects of considerable curiosity to
thinkers in the ancient Greek and Roman worlds; and Buddhist monks were known
in the Hellenic world” (Clarke 37).
28. The Essenes were an esoteric sect of Judaism that formed beginning in
c. 150 BCE. Blavatsky argues that “the Essenes . . . were the converts of Buddhist mis-
sionaries who had overrun Egypt, Greece, and even Judea at one time, since the reign
of Asoka the zealous propagandist” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:132). This theory was not un-
common in Victorian discourse; see Bunsen’s The Angel-Messiah of Buddhists, Essenes,
and Christians (1880). More recent scholars have argued that “there are clear indica-
tions that the Gnostic ideas, which played an important part in the early development
of Christian doctrine, were influenced by Buddhist and Hindu thought” (Clarke 39).
29. Citing arguably mystical phrases that the New Testament attributes to Jesus,
Blavatsky argues, “And, if we understand it rightly, we cannot avoid thinking that this
‘secret’ doctrine of Jesus, even the technical expressions of which are but so many du-
plications of the Gnostics and Neo-platonic mystic phraseology—that this doctrine,
we say, was based on the same transcendental philosophy of Oriental Gnosis as the rest
of the religions of those and earliest days” (Blavatsky, Isis 2:192).
30. Blavatsky had signaled early in volume one what sort of natural law she has in
mind: “Is it too much to believe that man should be developing new sensibilities and
a closer relation with nature? The logic of evolution must teach as much, if carried to
its legitimate conclusions” (Blavatsky, Isis 1: v).
31. Sinnett develops his appeal to science throughout Esoteric Buddhism, as here:
“In esoteric science, as in microscopy, the application of higher and higher powers will
always continue to reveal a growing wealth of detail; and the sketch of an organism
that appeared satisfactory enough when its general proportions were first discerned,
is betrayed to be almost worse than insufficient when a number of previously unsus-

pected minutiae are brought to notice” (Sinnett, Esoteric 21). The microscope meta-
phor was common in Victorian discourse, as for example in George Eliot’s Lydgate
in Middlemarch.
32. Jean-Baptiste de Lamarck’s Zoological Philosophy (translated in 1814) argued
that acquired characteristics could be inherited, which was more palatable in general
to progressive-minded Victorians than was Darwin’s theory of evolution in Origin of
Species, which argued for random selection and adaptation by mutation.
33. Concerning Annie Besant’s role in British politics, feminist politics, and her
combination of the two in activism in India see Beckerlegge, 235; Bevir, “A Theoso-
phist in India”; Burfield; Dixon, 206; Ellwood and Wessinger; van der Veer, Imperial
Encounters, 77; and Viswanathan, 177–207.
34. On Olcott’s participation in the Singhalese Buddhist revival, see Godwin,
321–22, and, as the best general source, Prothero, The White Buddhist. Olcott penned
A Buddhist Catechism, which still is used by Buddhists in Sri Lanka today, thereby
creating his own hybrid of Buddhism mixed with a Protestant orientation and a
Catholic genre.
35. For evidence for and against Blavatsky’s purported sojourn in Tibet, see Bla-
vatsky, Isis Unveiled, 2:598; “Mr. Lillie’s Delusions”; Gomes, The Dawning of the
Theosophical Movement, 9ff; Gomes, Theosophy in the Nineteenth Century, 215–223;
Sinnett, The Early Days of Theosophy in Europe, 24; and Washington, 29. The ques-
tion of whether Blavatsky had indeed spent time in Tibet was and still is debated
because it is crucial support for her claim to have received the transmission of the
“esoteric science” of Theosophy from the “Tashi Lama” over the course of years of
residency, a claim that underpins the authority of her teachings (Blavatsky, Letter to
Hartman 324).
36. This point comes from Dixon, 43.
37. On the association between the International Theosophical Society and the
Hindu Arya Samaj in India, see Gomes, Dawning, 13, and the section “Pilgrimage to
India,” as well as Godwin, 320.
38. The Hinduization of Theosophy is blatant in Sinnett’s Esoteric Buddhism. It
adopts the story of “a Brahmin pundit” to the effect that Gautama Buddha, though a
great teacher, had erred in democratizing the esoteric practices guarded by Brahmin
adepts and thus “opened the doors of the occult sanctuary too widely” (218, 227).
Sinnett then argues that the Buddha had to “re-incarnated himself, next after his
existence as Gautama” as Sankaracharya (c. 788–820 CE), a Hindu reformer and pro-
ponent of Vedanta philosophy, in order to “repair certain errors in his own previous
teaching” (219, 220).
39. One of many teachings ascribed to the Buddha on the Four Noble Truths can
be found in the Saccavibhanga Sutta, The Middle-Length Discourses of the Buddha,
1097–1101. For an introduction to the Four Noble Truths, see Erricker, 35–59; Nhat
Hanh, Heart, 3– 46; Rahula, What, 15–50; Smith, 65–102; and Snelling, 43– 46.
40. Turner, Between Religion and Science, 24, identifies these three scientific theo-
ries as definitive of Victorian scientific naturalism. As I. Salzer wrote in 1890 in refer-
ence to the Dharma, “Gautama Buddha’s doctrine of continuous Change, or tendency
towards Change within the Universe, is the only doctrine as yet known that includes
all the elementary processes of this world, both physical and mental; it is the highest
generalisation yet proclaimed by man” (Salzer 8).
41. If Theosophies cosmology is antithetic to Buddhism, it may have precedence

in Hindu and Egyptian models. T. W. Rhys Davids notes that in the Upanishads “The
belief in transmigration is here united with notion that soul go first to the moon, a
theory . . . curiously common” (T. W. Rhys Davids, Lectures 82).
42. I will note only in passing that the model of spiritual progress within The-
osophy is tied to a racial hierarchy. Blavatsky writes, for instance, that “Races of men
differ in spiritual gifts,” and Sinnett argues that each individual “has to live through
a series of races on that planet” before progressing to the next (Blavatsky, Isis 2:588;
Sinnett, Esoteric 95). Both state that the “Aryan race” of northern India and not
the “white race” is the most evolved in the nineteenth century. One of Theosophy’s
founding principles concerns racial equality, yet its privileging of the Aryan race is far
from disinterested. Is Theosophy racist, anti-racist, or, as I would argue, both? For
the two sides of this argument, see van der Veer, Imperial Encounters, 77, and, on the
other hand, Viswanathan, 177–207.
43. See Sinnett, Esoteric Buddhism, 65, and Besant (1895).
44. Blavatsky cites the skandhas many times; see, for example, Isis Unveiled
2:286 –87, and Key to Theosophy 141.
45. Useful recent treatments of the Five Aggregates or the skandhas can be found
in Erricker, 39; Nhat Hanh, Heart, 176 –83; and Snell, 56 –57.
46. On Freud and psychical research, see Oppenheim, 245–66, and Turner, Between
Science and Religion, 109.
47. As a counterpoint, Sinnett does theorize a hell-like possibility for those who
truly are not ready for spiritual progression, but this is the rare exception, a punishment
place call “Avitchi” that is reserved for the few genuinely evil “aristocrat[s] of sin”
(Sinnett, Esoteric 142). The very large majority of average sinners need not worry.
48. See Bevir, “A Theosophist in India.” Van der Veer argues that “spiritualism
and Theosophy have played a crucial role in the development of radical antiestablish-
ment and anticolonial politics, both in Britain and India” (van der Veer, Imperial 77).
In contrast, Viswanathan concludes that Annie Besant “attempted to forge through
the theosophical movement a culture of universal brotherhood that was, at the same
time, heavily marked by theories of racial fissures and regeneration” (Viswanathan
191). Both claims are supportable.
3. Romances of Reincarnation, Karma, and Desire
1. On the hypothesized link between Pythagoras and Buddhist reincarnation,

see Arundale, 120; Buchner, 7; Bunsen, xii; Cook, 35–36; Cust, 42; and Wier, 56.
Yang provides relevant analysis of eighteenth-century British conceptions about rein-
carnation.
2. My primary source on the debate over reincarnation in eighteenth-century
Britain is Yang.
3. My source for this evidence of Corelli’s popularity and sales is Federico.
4. Lewis Carroll alludes to this same metaphor for nirvana in Alice’s Adventures
in Wonderland when Alice pauses to contemplate the potential result of unchecked
shrinking: “And she tried to fancy what the flame of a candle looks like after the candle
is blown out, for she could not remember ever having seen such a thing” (56). This
metaphor became pervasive in late-Victorian discourse. See, for example, T. W. Rhys

Davids, Lectures on the Origin, 101, which cites “Alice in Wonderland.”
5. On the Victorian construction of Tibet and Tibetan Buddhism, see the works
by Bishop, Flemming, McMillin, Venturino, and most especially Lopez.
6. We know that Haggard and Rudyard Kipling, who were close friends, sup-
ported one another’s belief in reincarnation. For example, in his diary entry of 23 May
1918, Haggard wrote: “Also we [Kipling and himself ] discussed the possibility (and
probability) of reincarnation and agree that every year which passes draws back a cur-
tain as it were, and shows us to ourselves in yet completer nakedness” (Private 138).
We also know that Kipling had read comparative religious studies on Buddhism and
might reasonably assume that Haggard had as well and that, in some of their many
conversations and correspondences about Kipling’s Kim, they discussed Kipling’s
Buddhist “Teshoo Lama.”
7. For representatively unscholarly biographies of Corelli, see the works by
Bagland, Carr, and Huff. Carr’s 1901 biography makes this fabulous claim on Corel-
li’s behalf: “Since St. John the Divine no one [before Corelli] had undertaken by a
‘plain history of strange occurrences happening to oneself’ to prove the actual exis-
tence of God and His Heaven” (Carr 41).
8. Corelli frequently distanced her own Spirit-based belief from Spiritualism, but
we know that she had a connection to W. T. Stead, which “created a link with the
contemporary spiritualist scene,” and she finally confessed in her preface to Life Ever-
lasting that her inspiration for A Romance had come from “a strange psychical experi-
ence which chanced to myself ” (Kuehn 184; Corelli, Life 17). Similarly, Haggard in
his twenties “discovered the new fad of Spiritualism” and, according to his autobiog-
raphy, became a “frequent visitor” at the house of Lady Paulet, “a great spiritualist”
whose séances he “used to attend” (Manthorpe 65; Haggard, Days 1:37). Something
happened at one of those séances that disturbed him greatly, I suspect in part because
he credited it as authentic paranormal phenomena. Though later he would attend sev-
eral lectures by Arthur Conan Doyle on Spiritualism, he remained very critical of it.
9. Henkel argued along similar lines: “What Herodotus communicates on the re-
ligion of Egypt has to be taken with the greatest precaution. Egyptology has nothing
to produce to sanction his statements on metempsychosis” (Henkel 106).
10. Note Victorian approaches to the “Aryan question”: Hauser, 19; T. H. Hux-
ley; Max Müller, Lectures, 31; Oldenberg, 5; T. W. Rhys Davids, Buddhism, 22,
and Lectures, 23. Twentieth-century sources include Bishop, 120; Davies; and van
der Veer, Imperial, 50and 134). Some Victorian versions of the life of the Buddha
pointed out that Siddhartha was “an Aryan. . . . a descendant of the Sâkas, or Sythians,
who invaded India from the north about 600 B.C.” and that he was “tall, handsome,
with large blue eyes” (Hauser 19; Neale 441). Beyond simply refabricating a historical
figure in one’s own image, as is done in paintings of an Anglo-Saxon Jesus, this was
a reclaiming of a racial origin and identity. As a result, “this Buddhism could . . . serve
as a substitute self for Victorian Britain, a self present long ago in the very heart of
the Orient” (Lopez 6).
11. On Haggard and Egyptology, see Pearson. Much has been written about race
and racism in Haggard; see for example Malley, who notes that in creating Ayesha
“Haggard uses the myth of the white queen (Sheba must also be a model) as a sur-
vival of an ancient white imperial presence in Africa” (Malley 286). On the similarities
between Haggard’s Kôr and Egypt, see Gilbert (126). It is not irrelevant to note that
Haggard, according to his nephew, “ ‘believed that he had lived before: as an ancient
Egyptian, as a Zulu, as a Norseman’ ” (qtd. in Manthorpe 21).
12. For fuller development of reincarnation as a progressive evolutionary system,
see Besant, Reincarnation, 11; Sinnett (any of his works); and Tuthill, 258.
13. On reincarnation compared and contrasted to genetic inheritance, see Arun-
dale, 33; Besant, Reincarnation, 72; Henkel, 130; and Slater, 10.
14. Even so, one American author, Leo Michael, wrote a polemic entitled She: An
Allegory of the Church (1889) in which he argues that Haggard’s novel is an allegory
in which Ayesha stands for the corrupted institutions of Christianity while the Theo-
sophical spiritualism in the novel represents the true path for Christianity.
15. On the phallic nature of Ayesha’s “fire of life” and Haggard’s phallocentrism
in general, see Gubar’s “She and Herland,” 144.
16. On Ayesha as a figure for the “New Woman” and as a perceived threat to Vic-
torian masculinity, see the works by Gilbert, Gubar, Murphy, or T. Rogers.
17. Haggard echoed his character’s sentiment in his autobiographical writing:
“That all Love is immortal. It is God’s light permeating the universe, and therefore
incapable of diminution or decay” (Haggard, Days 2:259).
18. This contradiction between spirituality and sensuality has produced contra-
dictory critical claims about Corelli’s writing. While Kershner notes that “Corelli’s
religious vision—if we can call it that—was, like that of the Romantic poets or the
Decadents, inherently sensual rather than ascetic,” Siebers argues that “Corelli’s brand
of mesmerism is based on a kind of asceticism that rejects the body” (Kershner 75;
Siebers 187). Both claims are supportable.
19. Corelli’s protagonist in Life Everlasting repeatedly wonders about what has
prevented her union with Santoris, as here: “Something opposing,—something inimi-
cal to my peace and happiness held me back” (Life 248). The texts hints that one
partial explanation has to do with gender equality, though Corelli never would have
expressed it that way: the protagonist demands her own spiritual power equal to that
of the male counterpart. I believe that the author’s sexual orientation also may have
been a factor here.
20. Concerning desire, Haggard famously wrote in his 1887 essay “About Fic-
tion” that “Sexual passion is the most powerful lever with which to stir the mind of
man, for it lies at the root of all things human; and it is impossible to overestimate the
damage that could be worked by a single English or American writer of genius, if he
grasped it with a will” (Haggard, “About” 176 –77). D. H. Lawrence would attempt
just that: to grasp desire with will (or will with desire).
21. A similar argument was made by Howard, as in this statement: “According
to them [fundamentalists], man is by nature sinful, and it is utterly futile to look to
works for salvation: they therefore imagine that, if a man believes in their religious
teachers—Christ of the Christians, and Mohamet of the Moslems—he will be saved,
despite his whole life of sin” (Howard 144).
22. Corelli goes so far in her non-fiction work, Free Opinions Freely Expressed on
Certain Phases of Modern Social Life and Conduct (1905), as to write: “IF YOU BELIEVE
IN CHRISTIANITY, YOU MUST ALSO BELIEVE IN THESE THREE THINGS:—1. The virtue of
poverty. 2. The dignity of labour. 3. The excellence of simplicity. Rank, wealth, and all
kinds of ostentation should be to you pitiable—not enviable” (Corelli, Free 45).
23. For other Victorian scholarly commentaries on the Middle Way, see F. Max
Müller, “Buddhism,” 324, and T. W. Rhys Davids, History, 93.
24. T. W. Rhys Davids supports my claim here, for example, in the following: “I
would just notice . . . that it is craving thirst, and not desire, which in the Arahat is said
to be extinct. The second division of the Noble Eightfold Path is the cultivation of
right desires. It is only evil desires, the grasping, selfish aims, which the Arahat has
to overcome; and those, unfortunately too numerous, writers who place nirvana in
the absence of desire, are only showing thereby how exaggerated is the importance
which they attach to isolated passages and to careless translations” (Rhys Davids,
Lectures 203– 4).
25. The level of threat that Buddhism posed to what I have generalized here as the
Western “economic powerbase” is indicated especially by the fifth tenet of the Noble
Eightfold Path, Right Livelihood, which proscribes against profiting from products
that increase human suffering, including weapons, addictive substances, carcinogenic
chemicals and foods, financial instruments that exploit the disadvantaged, and all prod-
ucts derived from exploitation. How many major industries would be entirely exempt?
4. Buddhism and the Empire of the Self in Kipling’s Kim
1. Lycett can be taken as representative of the first position: “More than in any of
his works, Kim demonstrates [Kipling’s] love and understanding of India. He makes
no attempt to portray the colonialist’s existence as superior to the native’s. Indeed his
manuscript shows that they took special care to tone down any possible racialist traits
in his European characters and to build his Asians—in particular, the lama, who had
earlier been rather too ingratiating and childlike” (Lycett 331). Representative of the
second position are Eung, Parry, and Suleri. Parry argues, for instance, “From the
outset the two narratives [of the Great Game of British espionage and of the Buddhist
pilgrimage] run together, but the demands of the Great Game are always more urgent
and are from early on prioritized” (Parry 315).
2. Baucom further complicates any simply dichotomy as follows: “We might sug-
gest that through the construction and collapsing of these dichotomies [English/
Indian], Kipling erases any limit on the colonial state’s boundaries, renders discipline
everywhere, insinuates the police into every act of waywardness. We might also sug-
gest the exact opposite: in the unmapped spaces written over the imperial map of
India, and the de-Anglicization of the sahibized Kim, we could equally discover the
subversion of all the works of imperial discipline” (Baucom 99).
3. See Said, Culture and Imperialism, 146.
4. One exception would be the very recent work, published and unpublished, by
Venturino.
5. Some scholars have argued that Kipling chose Buddhism rather than Hinduism
or Islam in part as a result of personal prejudice or out of a desire to create a non-
aligned religious position that could therefore be more easily enlisted by the Empire.
In this regard, see Islam, 37; Kaul, 435; and Reid and Washbrook. A contrasting
position is offered by Rao, 132, and by McCutchan, who writes: “Kipling sets the
lama’s politically neutral religion against India’s long history of religious, racial, and
political strife. . . . The lama’s foreignness exempts him from the century-old rivalries
and hatreds that exist between the religions of India and between conqueror and
conquered” (McCutchan 136). Both positions may be valid.
6. As Islam summarizes the first of these two points, though Kipling was “respon-
sive to Christian ethical ideals” and “uses Christian symbols seriously,” “there is in
fact very little evidence anywhere in Kipling’s writings of an adherence to articles of
Christian faith” (Islam 32).
7. The Stupa at Amaravati was in use from the third century BCE until perhaps as
late as the fourteenth century, by which time Buddhism had died out in the country
of its birth. According to Knox, Colonel Colin Mackenzie visited the site in 1797. In
1821 he sent eleven stones to the Indian Museum in Calcutta, from which nine were
sent on to the East India Company collection in Leadenhall Street. To that collec-
tion were added 121 more, and in 1874 some of them were erected in the Sculpture
Court at the Southern Entrance of the new India Museum in South Kensington. In
1879–80 the collection was divided between the new Victorian & Albert Museum
and the British Museum, where for sixty years they were on display in the main stair-
well (Knox 18, 22). Kipling, like millions of other Britons, repeatedly saw these and
other Buddhist artifacts in each of these locations.
8. As Hopkirk reports, in a letter from Lockwood Kipling to Sir Aurel Stein of
16 May 1902, “He enquired: ‘I wonder whether you have seen my son’s “Kim,”
and recognized an old Lama whom you saw at the old Museum and at the School’ ”
(Hopkirk 42). In addition, Rudyard Kipling was influenced in his shaping of the
character of the Lama by his reading of Tibetan travel literature, as discussed later in
this chapter.
9. Here is how Kipling recalled his first exposure to Blavatsky’s ideas: “At one
time our little world was full of the aftermaths of Theosophy as taught by Madame
Blavatsky to her devotees. My Father knew the lady and, with her, would discuss
wholly secular subjects; she being, he told me, one of the most interesting and un-
scrupulous impostors he had ever met” (Kipling, Something 395).
10. In contrast to claims that Kipling was less sympathetic to Hinduism as a reli-
gion than to other religions, McCutchan develops the argument that Kipling in fact
drew directly upon the Hindu tradition of Varnashrama Dharma in creating Kim and
the Lama as representative, respectively, of the first and the fourth of four stages in the
spiritual trajectory of a person’s life prescribed within that Hindu doctrine.
11. Patrick Brantlinger makes this very argument: “Imperialism itself, as an ideol-
ogy or political faith, functioned as a partial substitute for declining or fallen Chris-
tianity” (Brantlinger, “Imperial Gothic” 186). Critics of course have suggested as
much in the case of Kipling’s own beliefs.
12. On this British construction of “Mother India,” see Roy, 90, or Reid and
Washbrook, whose historical study concludes: “Conventionally, the ideal district Col-
lector should be ‘ma-bap’ (mother-father) to his people” (Reid and Washbrook 18).
13. Concerning “interfering politicians in England,” Kipling acidly commented:
“They derided my poor little Gods of the East, and asserted that the British in India
spent violent lives ‘oppressing’ the Native,” when, he argued, England was a country
in which sixteen-year-old girls were expected to work fourteen-hour days “hauling
water up stairs” (Kipling, Something 419).
14. Especially relevant here is Richards’s The Imperial Archive. My primary source
on the Orientalist/Anglicist debate is van der Veer. For a differing but equally in-
formed perspective to van der Veer’s, see Suleri.
15. I make this claim without at the same time rejecting the argument that “What
is totally elided in Kipling’s narrative is the other story, that of native nationalism and
its own fantasies of religiously inflected masculinity” (van der Veer 94). My focus
is rather on Kipling’s contribution to discourses that raised India’s unique cultural
heritage into the consciousness of British readers, thereby laying the foundation for
acceptance of Indian nationalism even while working against it.
16. The seminal texts on hybridity are those by Bhabha and Young, though I
would return to Bakhtin’s concepts of “hybrid constructions,” or “hybridization,”
“organic hybridity,” and “novelistic hybrid” (Dialogic 304 – 6, 320, 358, 361). Also
relevant here are Lahiri and Pieterse.
17. The character of Hurree Chunder Moorkerjee has elicited strong stances on
both sides of the critical polarization; see Rao, 149; and Roy, 78–79.
18. I draw here on Baucom, as when he writes: “Creighton’s decision to re-
Orientalize Kim reflects his decision to guarantee English rule in India through the
pursuit of knowledge rather than the cultivation of Englishness” (Baucom 99). He
also argues that “in contributing to the Anglicization of India, Colonel Creighton
finds himself in the odd position of Orientalizing England” (Baucom 95).
19. Note further references to the love between the Lama and Kim, and Kim’s
devotion to the Lama, see Kim, 70, 90 –91, 103– 4, 121, 123, 165, 189, 213, 270,
274, and 288. Annan’s treatment of the relationship between Kim and the Lama
concludes, “Both find enlightenment and freedom—the comprehension of the order
of things—through love” (Annan 327). Other considerations of the function of their
love in the novel can be found in Fraser, 62; Howe, 337; Kindead-Weekes, 439; and
Sullivan, 150, 166, and 173.
20. In contrast to my argument here, Thrall argues: “Kim’s true allegiance to the
lama is filial rather than spiritual: love, not a search for ultimate truth, keeps him at the
lama’s side” (Thrall 53). While his is one of the most thorough readings of religion in
Kim, he too neglects the Buddhist content of the novel and therefore sees the relation-
ship between the two characters largely in terms of fellowship and loyalty.
21. For a counter-example to this claim of mine, see Victorian, Zen at War.
22. Most modern scholars fix the dates of the life of the Buddha as either 566 – 486
or 563– 483 BCE, as summarized in Ling, 45.
23. Examples of the “Greco-Buddhist sculptures” in the Wonder House—perhaps
the very one’s that Kipling had seen there—are held by the British Museum, photo-
graphs of which can be viewed on the British Museum website (K 6).

24. The details in this paragraph about the pilgrimages of Fa Hian and Huan
Tsang are from Allen, 205, which provides a detailed account of how Cunningham
and subsequent archaeologists in India reconstructed the pilgrimages in order to lo-
cate the ancient holy sites.
25. Other widely read works by Samuel Beal that Kipling also may have read in-
clude The Romantic Legend of Sá̄kya Buddha, A Translation of the Chinese Version
of the Abhinis.kraman.asūtra (1875) and Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western
World, Translated from the Chinese of Hiuen Tsiang (A.D. 629) (1884).
26. I thank my mother, Margaret Trotter Lane, for her personal assistance in locat-
ing these Biblical passages.
27. Along these lines, Roy, whose thesis concerns the construction of national
identity, notes that the “trope of pilgrimage in Kim, pilgrimage without a specific
local object—the River of the Arrow is, like the idea of the nation, mythical and in-
ternal and therefore necessitates travel to all places—serves to concretize and make
visible the form of the nation” (Roy 85). In this case, however, it would not matter
what the object of the search is as long as it is as yet unfound, which still leaves open
the question of why the River of the Arrow.
28. See Allen, 256. For a sample of the Waddell-Führer public debate, see Führer’s
letter and Waddell’s response in “Note to Above Letter.”
29. In addition to Waddell, Das’s Indian Pandits in the Land of Snow (1893) re-
counted the life of “The Great Tashi Lama,” who was born in 1737 in Tashi-lhunpo,
or “Teshoo Lomboo,” and was synonymous with “Teshoo Lama” (Das, appendix 16,
27). Hopkirk writes that he consulted “a Tibetan-speaking scholar, formerly with
the Victoria and Albert Museum,” who told him that “Teshoo Lama” simply means
“Learned One” (Hopkirk 40). Lopez notes that Madame Blavatsky praised Tibetan
“Teshu Lamas,” by which he claims “the British referred to the Panchan Lama”
(Lopez, Prisoners 36). Finally, according to McMillin, we know that Kipling had read
the travelogues of George Bogle, who in 1774 had visited the Tashilhunpo monas-
tery of the Pachen Lama and whose descriptions of Teshoo Lamas influenced Kipling
(McMillin 80).
30. Kipling revered Edwin Arnold. He reports in an 1888 letter that he was very
pleased to hear of Arnold’s praise for Departmental Ditties (1886) and Plain Tales
from the Hills (1888) (Kipling, Writings 136). Lycett suggests that “Arnold probably
encouraged the Kiplings to visit Kamakura, twenty miles outside Yokohama, the site
of a great bronze and gilt statue of Buddha,” which inspired the 1892 poem “Buddha
at Kamakura” (Lycett 250). One of the most direct allusions in Kim to Arnold’s Light
of Asia occurs when the Lama states, “As a drop draws to water, so my Soul drew near
to the Great Soul which is beyond all things” (288). Arnold’s famous line, which may
itself come from a Buddhist source, is, “the Dewdrop slips / Into the shining sea!”
(Arnold 8:216).
31. To take a few examples from the end of Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia,
where the Buddha says, “If ye lay bound upon the wheel of change / and no way were
of breaking from the chain, / The heart of boundless Being is a curse, / The Soul
of Things fell Pain,” “the wheel” is synonymous with Kipling’s Lama’s Wheel, the
“chain” refers to the chain of rebirths, and the last two lines allude to the First Noble
Truth, which states that suffering is an intrinsic aspect of lived existence (Arnold
8.210). This stanza—”Before beginning, and without an end, / As space eternal
and as surety sure, / Is fixed a Power divine which moves to good, / Only its laws
endure”—begins a long discourse on the Dharma in which “law” is roughly syn-
onymous with Kipling’s Lama’s Law (Arnold 8.211). Phrases like “Power divine”
represent a quasi-Christian deification. Arnold’s Buddha then spends a dozen stanzas
romanticizing the Dharma, showing it to have a hand in all things great and small.
The poem gives an accurate sense that within the Dharma all natural and human
systems are interconnected in an ethically ordered universe, but then attributes to it
anthropomorphic features and a creating force that are largely antithetical to Bud-
dhism. The treatment of the Dharma ends with this famous stanza, which, like much
of the poem, simultaneously captures a not unreasonable interpretation of Buddhist
doctrine while thoroughly Westernizing it: “Such is the Law which moves to righ-
teousness, / Which none at least can turn aside or stay: / The heart of it is Love, the
end of it / Is Peace and Consummation sweet. Obey!” (Arnold 8.214).
32. For examples of Victorians who perceived a compatibility between Buddhism
and Darwinian theory see Dublin Review 19; Eitel 63– 66; Lilly 213; Literary Di-
gest 162; and T. W. Rhys Davids, Lectures 94. This Victorian understanding laid the
groundwork for “new age” and postmodern ecological conceptions of the intercon-
nectedness of systems from spheres as seemingly diverse as quantum mechanics, mi-
crobiology, and ethics, a trend perhaps initiated by Huxley’s Evolution and Ethics
(1893). For more in this regard, see Jacobson, 19–35.
33. For some introductions to the Three Marks of Existence, see Erricker, 38;
Nhat Hanh, Heart, 131; and Snelling, 53–54.
34. This is confirmed in Kipling, Writings, 169.
35. In The Imperial Archive, Richards develops a more specific argument about
Tibet as the imagined repository of knowledge within an Empire that increasingly
conceived itself as founded not on military force but on domination through “intel-
ligence,” a message that Kipling built into Kim and that the novel helped to per-
petuate. Richards writes, “In the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, the
prevalent model for the archival confinement of total knowledge under the purview
of the state was Tibet, an imagined community that united archival institutions and
persons in one hieratic archive-state” (Richards 11).
36. Along these same lines, Guy Boothby’s novel Dr. Nikola (1896) recounts
the penetration by Westerners of a secret Lamasery in “Thibet” that harbors occult
knowledge—dating “from before the apotheosis of the ever-blessed Buddha”—for
extending human life indefinitely, in which the monks are described thusly: “A more
disreputable-looking crew I can unhesitatingly assert I had never seen before . . . [;]
hardly a face among them that did not suggest the fact that its owner was steeped to
the eyebrows in sensuality and crime” (Boothby 44, 159, 245).
37. On perceived similarities (and, it was thought by some, causal links) between
Catholicism and Lamaism, see Lopez, Prisoners, 15– 45.
38. The ox is a familiar symbol in Buddhist allegory for the uncontrolled will,
the head-strong mind, the ego. See, for example, Rahula’s Zen and the Taming of
the Bull.
39. Though L. Austine Waddell wrote in places scathingly about the indigenous
practices of Tibetan Buddhists, he also summarized some Buddhist doctrines with
great respect, as he does here in introducing his interpretation of The Wheel: “In-
deed, it would scarcely be going to far to say that at the period before the epoch of
Alexander the Great, in the valley of the Ganges, and at a time when writing was
still unknown in India, an Indian anchorite evolved in the main by private study and
mediation an ontological system which, while having much in common with the phi-
losophy of Plato and of Kant, and the most profound and celebrated speculations of
modern times (such as those of Bishop Berkeley, and Schopenhauer, and Hartmann),
yet far surpassed these in elaborateness. And as this bold system formed the basis of
Buddhist ethics, its formulas came to be represented for teaching purposes in concrete
pictorial form in the vestibules of the Indian monasteries and temples, as they still are
in Tibet and China” (Waddell, Tibetan 107).
40. The six realms of existence depicted between the spokes of the Wheel are, very
briefly: the realm of devas or gods, the realm of the jealous titans or demi-gods, the
realm of the “hungry ghosts,” the realm of tormented beings (partial corollary to
the Christian hell, though not eternal), the realm of the animals, and the realm of the
human beings.
41. If the “logic was unanswerable,” the reader is not given that logic, other than
the Lama’s conclusion that he had been “tempted” and was misguided in returning
to the hills to search for the River of the Arrow. There is no precedent of which I am
aware for interpreting a connection between those two particular “houses” in the
chain of dependent origination, though all of the links in the chain are interpreted
as both causes and effects of all the others. The image of the woman giving birth
indicates rebirth into a new life of suffering, which is what the Lama would avoid by
finding the River. “The Child” may point figuratively to the Lama’s childhood in the
mountains, to which he was “tempted” by nostalgia to return, or to Kim, a child by
whom he unknowingly was “tempted” to return there. The “House of the Senses”
may point to the fact that the Lama was misled by Kim’s sensual engagement with
“the world” to pursue the pleasures of his own senses. I also do not know if “houses”
is a term used by Tibetan Buddhists or if Kipling might be mixing the Wheel with the
astrological zodiac.
42. Victorian sources that discuss the doctrine of dependent origination and its
portrayal in the Wheel include Monier-Williams, Buddhism, 102– 4, and T. W. Rhys
Davids, History, 101–8. More recent sources include Erricker, 45– 49; Nhat Hanh,
Heart, 221– 49; Rahula, What, 53–54; and Snelling 62– 65.
43. An even stronger response can be seen in D. H. Lawrence a generation later.
He traveled to Ceylon in 1922 to visit Earl and Achsah Brewster, who were exploring
Buddhism, and exchanged a series of letters with them mentioning Buddhism, as here
in a letter from 30 August 1926: “What irritated me in you in the past was a sort of
way you had of looking on Buddhism as some sort of easy ether into which you could
float away unresisted and resisting. Believe me, no truth is like that. All truth—and
real living is the only truth—has in it the elements of battle and repudiation. . . . You’ve
got to get out of the vast lotus-pool of Buddhism on to the little firm island of your
own single destiny. Your island can have its own little lotus pool, its own pink lotus.
But you yourself must never try again to lose yourself in the universal lotus pool: the
mud is too awful” (Lawrence, in Brewster 104 –5). Also see Doherty.
44. An example here is Parry’s assertion that the “essential ‘artifice’ of the novel
is the pretence throughout that Kim can serve the Lama’s quest and the needs of the
Great Game,” which, I am arguing, is to reproduce the pretense of Western discourse
that no other way of knowing is possible (Parry 315).
45. It should be acknowledged that Kipling capitalizes on Kim’s rough adherence
to the precepts of a chela in order to generate sexual tension, especially in the series
of exchanges with the Woman of Shamlegh, and to perpetuate the novel’s misogynis-
tic portrayal of women primarily as prostitutes. Perhaps the sympathetic portrayal of
Gobind Sahai, the Sahiba, counterbalances this. However, perhaps Virginia Woolf is
correct in her assessment of the limitations of the masculine point-of-view of novelists
like Kipling: “It is not only that they celebrate male virtues, enforce male values and
describe the world of men; it is that the emotion with which these books are perme-
ated is to a woman incomprehensible” (Woolf 2514). Suffice it to note here that Bud-
dhist ethics contains explicit instructions concerning “sexual misconduct,” and Kim
appears to reference these in his exchange with the Woman of Shamlegh.
46. See, for example, Eitel, 80, and Monier-Williams, 559.
47. Sullivan, one of the most astute readers of Kipling, argues that “The powers
of contemplation, meditation, vision, repose and nonaction—are subverted at the
end of the novel by the plot, by the ideology, and by the lama’s final act. By choosing
freely to return from nirvana for the sake of Kim, the lama commits an action that is
at once human, loving, sacrificial and also supportive of official ideology” (Sullivan
176 –77). The first part of this statement represents a misreading based on a lack of
understanding of Buddhism and an attachment to the active/passive dualism; the

second sentence even so remains accurate. The Mahayana and Vajrayana bodhisattva
ideal is precisely to gain enlightenment but then to choose to remain in this world in
order to compassionately guide other beings toward nirvana. For a summary intro-
duction to this concept, see Erricker, 66 – 68, or Snelling, 68 and 82–83. For a read-
ing of the ending of the novel more attuned to this understanding while not entirely
incompatible with Sullivan, see Kinkead-Weekes, 439. Also relevant is this statement
from Irigaray: “Love takes place in the opening of self that is the place of welcoming
the transcendence of the other” (Irigaray 115).
48. It could only have been disturbing to Victorian sensibility that Buddhism is in
this sense more individualistic than Protestant individualism. This suggests an inverse
logic behind Victorian attacks on the concepts of karma and anatman (the “no self ”
doctrine), namely that Buddhist individual moral responsibility is threatening not
for its divergence from but rather for its very similarity to Protestant individualism,
which it therefore threatens to displace with a form of individuality that at the same
time does not “free” the individual from the necessity of social responsibility. As Max
Weber, Raymond Williams, and many other critics have argued, Protestant individual-
ism effectively serves capitalism. I would argue that, in contrast, Buddhist individual-
ism threatens the lasses-faire worldview.
49. For a useful analysis of the Cartesian cogito, see Strozier’s chapter “Descartes,
Interiority, and Identity.” I also would agree with Strozier’s argument that the “autono-
mous subject was never relinquished, not even during the era of the greatest poststruc-
tural influence,” which is to say, that even postmodern theory has not been able to escape
entirely from the dominant Western paradigm of the individual self, which, I would add,
has never entirely shaken off the Christian body/soul dichotomy (Strozier 54).
50. T. W. Rhys Davids made this same point in 1896: “Secondly, it is the belief
common to all schools of the Buddhists that the origin of sorrow is precisely identi-
cal with the origin of individuality. Sorrow is in fact the result of the effort which an
individual has to make to keep separate from the rest of existence” (T. Rhys Davids,
History 81).
51. In this same vein, Caroline Rhys Davids was even less polite than her husband in
describing how Buddhism obviates the “inner mannikin [sic]” of the “animistic soul”
as well as the myth of the “absolutistic self ” (C. Rhys Davids, Buddhism 55, 56).
52. One primary source on eternalism and annihilationism is The Connected Dis-
courses of the Buddha, 2:1393–94. Recent commentaries include Gowans, 67– 68, and
Rahula, What, 66.
53. Giles refers here to David Hume’s argument in A Treatise on Human Under-
standing (1748), one of the few Western philosophers until the twentieth century whose
understanding of identity approached the Buddhist theory of selfhood as consisting of
Five Aggregates that do not compose an integrated, essential self. On Hume in relation
to Buddhism, see Giles, “No-Self ”; Gowans, 80; and Jacobson, 62, 158, and 160.
54. Considerations on karma as “character” are widespread; see, for example, Bet-
tany, 155; Burnouf, 12; Eitel, 73; Lilly, 204; and, more recently, Fox, 115 and 131.
55. For another example of a Theosophical interpretation of the multi-layered self,
see Sinnett, Early Days, 103. The Theosophical conception of the “higher self ” likely
owes a debt to Matthew Arnold’s Culture and Anarchy, as discussed in Whitlark,
“Matthew Arnold and Buddhism,” 26.
56. For a fuller response to Caroline Rhys Davids and to all who attempt to find in
Buddhist scripture a basis for belief in an eternal soul, see Rahula, What 55– 66.
57. The sutras attribute this point to the Buddha many times, as here he is quoted
in the Cūlasaccaka Sutta: “ ‘Bhikkhus, material form is impermanent, feeling is imper-
manent, perception is impermanent, formations are impermanent, consciousness is
impermanent. Bhikkhus, material form is not self, feeling is not self, perception is not
self, formations are not self, consciousness is not self. All formations are impermanent;
all things are not self ’ ” (Middle 322).
58. The original source of the story of Nagasena and King Milinda is the Milindap-
ahna, or The Questions of King Menander, of which there are many versions, including
Mendis. Discussions of this story are numerous; see Oldenberg, 254 –58; T. Rhys
Davids, Buddhism, 95; and, more recently, Giles, No Self, 130; and Gowans, 82.
59. This argument of Nagasena’s to King Milinda was effectively reproduced
in the eighteenth century by David Hume in A Treatise of Human Understanding
(1748), which uses the example of a ship, the parts of which are gradually replaced
over the years until not a single part belonging to the original ship remains. Is this the
same ship or a different ship; where is the essence of ship? Approaching the Buddhist
theory of the Five Aggregates, Hume wrote: “When I enter most intimately into
what I call myself, I always stumble on some particular perception or other, of heat
or cold, light or shade, love or hatred, pain or pleasure. I never can catch myself at
any time without a perception, and never can observe any thing but the perception”
(Hume 252).
60. I borrow the concept of “monological,” as opposed to “dialogical,” from
Bakhtin.
61. I use the term “hail” in the sense developed by Althusser in his definition of
“interpellation” (Althusser 174 –75).
62. By “soft imperialism” I mean to acknowledge that Kipling favored the hege-
mony of cultural incorporation over military domination of India and that in places
Kim reproduces this view. Kipling’s view was representative of an attitude prevalent
among the Indian Civil Service, as Reid and Washbrook argue. Richards argues in this
regard that “what Kim figures more clearly than any other Victorian text is a world in
which colonization through ethnocide, deportation, and slavery . . . has begun to give
way to colonization through the mediated instrumentality of information” (Richards
23). A related claim appears in Eung (727). Suleri goes a step further in claiming that
“if one of the manifestations of the anxiety of empire is a repression of the conflict-
ual model even where economic and political conflict is at its most keenly operative,
then Kipling’s transcriptions of such evasion point to his acute understanding of the
ambivalence with which empire declares its unitary powers” (Suleri 115). Though
this charge is largely accurate, the reading of which it is a part fails to perceive other
potential readings available in the text in the process of projecting onto the novel the
very imperial condescension that it claims to find there.
63. A twenty-first-century example of this aspect of Buddhism is provided by the
teachings of Thich Nhat Hanh, the first of whose “Fourteen Mindfulness Trainings”
reads as follows: “Aware of the suffering created by fanaticism and intolerance, we are
determined not to be idolatrous about or bound to any doctrine, theory, or ideology,
even Buddhist ones. Buddhist teachings are guiding means to help us learn to look
deeply and to develop our understanding and compassion. They are not doctrines to
fight, kill, or die for” (Nhat Hanh, Interbeing 17).
64. Discussions of the Buddha’s dialogue with Vacchagotta and then Ananda may
be found in Gowans, 67; Rahula, What, 66; Santina, 153; and, in a widely read nine-
teenth century source, Oldenberg, 272.
65. According to canonical scripture, the Buddha saw nihilism as another form
of attachment to self, and one of the sources of human suffering as described in the
second of the Four Noble Truths, as here: “And what, friends, is the noble truth of
the origin of suffering? It is craving, which brings renewal of being, is accompanied
by delight and lust, and delights in this and that; that is, craving for sensual pleasure,
craving for being, . . . and craving for non-being” (Middle 1099).
66. For a formal analysis of tetralemma logic in relation to artificial intelligence
systems, see Sawamura and Mares.
67. Though I would not agree with every criticism leveled at postcolonial theory
by Erin O’Connor, I think he has it right when he says that “the scholarship aimed
at demystifying Victorian literature’s ideological complicity with empire is itself an
integral part of the narrative tradition it seeks to expose” (O’Connor 240).
68. While Kim is figured as a disciple to the Buddha as Ananda was the Buddha’s
discipline, in the Jataka tale that the Lama twice tells of the older elephant liberated
from the leg iron by the younger elephant, Kim is figured rather as himself the Bud-
dha who frees Ananda. See Kim, 165– 66and 192. As Sandra Kemp notes, the Jatakas,
the folkloric collection of stories about the Buddha’s birth and former lives, which was
translated by T. W. Rhys Davids in 1880, were a primary influence on Kipling’s writ-
ing: “Kipling’s father shows his acquaintance with them in Beast and Man in India
(1891), and they were among the source material for Kipling’s Jungle Books, Just So
Stories and Kim” (Kemp 32). As Kipling wrote in a letter to Edward Everett Hale,
16 January 1895: “The idea of beast-tales seems to me new in that it is a most an-
cient and long forgotten idea. The really fascinating tales are those that the Bodhisat
tells of his previous incarnations ending always with the beautiful moral” (Kipling,
Writings 46). Having consulted several sources that would have been available to
Kipling—including Jacobs (who used Rhys Davids’s translation), Speyer, and Tibetan
Tales—I have been unable to locate the particular tale recounted by Kipling’s Lama,
which inclines me to think that Kipling invented it, drawing on the Jatakas as a pat-
tern. On the influence of the Jataka tales on Kipling, see Caracciolo.
69. At the peripheries of Western discourse, from perspectives as disparate as New
Age Wicca and twenty-first-century quantum physics, Kim’s dissolution of the sepa-
rating slash in “physical/mental” or “material/spiritual” is entirely natural. As Rich-
ard King notes, “Today, comparisons are made between quantum mechanics and
the ‘new physics’ on the one hand with the non-substantialism and non-dualism of
Mahāyāna Buddhist thought” (King 152). I leave the question of the supportability
of those comparisons to others. One recent example from popular culture is the film
What the #$*! Do We (K)now!??
Conclusion: The Afterlife of Nirvana
1. Recent scholarship confirms Everett’s observation. Clausen notes that “per-

haps the most significant controversy, however, was over the nature of Nirvana”
(Clausen 9). Whitlark observes that in the 1880s–1890s “the nature of nirvana was
relatively common topic of conversations among people more interested than knowl-
edgeable” (Whitlark, “Nirvana Talk” 17). Almond concurs: “Of all the aspects of
Buddhist doctrine with which the Victorians dealt, the question of the nature of
Nirvana aroused the most interest and the most controversy” (Almond 102).
2. One frequently cited example of the Buddha’s discussion of annihilationism

and eternalism is in his dialogue with Vacchagotta and then Anatta found in The Con-
nected Discourses of the Buddha, 2:1393–94. For analysis of this dialogue, see Gowans,
67; Rahula, What, 62– 66; Santina, 153; and, in a widely read nineteenth-century
source, Oldenberg, 272.
3. As Everett summarized this well-known point in 1882: “The question [what is
nirvana?] was forced upon him by his disciples. They begged him to give an answer.
He simply refused to have anything to do with it. He told them that it was of no prac-
tical concerns, and pointed them back to the path which they were to tread” (Everett
432–33). Also in this regard see Huxley, Evolution, 102, 160, and Oldenberg, 263.
4. For other, representative statements about Nirvana attributed to the Buddha,
see, for example, the Middle Length Discourses, 536, 540, and 613. Statements in the
sutras about Nirvana are quoted and analyzed in Oldenberg, 263–85, and T. W. Rhys
Davids, Buddhism, 110 –11.
5. Colebrooke’s monograph, which was delivered to the Royal Asiatic Society,
was published in 1837 as part of Essays on the Religion and Philosophy of the Hindus.
On Colebrooke, also see Droit, 50 and 175.
6. One version of the anti-indigenous argument ran as follows: “The only ground,
therefore, on which we may stand, if we wish to defend the founder of Buddhism
against the charges of Nihilism and Atheism, is this, that, as some of the Buddhists
admit, the ‘Basket of Metaphysics’ was rather the work of his pupils, not of Buddha
himself ” (Müller, Chips 281). Other examples of the anti-indigenous argument can
be found in Ambereley, 313; Gordon, 527; and Müller, Lectures, 144.
7. Here is a fuller statement of Rhys Davids’s position: “What then is Nirvāna,
which means simply going out, extinction; it being quite clear, from what has gone
before, that this cannot be the extinction of the soul? It is the extinction of that sinful,
grasping condition of mind and heart, which would otherwise, according to the great
mystery of Karma, be the cause of renewed individual existence. . . . Nirvāna is therefore
the same thing as a sinless, calm state of mind; and if translated at all, may best, per-
haps, be rendered ‘holiness’—holiness, that is, in the Buddhist sense, perfect peace,
goodness, and wisdom” (Rhys Davids, Buddhism 111–12).
8. For other examples of Victorians who understood Nirvana neither as annihila-
tion nor as “absorption” but rather as achievable in this life, see Huxley, Evolution,
126, and Oldenberg, 283–84. One thoughtful philosophical analysis of this under-
standing of Nirvana can be found in Gowans, 135– 47.
9. On the linkage between Schopenhauer and Buddhism, I am indebted to vari-
ous sources, including, Droit, 45, 76, and 91–103; Welbon, 154 –93; and Dumoulin.
Also relevant are Batchelor, 250 –71; Clarke, 76 –79; and Schwab, 427–34. Taylor
concludes that Schopenhauer’s pessimistic assessment of the human condition “ap-
pears to have been lifted directly from Buddhism,” and that his philosophy recom-
mends “a kind of existence divested of will, evidently coinciding exactly with the
nirvana sought by the Buddhist” (Taylor 176).
10. “Cult of nothingness” was coined as a descriptor of Nirvana by Victor Cousin
in 1829, as discussed in Droit, 84. Droit also more fully articulates the point: “The
last half of the nineteenth century believed, with increasing firmness, that Schopen-
hauer and the Buddha were saying the same thing. Pessimism and nihilism were last-
ingly associated with Buddhism in the European imagination, beginning with the
decade of the 1850s” (Droit 93).
11. Another example of this argument is Ambereley, writing in 1872: “Nirvâna, in

short, is the abstraction of theologians; the bliss of heaven is the hope of the masses”
(Amberley 313).
12. An introduction to the influence of exposure to Eastern religions and philoso-
phies on the American Transcendentalists can be found in various sources, including
Clarke, 84 –92; Dejong; Fields, 60; Godwin, 309; and Schwab, 200. The best source-
book I have found on the impact of Eastern thought on the United States is Tweed
and Prothero.
13. This claim stands despite the existence within Buddhist mythology of the
realm of devas or gods, as pictured in one segment of the Wheel of Becoming. This
“heaven,” as it sometimes is translated, is not eternal: gods too are subject to karma
and may be reborn in lower realms. Also, I am aware that my claim may fail to account
for the modern Japanese Pure Land sect, about which I am largely uninformed but
which I understand posits a heaven-like afterlife.
14. My use of male pronouns throughout does not represent a lack of awareness
but rather reflects the highly gendered nature both of Nietzsche’s philosophy and of
the Western ideology of the self-made man.
15. Fox writes in a similar vein: “They [early Buddhists] had known the moment
of awakening to Something that transcended the world: their logic had taught them
this Something was, in fact no thing, since it could not be categorized or expressed,
but that it was not nothing, since nihilism was not a tenable position. There was, then,
a Real and it was not simply the world as one usually understood it; it could be known
only when one had abandoned all the logical presuppositions with which one became
burdened from infancy” (Fox 93).
16. Turner goes so far as to argue that the Christian afterlife serves a critical social
function in preserving an order that protects the power of the wealthiest because it
provides the promise of a “Heavenly reward” that will make up for the inequality of
temporal life. Thus anything that undermines belief in the eternal soul threatens to un-
dermine the dominant social order. See Turner, Contesting Cultural Authority, 110.
17. Neither Nietzsche’s theory of the will to power nor his theory of nihilism are
limited to the work titled Will to Power; both are rooted in his writings as a whole. Be-
cause Will to Power is one primary work from which I have drawn, the reader should
be informed that it consists of a series of aphoristic fragments written by Nietzsche

but compiled and edited after his death by his sister, Elisabeth Förster Nietzsche, and
others. Thus philosophers consider it less authoritative than Nietzsche’s fully finished
works. On this point, see Kaufman, 15–20. The sources that I have consulted suggest
that Nietzsche’s conception of nihilism in Will to Power is consistent with that found
in his finished works; I leave the details of that debate to professional philosophers.
18. On Nietzsche’s nihilism and his distinction between active and passive nihil-
ism, I have consulted, in addition to Nietzsche himself, works by Barnes, Beards-
worth, Caygill, Clemens and Feik, Conway, Bret W. Davis, Glicksberg, Kaufmann,
Ratschow, and Solomon.
19. Brobjer provides analysis and a timeline of Nietzsche’s reading in Oriental phi-
losophies, in particular the early German scholarship on Buddhism. On Nietzsche’s
debt to Schopenhauer, see Solomon, 105–9, as well as sources that treat Schopen-
hauer’s and Nietzsche’s contact with Buddhism: Batchelor, 250 –71; Clarke, 76 –84;
Droit, 143– 48; Schwab, 426 –38; Welbon, 154 –93.
20. In contrast to the summary treatment here, Conway offers a sophisticated

analysis of Nietzsche’s “will to power” as less a quality of individual volition or “meta-
physical will” than a “trans-human cosmological hypothesis,” which strikes me as akin
to D. H. Lawrence’s vitalism and not necessarily opposed to Buddhist dependent
origination (Conway 128).
21. I draw in this paragraph upon Kaufmann, who, among other Nietzsche schol-
ars, traces the parallels between central Nietzschean concepts across his writings.
22. Kaufmann observes in this regard that “negatively, the doctrine of eternal re-
currence is the most extreme repudiation of any deprecation of the moment, the finite,
and the individual—the antithesis of any faith which pins its hopes on infinite progress,
whether it be [biological] evolution . . . or the endless improvement of the human soul”
(Kaufmann 277).
23. For a limited perspective on nihilism in these and other modernist authors, see
Glicksberg. Also relevant is Kevin Bell.
24. General sources on Conrad and Buddhism include Brashers, Julkarni, Lom-
bard, Saravan, Stein, and, especially, the works by Caracciolo. On Eliot and Bud-
dhism, see Caracciolo, Gillis, and McConnell.
25. On Nietzsche’s early study of Buddhism see Bell, 7 and 105; Bret W. Davis;
Doherty; and Widmer, 115.
26. As Michael Bell observes in this regard, “To some extent, Lawrence’s un-
derstanding of Nietzsche was through the popular conception by which the ‘will to
power’ was effectively identified with the assertive will Birkin sees in Gerald Crich”
(Bell 7).
27. A small sample of the criticism on Lawrence’s individualism is represented by
Brown, Langbaum, Rooks, and Zytaruk.
28. For this same reason, Bell argues that in Women in Love while Gerald repre-
sents Nietzschean active nihilism, “Birkin’s concern for psychic wholeness and renewal
makes him the more truly Nietzschean figure,” the Dionysian Nietzsche (Bell 105).
29. As Doherty puts this point in relationship to Aaron’s Rod: “Thus ‘nirvana’ is a
type of solipsistic idealism, the attempt to ‘lose yourself’ in a woman or in humanity or in
God. . . . At the same time, however, as the text is actively subverting the nirvana ‘ideal,’
it suppresses a more crucial indebtedness to Buddhism” (Doherty, “Nirvana” 57).
30. What I am calling Lawrence’s “red Nirvana” points to the privileging of the fig-
ure of the phallus within his vitalism. I avoid this point because it opens into complex
critical debates concerning the degree of Lawrence’s gender bias and sexism that are at
once too significant and too peripheral to the present purposes to be addressed in this
context. Another point that requires mention, if only in a footnote, is that Lawrence
attempted to translate Buddhism into his phallic vitalism, as in this excerpt from a let-
ter of 8 November 1927 to the Brewsters: “Did you know that in ancient Buddhism,
the ‘stupa’ occupied the holy central position in the cave, or the temple: and when the
Buddha figure was invented, the standing Buddha took the place of this stupa. Now it
looks to me as if this stupa was just the monumental phallic symbol. . . . And the stand-
ing Buddha has still a phallic quality” (Lawrence in Brewster 153).
31. On Sartre’s concept of nihilation, see, for example, 104 and 775–76, as well as
analysis in Barnes and Solomon.
32. The concept of freedom is integral to Sartre’s philosophy, as analyzed in Solo-
mon, 248, 271, 285, and 314.
33. Note the Russian contribution to modern nihilism and its subsequent associa-
tion with revolutionary politics (as in Joseph Conrad’s The Secret Agent [1907]) in
Clemens and Feik, 22–32; Goudsblom, 8; and Olson, 515.
34. Indeed, I suggest that the “postmodern condition” in part describes the out-
come of the historical fact that the “democratization of the humanist tradition has
place[d] the ‘nothing is true’ theory within everyone’s reach” (Goudsblom 179). Ni-
hilism, now ubiquitous, is the source of postmodern irony. I further agree with Clem-
ens and Feik that the era in which we live “is nihilistic not only because it is witness to
the ungroundedness of all values, but also because it cannot recognise this becoming-
nothing of its ground” (Clemens and Feik 20 –21). I believe this is the hypocrisy
of those who live in denial that nihilism underlies the corporate-capitalist state, or,
worse, who, like some politicians, cynically claim values that their actions belie.
35. This describes Buddhism as a “meta-ethics,” which as it happens is one way
that defenders of existentialism describe its ethical orientation, as for example in
Solomon, 316.
36. See for example Jones, The New Social Face of Buddhism.
37. On the current state of Buddhism in the West, see Coleman.
Bibliography
Alabaster, Henry. The Wheel of the Law: Buddhism Illustrated from Siamese Sources.
London: Trübner & Co., 1871.
Albert, Eliot. “The Shattering of the Crystal Spheres: ‘rolling from the centre to-
ward X.’ ” In Nihilism Now! Monsters of Energy, edited by Keith Ansell Pearson and
Diane Morgan, 1–17. New York: St. Martin’s, 2000.
Alexander, Sidney Arthur. Sakya-Muni: The Story of Buddha. Oxford: A. Thomas
Shrimpton & Son, 1887.
Allen, Charles. The Search for the Buddha: The Men who Discovered India’s Lost Reli-
gion. New York: Carroll & Graf, 2002.
Almond, Philip C. The British Discovery of Buddhism. Cambridge: Cambridge Uni-
versity Press, 1988.

Althusser, Louis. Lenin and Philosophy. Translated by Ben Brewster. New York:
Pantheon, 1969.
Ambereley, John R. “Recent Publications on Buddhism.” The Theological Review 9
(1872): 293–317.
Anderson, Jerome A. Reincarnation, A Study of the Human Soul In its Relation to
Re-Birth, Evolution, Post-Mortem States, the Compound Nature of Man, Hypnotism,
etc. 4th ed. San Francisco: Lotus Publishing, 1896.
Annan, Noel. “Kipling’s Place in the History of Ideas.” In Kim, edited by Zohreh T.
Sullivan, 323–28. Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Archer, Mildred, and Ronald Lightbown. India Observed: India as Viewed by British
Artists, 1760 –1860. London: Victoria and Albert Museum, 1982.
Armstrong, Richard A. “Buddhism and Christianity.” The Theological Review 7 (1870):
176 –200.
Arnold, Edwin. The Light of Asia: Being The Life and Teaching of Gôtama, Prince of
India and Founder of Bûddhism. 1879. Edited by I. L. Hauser. Chicago: Rand,
McNally, 1890.
246 ~ Bibliography
Arnold, Edwin. The Light of Asia, or The Great Renunciation (Mahābhinishkramana),

Being the Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India and Founder of Buddhism
(As told in verse by an Indian Buddhist). 1879. Adyar, India: The Theosophical
Press, 1997.
Arnold, Matthew. Culture and Anarchy. 1869. Edited by Samuel Lipman. New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1994.
Arundale, Francesca. The Idea of Re-birth: Including a Translation of an Essay on Re-
incarnation by Karl Heckel. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner, & Co., 1890.
Ashvaghosa. The Buddhacarita; or, Acts of the Buddha. Complete Sanskrit text with
English translation. Edited by E. H. Johnston. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1972.
BBC News. “Buddhism Becomes Second Religion.” 4 March 2003. http://news.
bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/england/2820377.stm.
Bagland, Eileen. Marie Corelli, The Woman and the Legend, A Biography. London:
Jarrolds Publishers, 1953.
Bakhtin, Mikhail. The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays. Edited by Michael Holquist.
Translated by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist. Austin: University of Texas
Press, 1981.
Ballard, Frank. Why Not Buddhism? No. 10. The Christian “Why Not?” Series. London:
Charles H. Kelly, 1915.
Barnes, Hazel E. Introduction to Jean-Paul Sartre, Being and Nothingness: An Essay
on Phenomenological Ontology. Translated by Hazel E. Barnes. New York: Philo-
sophical Library, 1956.
Batchelor, Stephen. The Awakening of the West: The Encounter of Buddhism and West-
ern Culture. Berkeley: Parallax Press, 1994.
Bathélemy Saint-Hilaire, J. The Buddha and His Religion. 1860. London: Bracken,
1996.
Baucom, Ian. Out of Place: Englishness, Empire, and the Locations of Identity. Prince-
ton: Princeton University Press, 1999.
——. “[The Survey of India].” In Kim, by Rudyard Kipling, edited by Zohreh T. Sul-
livan, 351–58. Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Baudrillard, Jean. Simulacra and Sumulacrum. Translated by Sheila Faria Glaswer.
Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1994.
Beal, Samuel. The Romantic Legend of Sá̄kya Buddha, A Translation of the Chinese Ver-
sion of the Abhinis.kraman.asūtra. 1875. Delhi, India: Motilal Banarsidass, 1985.
——. Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World, Translated from the Chinese of
Hiuen Tsiang (A.D. 629). 1884. New York: Paragon Book Reprint Corp., 1968.
——. Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist pilgrims, from China to India
(400 A.D. and 518 A.D.). London: Trübner, 1869.
Beardsworth, Richard. “Nietzsche, Nihilism and Spirit.” In Nihilism Now! Monsters
of Energy, edited by Keith Ansell Pearson and Diane Morgan, 37–69. New York:
St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
Beckerlegge, G. “Professor Friedrich Max Müller and the Missionary Cause.” In Re-
ligion in Victorian Britain. Volume V: Culture and Empire, edited by John Wolfe,
177–220. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1997.
Beer, Gillian. Darwin’s Plots: Evolutionary Narrative in Darwin, George Eliot and
Nineteenth-Century Fiction. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983.
Bell, Kevin. Ashes Taken for Fire: Aesthetic Modernism and the Critique of Identity.
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2007.
Bibliography ~ 247
Bell, Michael. D. H. Lawrence: Language and Being. Cambridge: Cambridge Univer-

sity Press, 1991.
Bellah, Robert. Beyond Belief: Essays on Religion in a Post-Traditional World. New
York: Harper and Row, 1970.
Besant, Annie. The Self and Its Sheaths: Four Lectures. Benares: Theosophical Publish-
ing Society, 1895.
Bevir, Mark. “A Theosophist in India.” In Imperial Objects: Essays on Victorian Women’s
Emigration and the Unauthorized Imperial Experience, edited by Rita S. Kranidis,
211–27. New York: Twayne, 1998.
——. “The West Turns Eastward: Madame Blavatsky and the Transformation of the
Occult Tradition.” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 63.3 (Fall 1994):
747–67.
Bhabha, Homi K. The Location of Culture. London: Routledge, 1994.
Bigandet, The Right Rev. P. [Paul Ambrose]. The Life or Legend of Gaudama, The
Budha of the Burmese, with annotations. Notice on the Phongies, or Budhist Religious,
and The Ways to Niban. Rangoon: Pegu Press, 1858.
Bishop, Isabella Bird. Among the Tibetans. New York: Fleming H. Revell, 1894.
Bishop, Peter. The Myth of Shangri-La: Tibet, Travel Writing and the Western Creation
of Scared Landscape. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1989.
Blavatsky, H. P. Isis Unveiled: A Master-Key to the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern
Science and Theology. Vol. 1: Science. 1877. Pasadena, CA: Theosophical University
Press, 1972.
——. Isis Unveiled: A Master-Key to the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Science and
Theology. Vol. 2: Theology. 1877. Pasadena, CA: Theosophical University Press, 1972.
——. The Key to Theosophy: Being a Clear Exposition, in the form of Question and An-
swer, of the Ethics, Science, and Philosophy for the study of which the Theosophical So-
ciety has been founded. New York: Theosophical Publishing Company, 1889.
——. Letter of 19 November 1877. The Canadian Theosophist (September–October
1990; January–February 1991).
——. Letter to Hiram Corson. 16 February 1875. In Some Unpublished Letters of H.P.
Blavatsky, edited by Eugene Corson, 127–29. London: Rider & Co., 1929.
——. Letter to F. Hartmann. 3 April 1886. The Theosophical Quarterly (April 1926):
324.
——. “Mr. Lillie’s Delusions.” Letter to the Editor. Light (9 August 1884): 323–24.
——. The Secret Doctrine: The Synthesis of Science, Religion, and Philosophy. London:
Theosophical Publishing Company, 1888.
Bloomfield, Maurice. “Essentials of Buddhist Doctrine and Ethics.” International
Journal of Ethics Devoted to the Advancement of Ethical Knowledge and Practice 2,
no. 3 (April 1892): 313–26.
Bode, Mabel. “Women Leaders of the Buddhist Reformation.” Journal of the Royal
Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland 25 (1893): 517–66, 763–98.
Brandon, Ruth. The Spiritualists: The Passion for the Occult in the Nineteenth and
Twentieth Centuries. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1983.
Brantlinger, Patrick. “Imperial Gothic: Atavism and the Occult in the British Adven-
ture Novel, 1880 –1914.” In Reading Fin de Siècle Fictions, edited by Lyn Pykett,
184 –209. London: Longman, 1996.
——. Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830 –1914. Ithaca: Cor-
nell University Press, 1988.
248 ~ Bibliography
Brashers, H. C. “Conrad, Marlow, and Gautama Buddha.” Conradiana 1 (1969):

63–71.
Braud, Ann. “The Perils of Passivity: Women’s Leadership in Spiritualism and Chris-
tian Science.” In Women’s Leadership in Marginal Religions: Explorations Outside
the Mainstream, edited by Catherine Wessinger, 55–67. Urbana: University of
Illinois Press, 1993.
Brear, Douglas. “Early Assumptions in Western Buddhist Studies.” Religion: Journal
of Religion and Religions 5 (Autumn 1975): 136 –59.
Breckenridge, Carol A., and Peter van der Veer, eds. Orientalism and the Postcolonial
Predicament: Perspectives on South Asia. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1993.
Brewster, Earl, and Achsah Brewster. D. H. Lawrence: Reminiscences and Correspon-
dence. London: Martin Secker, 1934.
Brobjer, Thomas H. “Nietzsche’s Reading about Eastern Philosophy.” Journal of
Nietzsche Studies 28 (2004): 3–35.
Brown, Dennis. The Modernist Self in Twentieth-Century English Literature. New York:
Buckley, Jerome Hamilton. The Triumph of Time: A Study of the Victorian Concepts of
Time, History, Progress, and Decadence. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Belknap, 1966.
Buddhaghosa, Visuddhimagga. 5th century CE.
Budge, Wallis. Egyptian Ideas of the Future Life. 1899. New York: University Books, 1959.
Bulwer-Lytton, Edward. A Strange Story. 1866. In vol. 10 of The Worlds of Edward
Bulwer Lytton. New York: P. F. Collier and Son, 1901.
Bunsen, Ernest de. The Angel-Messiah of Buddhists, Essenes, and Christians. London:
Longmans, Green, 1880.
Burdett, Carolyn. “Romance, Reincarnation, and Rider Haggard.” In The Victorian
Supernatural, edited by Nicola Brown, Carolyn Burdett, and Pamela Thurschwell,
217–38. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Burfield, Diana. “Theosophy and Feminism: Some Explorations in Nineteenth-
Century Biography.” In Women’s Religious Experience, edited by Pat Holden, 27–56.
Totowa, NJ: Barnes & Noble Books, 1983.
Burnouf, Eugène. L’introduction à L’historie du Buddhisme Indien. 1844. Edited and
translated as Legends of Indian Buddhism by L. Canmer-Byng and S. A. Kapadia.

New Dehli: Ess Ess Publications, 1976.
Burton, Antoinette. At the Heart of Empire: Indians and the Colonial Encounter in
Late-Victorian Britain. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1998.
Byrne, Peter. Natural Religion and the Nature of Religion. London: Routledge, 1989.
Caracciolo, Peter. “Buddhist Teaching Stories and Their Influence on Conrad, Wells,
and Kipling: The Reception of the Jataka and Allied Genres in Victorian Culture.”
Conradian 11.1 (1986): 24 –34.
——. “Buddhist Typologies in Heart of Darkness and Victory and Their Contribution
to the Modernism of Jacob Epstein, Wyndham Lewis, and T. S. Eliot.” The Conra-
dian 14.1–2 (1989): 67–91.
Carpenter, J. Estlin. “The Obligations of the New Testament to Buddhism.” Nine-
teenth Century, a Monthly Review 8 (1880): 971–94.
Carr, Kent. Miss Marie Corelli. London: Henry J. Drane, 1901.
Carrington, Charles. The Origins of Kim.” In Rudyard Kipling. Kim, edited by Zoh-
reh T. Sullivan, 278–82. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002
Bibliography ~ 249
Carroll, Lewis. The Adventures of Alice in Wonderland. 1865. Peterborough, ONT:

Broadview Press, 2000.
Caygill, Howard. “The Survival of Nihilism.” In Nihilism Now! Monsters of Energy,
edited by Keith Ansell Pearson and Diane Morgan, 189 –97. New York: St. Mar-
tin’s, 2000.
Cerullo, John J. The Secularization of the Soul: Psychical Research in Modern Britain.
Philadelphia: Institute for the Study of Human Issues, 1982.
Clarke, J. J. Oriental Enlightenment: The Encounter between Asian and Western
Thought. London: Routledge, 1997.
Clarke, James Freeman. “Buddhism; or, the Protestantism of the East.” Atlantic
Monthly 23 (1869): 713–28.
Clausen, Christopher. “ ‘The Light of Asia’: An Annotated Critical Edition.” Ph.D.
diss., Queen’s University, 1972.
——. “Sir Edwin Arnold’s The Light of Asia and Its Reception.” Literature East &
West 17 (1973): 174 –91.
——. “Victorian Buddhism and the Origins of Comparative Religion.” Religion: A
Journal of Religion & Religions 5 (1975): 1–15.
Clemens, Justin, and Chris Feik. “Nihilism, Tonight. . . .” In Nihilism Now! Monsters
of Energy, edited by Keith Ansell Pearson and Diane Morgan, 18 –36. New York:
Coates, John D. “The ‘Spiritual Quest’ in Rider Haggard’s She and Ayesha.” Cahiers
victoriens & edouardiens 57 (2003): 33– 45.
Colebrooke, Henry Thomas. Essays on the Religion and Philosophy of the Hindus.
London: Trübner, 1837.
Coleman, William Emmette. “The Sources of Madame Blavatsky’s Writings.” In A
Modern Priestess of Isis. Translated by Walter Leaf, 353–66. London: Longmans,
Green, 1895.
——. “A Splendid Fraud: Sources of Theosophical Literature—Where Blavatsky Got
Her Book.” The Daily Examiner (San Francisco), July 8 1888: 12.
Collins, Mortimer. Transmigration. London: Chatto & Windus, 1883.
Collins, Richard. Buddhism and ‘The Light of Asia.’ Victoria Institute: London, 1893.
Collins, Steven. Selfless Persons: Imagery and Thought in Theravāda Buddhism. Cam-
bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1982.

Collins, Wilkie. The Moonstone. 1868. 2nd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000.
——. The Woman in White. 1860. Oxford World Classics. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1999.
Colombo, Reginald Stephen. “Buddhism.” The Nineteenth Century (July 1888): 119–35.
The Connected Discourses of the Buddha. 2 Vols. Translated by Bhikku Bodhi. Boston:
Wisdom Publications, 2000.
Conrad, Joseph. Heart of Darkness. 1901. Boston: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 1996.
——. The Secret Agent: A Simple Tale. 1907. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.
Conway, Daniel. “Revisiting the Will to Power: Active Nihilism and the Project of
Trans-human Philosophy.” In Nihilism Now! Monsters of Energy, edited by Keith
Ansell Pearson and Diane Morgan, 117– 41. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
Cook, Keningale. “The Ancient Faith of Egypt.” Dublin University Magazine 90
(1877): 27–51.
Corelli, Marie. Free Opinions Freely Expressed on Certain Phases of Modern Social Life
and Conduct. London: Archibald Constable, 1905.
250 ~ Bibliography
——. The Life Everlasting, A Romance of Reality. 1911. Los Angeles: Borden, 1966.
——. A Romance of Two Worlds. 1886. Los Angeles: Borden, 1947.
Cowell, E. B. “Jataka; or, Stories of the Buddha’s Former Births.” Westminster Review
145 (June, 1896): 622–34.
Crook, Paul. “Social Darwinism: The Concept.” History of European Ideas 22.4
(1996): 261–74.
Countess of Jersey. “Buddhism, and Christianity.” National Review 4 (1884–85): 577.
Cust, Robert Needham. “The Philosophical Aspect of the Idea of Metempsychosis.”
Calcutta Review 107 (July 1898): 42–78.
Dall, C. H. A. “Legend of Buddha and Life of Christ.” Unitarian Review (Boston) 18
(September 1882): 230 – 41.
Darwin, Charles. The Descent of Man and Selection in Relation to Sex. 1871. 2nd ed.
New York: Appleton, 1874.
——. On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection, or the Preservation of
Favoured Races in the Struggle for Life. 1859. 2 vols. New York: Appleton, 1897.
Das, Sarat Chandra. Indian Pandits in the Land of Snow. Calcutta: Baptist Mission
Press, 1893. Repr. Calcutta: Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyay, 1965.
——. Journey to Lhasa and Central Tibet. 2nd ed. London: John Murray, 1902.
Davies, A. “The Aryan Myth: Its Religious Significance,” Studies in Religion 10.3
(1981): 290 –95.
Davis, Bret W. “Zen after Zarathustra: The Problem of the Will in the Confrontation
between Nietzsche and Buddhism.” Journal of Nietzsche Studies 28 (2004): 89–138.
Davis, Charles Maurice. Mystic London. New York: John W. Lovell, 1890.
Davis, Mary F. Danger Signals: An Address of the Uses and Abuses of Modern Spiritual-
ism. New York: A. J. Davis, 1875.
Dean, Susan Thach. “Decadence, Evolution, and Will: Caroline Rhys Davids’ ‘Origi-
nal’ Buddhism.” In Women’s Theology in Nineteenth-Century Britain: Transfigur-
ing the Faith of Their Fathers, edited by Julie Melnyk, 209–31. London: Garland,
1998.
de Harlez, C. “Buddhist Propaganda in Christian Countries.” Dublin Review 107, 3S24
(1890): 54 –73.
De Jong, J. W. “A Brief History of Buddhist Studies in Europe and America.” The
Eastern Buddhist 7.1 (1974): 55–106.

de Purucker, G. Occult Glossary: A Compendium of Oriental and Theosophical Terms.
1933. Pasadena, CA: Theosophical University Press, 1953.
Dillon, E. J. “Ecclesiastes and Buddhism.” Contemporary Review 65 (1894): 153–76.
Dixon, Joy. Divine Feminine: Theosophy and Feminism in England. Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 2001.
Doherty, Gerald. “The Nirvana Dimension: D. H. Lawrence’s Quarrel with Bud-
dhism.” D. H. Lawrence Review 15 (1962): 51–67.
——. Oriental Lawrence: The Quest for the Secrets of Sex. New York: Peter Lang, 2001.
Doyle, Arthur Conan. The History of Spiritualism. 1926. Vols. 1 and 2. New York:
Arno Press, 1975.
Droit, Roger-Pol. The Cult of Nothingness: The Philosophers and the Buddha. Trans-
lated by David Streight and Pamela Vohnson. Chapel Hill: University of North
Carolina Press, 2003.
Droogers, André. “Syncretism: The Problem of Definition, the Definition of the
Problem.” In Dialogue and Syncretism: An Interdisciplinary Approach, edited by
Bibliography ~ 251
Jerald Gort, Hendrik Vroom, Rein Fernhout, and Anton Wessels, 7–25. Grand
Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans, 1989.
Dublin Review. “Modern Society and the Sacred Heart.” 25.49 (July 1875): 1–21.
Dumoulin, Heinrich. “Buddhism and Nineteenth-Century German Philosophy.”
Journal of the History of Ideas 42.3 (July–September 1981): 457–70.
Eitel, Ernest J. Buddhism: Its Historical, Theoretical, and Popular Aspects. 3rd ed.
Hong Kong: Land, Crawford, 1884.
Eliot, T. S. On Poetry and Poets. London: Faber, 1957.
Ellinwood, F. F. “Buddhism and Christianity—A Crusade Which Must Be Met.” The
Missionary Review of the World 4 (1891): 108 –17.
Ellis, Peter Berresford. H. Rider Haggard: A Voice from the Infinite. London: Rout-
ledge & Kegan Paul, 1978.
Ellwood, Robert, and Catherine Wessinger. “The Feminism of ‘Universal Brother-
hood’: Women in the Theosophical Movement.” In Women’s Leadership in Mar-
ginal Religions: Explorations Outside the Mainstream, edited by Catherine Wessinger,
68 –870. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1993.
Erricker, Clive. Buddhism. Lincolnwood, IL: NTC/Contemporary, 1975.
Everett, Charles C. “Recent Studies in Buddhism.” The Unitarian Review and Reli-
gious Magazine (Boston) 18 (1882): 421–36.
Federico, Annette R. Idol of Suburbia: Marie Corelli and Late-Victorian Literary Cul-
ture. Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 2000.
Fields, Rick. How the Swans Came to the Lake: A Narrative History of Buddhism in
America. 3rd ed. Boston: Shambhala, 1992.
Flanders, G. T. Christ or Buddha? Salem, MA: Bates, 1881.
Fleming, Peter. Bayonets to Lhasa: The First Full Account of the British Invasion of
Tibet in 1904. New York: Harper, 1961.
Foley, C. A. “The Psychological Basis of Buddhist Ethics.” Journal of the Royal Asi-
atic Society of Great Britain and Ireland 26 (1894): 321–33.
Ford, James L. “Buddhism, Mythology, and The Matrix.” In Taking the Red Pill:
Science, Philosophy, and Religion in The Matrix, edited by Glenn Yeffeth. Dallas:
Benbella Books, 2003.
Forlong, J. G. R. “Buddhism: Through What Historical Channels Did It Influ-
ence Early Christianity?” Open Court. A Fortnightly Journal, Devoted to the Work
of Establishing Religion and Ethics upon a Scientific Basis 1 (1887–88): 382,
416, 439.
Forster, E. M. A Passage to India. 1924. New York: Harcourt, 1984.
Fox, Douglas A. The Vagrant Lotus: An Introduction to Buddhist Philosophy. Philadel-
phia: Westminster Press, 1973.
Fox, St. George Lane. “The Neo-Buddhist Movement.” Time, a Monthly Miscellany
22, NS1 (1890): 597–602.
Franklin, J. Jeffrey. “The Counter-Invasion of Britain by Buddhism in Marie Corelli’s
A Romance of Two Worlds and H. Rider Haggard’s Ayesha: The Return of She.”
Victorian Literature and Culture 31.1 (spring 2003): 19 – 42.
——. “Memory as the Nexus of Identity, Empire, and Evolution in George Eliot’s
Middlemarch and H. Rider Haggard’s She.” Cahiers victoriens & édouardiens 53
(2001): 141–70.
Fraser, Hilary, Stephanie Green, and Judith Johnston. Gender and the Victorian Peri-
odical. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
252 ~ Bibliography
Fraser, Robert. Victorian Quest Romance: Stevenson, Haggard, Kipling, and Conan
Doyle. Plymouth, UK: Northcote House, 1998.
Gagnier, Regina. “The Law of Progress and the Ironies of Individualism in the Nine-
teenth Century.” New Literary History 31 (2000): 315–36.
Gaskell, Elizabeth. Cranford. 1851. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.
Gates, William. Letter to Katherine Tingley. May 8, 1912. Pasadena, CA: Theosophi-
cal Society Archive, 1919.
Giddens, Anthony. The Consequences of Modernity. Stanford: Stanford University
Press, 1990.
Gilbert, Sandra M. “Rider Haggard’s Heart of Darkness.” In Coordinates: Placing
Science Fiction and Fantasy, edited by George E. Slusser, Eric S. Rabkin, and Rob-
erts Scholes, 124 –38. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University, 1983.
Giles, James. “The No-Self Theory: Hume, Buddhism, and Personal Identity.” Phi-
losophy East & West 43, no. 2 (April 1993): 175–200.
——. No Self to be Found: The Search for Personal Identity. Lanham, MD: University
Press of America, 1997.
Gillis, Everett A. “The Spiritual Status of T. S. Eliot’s Hollow Men.” Texas Studies in
Literature and Language 2 (1961): 464 –75.
Gilmour, David. The Long Recessional: The Imperial Life of Rudyard Kipling. New
York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 2002.
Glicksberg, Charles I. The Literature of Nihilism. Lewisburg, PA: Bucknell University
Press, 1975.
Goldfarb, Russell M., and Clare R. Goldfarb. Spiritualism and Nineteenth-Century
Letters. Cranbury, NJ: Associated University Presses, 1978.
Godwin, Joscelyn. The Theosophical Enlightenment. Albany: State University of New
York Press, 1994.
Gordon, Rev. M. L. “Mill’s Use of Buddhism.” Bibliotheca Sacra: A Theological
Quarterly (London) 42 (July 1885): 527–35.
Goudsblom, Johan. Nihilism and Culture. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield, 1960.
Gowans, Christopher W. Philosophy of the Buddha. London: Routledge, 2003.
Graham, Colin. Ideologies of Epic: Nation, Empire, and Victorian Epic Poetry. Man-
chester, Eng.: Manchester University Press, 1998.
Green, Robert Frederick. “Christianity and Buddhism.” Proceedings of the Literary

and Philosophical Society of Liverpool 44 (1890): 299 –322.
Gubar, Susan. “She and Herland: Feminism as Fantasy.” In Coordinates: Placing Sci-
ence Fiction and Fantasy, edited by George E. Slusser, Eric S. Rabkin, and Robert
Scholes, 139 – 49. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1983.
Haggard, H. Rider. “About Fiction.” Contemporary Review 51 (February 1887):
172–80.
——. Ayesha: The Return of “She.” 1905. In The Classic Adventures: Ayesha: The Return
of She, Benita: An African Romance. Poole, Eng.: New Orchard Editions, 1986.
——. The Days of My Life, An Autobiography. 2 Vols. Edited by C. J. Longman. London:
Longmans, Green and Co., 1926.
——. The Private Diaries of Sir H. Rider Haggard 1914 –1925. Edited by D. S. Hig-
gins. New York: Stein and Day, 1980.
——. She. 1887. Oxford World’s Classics. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.
——. She and Allan. 1920. New York: Ballantine Books, 1978.
Bibliography ~ 253
Haggard, Lilias Rider. The Cloak That I Left: A Biography of the Author Henry Rider
Haggard K. B. E. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1951.
Hardy, R. Spence. A Manual of Buddhism, in Its Modern Development. Translated
from Singhalese Mss. 1853. London: Williams and Norgate, 1860.
Hartnell, Elaine M. “Morals and Metaphysics: Marie Corelli, Religion, and the
Gothic.” Women’s Writing 13.2 (June 2006): 284 –303.
Harvey, Peter. An Introduction to Buddhism: Teachings, History, and Practices. Cam-
Hastings, Beatrice Hastings. Defence of Madame Blavatsky. Worthing, Eng.: Hastings
Press, 1937.
Hauser, Mrs. I. L. “Preface to Notes.” The Light of Asia. Being The Life and Teach-
ing of Gautama, Prince of India and Founder of Büddhism. 1879. Chicago: Rand,
McNally & Company, 1890.
Heckel, Karl. “The Idea of Re-Birth.” Translated by Francesca Arundale. In The Idea
of Re-Birth, Including a Translation of an Essay on Re-Incarnation by Karl Heckel.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner, & Co., 1890. Hesse, Herman. Siddhartha.
1922. Translated by Sherab Chödzin Kohn. Boston: Shambhala, 2000.
——. Siddhartha. 1922. Translated by Joachim Neugroschel. New York: Penguin
1999.
Hoare, John Newenham. “The Religion of the Ancient Egyptians.” Littell’s Living
Age 140, 5S25 (4 January 1879): 33– 41.
Hodgson, Richard. “Account of Personal Investigations in India, and Discussion of
the Authorship of the ‘Koot Hoomi’ Letters.” Proceedings of the Society for Psychical
Research 3 (1886): 207–380.
Holmes, Oliver Wendell. Review of The Light of Asia. International Review 7 (1879):
345– 49.
Hopkins, R. Thurston. Rudyard Kipling: A Literary Appreciation. London: Simpkin,
Marshall, Hamilton, Kent, 1978.
Hopkirk, Peter. Quest for Kim: In Search of Kipling’s Great Game. Ann Arbor: Uni-
versity of Michigan Press, 1996.
Howard, Mrs. Charles L. “The Doctrine of Reincarnation.” The Metaphysical Maga-
zine 8 (May and June 1898): 141– 48.
Howe, Irving. “The Pleasures of Kim.” In Kim, edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan,

328 –37. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Huff, Chester Clarence. “The Novels of Marie Corelli: Their Themes and Their Pop-
ularity as an Index to Popular Taste.” Ph.D. diss. Boulder: University of Colorado,
1970.
Hume, David. A Treatise of Human Understanding. 1748. Edited by L. A. Selby-
Bigge. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1965.
Humphreys, Christmas. The Development of Buddhism in England, Being a History
of the Buddhist Movement in London and the Provinces. London: Buddhist Lodge,
1937.
——. Studies in the Middle Way: Being Thoughts on Buddhism Applied. 1940. 3rd ed.
London: George Allen and Unwin, 1959.
Huxley, Aldous. The Doors of Perception. New York: Harper, 1954.
Huxley, T. H. Evolution and Ethics. 1893. Edited by James Paradis and George C.
Williams. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1989.
254 ~ Bibliography
Irigaray, Luce. Between East and West: From Singularity to Community. Trans. Stephan
Pluhác̆ek. New York: Columbia University Press, 2002.
Islam, Shamsul. Kipling’s Law: A Study of His Philosophy of Life. New York: St. Mar-
tin’s, 1975.
J. M. M. “Buddhism.” Journal of Sacred Literature and Biblical Record 35 (1865):
281–300.
Jacobs, Joseph, ed. Indian Fairy Tales. New York: Putnam’s Sons, 1903.
Jacobson, Nolan Pliny. Understanding Buddhism. Carbondale: Southern Illinois Uni-
Jacolliot, Louis. The Bible in India: Hindoo Origins of Hebrew and Christian Revela-
tion. 1870. New York: Carleton, 1877.
Jay, Elisabeth. Faith and Doubt in Victorian Britain. Houndmills, Eng.: Macmillan,
1986.
Jensen, Lionel M. Manufacturing Confucianism: Chinese Traditions and Universal
Civilization. Durham: Duke University Press, 1977.
Johnson, Samuel. A Dictionary of the English Language. London: W. Strahan, 1755.
Johnston, J. Wesley. “Christ and Buddha: Resemblances and Contrasts.” Methodist
Review 80 (1898): 32– 40.
Jones, Ken. The New Social Face of Buddhism: A Call to Action. Boston: Wisdom
Publications, 2003.
Julkarni, H. B. “The Buddhist Structure and Significance in Joseph Conrad’s ‘Heart
of Darkness.’ ” South Asian Review 3 (1979): 67–75.
Kerouac, Jack. The Dharma Bums. 1958. New York: Penguin, 1986.
Kaufmann, Walter. Nietzsche: Philosopher, Psychologist, Antichrist. Cleveland, OH:
Meridian Books, 1956.
Kaul, Suvir. “Kim, or How to Be Young, Male, and British in Kipling’s India.” In
Kim, edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan, 426 –36. A Norton Critical Edition. New York:
W. W. Norton, 2002.
Keely, E. W. “Christianity and Reincarnation.” The Metaphysical Magazine 8 (Au-
gust 1898): 235–37.
Kellogg, S. H. “Kingdom of, Life of, and Legend of Buddha.” Bibliotheca Sacra 39
(1882): 458.
——. The Light of Asia and the Light of the World. London: Macmillan, 1885.
Kemp, Sandra. Kipling’s Hidden Narratives. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.
Kemp, Sandra, and Lisa Lewis, eds. Writings on Writing by Rudyard Kipling. Cam-
Kershner, R. B. “Modernism’s Mirror: The Sorrows of Marie Corelli.” In Transform-
ing Genres: New Approaches to British Fiction of the 1890s, edited by Nikki Lee
Manos and Mer-Jane Rochelson, 67–86. New York: St. Martin’s, 1994.
King, Richard. Orientalism and Religion: Postcolonial Theory, India, and “The Mysti-
cal East.” London: Routledge, 1999.
Kingsford, Anna, and Edward Maitland. The Virgin of the World of Hermes Mercurius
Trismegistus. London: George Redway, 1885.
Kinkead-Weekes, Mark. “The Ending of Kim.” In Kim, edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan,
436 – 41. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Kipling, Rudyard. Kim. 1901. Edited by Alan Sandison. Oxford World’s Classics.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.
Bibliography ~ 255
——. Something of Myself (1937). Vol. 24 of The Collected Works of Rudyard Kipling.
New York: AMS Press, 1970.
——. Writings on Writing by Rudyard Kipling. Edited by Sandra Kemp and Lisa
Lewis. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996.
Kling, Blair B. “Kim in Historical Context.” In Kim, edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan,
297–309. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Knight, William. “The Doctrine of Metempsychosis.” The Fortnightly Review 30,
NS24 (1878): 422– 42.
Knox, Robert. Amaravati: Buddhist Sculpture from the Great Stupa. London: British
Museum Press, 1992.
Kraft, Siv Ellen. “ ‘To Mix or Not to Mix’: Syncretism/Anti-Syncretism in the His-
tory of Theosophy.” Numen: International Review for the History of Religions
49.2 (2002): 142–77.
Kuehn, Julia. Glorious Vulgarity: Marie Corelli’s Feminine Sublime in a Popular Con-
text. Berlin: Logos, 2004.
Lahiri, Shompa. Indians in Britain: Anglo-Indian Encounters, Race and Identity,
1880 –1930. London: Frank Cass, 2000.
The Lalita-Vistara: Memoirs of the Early Life of Sakya Sinha. Chps. 1–15. Translated
by R. L. Mitra. Delhi, India: Sri Satguru Publications, 1998.
Lamarck, Jean-Baptiste de. Zoological Philosophy. 1809. Translated by H. Elliott.
London, 1914.
Langbaum, Robert. Mysteries of Identity: A Theme in Modern Literature. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1977.
Langdon, Samuel. Punchi Nona: A Story of Female Education and Village Life in Cey-
lon. London: T. Woolmer, 1884.
Lawrence, D. H. Aaron’s Rod. 1922. London: Penguin, 1995.
——. Lady Chatterley’s Lover. 1928. London: Penguin, 1994.
——. Phoenix: The Posthumous Papers of D. H. Lawrence. Edited by Edward D. Mc-
Donald. New York: Viking, 1936.
——. Reflections on the Death of a Porcupine and Other Essays. 1925. Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1963.
——. Sons and Lovers. 1913. London: Penguin, 2006.
——. Women in Love. 1920. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.

Legge, F. “The Origin of Modern Occultism.” The National Review (London) 14
September 1889: 10 –22.
Lillie, Arthur. Buddhism in Christendom; or, Jesus the Essene. London: Kegan Paul,
Trench, & Co., 1887.
Lilly, W. S. “The Message of Buddhism to the Western World.” The Fortnightly Re-
view 78 (July/December 1905): 197–214.
Ling, T. O. A Dictionary of Buddhism. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1972.
Literary Digest. 1:6 (31 May 1890): 162.
Littell’s Living Age. “A Buddhist ‘Matthew Arnold.’ ” No. 1351 (April 23, 1870):
235–38.
——. “The Contrast between Buddhist and Christian Teaching.” No. 2198 (7 Au-
gust 1886): 381.
Lombard, François. “Conrad and Buddhism.” Cahiers d’études et de recherches victori-
ennes et édouardiennes 2 (1975): 103–12.
256 ~ Bibliography
Long, J. Bruce. “Reincarnation.” In Encyclopedia of Religion, edited by Lindsay Jones,

7676 –7681. 2nd ed. Farmington Hills, MI: Thompson Gale, 2005.
Lopez, Donald S., Jr. Curators of the Buddha: The Study of Buddhism Under Colonial-
ism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995.
——. Prisoners of Shangri-La: Tibetan Buddhism and the West. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1998.
Low, Gail Ching-Liang. White Skins / Black Masks: Representation and Colonialism.
London: Routledge, 1996.
Loy, David. Nonduality: A Study in Comparative Philosophy. New Haven: Yale Uni-
Lucretius Carus, Titus. De rerum natura: libri sex. Translated by H. A. J. Munro.
Cambridge: Deighton, Bell, 1886.
Lycett, Andrew. Rudyard Kipling. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1999.
Lyell, Charles. Principles of Geology. 1830 –1833. Lehre: Verlag von J. Cramer, 1970.
MacDonald, Frederika. “Buddhism and Mock Buddhism.” The Fortnightly Review 37,
no. 221 (May 1885): 703–13.
Malley, John. “ ‘Time Hath No Power against Identity’: Historical Continuity and
Archaeological Adventure in H. Rider Haggard’s She.” English Literature in Tran-
sition, 1880 –1920 40, no. 3 (1997): 275–97.
Manthorpe, Victoria. Children of the Empire: The Victorian Haggards. London: Vic-
tor Gollancz, 1996.
Marshall, P. J. The British Discovery of Hinduism in the Eighteenth Century. Cam-
Mason, Philip. Kipling: The Glass, The Shadow, and the Fire. New York: Harper &
Row, 1975.
Maugham, W. Somerset. The Narrow Corner. 1932. New York: Penguin, 1993.
McConnell, Daniel J. “ ‘Heart of Darkness’ in T. S. Eliot’s The Hollow Men.” Texas
Studies in Literature and Language 4 (1962): 141–52.
McCutchan, Corinne. “Who Iås Kim?” In Transforming Genres: New Approaches to
British Fiction of the 1890s, edited by Nikki Lee Manos and Meri-Jane Rochelson,
131–51. New York: St. Martin’s, 1994.
McDonough, Sheila. “Sense and Sensibility: A Survey of Western Attitudes to Hinduism,
Buddhism, and Islam as Expressed in Various Editions of the Encyclopaedia Britan-

nica.” Cahiers d’histoire mondiale: Journal of World History 9, no. 3 (1966): 771–84.
McKerlie, Helen Graham. “Western Buddhism.” Asiatic Quarterly Review (London) 9,
no. 17 (January 1890): 192–227.
McLeod, Hugh. Religion and Society in England, 1850 –1914. New York: St. Martin’s,
1996.
M’Clintock, John, and James Strong. “Transmigration.” In Cyclopaedia of Biblical,
Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature, vol. 10, 524 –25. New York: Harper &
Brothers, 1886.
McMillin, Laurie Hovell. English in Tibet, Tibet in English: Self-Presentation in Tibet
and the Diaspora. New York: Palgrave, 2001.
Mead, Marion. Madame Blavatsky: The Woman behind the Myth. New York: G. P.
Putnam’s Sons, 1980.
Melton, J. Gordon. Encyclopedic Handbook of Cults in America. New York: Garland
Press, 1992.
Menzies, Jackie. Buddha: Radiant Awakening. Sydney: Art Gallery of New South
Wales, 2001.
Bibliography ~ 257
Michael, Leo. She: An Allegory of the Church. New York: Frank F. Lovell, 1889.
The Middle Length Discourses of the Buddha: A New Translation of the Majjhima
Nikāya Translated from the Pali. Translated by Bhikkhu Ñānamoli, edited and re-
vised by Bhikkhu Bodhi. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 1995.
Mill, John Stuart. The Collected Works of John Stuart Mill, edited by J. M. Robson.
Toronto: University of Toronto, 1963–1985.
Monier-Williams, Monier. Buddhism, in Its Connexion with Brāhmanism and
Hindūism, and in Its Contrast with Christianity. London: John Murray, 1889.
——. “Buddhism and Christianity.” Evangelistic Repository 68 (1891): 478 –84.
Morgan, Sue. Women, Religion, and Feminism in Britain, 1750 –1900. New York:
Palgrave Macmillan, 2002.Müller, Friedrich Max. “Buddhism.” The Quarterly
Review 170 (April 1890): 318 – 46.
——. Chips from a German Workshop. 1. Essays on the Science of Religion. 1867. Chico,
CA: Scholars Press, 1985.
——. “Christianity and Buddhism.” The New Review 4 (1891): 67–74.
——. “Esoteric Buddhism.” Nineteenth Century 33 (May 1893): 767–88.
——. Lectures on the Science of Religion; with a Paper on Buddhist Nihilism, and a
Translation of the Dhammapada or “Path of Virtue.” New York: Charles Scribner,
1872.
——. Natural Religion. The Gifford Lectures. London: Longmans, Green, and Co.,
1889.
Murphy, Patricia. “The Gendering of History in ‘She.’ ” Studies in English Literature,
1500 –1900 39, no. 4 (Autumn 1999): 747–72.
Nakamura, Hajime. Gotama Buddha: A Biography Based on the Most Reliable Texts.
Vol. 1. Translated by Gaynor Sekimori. Tokyo: Kosei, 2000.
Naravane, V. S. “Edwin Arnold and The Light of Asia.” Indian Horizons 29, no. 1
(1980): 17–33.
Neale, E. Vansittart. “Buddha and Buddhism.” Macmillan’s Magazine 1 (1860):
439 – 48.
Neff, Mary K. “How Many Objects Has the Theosophical Society?” The Theosophist
(May 1935): 118.
Neufeldt, Ronald. “In Search of Utopia: Karma and Rebirth in the Theosophical
Movement.” In Karma and Rebirth: Post Classical Developments, edited by Ron-

ald W. Neufeldt, 233–55. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986.
Nhat Hahn, Thich. The Heart of the Buddha’s Teaching: Transforming Suffering into
Peace, Joy, and Liberation. New York: Broadway Books, 1999.
——. Interbeing: Fourteen Guidelines for Engaged Buddhism. Edited by Fred Epp-
steiner. 3rd ed. Berkeley: Parallax, 1998.
Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Anti-Christ. 1895. Translated by H. L. Mencken. New York:
Alfred A. Knopf, 1923.
——. The Will to Power. 1883–1888. Edited by Walter Kaufmann. Translated by
Walter Kaufmann and R. J. Hollingdale. New York: Random House, 1968.
Niles, Henry Thayer. The Dawn and the Day; or, The Buddha and the Christ. Toledo,
OH: The Blade Printing & Paper Company, 1894.
Nixon, Judith V. Victorian Religious Discourse: New Directions in Criticism. New
York: Palgrave, 2004. Noakes, Richard. “Spiritualism, Science, and the Supernat-
ural in Mid-Victorian Britain.” In The Victorian Supernatural, edited by Nicola
Bown, Carolyn Burdett, and Pamela Thurschwell, 23– 43. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 2004.
258 ~ Bibliography
Nobel Prize Committee. “The Nobel Prize for Literature, 1907.” In Kim, edited
by Zohreh T. Sullivan, 290 –96. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W.
Norton, 2002.
O’Connor, Erin. “Preface for a Post-Postcolonial Criticism.” Victorian Studies 45.2
(January 2003): 217– 46.
Olcott, Henry Steel. A Buddhist Catechism: According to the Canon of the Southern
Church. Colombo, Ceylon: Theosophical Society, 1881.
——. “The Genesis of Theosophy.” The National Review (London) 14 (October 1889):
208 –17.
Oldenberg, Hermann. Buddha: His Life, His Doctrine, His Order. 1881. Translated by
William Hoey. London: Williams and Norgate, 1882.
Oppenheim, Janet. The Other World: Spiritualism and Psychical Research in England,
1850 –1914. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985.
Oswald, Feliz L. “Was Christ a Buddhist?” The Arena 3 (1890 –91): 193–201. Oul-
ton, Carolyn W. de la L. Literature and Religion in Mid-Victorian England: From
Dickens to Eliot. Houndmills, Eng.: Palgrave, 2003.
Owen, Alex. The Darkened Room: Women, Power, and Spiritualism in Late Victorian
England. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1990.
——. The Place of Enchantment: British Occultism and the Culture of the Modern.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004.
Paley, William. Natural Theology: Selections. 1802. Edited by Frederick Ferré. India-
napolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1963.
Parker, W. B. “The Religion of Mr. Kipling.” The New World 7(1898): 662–70.
Parry, Ann. “Recovering the Connection between Kim and Contemporary History.”
In Kim. Edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan, 309 –20. A Norton Critical Edition. New
York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Parsons, Gerald. “Introduction: Victorian Religion, Paradox and Variety.” In Religion
in Victorian Britain. Vol. 1. Edited by Gerald Parsons, 1–13. Manchester: Man-
chester University Press, 1988.
——. “From Dissenters to Free Churchman: The Transitions of Victorian Noncon-
formity.” Religion in Victorian Britain. Vol. 1. Edited by Gerald Parsons, 67–116.
Manchester, Eng.: Manchester University Press, 1988.
——. “Reform, Revival, and Realignment: The Experience of Victorian Anglican-

ism.” In Religion in Victorian Britain. Vol. 1. Edited by Gerald Parsons, 14 –66.
Manchester, Eng.: Manchester University Press, 1988.
Pater, Walter. The Renaissance: Studies in Art and Poetry. 1873. Oxford: Oxford Uni-
Pearson, Keith Ansell, and Diane Morgan. “Introduction: the Return of Monstrous
Nihilism.” In Nihilism Now! Monsters of Energy, edited by Keith Ansell Pearson and
Diane Morgan, 1–17. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
Pearson, Richard. “Archaeology and Gothic Desire: Vitality beyond the Grave in
H. Rider Haggard’s Ancient Egypt.” In Victorian Gothic, edited by Ruth Tobbins
and Julian Wolfreys, 218 – 44. New York: Palgrave, 2000.
Peiris, William. The Western Contribution to Buddhism. Delhi: Motilal Banarisidass,
1973.
Pels, Peter. “Occult Truths: Race, Conjecture, and Theosophy in Victorian Anthro-
pology.” In Excluded Ancestors, Inventible Traditions, edited by Richard Handler,
11– 41. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 2000.
Bibliography ~ 259
Pember, G. H. Theosophy, Buddhism, and the Signs of the End. London: Hodder and
Stoughton, 1891.
Phillips, Richard. The Story of Gautama Buddha and His Creed: An Epic. London:
Longmans, Green, 1871.
Pieterse, Jan Nederveen. “Hybridity, So What? The Anti-hybridity Backlash and
the Riddles of Recognition.” Theory, Culture & Society 18, nos. 2–3 (April–June
2001): 219 – 45.
Pirsig, Robert M. Zen and the Art of Motorcycle Maintenance: An Inquiry into Values.
New York: William Morrow, 1974.
Podmore, Frank. Modern Spiritualism: A History and Criticism. 2 vols. London:
Methuen, 1902.
Prothero, Stephen. “From Spiritualism to Theosophy: ‘Uplifting’ a Democratic Tra-
dition.” Religions and American Culture 3, no. 2 (Summer 1993): 197–216.
——. The White Buddhist: The Asian Odyssey of Henry Steel Olcott. Bloomington: In-
diana University Press, 1996.
The Quarterly Review. “Buddhism.” 170 (1890): 318 – 46.
Rahula, Walpola. What the Buddha Taught. New York: Grove Press, 1974.
——. Zen and the Taming of the Bull: Toward the Definition of Buddhist Thought.
London: Gordon Fraser, 1978.
Rajapakse, Vijitha. “Early Buddhism and John Stuart Mill’s Thinking in the Fields
of Philosophy and Religion: Some Notes toward a Comparative Study.” Philosophy
East and West 37, no. 3 (July 1987): 260 –85.
Rao, K. Bhaskara. Rudyard Kipling’s India. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press,
1967.
Rattigan, William H. “Three Great Asiatic Reformers: A Study and a Contrast.” Lon-
don Quarterly Review 92 (1899): 291–312.
Rawlinson, H. G. Intercourse between India and The Western World: From the Earliest
Times to the Fall of Rome. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1926.
Reed, Edward S. From Soul to Mind: The Emergence of Psychology from Erasmus Dar-
win to William James. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1997.
Reid, Fred, and David Washbrook. “Kipling, Kim, and Imperialism.” History Today
32 (August 1982): 14 –20.
Rhys Davids, C. A. F. Buddhism: A Study of the Buddhist Norm. New York: Henry
Holt, 1912.
——. Buddhist Psychology: An Inquiry into the Analysis and Theory of Mind in Pali
Literature. London: G. Bell and Sons, 1914.
Rhys Davids, T. W. Buddhism: Being a Sketch of the Life and Teachings of Gautama,
the Buddha. 1877. 21st ed. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge,
1907.
——. Buddhist Birth Stories; or, Jātaka Tales. The Oldest Collection of Folk-Lore Extant:
Being the Jātakatthavaņņanā, for the first time Edite in the Original Pāli. Vol. 1.
Edited by V. Fausböll. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin, 1880.
——. Buddhist India. 1903. Delhi: Indological Book House, 1970.
——. The History and Literature of Buddhism. 1896. Calcutta: Susil Gupta, 1962.
——. Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Buddhism. 1881. Hibbert Lectures. Al-
lahabad, India: Rachna Prakashan, 1972.
Richards, Thomas. The Imperial Archive: Knowledge and the Fantasy of Empire.
London: Verso, 1993.
260 ~ Bibliography
Robertson, James. The Rise and Progress of Modern Spiritualism in England. Man-
chester: “The Two Worlds” Publishing Company, 1893.
Rogers, H. T. Buddhaghosha’s Parables. Translated by F. Max Müller. London: Trüb-
ner, 1870.
Rogers, Terence. “Restless Desire: Rider Haggard, Orientalism and the New Woman.”
Women: A Cultural Review 10.1 (1999): 35– 46.
Rooks, Pamela. “D. H. Lawrence’s ‘Individual’. . . .” DHL Review 23 (1991): 21–29.
Root, E. D. Sakya Buddha: A Versified, Annotated Narrative of His Life and Teach-
ings; with an Excursus, Containing Citations from the Dhammapada, or Buddhist
Canon. New York: Charles P. Somerby, 1880.
Roy, Parama. Indian Traffic: Identities in Question in colonial and Postcolonial India.
Berkeley: University of California Press, 1998.
Said, Edward W. Culture and Imperialism. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1993.
——. Orientalism. New York: Pantheon, 1978.
Saint-Hilaire, J. Barthélémy. La Bouddha et Sa Religion. Paris: Librairie Académique,
1860.
Salzer, I. Buddhism, Positivism, and Modern Philosophy. Calcutta: J. Larkins, 1890.
Sandison, Alan. Introduction to Kim. Oxford World’s Classics. Oxford: Oxford Uni-
Sarvan, Charles Ponnuthurai, and Paul Balles. “Buddhism, Hinduism, and the Con-
radian Darkness.” The Conradian 26, no. 1 (1994): 70 –75.
Sargent, Epes. The Scientific Basis of Spiritualism. Boston: Colby and Rich, 1881.
Sartre, Jean-Paul. Being and Nothingness: An Essay on Phenomenological Ontology.
1943.Translated by Hazel E. Barnes. New York: Philosophical Library, 1956.
Sawamura, Hajime, and Edwin D. Mares. “How Agents Should Exploit Tetralemma
with an Eastern Mind in Argumentation.” Lecture Notes in Artificial Intelligence
3371 (Spring 2004): 259 –78.
Schopenhauer, Arthur. The World as Will and Representation. 1818 and 1844. 2 vols.
Translated by E. F. J. Payne. New York: Dover, 1966.
Schwab, Raymond. The Oriental Renaissance: Europe’s Rediscovery of India and the
East, 1680 –1880. Translated by Gene Patterson-Black and Victor Reinking. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1984.
Scott, William Stuart. Marie Corelli: The Story of a Friendship. London: Hutchinson,
1955.
Shanks, Andrew. Civil Society, Civil Religion. Oxford: Blackwell, 1995.
Shaw, Rosalind, and Charles Stewart. “Introduction: Problematizing Syncretism.”
In Syncretism/Anti-syncretism: The Politics of Religious Synthesis, edited by Charles
Stewart and Rosalind Shaw, 1–26. London: Routledge, 1994.
Shelley, Percy Bysshe. A Defense of Poetry. 1821. Boston: Ginn, 1903.
Siebers, Alisha. “Marie Corelli’s Magnetic Revitalizing Power.” In Victorian Literary
Mesmerism, edited by Martin Willis and Catherine Wynne, 182–202. Amsterdam:
Rodopi, 2006.
Silk, Jonathan A. “The Victorian Creation of Buddhism.” Journal of Indian Philoso-
phy 22 (1994): 171–96.
Sinnett, A. P. The Early Days of Theosophy in Europe. London: Theosophical Publish-
ing House, 1922.
——. Esoteric Buddhism. 1883. 7th ed. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin, 1887.
Bibliography ~ 261
Slater, T. E. Transmigration and Karma. London: Christian Literature Society for

India, 1898.
Smiles, Samuel. Self Help. 1859. Project Guttenberg Ebook. http://manybooks.net/
titles/smilessaetext97selfh10.html. 29 November 2007.
Smith, Jean, ed. Radiant Mind: Essential Buddhist Teachings and Texts. New York:
Riverhead Books, 1999.
Smith, Jonathan Z. The HarperCollins Dictionary of Religion. New York: Harper-
Collins, 1995.
Smith, Warren Sylvester. The London Heretics, 1870 –1914. New York: Dodd, Mead,
1968.
Snell, Merwin-Marie. “Modern Theosophy in Its Relation to Hinduism and Bud-
dhism.” The Biblical World (March–April 1895): 200 –205, 259 –65. Snelling,
John. The Buddhist Handbook: A Complete Guide to Buddhist Schools, Teachings,
Practice, and History. Rochester, VT: Inner Traditions: 1991.
Solomon, Robert C. From Rationalism to Existentialism: The Existentialists and Their
Nineteenth-Century Backgrounds. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2001.
Speyer, J. S. The Jātakamālā, Garland of Birth-Stories of Āryasú̄ra. 1895. Delhi: Mo-
tilal Banarsidass, 1971.
Stein, W. B. “Buddhism and Heart of Darkness.” Western Humanities Review 11
(1957): 281–85.
Steiner, Rudolph. Theosophy: An Introduction to the Supersensible Knowledge of the
World and the Destination of Man. 1924. New York: Anthroposophic Press, 1971.
——. Theosophy of the Rosicrucian. 1907. London: Rudolph Steiner Press, 1954.
Stephens, Winifred. Introduction to. L’introduction à L’historie du Buddhisme Indien
(1844), by Eugène Burnouf. Edited and translated by L. Canmer-Byng and S. A.
Kapadia as Legends of Indian Buddhism. New Dehli: Ess Ess Publications, 1976.
Stevens, Wallace. The Collected Poems of Wallace Stevens. New York: Alfred A.
Knopf, 1977.
Stewart, Susan. Nonsense: Aspects of Intertextuality in Folklore and Literature. Balti-
more: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1979.
Strozier, Robert M. Foucault, Subjectivity, and Identity: Historical Consciousness of
Subject and Self. Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 2002.
Suleri, Sara. The Rhetoric of English India. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992.
Sullivan, Zohreh T. Narratives of Empire: The Fiction of Rudyard Kipling. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1993.
Swenson, Don. Society, Spirituality, and the Sacred: A Social Scientific Introduction.
Toronto: Broadview, 1999.
Tatar, Maria M. Spellbound: Studies on Mesmerism and Literature. Princeton: Prince-
ton University Press, 1978.
Taylor, Richard. “Arthur Schopenhauer.” In Nineteenth-Century Religious Thought in the
West. Vol. 2. Edited by Ninian Smart, John Clayton, Steven Katz, and Patrick Sherry,
157–80. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985. Telang, Kashinath Timbak.
The Bhagavadgita with the Sanatsugatiya and the Anugita. Oxford: Clarendon, 1882.
The Theosophical Society International Headquarters. “Early History.” Adyar, India:
2002. http://ts-adyar.org/history.html.
Thrall, James H. “Immersing the Chela: Religion and Empire in Rudyard Kipling’s
Kim.” Religion & Literature 36, no. 3 (Autumn 2004): 45–67.
262 ~ Bibliography
Tibetan Tales, Derived from Indian Sources. Translated by F. Anton von Schiefner and
W. R. S. Ralston. London: Trübner & Co, 1882.
Tromp, Marlene. “Spirited Sexuality: Sex, Marriage, and Victorian Spiritualism.” Vic-
torian Literature and Culture 31, no. 1 (2003): 67–81.
Turner, Frank Miller. Between Science and Religion: The Reaction to Scientific Natu-
ralism in Late Victorian England. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1974.
——. Contesting Cultural Authority: Essays in Victorian Intellectual Life. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1993.
Tuthill, William Burnet. “Development through Reincarnation.” Metaphysical Maga-
zine 4 (October 1896): 250 –61.
Tuttle, Hudson. Arcana of Spiritualism: A Manual of Spiritual Science and Philosophy.
London: James Burns, 1876.
Tweed, Thomas W., and Stephen Prothero. Asian Religions in America: A Documen-
tary History. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999.
Upham, Edward. The History and Doctrine of Buddhism. London: R. Ackerman,
1829.
van der Veer, Peter. Imperial Encounters: Religion and Modernity in India and Brit-
ain. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2001.
van der Veer, Peter. “Syncretism, Multiculturalism and the Discourse of Tolerance.”
In Syncretism/Anti-syncretism: The Politics of Religious Synthesis, edited by Charles
Stewart and Rosalind Shaw, 196 –211. London: Routledge, 1994.
Venturino, Steven J. “Where Is Tibet in World Literature?” World Literature Today: A
Literary Quarterly of the University of Oklahoma 78, no. 1 (Winter 2004): 51–56.
Victoria, Brian Daizen. Zen at War. 2nd ed. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield,
2006.
Viswanathan, Gauri. Outside the Fold: Conversion, Modernity, and Belief. Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 1998.
Vitsthum, Richard C. Materialism: An Affirmative History and Definition. Amherst,
NY: Prometheus Books, 1995.
Waddell, L. Austine. “The Buddhist Pictorial Wheel of Life.” Journal of the Asiatic
Society of Bengal 61 (1892): 133–55.
——. Tibetan Buddhism. 1894. New York: Dover Publications, 1972.
Walker, E. D. Reincarnation: A Study of Forgotten Truth. 1888. New York: University

Books, 1965.
Wallace, Alfred Russel. Letter to H. P. Blavatsky. 11 January 1878. Published in The-
osophist (April 1906): 559.
Washington, Peter. Madame Blavatsky’s Baboon: A History of the Mystics, Mediums, and
Misfits Who Brought Spiritualism to America. New York: Schocken Books, 1993.
Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Translated by Talcott
Parsons. New York: Scribner, 1958.
Welbon, Guy Richard. The Buddhist Nirvāna and Its Western Interpreters. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1968.
Westminster Review. “Buddhism: Mythical and Historical.” Westminster Review 66
(1856): 162–81.
Whitlark, James. “Matthew Arnold and Buddhism.” The Arnoldian: A Review of Mid-
Victorian Culture 9, no. 1 (Winter 1981): 5–16.
——. “Nineteenth-Century ‘Nirvana Talk.’ ” South Asian Review 5, no. 2 (July 1981):
17–33.
Bibliography ~ 263
Widmer, Kingsley. “Lawrence and the Nietzschean Matrix.” In D. H. Lawrence and

Tradition, edited by Jeffrey Meyers. Amherst: University of Massachusetts, 1985.
Wier, John. “Forms of Belief in Transmigration.” Methodist Review 76 (1894):
565–73.
Wilkinson, C. W. Edwin Arnold as Poetizer and as Paganizer. London: Funk and
Wagnalls, 1884.
Wilkinson, John Gardner. The Manners and Customs of the Ancient Egyptians, includ-
ing Their Private Life, Government, Laws, Arts, Manufacture, Religion, and Early
History. London: John Murray, 1837.
Williams, Patrick. “Kim and Orientalism.” In Kim, edited by Zohreh T. Sullivan,
410 –25. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.
Winter, Alison. Mesmerized: Powers of Mind in Victorian Britain. Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 1998.
Woolf, Virginia. “From A Room of One’s Own.” In The Longman Anthology of Brit-
ish Literature. Vol. 2C. Edited by David Damrosch, Kevin Dettmar, and Jennifer
Wicke. New York: Longman/Addison-Wesley, 2003.
Wright, B. Interpreter of Buddhism to the West: Sir Edwin Arnold. New York: Book-
man, 1957.
Wurgaft, Lewis D. The Imperial Imagination: Magic and Myth in Kipling’s India.
Middletown, CT: Wesleyan University Press, 1983.
Yang, Chi-ming. “Gross Metempsychosis and Eastern Soul.” In Humans and Other
Animals in Eighteenth-Century British Culture: Representation, Hybridity, Ethics,
edited by Frank Palmeri, 13–30. Hampshire, Eng.: Ashgate, 2006.
Young, Robert J. C. Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Culture and Race. London:
Routledge, 1995.
——. White Mythologies: Writing History and the West. London: Routledge, 1990.
Zirkoff, Boris De. Preface to H. P. Blavatsky: Collected Writings 1874 –1878. Vol. 1.
Adyar, India: The Theosophical Publishing House, 1966.
Zytaruk, George J. “The Doctrine of Individuality: D. H. Lawrence’s ‘Metaphysic.’ ”
In D. H. Lawrence, A Centenary Consideration, edited by Peter Balbert and Phillip L.
Marcus, 237–253. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1985.
Index
Abel-Rémusat, Jean-Pierre, 12, 143 Archaeological Survey of India, 142, 145

active/passive dualism: physically or socially, archaeology, 130, 141– 42, 145– 46
42, 92, 127, 156 –58, 160, 208; spiritually, Armstrong, Richard A., 21–22
40, 115–16, 119, 121–24, 129, 208. Arnold, Edwin , x; The Light of Asia, 2, 3,
See under nihilism 25– 49, 84, 94, 147, 196, 215–16, 221 n 9,
Africa, 63, 93, 98, 131 222 n 16, 235 n n 30 –31
Alabaster, Henry, 12, 29, 167 Arnold, Matthew, 21, 41, 103, 186, 220 n 16,
Alexander, Sidney Arthur, 25 238n 55
Alexander the Great, 69, 93 Arundale, Francesca, 103, 120
Allen , Charles, 141 Arya Samaj, 77, 135–36, 222 n 36
Almond, Philip C., viii, 5 Aryan , 64, 98, 151, 226 n 23, 229 n 42,
Amaravati Stupa, 4, 132, 219 n 4, 233 n 7 230 n 10
Ambereley, John R., 2, 21–22, 242 n 11 Ashvaghosa, 222 n 11

Ananda, 165, 172, 240 n 68 Asoka, Emperor, 37, 69, 142
anatman , Buddhist tenet of (“no-self ” assimilation/non-assimilation of Buddhism,
doctrine), 23, 45, 104, 114, 116, 148, 5, 23, 51, 77, 86, 114, 122, 127, 172,
163 – 67, 169, 172, 175, 184 –85, 191, 178, 184 –85, 196, 203
196, 201, 203 – 4, 208, 216 –17, 238n 48. atheism, 4, 8, 90, 116, 186 –87, 204; of
See also Three Marks of Existence Buddhism, 23, 41, 43, 45, 48, 51, 91,
Anderson , Jerome A., 104 116, 179 –80, 184, 223 n 24
Anglicanism. See Church of England Atman , 80 –81, 83, 96, 99, 105, 149, 167,
Anglicists, 135–36, 140, 233 n n 14 –15, 182, 216. See also Hinduism
234 n 18, 239 n 62 atomic theory, 54, 79, 81, 99, 102, 108–9,
Anglo-Indians, 19, 80, 134, 233 n 12, 176, 182, 224 n 4
234 n 18 Avaita Vedānta, 182
anitya (impermanence), Buddhist tenet of,
148, 164, 239 n 57. See also Three Marks of Bakhtin , Mikhail, 8, 61, 234 n 16
Existence Ballard, Frank, 166
Annan , Noel, 234 n 19 Barnes, Hazel E., 196
Anthroposophy, 50, 63, 66, 71 Batchelor, Stephen , 28, 181
arahant, 180 Baucom, Ian , 129, 136, 232 n 2, 234 n 18
266 ~ Index
Baudrillard, Jean , 204 Burnouf, Eugène, 9, 12, 20, 179 –80

Beal, Samuel, 12, 29, 143 – 44 Butler, Josephine, 72
Beardsworth, Richard, 188 Byrne, Peter, 67
Beckett, Samuel, 193
Beer, Gillian , 222 n 15 Campbell, Joseph, 65
Bell, Kevin , 193 Camus, Albert, 193
Bell, Michael, 243 n 26, 243 n 28 capitalism, 126, 156, 184; foundational
Bellah, Robert, 207, 224 n 1 beliefs of, 45, 121; consumption-based,
Bennett, Charles (Ananda Metteyya), 25 122, 184, 194, 199, 205; corporate-state,
Besant, Annie, 72 –73, 87, 102, 104, 167 187, 191, 194, 199, 208; laissez-faire
Bevir, Mark, 229 n 48 or market, 15, 17, 35, 121, 124, 156,
Bhabha, Homi K., 8, 49, 61, 136 185, 191, 204; nineteenth-century, 162.
Bhagavad-Gita, 2, 11, 182 See under Protestantism
Bigandet, The Right Rev. P. (Paul Ambrose), Caracciolo, Peter, 2, 222 n 12
19, 29 Carlleyle, Archibald, 142
Bishop, Peter, 75, 150 Carlyle, Thomas, 103, 186
Blavatsky, H. P. (Helene Petrovna), 9, Carr, Kent, 230 n 7
94 –95, 97, 100, 104, 125, 137, 150, Carroll, Lewis, 25, 229 n 4
182, 226 n 25, 227 n n 27–30, 228n 35, Cartesian cogito, 12, 82, 98, 162, 165– 66,
229 n 42; Isis Unveiled, 3, 64; Key to 184, 238n 49. See also self
Theosophy, 64; life of, 63 – 65, 75, 133; Catholic Church, The, 4, 14 –15, 18, 74,
Secret Doctrine, 64 144, 220 n 11; anti-Catholic discourse, 21,
Boden Chair of Sanskrit, 7, 58, 27, 34, 62, 66 – 67, 70, 73, 151; Spanish
Bodh-Gaya, 141, 143 Inquisition of, 55, 67, 73
Bodichon , Barbara, 72 Census of Religious Worship (1851), 14, 18
bodhisattva ideal, 160, 180, 237 n 47 Cerullo, John J., 83
body/soul dichotomy, 45, 80, 98–99, 114, Ceylon (Sri Lanka), 9, 29, 75, 141, 143,
118, 122 –23, 127, 162, 167, 171, 184, 150, 179, 182, 196, 219 n 5
192, 201–3 Chaldeanism, 74
Boothby, Guy, 109, 236 n 36 China, 1, 6, 10, 30, 104, 143, 153
Brahmanism, 21, 34, 73 –76, 79, 88 Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate, 20, 23–24
Brantlinger, Patrick, 37 Christian Socialism, 66
Braud, An n , 72 Church of Christ, Scientist (Christian
Brear, Douglas, 223 n 21 Science), 50, 62, 66, 71–72, 226 n 21
Brewster, Earl and Achsah, 196 –97, 237 n 43, Church of England, The, 4, 9, 20; Broad
243 n 30 Church, 13, 16, 48, 84; disestablishment
British Empire, 2 –7, 19, 26, 37–38, 48, 61, of, 14; High Church and Low Church, 13,
112, 121, 124, 128, 131, 135, 141, 158, 16; history of, 27. See also evangelicalism;
162, 170. See also imperialism latitudinarianism
British Museum, The, viii, 5, 97, 233 n 7, civil religion (and un-civil religion), 11, 207
234 n 23 Clarke, J. J., 227 n n 27–28
British Network of Buddhist Clarke, James Freeman , 27
Organizations, 2 Clausen , Christopher, viii, 222 n 7, 240 n 1
Brobjer, Thomas H., 242 n 19 Clemens, Justin , 204
Buddha, The (Siddhartha Gautama): and Clement of Alexandria, 97
caste, 21, 34, 46; life of, 3, 10, 30 –31, 35, Coates, John D., 95
114 –15, 141, 143, 220 n 15, 222 n n 10 –11; Cobbe, Frances Power, 73
on nirvana, 171–72, 178, 183; similarities Colebrooke, Henry Thomas, 179
to Jesus of, 20 –21, 27–28, 43, 48, 114 Coleman , William Emmette, 226 n 25
Buddhaghosa, 221 n 7 Colenso, John William, Bishop of Natal, 13
Buddhist psychology, 161– 69. See also Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, 63
anatman Collins, Mortimer, 102
Budge, Wallis, 97 Collins, Wilkie, 8, 63
Bulwer-Lytton , Edward, 63 Colombo, Reginald Stephen. See Copleston ,
Bunsen , Ernest de, 221 n 6 Reginald
Burdett, Carolyn , 89 colonialism, British. See British Empire
Burfield, Diana, 72 comparative religion , 6, 32, 94, 179; as
Burma (Myanmar), 4, 30, 141, 150 conduit for Buddhism into the West, 20,
Index ~ 267
30, 193; formation of, 3, 12, 26; hybrid 235n31; definition of, 148; as “Law,” 27,
religions and, 57, 60, 75, 91. See also 38, 59, 71, 78, 116, 127, 146, 176, 226n16
textualized Buddhism, Western Dhammapada, 152, 175
Comte, Auguste, 41, 50, 186 dissent. See Noncomformist
Conrad, Joseph, 63; Heart of Darkness, 3, Dixon , Joy, 72
103, 193 –95, 197, 242 n 24; Lord Jim, Doherty, Gerald, 196, 243 n 29
193; Secret Agent, 194 Doolan , Tim, 150
consensus of Buddhism, historical and Doyle, Arthur Conan , 55, 63, 89
doctrinal, 7, 78, 146 Droit, Roger-Pol, 10, 181, 183, 209,
consensus of Christianity, historical and 241 n 10
doctrinal, 18–19, 98, 114 Droogers, André, 61
Conway, Daniel, 243 n 20 dualistic logic, Western , 140, 158, 170 –72,
Cook, Keningale 184, 201. See also non-dualistic logic,
Copleston , Reginald, Bishop of Colombo, Buddhist
22, 42 dukkha. See Four Noble Truths; suffering;
Corelli, Marie, 63, 89 –90, 231 n 19, 231 n 22; Three Marks of Existence
hybrid religion in the work of, 62, 92, 95, Dumoulin , Heinrich, 180
113; Life Everlasting, 3, 89 –91, 107–14, Durkheim, Émile, 224 n 1
116, 118, 230 n 8, 231 n 19; reincarnation
and karma in the novels of, 109; A East India Company, 2, 4, 5, 141
Romance of Two Worlds, 3, 71, 89 –95, Eddy, Mary Baker, 72. See also Church of
108–11, 116 –18, 225 n 9, 230 n 8 Christ, Scientist
Council of Nicaea, 67 Eddy, William, 64
counter-invasion , cultural, 7, 9, 18, 19 –24, Egypt, 63, 68, 88, 93, 96 –98, 103 – 4,
38, 63, 208 107, 124
Cousin , Victor, 241 n 10 Eitel, Ernest J., 7, 20, 22, 39, 58, 104, 115,
crisis of faith, Victorian , 26, 39, 51, 62, 172 119, 160
Cunningham, Alexander, 142 Eliot, George, 21, 42,
Cust, Robert Needham, 96 Eliot, T. S., 26, 63, 186, 243 n 24; “The
Waste Land,” 3, 193 –94
Dalai Lama, vii, 2, 102, 208 Emerson , Ralph Waldo, 11, 63, 182
Darwin , Charles, 186 –87; Descent of Man , Encyclopaedia Britannica, 28
26, 52; On the Origin of Species, 34, 51, Enlightenment, The, 51–52, 83, 184,
228n 32; See also evolutionary theory; 192, 204
Social Darwinism Essenes, 69, 227 n 28
Das, Sarat Chandra, 235 n 29 esoteric/exoteric distinction , 3, 55, 59,
Davis, Bret W., 190 66 –76, 78
Davis, Mary F., 53 Essays and Reviews, 13
Dean , Susan Thach, viii Evangelical Alliance, 17
decadence. See degeneration evangelicalism, eighteenth- and nineteenth-

Deer Park at Sarnath, 31 century Christian , 17, 27, 66, 84, 122,
degeneration , 103 – 4, 111, 188–89, 203 131; and empire, 140; revival of, 13, 14
Deism. See Natural Theology Everett, Charles C., 168, 177, 241 n 3
demi-immortality, 106, 109 –11, 117–18, evolutionary theory, Darwinian , 3, 4, 18, 26,
124, 190. See also reincarnation 34 –36, 38, 52, 58, 71, 79, 86, 103, 116,
dependent origination , Buddhist doctrine 148, 187, 222 n 15, 224 n 3; compatibility
of, 146, 153 –55, 168, 171, 173, 185, of Buddhism with, 27, 58, 148; natural
190, 201–2, 206, 208, 217–18, 236 n 41, selection within , 39, 101, 116; survival of
237 n 42 the fittest in , 22, 25, 29, 38, 71, 186. See
de Purucker, G., 80 also Darwin , Charles; Social Darwinism;
Descartes, René. See Cartesian cogito spiritual evolution
desire (trishna, thirst), 36, 114 –24, 127, 144, existential condition , the modern , 187–88,
147, 149, 154, 156, 160, 164, 196 –98, 194 –97, 204, 206
200, 202 –3, 218, 231 n 20, 232 n 24. See existentialism, 188, 203 – 4, 244 n 35. See
under Lawrence, D. H. under individualism; freedom; nihilism
Devachan , 80, 81, 84 –85
Dharma, Buddhist doctrine of, 31, 80, 86, faith/works, dichotomy of, 19, 68, 100, 106,
148–52, 218; anthropomorphized, 43, 111, 114, 119, 122 –23, 126, 184, 192
268 ~ Index
Fabian Society, 72 heaven/hell, Christian doctrine of, 23, 43,

Fa Hian , 142 – 43 84 –86, 100, 106, 108, 126, 182, 229 n 47
Feik, Chris, 204 Hebraism, 62, 68
feminism, 56, 72 –73. See also women Heckel, Karl, 230 n 9
FitzGerald, Edward, 63 Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich, 181, 187
Five Aggregates, Buddhist doctrine of the, Heidegger, Martin , 181, 188, 195,
81–82, 163; definition of, 167, 217 Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn , 50,
Five Precepts, Buddhist doctrine of the, 21, 63, 69, 80
78; definition of, 215–16 Hesse, Herman , 193, 207
Ford, Henry, 203 Higher Criticism, 27, 57
Forlong, J. G. R., 22 Hilton , James, 109, 151, 207
Forster, E. M., 193 Hinduism, 68; anti-Hindu discourse, 57;
Foucault, Michel, 119, 204 in contrast to Buddhism, 104; soul
Foucaux, Philippe Edouard, 12 in , 99; as a source for hybrid religions
Four Noble Truths, The, 31, 36, 40, 77–78, (Theosophy), 74, 76 –77, 84, 87, 124,
119, 122, 149, 156, 159, 184, 189, 200, 228n 38; Western study of, 11, 63. See also
205, 228n 39, 240 n 65; definition of, Atman; reincarnation. See under Kipling,
114 –15, 213 –14 Rudyard
Fox, Douglas A., 161, 172, 242 n 15 Hoare, John Newenham, 97
Frazer, James, 65 Hodgson , Brian Houghton , 12, 221 n 3
freedom, 42, 87; Buddhist, 201–2, 206; Hodgson , Richard, 65
individual or existential, 195, 204 –5 Holmes, Oliver Wendell, 26
Freemasonry, 133 Hopkirk, Peter, 233 n 8, 235 n 29
Freud, Sigmund, 83, 99, 119, 163, 168, Howard, Mrs. Charles L., 231 n 21
229 n 46 Howe, Irving, 129
Fürer, Alois, 145– 46 Huan Tsang, 143
Hume, David, 165, 238n 53, 239 n 59
Gagnier, Regina, 184 Humphreys, Christmas, 26
Gandhara, 143 Huxley, Aldous, 207
Gandhi, Mohandas, 173 Huxley, Thomas Henry, 36, 50, 71, 79, 98,
Gaskell, Elizabeth: Cranford, vii 103, 186, 235 n 32, 241 n 8
Gautama, Siddhartha. See Buddha hybridity, 8, 49, 104, 136, 234 n 16. See
Geertz, Clifford, 162 under race
Giddens, Anthony, 186 hybrid religion , 9, 51, 57, 59 – 63, 65, 71,
Giles, James, 165– 66 76, 82, 85, 87, 99, 182, 206, 226 n 21. See
Gilmour, David, 134 under comparative religion; Corelli, Marie;
Gnosticism, 62, 68– 69, 73, 77 Haggard, H. Rider; Kipling, Rudyard
God: definition of, 67, 100, 108; existence
of, 41, 62, 66 imperialism, 48, 60, 62 – 63, 170; discursive
Goddess, The, 74, 95, 109, 112 –13 or intellectual, 5, 67, 87, 116, 134, 140,
Godwin , Joscelyn , 84 171, 173, 239 n 62; war and conquest of, 5,
Gordon , Rev. M. L., 182 37, 39, 124, 135, 140, 145, 156, 173 –74,
Gosse, Edmond, 15 185, 222 n 17. See also British Empire
Gowans, Christopher W., 165– 66, 169, 174, India: British colonial occupation of, 37, 61,
183, 201 73, 135, 156, 171; Buddhism in , 4, 130,
Graham, Colin , 222 n 14 233 n 7; stereotypes about, 115, 134. See
Greco-Buddhist statues, viii also Anglo-Indians; British Empire
Greece, 10, 219 n 6 Indian Civil Service, 135, 239 n 62
Indian Mutiny of 1857, 8, 98
Haggard, H. Rider, 63, 89, 230 n n 6 –11, Indian National Congress, 136
231 n 20; Ayesha, vii, 2, 3, 89, 90, individualism, 53, 162, 184; active nihilism
92, 93 –96, 107–18, 125, 230 n 11, as, 192 –93; Buddhist, 161, 238n 48;
231 n n 16 –17; life of, 92, 230 n 8; She, vii, capitalist, 23, 45; existential, 193 –95, 201;
3, 89 –90, 93 –98, 107–18, 142, 231 n 15; progressive, 187, 192, 204 – 6; Protestant,
She and Allan , 89, 118–19 15, 19, 23, 55, 62, 82, 113, 162, 184,
Hardy, R. Spence, 19, 29, 178, 217 191–92, 199, 202, 204 –5, 238n 48; as self-
Hauser, Mrs. I. L., 223 n 26 interest, 162, 166 – 67, 184, 195, 205; of
Hawthorne, Nathaniel, 130 the soul, 99, 203; within Spiritualism, 55.
Index ~ 269
See also freedom; self; soul; will. See under viii, 3, 26, 94, 128, 136–40, 147, 169–71;
Lawrence, D. H. life of, 5, 131–35, 139, 151, 155–63,
Indo-European language group, 98, 226 n 23 171–76, 232n5, 233n9, 233n13, 234n19,
industrialism, 122, 187 235nn30–31, 237n45, 239n62, 240n68;
inheritance (as reincarnation), 106 –7, 124, Plain Tales, 134; portrayal of Hinduism
228n 32, 231 n 13. See also reincarnation by, 133; religious beliefs of, 131–34, 140,
Irigaray, Luce, 238n 47 230n6; Something of Myself, 131
Isis, 73, 95. See also Goddess Kierkegaard, Søren , 204
Islam (Muslim), 4, 26, 28, 57, 63, 130 –33, Kisagotami, 45– 47
137, 140 – 41, 147 Knight, William, 102
Islam, Shamsul, 152, 233 n 6 Knights Templar, 62, 69
Körös, Alexander Csomo de, 12
Japan , 1, 2, 5, 10, 210, 242 n 13 Kushinagara, 31, 141– 43
J. M. M., 21, 34
Jacobson , Nolan Pliny, 163, 174 Lamaism, Tibetan , 3, 145, 151, 236 n 38
James, Henry, 131 Lamarck, Jean-Baptiste de, 51, 71, 103,
Jataka, 32, 240 n 68 222 n 15, 224 n 4, 228n 32
Jay, Elisabeth, 14 Lane, Margaret Trotter, 234 n 26
Jesus, 68– 69, 95, 99, 170; life of, 22, 54, Langdon , Samuel, 9
108, 125, 227 n 29; similarity to Buddha, latitudinarianism, 13, 16 –17, 84, 125
15, 20 –21, 27–28, 43, 48, 114 law of conservation of energy, 39, 79
Jesus-versus-Buddha debate, 27–28. See also Lawrence, D. H., 3, 193 –94, 196 –203,
Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate 237 n 43, 243 n 26; Aaron’s Rod, 3,
Johnson , Samuel, 51 199 –200; conception of desire by, 197–
Jones, William, 11 200, 202 –3; conception of individualism
Jowett, Benjamin , 13 by, 198–201; Lady Chatterley’s Lover,
Judaism, 14, 20, 27, 60, 68, 74, 147, 197–201; on self/other, 199 –201; Sons
227 n 28. See also Hebraism; Kabbalah and Lovers, 197, 200; vitalism of, 194,
Judge, William Quan , 64, 72, 224 n 3 197–98, 200 –203, 243 n 30; Women in
Julien , Stanislas, 143 Love, 3, 199 –200
Lawrence, Frieda, 196
Kabbalah, 62, 64, 68, 73, 75 Layard, Austen Henry, 98
Kafka, Franz, 193, 204 Legge, F., 76
Kapilavastu, 30, 141, 143, 145– 46 Lilly, W. S., 120, 148, 161, 166
karma, Buddhist doctrine of, 23, 35, Limbini Grove, 143
38, 42, 59, 63, 68, 79, 88, 117, 121, Lopez, Donald S. Jr., viii, 151, 235 n 29
145– 48, 160; as “action/reaction ,” Lowe, Louisa, 55
79, 115, 156 –57; as cause and effect, Lucas, Judith C., 45– 47, 84, 91, 108,
79, 101, 148, 154; definition of, 144; 116 –18, 198
Indian origin of, 96; merit/debt of, 85, Lumbini, 141

104, 111–13, 115, 119 –20, 157– 60, Luther, Martin , 20
166, 184; moral economy of, 100, Lycett, Andrew, 131, 133, 232 n 1,
114 –27; Theosophical interpretation of, 235 n 30
85–86, 167– 68; Victorian debate about, Lyell, Charles, 51, 224 n 4
100 –101; Western stereotypes about,
155, 161 Macaulay, Thomas Babington , 135
Kaufman n , Walter, 190, 243 n 22 MacDonald, Frederika, 77
Keble, John , 13 Mackenzie, Colin , 4
Keely, E. W., 102 Mahatma letters, 64 – 65, 70, 75–78,
Kemp, Sandra, 147, 240 n 68 94 –95, 133, 226 n 25
Kerouac, Jack, 207 Mahayana Buddhism, x, 6, 30, 32, 144,
Kershner, R. B., 231 n 18 146 – 48, 150 –51, 157, 160, 180, 185,
King, Richard, 240 n 68 202, 237 n 47
Kingsford, Anna, 72 Malinda, King (and the Malindapahna),
Kinkead-Weekes, Mark, 174 168, 175
Kipling, Lockwood, 132, 135, 233 n 8 Malley, John , 230 n 11
Kipling, Rudyard: hybrid religion in the writing Man n , Thomas, 193
of, 133, 136, 139; Jungle Book, 33; Kim, Manthorpe, Victoria, 230 n 8
270 ~ Index
Marsh, Richard, 98 New Age movement, 125, 183, 206 –7,

martial arts Buddhism, x, 109, 207 235 n 32
masculinity (male-oriented), 40, 56, 67, New Woman , 113, 231 n 16
73 –74, 93, 112, 118–19, 131, 156, 160, Newman , John Henry, 13
185, 198, 231 n 16, 237 n 45, 242 n 14 Nhat Hahn , Thich, 208, 216, 222 n 18,
materialism. See spiritualism/materialism debate 239 n 63
Maugham, W. Somerset, 207 Nietzsche, Friedrich, 181, 188–92; Antichrist,
Max Müller, Friedrich. See Müller, 188–89; Birth of Tragedy, 189; on eternal
Friedrich Max recurrence, 189 –92, 242 n 22; Gay Science,
Mayadevi, 30, 45, 141 190; Thus Spoke Zarathustra, 188, 190; on
McConnell, Daniel J., 232 n 5 the Übermensch, 189 –92, 195, 197–200,
McCutchan , Corinne, 139, 173 203; Will to Power, 3, 188, 242 n 17; on the
McDonough, Sheila, 28–29 will to power, 189 –90, 195, 198–200, 205,
McKerlie, Helen Graham, 21, 42, 166 – 67, 243 n 20. See under nihilism
222 n 12 nihilism, 40, 48, 115, 149, 172, 181, 183;
McLeod, Hugh, 18 Buddha on , 240 n 65; existentialist, 192,
McMillin , Laurie Hovell, 235 n 29 195–97; Nietzschean active, 188–90, 192,
meditation , Buddhist, x, 156, 208 194 –98, 202 – 4, 242 n 23; Nietzschean
Melton , J. Gordon , 225 n 8 passive 188–89, 195, 197, 200 –203 See
memory. See under reincarnation under nirvana
mesmerism, 54 –55, 62, 69, 124, 225 n 11 nirvana: as annihilation , 40, 44, 48, 84,
metempsychosis, 96 –98, 102, 105–7, 117, 172, 187, 193, 195, 197, 203,
124 –25, 230 n 9. See also reincarnation 207, 223 n 20, 223 n n 26 –27, 238 n 52,
Michael, Leo, 231 n 14 251 n 2; Buddha’s refusal to define, 43,
middle-class ideology and values, Victorian , 178, 241 n 3; candle flame image for, 91,
43, 47– 49, 162, 191, 207 169, 229 n 4; as eternalism, 172, 178–83,
Middle Way, Buddhist doctrine of the, 31, 187, 195, 205, 206 –7; as an ethical state
40, 46, 114, 123 –27, 130, 146 – 49, 157, achievable in life, 178, 180, 241 n 8; in
159 – 60, 172, 214 Haggard’s novels, 93, 114; indefinability
Mill, John Stuart, 21, 22, 41, 181, 186 of, 43, 183, 240 n 1; within Theosophy, 83.
Milton , John , ix, 41, 130 See also nihilism
modernism, 3, 83, 89, 184 –88, 192 –96, 203 Nixon , Judith V., ix
Monier-Williams, Monier, 20 –21, 58, 78, 81, Noakes, Richard, 54
115, 119, 160, 170, 223 n 20 Noble Eightfold Path, The, 21, 31, 40, 77,
Montgomerie, Thomas, 150 78, 114, 123, 148, 159, 205, 232 n 25;
Müller, Friedrich Max (F. Max): comparing definition of, 214 –15
Christianity and Buddhism, 27–28; critical Nonconformist, 4, 13, 17; “New Dissent,”
of Victorian interpretations of Buddhism, 14; “Old Dissent,” 14
34, 221 n 9; as founder and advocate of non-dualistic logic, Buddhist, 159, 174, 184,
comparative religion , 3, 6, 26, 57–58, 202; tetralemma as, 172. See also dualistic
225 n 5;on the historical basis of Buddhism, logic, Western
32; the life of, 12, 58; on nirvana, 91, 179,
182, 184; as source for contemporaries, O’Connor, Erin , 240 n 67
75, 94 Oldenberg, Herman n , x, 20, 169, 179, 190
muscular Christianity, 119 Olcott, Henry Steel, x, 9, 64, 75, 228n 34
Muslim. See Islam Oppenheim, Janet, 56
Myers, Frederic, 55 Orientalism: nineteenth-century, 11–12, 31,
49, 134 –35, 141, 153, 179; postmodern ,
Nagasena, 168– 69, 210, 239 n n 58–59 170, 134 –35. See also postcolonial theory
Nazarenes, 69 origin , genetic or racial, 8, 98, 103, 125, 161
Naravane, V. S., 221 n 7 Orwell, George, 204
Natural Theology (Deism), 13, 52, 60, 62, Osiris, 96, 97, 99
67, 86, 99, 110, 113, 117, 124, 126, 207 Oswald, Feliz L., 22
Nature (as spirit or force), 39, 70, 107, Oulton , Carolyn W., ix
109 –10, 112 –13, 119, 202, 225 n 5 Owen , Alex, 56, 83, 226 n 15, 226 n 20
Neale, E. Vansittart, 34 Paley, William, 52
Nepal, 2, 141, 211 Pali canon , 6, 29, 32, 105, 150, 219 n 2,
Neufeldt, Ronald, 85 222 n 12
Index ~ 271
Pali Text Society, 12, 26 Rahula, Walpola, 217

Paranirvana, Buddhist doctrine of, 31, 141, Rattigan , William H., 120
142 Reid, Fred, 134
Parker, W. B., 131 reincarnation: Buddhist doctrine of, 23, 35,
Parry, An n , 232 n 1, 237 n 44 59, 63, 68, 88, 94–96, 99, 105–14, 125,
Parsons, Gerald, 15, 17 229n1; and eternal return, 190; Hindu,
passivity, Buddhist. See active/passive 99, 100, 105, 113, 124; Indian (Hindu-
Pearson , Richard, 118 Buddhist), 98–100, 104, 107–14; memory
Peiris, William, 80 between lives in, 99, 101–3, 108, 111,
periodical press, nineteenth-century, viii, 20, 113, 126; Theosophical interpretation of,
27, 53, 89, 145, 220 n 12 84–86; Victorian debate about, 96–99.
Phillips, Richard, 28; Story of Gautama See also demi-immortality; inheritance;
Buddha, 3, 25– 49, 92 metempsychosis; resurrection; transmigration
Pieterse, Jan Nederveen , 9 religion , definition of, 224 n 1
Pirsig, Robert M., 207 resurrection , 92, 94 –95, 97, 106,
Plato (Platonism), 68– 69, 88, 97–99, 123, 109, 124 –25. See also Jesus; Osiris;
162, 227 n 27 reincarnation
Podmore, Frank, 55, 225 n 10 Rhodes, Cecil, 131, 203
Positivist Political and Social Union , 50 Rhys Davids, C. A. F. (Caroline), x, 6, 12,
postcolonial theory, 8, 60 – 61, 135, 170, 26, 81, 163, 167, 238n 51
173, 240 n 67. See under Orientalism Rhys Davids, T. W. (Thomas), 3, 6, 12, 20,
postmodernism, 244 n 34 26, 28, 29, 34, 36, 58, 218, 221 n 18,
poststructuralist theory, 166, 238n 49 221 n 9, 232 n 24, 238n 50; on anatman ,
Prejevalsky, Nikolai, 150 164; as a defender of Buddhism, 38;
Princep, Henry and James, 12, 142 on the ethical principles of Buddhism,
progressivism, Victorian , 62, 103, 119, 213 –16; on karma and reincarnation , 99,
163, 186, 203 – 4; antithetical to 100 –101, 105, 229 n 41; on the life of
degeneration , 103; antithetical to Buddha, 30; on the Middle Way, 123; on
Nirvana and nihilism, 186 –87, 192 –98; nirvana, 180, 241 n 7
evolutionary, 35–36, 53, 71, 103, 124; Richards, Thomas, 236 n 35, 239 n 62
social, 103, 121–22, 126, 156, 194 –95. Robertson , James, 54
See also spiritual evolution Romanticism, 52, 63, 79, 99, 176, 179
Protestantism: Calvinism within , 14, 55, Roosevelt, Theodore, 203
62, 100, 108, 125; emphasis on textual Rossetti, Dante Gabriel, 63, 98
sources in , 18, 30, 76; foundational beliefs Rosicrucianism, 55, 62, 64, 69
of, 17–18, 45, 48, 55; historical parallel Roy, Parama, 134, 234 n 27
to capitalism, 15, 120 –22, 162, 187, 191, Royal Asiatick Society of Bengal,
238n 48; Puritanism within , 53, 62, 68, 11, 142
130; Reformation , the, ix, 15, 52, 82, Royal Asiatic Society, 2, 145
130; similarities to Buddhism of, 20, 27,

34. See also faith/works; heaven/hell; Said, Edward W., 129, 170
individualism; sin/redemption; body/soul. Saint-Hilaire, Jules Barthélémy, 20, 179
See under individualism Sakyamuni. See Buddha, The
Prothero, Stephen , 242 n 12 Salzer, I., 149, 228n 40
Pusey, Edward, 13 samsara, cycle of, 144, 176, 218
Pythagoras, 68– 69, 88, 97, 104, 190, Sandison , Alan , 128
227 n 27, 229 n 1 Sanskrit canon , 6, 12, 29, 32,
150 –51, 219 n 2
Queen Victoria, 7, 26, 112 Sarnath, Deer Park at, 31, 141, 143
Sartre, Jean-Paul, 195–96, 203 –5,
race (and racism), 6, 11, 15, 50, 98, 103, 243 n n 31–32
122, 125, 174, 197 226 n 23, 230 n 10; in Schopenhauer, Arthur, 63, 180 –82, 189,
Haggard’s writing, 93, 230 n 11; hybridity 191, 196, 241 n 9, 242 n 19
of, 8–9, 19, 136, 161; in Kipling’s writing, Schwab, Raymond, 11
128, 131, 134, 135, 137, 139, 151, 170, scientific materialism, 18, 65, 71, 187. See
174, 232 n 1; in Lawrence’s writing, 198; spiritualism/materialism dualism
in Theosophy, 64, 72, 104, 229 n 42, scientific naturalism, 4, 51–52, 54, 61– 62,
229 n 48. See also Aryan 70, 86, 91–94, 124
272 ~ Index
self: and other, 87, 170 –71, 184, 201–3; Sravasti, 141– 42
autonomy of, 149, 162, 185, 191; Sri Lanka. See Ceylon
continuous identity of, 101, 111, Stanley, A. P., 13
174 –76, 190; as identity, 161– 62, 168, Stevens, Wallace, 180
185; process, 166, 169, 201; split-and- Stewart, Charles, 226 n 18
multiplied, 81–82, 167; substance, 166, Stewart, Susan , 165, 172
169 –70, 201. See also Cartesian cogito; Strong, Dawsonne M., 155
individualism Strozier, Robert M., 238n 49
self-determination. See will suffering (dukkha), 36, 78, 96, 114 –24, 127,
self-help, 42 – 43, 49, 62, 78, 85, 100, 126 131, 144, 147– 49, 152 –56, 159, 163 – 64,
self-interest. See under individualism 176, 184, 188–90, 197, 200, 213 –14,
self-made man , 162, 184 –85, 216, 218, 240 n 65
188–92, 203 –5 Sujata, 45– 47
Setting into Motion of the Wheel of the Suleri, Sara, 239 n 62
Dharma, The, 31, 78, 116, 141 Sullivan , Zohreh T., 128, 138, 160, 237 n 47
sex, 9, 19, 56, 93, 116, 117–18, 198, sunyata, 185
200 –201, 215, 231 n 20, 237 n 45 Suzuki, D. T., x
Shanks, Andrew, 189 Swedenborgianism, 124
Shaw, Rosalind, 226 n 18 syncretism, religious, 9, 50, 59, 226 n 18
Siebers, Alisha, 231 n 18
Siddhartha Gautama. See Buddha Tatar, Maria M., 225 n 11
Sinnett, A. P., 64, 66, 71, 75–76, 80, 88, Taylor, Richard, 241 n 9
227 n 31, 228n 38, 229 n 47 Tennyson , Alfred, 34, 42
sin/redemption , Christian doctrine of, textualized Buddhism, Western , 5–7, 30,
23, 43, 68, 86, 88, 114, 120, 122 –23, 151, 179, 241 n 6
126 –27, 144, 205; moral economy of, 43, Theosophy, 3, 13, 63 –86, 89, 91, 95, 110,
100, 111, 114 –16, 119 –25 124 –25, 182, 224 n 3, 227 n 26
skandhas. See Five Aggregates Theosophical Society International, The, 50,
Slater, T. E., 88, 101 64, 77, 97, 167, 224 n 3, 226 n 24; in India,
Smiles, Samuel, 191–92. See also self-help 73, 97, 133
Smith, Warren Sylvester, 65, 70 Theosophical Society Pasadena, The, 64,
Snell, Merwin-Marie, 77 72, 224 n 3
Social Darwinism, 35–37, 71, 103, 222 n 15. Theravada Buddhism, x, 6, 9, 30, 32, 78,
See also evolutionary theory 144, 146, 150 –51, 160, 180, 223 n 23
Société Asiatique de Paris, 2, 143 Thipakon , Chao Phya, 29
Society for Psychical Research, 53, 65, 83 Thoreau, Henry David, 11
soul: Anthroposophical, 104; extinction Thrall, James H., 234 n 20
of, 53, 180; identity and the, 126, 162; Three Fires, Buddhist doctrine of the, 144,
immortality or eternalism of, 97, 164, 157–58, 215
183 –84; individuality of, 99, 103, 125; Three Marks of Existence, Buddhist
Judeo-Christian , 82, 86, 182, 185. See also doctrine of the, 148– 49, 154, 164, 184,
body/soul; individualism; self 216 –17
soul-theory, Western , 82, 89, 98–99, 101– 4, Tibet, vii, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 10, 30, 179, 218,
113, 125–26, 149, 201. See also body/soul 228n 35, 236 n 35, 236 n 39; in Haggard’s
South Kensington Museum, 5, 131, 232 n 5 writing, 93 –94, 109; in Kipling’s writing,
Spencer, Herbert, 136, 137, 222 n 15 131–33, 140 – 46, 150 –53, 158; and
Spirit (as distinct from soul), 53, 63, 66 – 69, Theosophy, 64, 65, 75, 77, 133
74, 81–82, 95, 110 –11, 119, 182 Tibetan Buddhism, x, 94, 119, 145– 46,
spiritual evolution (and devolution), 27, 28, 152 –53, 202. See also Lamaism
53, 55, 62, 71–72, 80, 85–86, 91, 95, Tingley, Katherine, 72
101–13, 121, 126. See also evolutionary Tractarian Movement, 13
theory, Darwinian; progressivism, Victorian Transcendentalism, American , 11, 52,
spiritualism/materialism dualism, 4, 18, 62 – 63, 79, 99, 167, 179, 182, 220 n 8,
51–59, 62, 66, 90, 122, 116, 121, 242 n 12
180 –81, 184, 187, 194, 224 n 4. See also transmigration , 96 –97, 105–10, 124,
scientific materialism 229 n 41. See also reincarnation
Spiritualism moveme n t, 13, 52 –53, 62 – 63, Tripitaka, 32
91, 94, 112, 182, 225 n 6, 230 n 8 trishna. See desire
Index ~ 273
Tromp, Marlene, 56 Western civilization , 87, 98, 127, 195

Turner, Frank Miller, 52, 242 n 16 Weston , Jessie, 65
Turnour, George, 9 Wheel of Life, Buddhist doctrine of the, 146,
Tuthill, William Burnet, 103 149, 152 – 61, 217–18, 236 n 39
Tuttle, Hudson , 53, 225 n 6 Whitlark, James, 22, 177, 240 n 1
Tweed, Thomas W., 242 n 12 Widmer, Kingsley, 196
Wicca, 57, 72, 240 n 69. See also witchcraft
Upham, Edward, 2 Wier, John , 97
Wilkins, Charles, 11
Vacchagotta, 171, 241 n 2 Wilkinson , John Gardner, 97
Vajrayana Buddhism. See Tibetan Buddhism will, 48, 62, 111, 116 –17, 160, 188, 197,
van der Veer, Peter, 229 n 48 205; free, 42, 161
Victoria and Albert Museum, viii, 5 Winter, Alison , 54
Victoria, Brian Daizen , 222 n 17 witchcraft, European , 55–58, 73, 225 n 15.
Victoria, Queen. See Queen Victoria See also Wicca
Virgin Mary, 73 –74; See also Catholic Church women , representation of, 45– 47, 53,
Viswanathan , Gauri, 140, 229 n 48 56, 62, 71–72. See also feminism;
Vyver, Bertha, 101 Goddess
Woolf, Virginia, 237 n 45
Waddell, L. Austine, 94, 145– 46, 151–52, works/faith. See faith/works
218, 236 n 39 Wurgaft, Lewis D.
Wagner, Richard, 181
Walker, E. D., 100, 102 Yang, Chi-ming, 104
Wallace, Alfred Russel, 71 Yeats, William Butler, 26, 63, 80, 193,
war. See under imperialism Yoshodhara, 40, 46, 144
Washbrook, David, 134 Young, Robert J. C., 9, 19, 61
Washington , Peter
Weber, Max, 15, 162, 191, 238n 48 Zen Buddhism, x
Welbon , Guy Richard, 185, 191 Zirkoff, Boris De
Wells, H. G., 89 Zoroastrianism, 63

The Lotus and The Lion Buddhism and The British Em...

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Lotus and The Lion Buddhism and The British Em...

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Lotus and The Lion Buddhism and The British Em...

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Lotus

Serious Play: The Cultural Form of the Nineteenth-Century Realist Novel

C ORNELL U NIVERSITY P RESS

First published 2008 by Cornell University Press

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Includes bibliographical references and index.

Cornell University Press strives to use environmentally responsible

4. Buddhism and the Empire of the Self in Kipling’s Kim 128

century; that it generated a substantial body of translations, analyses, and com-

book of criticism in which the theoretical, ideological, or religious commitment

Whether in Victorian England or twenty-first-century North America, what

My most general thanks go to the University of Colorado Denver—the

In the family temple [of the magistrate of Kolang, Tibet],

Should I be considered too bold if I were to go one step

The European “Discovery” of Buddhism

Joseph Conrad’s Heart of Darkness (1901), T. S. Eliot’s “The Waste Land”

is to be able to assess various Victorian uses of key Buddhist concepts and

the boundary of difference separating two nations, races, cultures, or religions

Britain, as evidenced by the number of Buddhists in Britain today. By the same

Historical Background for the Counter-Invasion

Though the counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism did not fully commence

The Religious Context for the Counter-Invasion

When Buddhism entered Victorian discourse at mid century, it became part

Ellicott. The Broad Church or Latitudinarian position was typified by A. P.

considerable variation in the interpretation of these ‘vital simplicities’ ” of evan-

sent” 88). I will return to these features of Protestant individualism in analyz-

articles written in the nineteenth century comparing and contrasting Christi-

religiously pluralistic the commentator, the more willing he or she might be

the nature of responses to Buddhism. They did not do so in any straightfor-

for Christianity from multiple denominations expressed concerns about Bud-

emphasis on individualism or on faith over works. Finally, where I refer to

Forms of the Counter-Invasion

The counter-invasion of Britain by Buddhism took place via a diversity of ve-

marily in Europe, though also in Anglo-India and other imperial enclaves, in

their titles, for instance, C. de Harlez’s “Buddhist Propaganda in Christian

“Caste or Brahmanism, which is the same thing, is the system, Buddhism is

promised to believers,” and Helen Graham McKerlie, in the Asiatic Quarterly

(Colombo 121). It seemed undeniable, however, that adaptability had proved

assimilable elements of Buddhism also were threatening and therefore required

Thus while the Christianity-versus-Buddhism debate was a significant ex-

The Life of the Buddha

Competing Victorian Buddhas

Thousands of late-Victorian Britons went about with images of the Buddha

as a result of this confluence, comparative religion and the understanding of

published in France, Germany, England, and America offered accounts of the

dilemma: “In no religion are we so constantly reminded of our own as in Bud-

Sources for the Victorian Buddha

the Law: Buddhism Illustrated from Siamese Sources; it includes a sympathetic

Arnold was more informed and influenced by comparative religion. Vic-

sion or not of miraculous phenomena, though they agree on key historical

A Secular, Exotic, Protestant Buddha

As might be expected, both poems appeal to the “exotic Orient” through

Its beams were carved with stories of old time—

This passage continues with a listing of animals—gazelles, peacocks, parrots,

Darwinism and Buddhism

. . . then marked he, too,

And kite on both; and how the fish-hawk robbed

It seeth everywhere and marketh all:

It knows not wrath nor pardon; utter-true